CATALOGUE Prokontrol

ABOUT THIS CATALOGUE
We created this catalogue as a partial visual display of the many products that we carry from our main manufacturers with whom we have strategic partnerships. We hope it will help you understand the vast scope of our offering and that it will help you select the correct components to get the job done . Please contact us and use the catalogue page numbers to facilitate a meaningful discussion with our Technical Sales Advisors. They will be more than happy to provide you with advice and /or further documentation and obviously price & delivery for any items you may need whether they be in the catalogue or not. We will be able to provide this catalogue in the form of a CD Rom and via a link to www.prokontrol.com. Thank You for your continuing support.
Note:
Prokontrol cannot be held responsible for any omissions or errors contained within this catalogue.
1989 Michelin Street, Laval, QC H7L 5B7 Laval (450) 973-7765 Montreal (514) 990-2768 1-800-461-1381 Fax (450) 973-6186 100-420 Desrochers Street, Vanier, QC G1M 1C2 (418) 682-2421 1-800-465-7413 Fax (418) 687-956 4500 Alden road, suite 19, Markham, Ontario L3R 5H5 (905) 475-9888 1-888-687-7247 Fax (905) 475-9030 Internet: http://www.prokontrol.com Email: info@okontrol.com
Canadas leading HVAC/R controls wholesaler

More than a supplier... A solution!
In business since 1985
The Pro Kontrol family of products

Temperature, humidity, pressure, air flow & velocity and fluids sensors, relays, transformers, turn key solutions for ModBus, BACnet, Lon and N2, engineering services, panel assembly, graphic interfaces and Web.
Electronic (DDC) controls
Electrical controls
Thermostats, valves, actuators, controllers.
Pneumatic controls
Thermostats, valves, controllers, transmitters, relays, accessories, plastic and copper tubing, compressors, compressor oil, calibration and repair kits, replacement parts.
Ventilation products
Zoning systems, VAV boxes, duct heaters, dampers (parallel and opposed), actuators, direct coupled actuators, pneumatic actuators, foot mount actuators, dumping and air valve boxes.
Control valves and actuators Temperature Humidity Pressure
Ball, butterfly, globe, thermostatic and zone valves, solenoid valves, pneumatic and electronic actuators, butterfly gate, universal retrokits. Controllers, transmitters, thermistors, RTDs, indicators, digital thermometers. Humidity control, dehumidification, enthalpy, dew point. Air and fluid pressure control, transmitters, displays, converters, controllers, probes, pressure gauge.
Measurement and control of electrical consumption

Power/voltage switches and transmitters, phase lost, power factor.
Gas detection
CO, CO2, NO2, NH4 gas monitoring and measurement, refrigerants, VOCs.
Power supplies
PMS: 3155 et Noir
Control transformers, power supplies.
Relays and contactors
Plug-in, power, time delay, alternator relay, ice cube, solid state (SSR).
Other controls and accessories
Timers, time clocks, SCR, triacs, thermostat guards, smoke detectors, flow switches, firestats, freezestats, control cabling, and many more.
Take advantage of our wide range of technical services

Proposals Engineering Shop drawings Wiring plans Programming Testing Panel and ventilation box assembly Commissioning assistance
www.prokontrol.com | info@prokontrol.com
E
w w w. n e p t r o n i c . c o m
Exclusive distributor
We also distribute the following brands:

Columbus Electric Dekoron De Vilbiss/Omega Drainview McDonnell and Miller Paragon Robertshaw Uni-Line (Enerstat) Uni Guard Polaris Erie Miniveil Vapac and many more! Laval
1989 rue Michelin Laval,Qubec, Canada, H7L 5B7 Tel: 450-973-7765 Fax: 450-973-6186 Toll-free: 1-800-461-1381
Longueuil
908 Trans Canada Longueuil, Qubec Canada, J4G 2M1 Tel: 450-679-0203 Fax: 514-845-6186 Toll-free: 1-800-461-1381
Qubec
100-420 rue Desrochers Qubec, Qubec Canada, G1M 1C2 Tel: 418-682-2421 PMS: 3155 et Noir Fax: 418-687-9564 Toll-free: 1-800-465-7413
Markham
500 Alden Road, Suite 19 Markham, Ontario Canada, L3R 5H5 Tel: 905-475-9888 Fax: 905-475-9030 Toll-free: 1-888-687-7247
Dartmouth
100 Wright Avenue, Unit 10 Dartmouth, Nova Scotia Canada, B3B 1L2 Tel: 902-482-5788 Fax: 902-468-1722 Toll-free: 1-800-461-1381
www.prokontrol.com | info@prokontrol.com
D.D.C. PERIPHERALS INDEX

TEMPERATURE & HUMIDITY SENSORS
ACI Room Temperature Sensors DDC -1 ACI Micro & Stainless Steel Plate Sensors DDC -2 ACI Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor DDC -3 ACI Duct Temperature Sensor DDC -4 ACI Immersion Temperature Sensor DDC -5 ACI Duct AVG. Temperature sensors DDC -6 ACI Award Winning Humidity Transducer (wall/duct/LCD) DDC -7 ACI Award Winning Humidity/Temp Sensor(wall/duct/LCD) DDC -8 FUNCTIONAL DEVICES [RIB]-relay in a box VERIS Electronic to Pneumatic Pressure Transducer ( HOT) DDC -9,10 VERIS (Alta Labs) Low Pressure DPT (multi range/output) DDC -11,12 VERIS (Alta Labs) Gauge Pressure Transducer (multi range) DDC -13,14 GREYSTONE PRODUCTS (in stock at PK) DDC -15 to 19 HAWKEYE by VERIS CURRENT SENSORS H600 go no go DDC -24 H608 Split Core GNG DDC -25 H708/908 Solid Core/Split Core Adj. STPT Digital Output DDC -26 H730 Solid Core Fixed STPT Digital Output c/w Relay DDC -27 H735 Solid Core Adj. STPT with Relay DDC -28 GREYSTONE CURRENT SWITCHES DDC -29 to31 Carlo Gavazzi Relays & Bases DDC -32 to 35 OMRON-General Purpose Relays DDC -36 SPARTAN Control Valves DDC -37 to 41 SPARTAN Thermoelectric(WAX) Valves 10 year warranty! DDC -42, 43
www.prokontrol.com
DDC -
www.prokontrol.com
DDC - 2
www.prokontrol.com
DDC -
www.prokontrol.com
DDC -
www.prokontrol.com
DDC -
www.prokontrol.com
DDC -
www.prokontrol.com
DDC -
www.prokontrol.com
DDC -
Functional Devices, Inc. 310 South Union Street Russiaville, IN 46979 www.FunctionalDevices.com
Office Sales Fax Email
765.883.5538 800.888.5538 765.883.7505 sales@functionaldevices.com
TR100VA001
TRANSFORMER
Transformer 100 VA, 120 to 24 Vac, Circuit Breaker, Foot and Single Threaded Hub Mount
1.800"
CLASS II
Wht - 120 Vac
Yel/Wht - 24 Vac*
2.000"
PRIMARY WIRES
Blk - Comm
SECONDARY WIRES
Yel - Comm
*Secondary Yel/Wht wire in phase with Primary Blk wire.
SPECIFICATIONS
VA Rating: Frequency: Mounting: Over Current Protection: Dimensions: Wire Length: Operating Temperature: MTBF: Construction: Weight: Approvals: 100 50/60 Hz Foot & Single Threaded Hub Circuit Breaker 3.000 x 2.500 x 4.000 (w/ .500 NPT Hub) 9.5 Typical w/ .5 Strip -30 to 140 F 100,000 Hours @ 77 F Split-Bobbin 4.06 lbs. Class II UL5085-3 Listed, C-UL, CE, RoHS
2.550" 4.000"
Mounting Hole = .350" x .175" 2.500"
9.50"
.50"
NOTES
3.000"
TR100VA002
TRANSFORMER
Transformer 100 VA, 120 to 24 Vac, Circuit Breaker, Foot and Dual Threaded Hub Mount
1.800"
CLASS II
Wht - 120 Vac
Yel/Wht - 24 Vac*
2.00"
PRIMARY WIRES
Blk - Comm
SECONDARY WIRES
Yel - Comm
SPECIFICATIONS
VA Rating: Frequency: Mounting: Over Current Protection: Dimensions: Wire Length: Operating Temperature: MTBF: Construction: Weight: Approvals: 100 50/60 Hz Foot & Dual Threaded Hubs Circuit Breaker 3.000 x 2.500 x 4.000 (w/ .500 NPT Hubs) 9.5 Typical w/ .5 Strip -30 to 140 F 100,000 Hours @ 77 F Split-Bobbin 4.13 lbs. Class II UL5085-3 Listed, C-UL, CE, RoHS
2.550" 4.000"
Mounting Hole = .350" x .175" 2.500"
.50"
9.50"
9.50"
.50"
NOTES
3.000"
TR75VA002
TRANSFORMER
Transformer 75 VA, 120 to 24 Vac, Circuit Breaker, Foot and Dual Threaded Hub Mount
1.625"
CLASS II
Wht - 120 Vac
Yel/Wht - 24 Vac*
2.00"
PRIMARY WIRES
Blk - Comm
SECONDARY WIRES
Yel - Comm
SPECIFICATIONS
2.400" 3.900"
Mounting Hole = .350" x .175" 2.500"
.50"
9.50"
9.50"
.50"
NOTES
3.000"
TR50VA005
TRANSFORMER
1.260"
CLASS II
Wht - 120 Vac
Yel/Wht - 24 Vac*
2.00"
PRIMARY WIRES
Blk - Comm
SECONDARY WIRES
Yel - Comm
SPECIFICATIONS
VA Rating: Frequency: Mounting: Over Current Protection: Dimensions: Wire Length: Operating Temperature: MTBF: Construction: Weight: Approvals: 50 50/60 Hz Foot & Single Threaded Hub Circuit Breaker 3.000 x 2.525 x 3.475 (w/ .500 NPT Hub) 9 Typical w/ .5 Strip -30 to 140 F 100,000 Hours @ 77 F Split-Bobbin 2.60 lbs. Class II UL5085-3 Listed, C-UL, CE, RoHS
1.950" Mounting Hole = .350" x .175" 3.475" 2.525"
9.00"
.50"
NOTES
3.000"
TR50VA004
TRANSFORMER
Transformer 50 VA, 480/277/240/120 to 24 Vac, Circuit Breaker, Foot and Dual Threaded Hub Mount
1.200"
CLASS II
PRIMARY WIRES
Gry - 480 Vac Brn - 277 Vac Org - 240 Vac Wht - 120 Vac Blk - Comm
SECONDARY WIRES
Yel/Wht - 24 Vac*
2.000"
Yel - Comm
SPECIFICATIONS
1.950" 3.475"
Mounting Hole = .350" x .175" 2.525"
.50"
9.50"
9.50"
.50"
NOTES
3.000"
TR75VA001
TRANSFORMER
1.625"
CLASS II
Wht - 120 Vac
Yel/Wht - 24 Vac*
2.000"
PRIMARY WIRES
Blk - Comm
SECONDARY WIRES
Yel - Comm
VA Rating: Frequency: Mounting: Over Current Protection: Dimensions: Wire Length: Operating Temperature: MTBF: Construction: Weight: Approvals:
SPECIFICATIONS
2.400"
75 50/60 Hz Foot & Single Threaded Hub Circuit Breaker 3.000 x 2.500 x 3.900 (w/ .500 NPT Hub) 9.5 Typical w/ .5 Strip -30 to 140 F 100,000 Hours @ 77 F Split-Bobbin 3.66 lbs. Class II UL5085-3 Listed, C-UL, CE, RoHS
Mounting Hole = .350" x .175" 2.500"
3.900"
9.50"
.50"
NOTES
3.000"
RIBU1C
10 Amp Pilot Control Relay

Enclosed Relay 10 Amp SPDT with 10-30 Vac/dc/120 Vac Coil
Contact Ratings: 10 Amp Resistive @ 120-277 Vac 10 Amp Resistive @ 28 Vdc 480 VA Pilot Duty @ 240-277 Vac 480 VA Ballast @ 277 Vac 600 Watt Tungsten @ 120 Vac N/O 240 Watt Tungsten @ 120 Vac N/C 1/3 HP for N/O @ 120-240 Vac 1/6 HP for N/C @ 120-240 Vac 1/4 HP for N/O @ 277 Vac 1/8 HP for N/C @ 277 Vac Coil Current: 30 mA @ 10 Vac 32 mA @ 12 Vac 42 mA @ 24 Vac 50 mA @ 30 Vac 25 mA @ 120 Vac
Wht/Blk 120 Vac
Blu N/C
c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c
Wht/Blu 10-30 Vac/dc
Yel Comm
SPECIFICATIONS
# Relays & Contact Type: Expected Relay Life: Operating Temperature: Operate Time: Relay Status: Dimensions: Wires: Approvals:
MADE IN USA
One (1) SPDT Continuous Duty Coil 10 million cycles minimum mechanical -30 to 140 F 20mS LED On = Activated 1.70 x 2.80 x 1.50 with .50 NPT nipple 16, 600V Rated UL Listed, UL916, UL864, C-UL California State Fire Marshal, CE Housing Rating: Plenum, NEMA 1 Gold Flash: Yes Override Switch: No
12 mA 14 mA 16 mA 18 mA
@ @ @ @
10 Vdc 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 30 Vdc
Wht/Yel Comm
Org N/O
Coil Voltage Input: 10-30 Vac/dc ; 120 Vac ; 50-60 Hz Drop Out = 2.1 Vac / 2.8 Vdc Pull In = 9 Vac / 10 Vdc
RIBU1C-RD Red housing
RIBU1C-N4 NEMA 4X housing
NOTES
RIBU1S
10 Amp Pilot Control Relay

Enclosed Relay 10 Amp SPST-N/O + Override with 10-30 Vac/dc/120 Vac Coil
Contact Ratings: 10 Amp Resistive @ 277 Vac 480 VA Pilot Duty @ 240-277 Vac 480 VA Ballast @ 277 Vac 600 Watt Tungsten @ 120 Vac N/O 240 Watt Tungsten @ 120 Vac N/C 1/3 HP for N/O @ 120-240 Vac 1/6 HP for N/C @ 120-240 Vac 1/4 HP for N/O @ 277 Vac 1/8 HP for N/C @ 277 Vac Coil Current: 30 mA @ 10 Vac 12 mA @ 10 Vdc 32 mA @ 12 Vac 14 mA @ 12 Vdc 42 mA @ 24 Vac 16 mA @ 24 Vdc 50 mA @ 30 Vac 18 mA @ 30 Vdc 25 mA @ 120 Vac Coil Voltage Input: 10-30 Vac/dc ; 120 Vac ; 50-60 Hz Drop Out = 2.1 Vac / 2.8 Vdc Pull In = 9 Vac / 10 Vdc Notes: Order Normally Closed by adding -NC to end of model number Order with Momentary Override Switch by adding -MNO to end of model number
Wht/Blk 120 Vac
Wht/Blu 10-30 Vac/dc
CLOSED OPEN AUTO
SPECIFICATIONS
MADE IN USA
One (1) SPST Continuous Duty Coil 10 million cycles minimum mechanical -30 to 140 F 20mS LED On = Activated 2.30 x 3.20 x 1.80 with .50 NPT nipple 16, 600V Rated UL Listed, UL916, UL864, C-UL California State Fire Marshal, CE Housing Rating: Plenum, NEMA 1 Gold Flash: Yes Override Switch: Yes
Wht/Yel Comm
Org
Org
NOTES
RIBXK SERIES
CURRENT SENSOR
Enclosed Solid Core Current Sensors 1.460
.500 Diameter
1.863 2.050
1.008 1.508 LEDS
RIBXKA
MADE IN USA
WIRE CLAMP
RIBXKTF
THRESHOLD ADJUST
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature: Max Sense Voltage: Approvals: Housing Rating: Mounting/Installation: -30 to 140 F 600 Vac UL Listed, UL916, UL864, C-UL, CE Plenum, NEMA 1 Removable mounting tab provided. The wire clamp locks against the load wire, securing the unit in place.
REMOVABLE MOUNTING TAB
SENSOR OUTPUT Solid State Contact 30 Vac/dc, .4 Amp Max. RIBXKF, RIBXKTF .8 Amp Max. RIBXKA, RIBXKTA
When current sensor status is off (open), leakage <30 uA @ 30Vac/dc When current sensor status is on (closed), voltage drop < .3 Vac/dc @ .1 Amp < 1.6 Vac/dc @ .4 Amp
SENSOR OUTPUT LOAD WIRE Solid State Contact 30 Vac/dc, .4 Amp Max. When current sensor status is o (open), leakage <30 uA @ 30Vac/dc When current sensor status is on (closed), voltage drop < .3 Vac/dc @ .1 Amp < 1.6 Vac/dc @ .4 Amp
LOAD WIRE Wht/ Yel
Wht/ Yel
RIBXK SERIES SELECTION GUIDE

MODEL # RANGE TYPE THRESHOLD OUTPUT LED 1 LED 2
RIBXKF RIBXKTF RIBXKA RIBXKTA
.25-150 Amp Solid Core .25-150 Amp Solid Core .50-150 Amp Solid Core .50-150 Amp Solid Core
Fixed Fixed
Solid State Switch SPST ; 30 Vac/dc ; .4 Amps Max (Wht/Yel 16 18 AWG Wire Leads) Solid State Switch SPST ; 30 Vac/dc ; .4 Amps Max (Terminal Strip, Accepts #14-22 AWG Wire) Over Trip Point Under Trip Point
Adjustable Solid State Switch SPST ; 30 Vac/dc ; .8 Amps Max (Wht/Yel 16 18 AWG Wire Leads)
Adjustable Solid State Switch SPST ; 30 Vac/dc ; .8 Amps Max (Terminal Strip, Accepts #14-22 AWG Wire) Over Trip Point Under Trip Point
NOTES
INTERLOCKING LOADS (NO TRANSFORMER)

Self-powered Current Sensors of the RIBX Series and relays of the Dry Contact Input RIB Series may be applied to interlock Load 2 to Load 1. DRY CONTACT INPUT CURRENT SENSORS Current sensing may RELAYS RIBXKF RIBXRF be internal or external
LOAD WIRE
LOAD 1
LOCAL POWER 120, 240, 277 Vac
RIBX SERIES
Current Sensor Only Current Sensor Status
Low Voltage (Class II)
DRY CONTACT INPUT RIB SERIES
LOAD 2
RIB21CDC RIB01BDC RIB01SBDC RIB02BDC RIB02SBDC RIBM01ZNDC RIBM02ZNDC RIBM013PNDC RIBD01BDC (Time Delay) RIBD02BDC (Time Delay)
RIBXKTF RIBXKA RIBXKTA RIBXGA RIBXGF RIBXGTA RIBXGTF RIBXGFL RIBXGTFL RIBXF RIBXA
RIBXRA RIBXJF RIBXJA RIBMXF RIBMXA RIBMXRF RIBMXRA RIBMXJF RIBMXJA
RIBXK420 SERIES
CURRENT TRANSDUCER
Enclosed 20, 50, and 100 Amp Current Transducers with Loop Powered 4-20 mA Output (Pre-Wired) 1.460
.500 Diameter 1.863

1.008 1.508
MADE IN USA
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature: Wires: Sensor Type: Sensor Range: Accuracy: Linearity: Max Output Current: Max Sense Voltage: Approvals: Housing Rating: -30 to 140 F Red & Black, 16, 18 AWG, 600V Rated Internal, with 4-20 mA Transmitter Output 0-20 Amps, 0-50 Amps, or 0-100 Amps (See Selection Guide Below) 96.4% FS 99% FS (25%-100% Span) 30 mA 600 Vac UL Listed, UL916, UL864, C-UL, CE Plenum, NEMA 1
WIRE CLAMP
MAXIMUM OUTPUT LOAD RESISTANCE 800 ohms 500 ohms 350 ohms 250 ohms 200 ohms 100 ohms 50 ohms
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
MINIMUM MAXIMUM
Mounting/Installation: Removable mounting tab provided. The wire clamp locks against the load wire, securing the unit in place.
24 Vdc 18 Vdc 15 Vdc 13 Vdc 12 Vdc 10 Vdc 9 Vdc
35 Vdc 35 Vdc 35 Vdc 30 Vdc 30 Vdc 28 Vdc 28 Vdc
RIBXK420 SERIES SELECTION GUIDE

MODEL # RIBXK420-20 RIBXK420-50 RIBXK420-100 SENSOR RANGE 0-20 Amps 0-50 Amps 0-100 Amps OUTPUT Loop Powered 4-20 mA Transmitter (Pre-Wired) Loop Powered 4-20 mA Transmitter (Pre-Wired) Loop Powered 4-20 mA Transmitter (Pre-Wired)
NOTES
LOOP-POWERED RIBXK420 SERIES

RIBXK420 DC SUPPLY +
*Add 250 Ohms for 1-5 Vdc Analog In
ENCLOSED MINI CURRENT SENSORS

RIBXK420-20 RIBXK420-50 RIBXK420-100
LOAD WIRE RED + BLACK -
4-20 mA Analog In *1-5 Vdc Analog In
CONTROLLER
RIBXKTV SERIES
CURRENT TRANSDUCER
Enclosed Solid Core Current to Voltage Transducers
1.460
.500 Diameter
1.863 2.050
MADE IN USA
WIRE CLAMP
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature: -30 to 140 F Accuracy: 96.8% Full Scale Loading: RIBXKTV5-10, 1% Error @ 180 k RIBXKTV5-20, 1% Error @ 90 k RIBXKTV5-50, 1% Error @ 40 k RIBXKTV5-100, 1% Error @ 15 k Max Sense Voltage: 600 Vac Approvals: UL Listed, UL916, UL864, C-UL, CE Housing Rating: Plenum, NEMA 1 Mounting/Installation: Removable mounting tab provided. The wire clamp locks against the load wire, securing the unit in place. Sensor Type: Solid core with voltage output
RIBXKTV SERIES SELECTION GUIDE

MODEL # RANGE OUTPUT
RIBXKTV5-10 RIBXKTV5-20 RIBXKTV5-50 RIBXKTV5-100
0-10 Amp 0-20 Amp 0-50 Amp 0-100 Amp
0-5 Vdc (Terminal Strip, Accepts #14-22 AWG Wire) 0-5 Vdc (Terminal Strip, Accepts #14-22 AWG Wire) 0-5 Vdc (Terminal Strip, Accepts #14-22 AWG Wire) 0-5 Vdc (Terminal Strip, Accepts #14-22 AWG Wire)
NOTES
Functional Devices, Inc. 310 South Union Street Russiaville, IN 46979
Office 765.883.5538 Sales 800.888.5538 Fax 765.883.7505
www.FunctionalDevices.com sales@functionaldevices.com
RIBXLS SERIES
RELAY & CURRENT SENSOR COMBO

Enclosed Relay/Current Sensor Combinations, SPST + Override with 10-30 Vac/dc Coil
SPECIFICATIONS
# Relays & Contact Type: Expected Relay Life: Operating Temperature: Operate Time: Relay Status: Dimensions: Wire Length: Approvals:
MADE IN USA
One (1) SPST Continuous Duty Coil 10 million cycles minimum mechanical -30 to 140 F 20mS Red LED On = Activated 4.00 x 4.00 x 1.80 with .50 NPT Nipple 16, 600V Rated UL Listed, UL916, UL864, C-UL California State Fire Marshal, CE Housing Rating: Plenum, NEMA 1 Gold Flash: Yes Override Switch: Yes
Coil Current: 30 mA @ 10 Vac 32 mA @ 12 Vac 42 mA @ 24 Vac 50 mA @ 30 Vac 12 mA @ 10 Vdc 14 mA @ 12 Vdc 16 mA @ 24 Vdc 18 mA @ 30 Vdc
Notes: Normally Open or Normally Closed selected by yellow jumper wire Order with Momentary Override Switch by adding -MNO to end of model number
Coil Voltage Input: 10-30 Vac/dc ; 50-60 Hz Drop Out = 2.1 Vac / 2.8 Vdc Pull In = 9 Vac / 10 Vdc
RIBXLSA, RIBXLSF, RIBXLSEA*

SENSOR FEEDBACK Current Sensor Status
RIBXLSV, RIBXLSEV
Minimum Input Impedance = 30K ohms Accuracy +/- 1% full scale Vripple < 10mVac Current Sensor Voltage Output Voltage output is proportional to current sensor range 0-10 Vdc 10-30 Vac/dc Comm
When current sensor status is o (open), leakage <30 uA @ 30Vac/dc When current sensor status is on (closed), voltage drop < .3 Vac/dc @ .1 Amp < 1.6 Vac/dc @ .4 Amp
V V Selectable Jumper Wire
0-5 Vdc Comm
Selectable Jumper Wire

10-30 Vac/dc
Org* CLOSED OPEN AUTO Org*

*Org wires will be Gry
Org CLOSED OPEN AUTO
Org
Comm
RIBXLSRA, RIBXLSRF
SENSOR FEEDBACK Current Sensor Status CURRENT SENSOR CIRCUITRY LOAD WIRE Org CLOSED OPEN AUTO Org
RIBXLSJA, RIBXLSJF
SENSOR FEEDBACK Current Sensor Status CURRENT SENSOR CIRCUITRY
LOAD WIRE Org
Selectable Jumper Wire 10-30 Vac/dc
Selectable Jumper Wire 10-30 Vac/dc
Comm
Current sensor status on (closed): voltage drop < .3 Vac/dc @ .1 Amp < 1.6 Vac/dc @ .4 Amp
Gry Gry
Comm
Current sensor status on (closed): voltage drop < .3 Vac/dc @ .1 Amp < 1.6 Vac/dc @ .4 Amp
CLOSED OPEN AUTO
Org
Gry Gry
Current sensor status o (open): leakage <30 uA @ 30Vac/dc
Current sensor status o (open): leakage <30 uA @ 30Vac/dc
RIBXLS SERIES SELECTION GUIDE

CURRENT SENSOR MODEL # RANGE TYPE THRESHOLD RELAY REMOTE STYLE RESISTIVE OUTPUT Solid State Contact 30 Vac/dc, 0.4 Amp Solid State Contact 30 Vac/dc, 0.4 Amp CONTACT RATINGS 10 Amp Resistive @ 277 Vac 480 VA Pilot Duty @ 277 Vac 480 VA Ballast @ 277 Vac 600 Watt Tungsten @ 120 Vac N/O 240 Watt Tungsten @ 120 Vac N/C 1/3 HP for N/O @ 120-240 Vac 1/6 HP for N/C @ 120-240 Vac 1/4 HP for N/O @ 277 Vac 1/8 HP for N/C @ 277 Vac
RIBXLSF RIBXLSA RIBXLSV RIBXLSRF RIBXLSRA RIBXLSJF RIBXLSJA
.50-10 Amps .50-10 Amps 0-10 Amps 1.25-150 Amps 1.25-150 Amps 3-150 Amps 3-150 Amps
Internal w/ contact status Internal w/ contact status Internal w/ voltage output External w/ contact status External w/ contact status External w/ contact status External w/ contact status Internal w/ contact status
Fixed Adjustable Analog Fixed Adjustable Fixed Adjustable
10 Amp 10 Amp 10 Amp

Model AXKT: (Solid Core Remote) Model AXKT: (Solid Core Remote) Model AXGT: (Split Core Remote) Model AXGT: (Split Core Remote)
0-5 Vdc 0-10 Vdc

Solid State Contact 30 Vac/dc, 0.4 Amp Solid State Contact 30 Vac/dc, 0.4 Amp Solid State Contact 30 Vac/dc, 0.4 Amp Solid State Contact 30 Vac/dc, 0.4 Amp Solid State Contact 30 Vac/dc, 0.4 Amp
10 Amp 10 Amp 10 Amp 10 Amp
RIBXLSEA
.125-5 Amps
Adjustable
5 Amp
RIBXLSEV
0-5 Amps
Internal w/ voltage output
Analog
0-5 Vdc 0-10 Vdc
5 Amp
5 Amp Resistive @ 277 Vac 345 VA Pilot Duty @ 120/240 Vac N/O 268 VA Pilot Duty @ 277 Vac N/O 211 VA Pilot Duty @ 120/240 Vac N/C 175 VA Pilot Duty @ 277 Vac N/C 1/3 HP for N/O @ 120-240 Vac 1/6 HP for N/C @ 120-240 Vac 1/4 HP for N/O @ 277 Vac 1/8 HP for N/C @ 277 Vac
Office 765.883.5538 Sales 800.888.5538 Fax 765.883.7505
RIBX24 SERIES
RELAY & CURRENT SENSOR COMBO

Enclosed 20 Amp Relay/Current Sensor Combinations, with 24 Vac/dc Coil
SPECIFICATIONS
Expected Relay Life: Operating Temperature: Operate Time: Relay Status: Dimensions: Wire Length: Approvals:
MADE IN USA
10 million cycles minimum mechanical -30 to 140 F 20mS Red LED On = Activated 4.00 x 4.00 x 1.80 with .50 NPT Nipple 16, 600V Rated UL Listed, UL916, UL864, C-UL California State Fire Marshal, CE Housing Rating: Plenum, NEMA 1 Gold Flash: No
Coil Current: 45 mA @ 18 Vac 75 mA @ 24 Vac 30 mA @ 22 Vdc 32 mA @ 24 Vdc 42 mA @ 30 Vdc Coil Voltage Input: 24 Vac/dc ; 50-60 Hz Drop Out = 3 Vac / 3.8 Vdc Pull In = 18 Vac / 22 Vdc
RIBX24BA, RIBX24BF
RIBX24BV
Minimum Input Impedance = 30K ohms Accuracy +/- 1% full scale Vripple < 10mVac Current Sensor Voltage Output Voltage output is proportional to current sensor range 0-10 Vdc 24 Vac/dc Comm
When current sensor status is o (open), leakage <30 uA @ 30Vac/dc When current sensor status is on (closed), voltage drop < .3 Vac/dc @ .1 Amp < 1.6 Vac/dc @ .4 Amp Blu - N/C Yel - Comm
V V
0-5 Vdc Comm Blu - N/C Yel - Comm Org - N/O
24 Vac/dc
Comm
Org - N/O
RIBX24SBA, RIBX24SBF
RIBX24SBV
Minimum Input Impedance = 30K ohms Accuracy +/- 1% full scale Vripple < 10mVac Current Sensor Voltage Output Voltage output is proportional to current sensor range 0-10 Vdc 24 Vac/dc Comm
When current sensor status is o (open), leakage <30 uA @ 30Vac/dc When current sensor status is on (closed), voltage drop < .3 Vac/dc @ .1 Amp < 1.6 Vac/dc @ .4 Amp
V V Selectable Jumper Wire
0-5 Vdc Comm

24 Vac/dc
Org CLOSED OPEN AUTO Org

CLOSED OPEN AUTO
Org
Comm
Org
RIBX24 SERIES SELECTION GUIDE

CURRENT SENSOR
MODEL # RANGE TYPE THRESHOLD OUTPUT Solid State Contact 30 Vac/dc, 0.4 Amp 20 Amp* Solid State Contact 30 Vac/dc, 0.4 Amp 20 Amp*
RELAY
OVERRIDE CONTACT RESISTIVE SWITCH TYPE CONTACT RATINGS 20 Amp Resistive @ 277 Vac 20 Amp Ballast @ 277 Vac N/O 10 Amp Ballast @ 277 Vac N/C 10 Amp Tungsten @ 120 Vac N/O 1,110 VA Pilot Duty @ 277 Vac 770 VA Pilot Duty @ 120 Vac 240 Watt Tunsgten @ 120 Vac N/C Normally Open or Normally Closed 2 HP @ 277 Vac selected by yellow jumper wire 1 HP @ 120 Vac
Order with Momentary Override Switch by adding -MNO to end of model number
NOTES
Internal w/ contact status Internal w/ RIBX24BA .50-20 Amps contact status Internal w/ RIBX24BV 0-20 Amps voltage output Internal w/ RIBX24SBF .50-20 Amps contact status Internal w/ RIBX24SBA .50-20 Amps contact status Internal w/ RIBX24SBV 0-20 Amps voltage output RIBX24BF .50-20 Amps
Fixed Adjustable Analog Fixed Adjustable Analog
No No No Yes Yes Yes
SPDT SPDT SPDT SPST SPST SPST
0-5 Vdc 0-10 Vdc

Solid State Contact 30 Vac/dc, 0.4 Amp Solid State Contact 30 Vac/dc, 0.4 Amp
20 Amp* 20 Amp 20 Amp 20 Amp
0-5 Vdc 0-10 Vdc
= Additional rating of 5 Amp Resistive @ 480 Vac
Office 765.883.5538 Sales 800.888.5538 Fax 765.883.7505
RIBMW24SB-LNAI
Open Protocol Relay

LonWorks Twisted-Pair FT-10 Network Three I/O Controller; One Discrete Output (20Amp Relay SPST + Override), One Discrete Input; One Analog Input (0-5Vdc / 0-10 Vdc / Thermistor); 24 Vac/dc Power
Cut resistor to use 0-5V and 0-10V Analog-In. Leave in to use 10K Thermistor. Connect 10K Thermistor from +5 Vdc to 0-5V Analog-In. (Set dip switch below.)
YELLOW LED = Service RED LED = Relay Activated GREEN LED = Network Status
LON LON 24 Vac/dc

Service Button Analog-In Class 2 Dry Contact Digital Input COM +5 Vdc
ANALOG-IN
Comm
MADE IN USA
Available with Enclosure as Model RIBTW24SB-LNAI

SPECIFICATIONS
# Relays & Contact Type: Expected Relay Life: Operating Temperature: Operate Time: Green LED: Red LED: Yellow LED: Dimensions: Track Mount: Approvals: One (1) SPST Continuous Duty Coil 10 million cycles minimum mechanical -30 to 140 F 18mS Network Status Relay Status Service Status 4.00 x 4.00 x 2.30 MT4-4 Mounting Track Provided FCC, LonMark, CE UL Listed, UL916, C-UL Gold Flash: No Override Switch: Yes Power Input Ratings: 111 mA @ 24 Vac 81 mA @ 24 Vdc Coil Voltage Input: 24 Vac/dc ; 50-60 Hz
5V 10 V
(Close only one switch)
OPEN
CLOSED OPEN AUTO
1 2
SW 1 Closed 5V SW 2 Open SW 1 Open 10 V SW 2 Closed
DESCRIPTION
SNVT NAME
SNVT TYPE
Contact Ratings: 20 Amp Resistive @ 277 Vac 20 Amp Ballast N/O @ 120/277 Vac 10 Amp Ballast N/C @ 120/277 Vac 10 Amp Tungsten N/O @ 120 Vac 1110 VA Pilot Duty @ 277 Vac 770 VA Pilot Duty @ 120 Vac 2 HP @ 277 Vac 1 HP @ 120 Vac
Command to open/close relay nvi Value Command status of relay nvo Value Fb Default state of relay on/off nci Default Communication timer nci Max Receive T Status of Digital-In nvo Value Invert status of Digital-In nci Invert Max time between updates nci Max Send T Min time between updates nci Min Send T Value of Analog-In nvo Analog Max time between Analog updates nci Max Send T1 Min time between Analog updates nci Min Send T1 Min change in Analog before updates nci Min Delta
SNVT_switch SNVT_switch SNVT_switch SNVT_elapsed_tm SNVT_switch SNVT_lev_disc SNVT_elapsed_tm SNVT_elapsed_tm SNVT_lev_percent SNVT_elapsed_tm SNVT_elapsed_tm SNVT_lev_percent
Channel: TP/FT-10 Transceiver Type: FTT-10A with blocking capacitors for compatibility with link power channel Functional Blocks: 0000 Node Object 0004 Closed Loop Actuator Object 0001 Open Loop Sensor Object 0520 Analog Input Downloadable Files: PDF, XIF, APB, VSS and NXE Notes: Thermistor input reports back a % value, not a temperature. Must use isolated power supply when connected to half-wave rectified devices.
The relay will go to the default state when the communication timer times out. Setting the timer value to zero will cause the communication to never time out. It is recommended to put a value in nci Max Send T to ensure the RIB re-synchronizes itself on the network after power loss. It is the responsibility of the user to ensure this value does not cause conflicts in network traffic. (No value = No heartbeat updates / no re-sychronization; Low Value = Many updates but may cause many traffic collisions; High value = Few updates but many less collisions.)
NODE OBJECT
NV1 NV1 nvi Request NV2 nvo Status
CLOSED LOOP ACTUATOR

nvi Value NV2 nvo Value Fb
OPEN LOOP SENSOR OBJECT

NV1 nci Invert nci Max Send T nci Min Send T nvo Value
ANALOG INPUT
NV1 nvo Analog nci Max SendT1 nci Min Send T1 nci Min Delta
nci Default nci Max Receive T
0-5Vdc or 0-10 Vdc Temp., Humidity, Pressure Transducer
AI
AI
10K
AI Com
ANALOG INPUT
Cut 10K out.
10K
10K Thermistor
ANALOG INPUT
Leave 10K in.
N/C
AI Com
N/C
Thermistor + 5Vdc
Thermistor + 5Vdc
RIB2401SB
20 Amp POWER Control Relay

Enclosed Relay 20 Amp SPST-N/O + Override with 24 Vac/dc/120 Vac Coil
Contact Ratings: 20 Amp Resistive @ 277 Vac 20 Amp Ballast N/O @ 120/277 Vac 10 Amp Ballast N/C @ 120/277 Vac 10 Amp Tungsten N/O @ 120 Vac 770 VA Pilot Duty @ 120 Vac 1,110 VA Pilot Duty @ 277 Vac 2 HP @ 277 Vac 1 HP @ 120 Vac Coil Current: 45 mA @ 18 Vac 75 mA @ 24 Vac 42 mA @ 120 Vac 30 mA @ 22 Vdc 32 mA @ 24 Vdc 42 mA @ 30 Vdc Coil Voltage Input: 24 Vac/dc ; 120 Vac ; 50-60 Hz Drop Out = 2.1 Vac / 3.8 Vdc Pull In = 18 Vac / 22 Vdc Notes: Order Normally Closed by adding -NC to end of model number Order with Momentary Override Switch by adding -MNO to end of model number
Wht/Blk 120 Vac
Wht/Blu 24 Vac/dc
CLOSED OPEN AUTO
SPECIFICATIONS
MADE IN USA
One (1) SPST Continuous Duty Coil 10 million cycles minimum mechanical -30 to 140 F 18mS LED On = Activated 2.30 x 3.20 x 1.80 with .50 NPT Nipple 16, 600V Rated UL Listed, UL916, UL864, C-UL California State Fire Marshal, CE Housing Rating: Plenum, NEMA 1 Gold Flash: No Override Switch: Yes
Wht/Yel Comm
Org Org
NOTES
RIB2401B

Enclosed Relay 20 Amp SPDT with 24 Vac/dc/120 Vac Coil
Contact Ratings: 20 Amp Resistive @ 277 Vac 5 Amp Resistive @ 480 Vac 20 Amp Ballast N/O @ 120/277 Vac 10 Amp Ballast N/C @ 120/277 Vac 10 Amp Tungsten N/O @ 120 Vac 770 VA Pilot Duty @ 120 Vac 1,110 VA Pilot Duty @ 277 Vac 2 HP @ 277 Vac 1 HP @ 120 Vac Coil Current: 45 mA @ 18 Vac 75 mA @ 24 Vac 42 mA @ 120 Vac 30 mA @ 22 Vdc 32 mA @ 24 Vdc 42 mA @ 30 Vdc Coil Voltage Input: 24 Vac/dc ; 120 Vac ; 50-60 Hz Drop Out = 2.1 Vac / 3.8 Vdc Pull In = 18 Vac / 22 Vdc
Wht/Blk 120 Vac
Blu N/C
SPECIFICATIONS
MADE IN USA
Wht/Blu 24 Vac/dc
Yel Comm
One (1) SPDT Continuous Duty Coil 10 million cycles minimum mechanical -30 to 140 F 18mS LED On = Activated 2.30 x 3.20 x 1.80 with .50 NPT Nipple 16, 600V Rated UL Listed, UL916, UL864, C-UL California State Fire Marshal, CE Housing Rating: Plenum, NEMA 1 Gold Flash: No Override Switch: No
Wht/Yel Comm
Org N/O
NOTES
RIB01P

Enclosed Relay 20 Amp DPDT with 120 Vac Coil
Contact Ratings: 20 Amp Resistive @ 300 Vac 20 Amp Resistive @ 28 Vdc 20 Amp Ballast @ 277-480 Vac 15 Amp Resistive @ 600 Vac 770 VA Pilot Duty @ 120 Vac 1158 VA Pilot Duty @ 240 Vac 1110 VA Pilot Duty @ 277 Vac 1640 VA Pilot Duty @ 480 Vac 3 HP @ 480-600 Vac 2 HP @ 240-277 Vac 1 HP @ 120 Vac
Blu N/C Wht/Blk 120 Vac Yel Comm Org N/O Gry N/C Wht/Blk 120 Vac Prp Comm Brn N/O
SPECIFICATIONS
MADE IN USA
One (1) DPDT Continuous Duty Coil 10 million cycles minimum mechanical -30 to 140 F 18mS LED On = Activated 4.00 x 4.00 x 1.80 with .50 NPT Nipple 16, 600V Rated UL Listed, UL916, UL864, C-UL California State Fire Marshal, CE Housing Rating: Plenum, NEMA 1 Gold Flash: Yes Override Switch: No
Coil Current: 95 mA @ 120 Vac
Coil Voltage Input: 120 Vac ; 50-60 Hz Drop Out = 35 Vac Pull In = 85 Vac
NOTES
PSH500A
Shown With Cover
AC POWER SUPPLY
Enclosed 500VA Power Supply with Five 100VA Class II Outputs, 480/277/240/120 Vac to 24 Vac
5 Secondaries: 24 Vac, with LED Indicators
CLASS II
24 Vac ON/OFF: On / Off Switch & Breaker Input: 480/277/240/120 Vac Terminals, 10-26 AWG Output: 5 Isolated 100 VA Class II 24 Vac Terminals, 12-26 AWG Ambient Temperature Derating: 4A up to 40 C ; 3A up to 50 C ; 2A up to 55 C (When All 5 Outputs Operated Simultaneously)
Standby Wattage: 48.515 W @ 120 Vac 48.699 W @ 240 Vac 49.564 W @ 277 Vac 48.255 W @ 480 Vac Full Load Primary Current: 4.66 A @ 120 Vac 2.41 A @ 240 Vac 2.06 A @ 277 Vac 1.17 A @ 480 Vac
MADE IN USA
Shown Without Cover
480 277 240 120 COM

1 2 3 4 5
ON OFF
24V COM 24V COM 24V COM 24V COM
SPECIFICATIONS
Transformer: Over Current Protection: Primary: Frequency: Dimensions: Approvals: Housing: Weight: One (1) 500 VA Circuit Breaker 480/277/240/120 Vac 50/60 Hz 12.125 x 12.125 x 6.000 Class II UL Listed, UL916, C-UL, CE NEMA1 Metal Enclosure 30.16 lbs.
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
SWITCH INDICATOR BREAKER
NOTES
USER CONNECTIONS
ON OFF
24V COM
PSH300A
Shown With Cover
AC POWER SUPPLY
Enclosed 300VA Power Supply with Three 100VA Class II Outputs, 480/277/240/120 Vac to 24 Vac
3 Secondaries: 24 Vac, with LED Indicators
CLASS II
24 Vac ON/OFF: On / Off Switch & Breaker Input: 480/277/240/120 Vac Terminals, 10-26 AWG Output: 3 Isolated 100 VA Class II 24 Vac Terminals, 12-26 AWG Ambient Temperature Derating: 4A up to 40 C ; 3A up to 50 C ; 2A up to 55 C (When All 3 Outputs Operated Simultaneously)
Standby Wattage: 16.61 W @ 120 Vac 17.70 W @ 240 Vac 16.26 W @ 277 Vac 19.20 W @ 480 Vac Full Load Primary Current: 2.66 A @ 120 Vac 1.36 A @ 240 Vac 1.18 A @ 277 Vac 0.68 A @ 480 Vac
MADE IN USA
Shown Without Cover
480 277 240 120 COM

ON 1 OFF 24V COM 24V COM 24V COM
SPECIFICATIONS
Transformer: Over Current Protection: Primary: Frequency: Dimensions: Approvals: Housing: Weight: One (1) 300 VA Circuit Breaker 480/277/240/120 Vac 50/60 Hz 12.125 x 12.125 x 6.000 Class II UL Listed, UL916, C-UL, CE NEMA1 Metal Enclosure 18.08 lbs.
ON OFF 2 ON OFF 3
SWITCH INDICATOR BREAKER
NOTES
USER CONNECTIONS
PSH100A SERIES
AC POWER SUPPLY
Enclosed Single 100 VA Power Supplies, 120 to 24 Vac
120 Vac Convenience Outlet*
CLASS II
24 Vac Breaker 5.438 5.150

RESET
4.500 4.250 4.500
ON OFF
SPECIFICATIONS
MADE IN USA
OFF
24 Vac On/Off Switch LED Indicator

RESET
Transformer: One 100 VA Split-Bobbin Over Current Protection: Circuit Breaker Input Wires: B10 Models Only Input Power Wires BLK: 120 Vac WHT: Neutral GRN: Ground All Other Models Primary Wires BLK: 120 Vac WHT: Common Outlet Wires BLK: 120 Vac WHT: Neutral GRN: Ground Com 24 Vac
ON OFF
OFF
120 Vac Convenience Outlet* 10 Amp Main Breaker/Switch
5.150
*Move internal jumper to HOT position if you wish outlets to always be hot otherwise outlets will be switched by main breaker.
Output Wires: B10 Models Only W Models Only Auxiliary Output Transformer Output BLU: 120 Vac WHT/YEL: 24 Vac WHT/BLU: Common Frequency: 50/60 Hz 24 Vac ON/OFF: On / Off Switch & Breaker Main Breaker ON/OFF: Switch / Breaker (10 Amp) (Kills power to entire unit: Outlets, Aux. Output, and Transformer)* Total Combined Output 9A Approvals: Class II UL Listed, UL916, C-UL, CE Dimensions: 4.500 x 5.438 x 4.500 Weight: 4.600 lbs.
PSH100A SERIES SELECTION GUIDE

MODEL # 120 VAC OUTLETS AUX OUTPUT WIRE MAIN BREAKER ON INPUT POWER SECONDARY CONFIGURATION
PSH100A PSH100AN PSH100ANW PSH100AW PSH100AB10* PSH100ANB10 PSH100ANWB10 PSH100AWB10*
10 Amp Switch / Breaker 10 Amp Switch / Breaker 10 Amp Switch / Breaker 10 Amp Switch / Breaker
External Terminal Strip External Terminal Strip Internal Wires Internal Wires External Terminal Strip External Terminal Strip Internal Wires Internal Wires
NOTES
CONDENSE WORK SPACE AND WIRING (POWER SUPPLIES)

The PSC, PSH, and PSB Series Power Supplies allow you to save large amounts of time, space, and wiring throughout your panel. POWER SUPPLIES
Any B10 models in the PSC, PSH, or PSB Power Supply Series
BEFORE
There is a lot of extra wiring in this enclosure which not only takes up space but also increases the diculty and time associated with installation.
CONDUIT ENCLOSURE SWITCH
H N G H N G
AFTER
By using one of Functional Devices' Power Supplies you will greatly reduce installation time, as well as save space in your enclosure. Power Supplies are pre-wired
ENCLOSURE 24Vac Switch/Breaker CONDUIT
FUSE 24 Vac SUB-PANEL
120Vac from 10A Switch & CB to remainder of panel
24Vac
24Vac Indicator
To remainder of panel
POWER SUPPLY MAIN POWER 10A Switch/CB & Indicator Light SUB-PANEL
PSH100A100A SERIES
AC POWER SUPPLY
Enclosed Dual 100 VA Power Supplies, 120 to 24 Vac
CLASS II
24 Vac On/Off Switch 24 Vac Breaker
120 Vac Convenience Outlet* 24 Vac Breaker
8.625 8.250 4.500

4.250
ON OFF
RESET
SPECIFICATIONS
Transformer: Two 100 VA Split-Bobbin Over Current Protection: Circuit Breaker Input Wires: B10 Models Only Input Power Wires BLK: 120 Vac WHT: Neutral GRN: Ground All Other Models Primary Wires BLK: 120 Vac WHT: Common
MADE IN USA
ON OFF
RESET
*
ON OFF
24 Vac On/Off Switch LED Indicator
ON OFF
4.500
OFF
OFF
Com
24 Vac
Com
24 Vac 8.250
120 Vac Convenience Outlet* Outlet Wires BLK: 120 Vac WHT: Neutral GRN: Ground 10 Amp Main Breaker/Switch
*Move internal jumper to HOT position if you wish outlets to always be hot otherwise outlets will be switched by main breaker.
Output Wires: B10 Models Only W Models Only Auxiliary Output Transformer Output BLU: 120 Vac WHT/YEL: 24 Vac WHT/BLU: Common Frequency: 50/60 Hz 24 Vac ON/OFF: On / Off Switch & Breaker Main Breaker ON/OFF: Switch / Breaker (10 Amp) (Kills power to entire unit: Outlets, Aux. Output, and Transformer)* Total Combined Output 9A Approvals: Class II UL Listed, UL916, C-UL, CE Dimensions: 4.500 x 8.625 x 4.500 Weight: 8.600 lbs.
PSH100A100A SERIES SELECTION GUIDE

MODEL # 120 VAC AUX OUTPUT OUTLETS WIRE MAIN BREAKER ON INPUT POWER SECONDARY CONFIGURATION
PSH100A100A PSH100A100AN PSH100A100ANW PSH100A100AW PSH100A100AB10* PSH100A100ANB10 PSH100A100ANWB10 PSH100A100AWB10*
10 Amp Switch / Breaker 10 Amp Switch / Breaker 10 Amp Switch / Breaker 10 Amp Switch / Breaker
External Terminal Strip External Terminal Strip Internal Wires Internal Wires External Terminal Strip External Terminal Strip Internal Wires Internal Wires
NOTES
CONDENSE WORK SPACE AND WIRING (POWER SUPPLIES)

The PSC, PSH, and PSB Series Power Supplies allow you to save large amounts of time, space, and wiring throughout your panel. POWER SUPPLIES
Any B10 models in the PSC, PSH, or PSB Power Supply Series
BEFORE
There is a lot of extra wiring in this enclosure which not only takes up space but also increases the diculty and time associated with installation.
CONDUIT ENCLOSURE SWITCH
H N G H N G
AFTER
By using one of Functional Devices' Power Supplies you will greatly reduce installation time, as well as save space in your enclosure. Power Supplies are pre-wired
ENCLOSURE 24Vac Switch/Breaker CONDUIT
FUSE 24 Vac SUB-PANEL
120Vac from 10A Switch & CB to remainder of panel
24Vac
24Vac Indicator
To remainder of panel
POWER SUPPLY MAIN POWER 10A Switch/CB & Indicator Light SUB-PANEL
PRESSURE MONITORING
EP2 Series Electropneumatic Transducer

-YE VE A
LCD DISPLAY!
WARRANTY
The EP Series microcontroller based electropneumatic transducers incorporate high performance poppet valve technology and low power coils with digital control to provide unmatched accuracy, stability and quiet operation even with short tubing runs. In addition to providing quiet, stable operation, the poppet valves used in the EP Series consume no air, eliminating unnecessary air losses in the system. The EP Series covers a wide range of applications as all models feature jumper-selectable pressure ranges, an LCD display and manual override.
Snap Track Housing for Easy Mounting!
Field-selectable (jumper) outputs4-20mA/05V/0-10VDC, provide exceptional systems compatibility. LED indicators provide visual status of valve operation in manual or automatic mode.
Features Jumper-selectable control range (0-20psig or 3-15psig) fewer models to order and stock Field-selectable 4-20mA/0-5V/0-10VDC input LCD display for local indication of readings more accurate than analog gauges No air consumption and quiet operationperfect for hospitals and schools Manual override with set and hold feature great for commissioning those leaky systems Multi-point calibration; 3-15psi 5 point calibration and 0-20psi 6 point calibration Easy mounting with the snap track housing Options for diverse applications Pressure loss alarm provides a contact closure if the EP is unable to achieve the desired output within a xed length of time Failsafe vent solenoids bleed branch pressure on power failure Slide switch selectability for auto or manual mode (indicate by adding "1" at end of P/N)
FI
ORDERING INFORMATION
(Input) EP
2 = Analog, 0-5V/0-10VDC/ 4-20mA 1 = Selectable 3-15/0-20 psi 0 = None 1 = Pressure Loss Alarm 2 = Manual Mode Alarm 0 = None 1 = Vent on Power Fail S = Standard C = CE (blank = none) 1 = Slide Switch/ Auto/Manual 2 = EP Cover Plate 3 = Slide Switch/Auto Manual plus EP cover plate
(Output)
(Feedback)
(Failsafe)
(US or EU)
(Option)
128
Example: EP 2 1 0 0 S 1
Option = Slide Switch Auto/Manual Mode
ACCESSORIES
Dust coverSee page 206 available
PRESSURE MONITORING www.prokontrol.com
2004
VERIS INDUSTRIES
800.354.8556 DDC - 9
PRESSURE MONITORING
PX Series Dierential Pressure TransducerDry Media

The digital PX Series dierential pressure transducers utilize a highly accurate and stable sensor, which is microprocessor proled for improved accuracy and reliability. The stability, accuracy and ease of use characteristics of the PX models make them the ideal product for dierential pressure monitoring applications. Designed to monitor duct and static pressure in commercial buildings and to provide exceptional job-site exibility, all PX models feature four eld-selectable range options allowing just two models to cover applications for 0-0.1" to 0-10" W.C. The directional mode jumper provides the means to congure the transducer in unidirectional or bidirectional mode for room and building static pressure applications. All models feature a pushbutton and digital input terminal to zero the output. A microprocessor algorithm prevents accidental zero adjustment during normal operation. Applications Static pressure in duct or room applications Variable air volume system Filter status monitoring Exceptional accuracy and stability Improved tolerance to overpressure and vibration reduces eld failures High accuracy digital sensor maintains calibration and reduces callbacks High reliability sensor technology for long-term maintenance-free operation Lowest total installed cost Switch-selectable ranges reduce setup time and number of models to stock Microprocessor allows for a nine-point calibration increasing product accuracy and reliability Brass barb ttings prevent breakage and accomodate popular tubing sizes Built-in pickup tube simplies installation and saves time (duct model) Circuit protection, prevents damage due to incorrect wiring Low-dierential room pressure sensor with LCD display
Ideal for clean rooms, hospitals, fume hoods, computer rooms, and other very low dierential pressure applications
Selectable Ranges...LCD Display... Automatic Zero...
FI
-YE VE A
WARRANTY W WA RRANTY
Advanced pressure sensing technology

PX Series pressure transducers utilize an advanced ceramic capacitive sensing element which provides a highly stable linear output. Output oset errors due to changes in temperature, warm-up and long term drift are signicantly reduced compared to conventional sensors.
140
(Enclosure) (Local Display) (NIST)
Monitors positive and negative pressure Field-adjustable ranges for maximum resolution Flush mount directly on wall or duct
(Range)
(US or EU)
PX
D = Duct P = Panel L = LCD Display X = No Display N = NIST X = None 01 = 0-1" wc 02 = 0-10" wc
S
S = Standard
Example: PX D L X 01 S
ACCESSORIES
Room and duct static pickup tubes See page 206
2004
VERIS INDUSTRIES
800.354.8556 DDC -11
PRESSURE MONITORING
PH Series Digitally Controlled Gauge Pressure Transducer

The PH Series pressure transducers are designed for steam, air, gas and liquid pressure measurement in all mediums compatible with 17-4 PH stainless steel. They utilize a highly accurate, stable sensor which is microprocessor proled for exceptional accuracy and reliability. All models feature three switch-selectable ranges and a test mode to verify wiring and panel input scaling.
FI
Applications Chilled and hot water pump monitoring Medical and industrial gas monitoring Instrument air pressure Hydraulic oil pressure Exceptional accuracy and stability Micromachined silicon sensor design improves overpressure capacity Electronic surge damping for high stability Pushbutton zero calibrationno trim pots to adjust Lowest total installed cost Switch selectable pressure rangesfewer models to order and stock Pushbutton and remote zero adjustment maintain accuracy and prevent callbacks with automatic zero calibration
Output Clamping
-YE VE A
WARRANTY
A pushbutton and digital input terminal are used to zero the output automatically. A microprocessor algorithm prevents accidental zero adjustment during normal operation. The eld-selectable 0-5V/010VDC, or 4-20mA output feature provides excellent systems compatibility. Jumper controlled surge damping is provided on all models to prevent false alarms.
PRESSURE
Microprocessor controlled signal conditioning Noise rejection reduces uctuating readings due to noise or turbulence Surge damping prevents false alarms by averaging fast peaks Output clamping protects controller input from overcurrent/overvoltage
F.S.
Noise Rejection
Surge Damping
0
Actual Pressure
TIME
Digitally Conditioned Output
124
(NIST) (Range) (US or EU)
PH
N = NIST X = None 07 = 0-100 psig 08 = 0-250 psig 09 = 0-500 psig 10 = 0-1000 psig
S
S = Standard
Example: PH X 07 S
ACCESSORIES
Snubbers, steam siphon See page 206
2004
VERIS INDUSTRIES
800.354.8556 DDC -13
PRESSURE
jumper-selectable port swap feature
Wet Media Pressure Transducer

The PW/PW2 Series wet/wet pressure transducers incorporate microprocessor profiled sensors for exceptional accuracy and reliability. Easy to use and designed to provide exceptional installation savings, the PW/PW2 Series is ideal for measuring pressure across pumps, filters, heat exchangers, compressors, and other non-corrosive wet media applications. Exceptional accuracy and stability Dual sensor design for improved overpressure tolerance Jumper-controlled electronic surge dampening for high stability Pushbutton zero calibration no trim pots to adjust Lowest total installed cost Jumper-selectable port swap feature eliminates costly replumbing when the high and low ports are improperly plumbed...change the jumper position from normal to swap problem solved! Dual sensor design eliminates the requirement for a bypass valve assembly in most applications Switch-selectable pressure ranges...fewer models to order and stock Pushbutton and remote zero adjustment... maintain accuracy and prevent callbacks with automatic zero calibration
9EAR
PW
7ARRANTY
APPLICATIONS
Monitoring and controlling pump differential
pressure
Chiller/boiler differential pressure drop CW/HW system differential pressure 3-wire pressure tranducer, field-selectable output 0-5V/0-10VDC or 420mA. LCD displays gauge and differential pressure
PW2
Features The jumper-selectable output switch for normal (4-20mA) or reverse (20-4mA) operation provides application flexibility Rugged, die-cast enclosure provides NEMA 4 sealing
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Power PW: 12 to 30VDC/24VAC nominal PW2: 12 to 24VDC, loop powered Maximum Current Draw PW: DC: 125mA; AC: 280mA PW2: 29mA Output PW: 3-wire transmitter; user selectable 4-20mA, (clipped and capped)/0-5V/0-10V PW2: 2-wire transmitter; user selectable 4-20mA, (clipped and capped) Accuracy @ 25C* Range A, B, C: 1% F.S.; Range D: 2% F.S.** Surge Damping Electronic; 5-second averaging Test Mode PW: Overrides output to full-scale (20mA, 5V, 10V) Pressure Ranges (Selectable): 0-50 psi (0-3.45 bar) 0-5/10/25/50psid (0-0.34/0.69/1.72/3.45 bar) 0-100 psi (0-6.89 bar) 0-10/20/50/100psid (0-0.69/1.38/3.45/6.89 bar) 0-250 psi (0-17.24 bar) 0-25/50/125/250psid (0-1.72/3.45/8.62/17.24 bar) Product Operating Environment -10 to 55C (-140 to 130F); 0 to 90%RH, non-condensing Long Term Stability 0.25% per year Zero Adjust PW: Pushbutton auto-zero and digital input (2-pos terminal block) PW2: Pushbutton auto-zero Status Indication PW: Dual-color LED: Green = Normal, Green Blinking = Low > High, Red = Overrange, Red Blinking = Overpressure Housing Material White powder-coated aluminum Sensor: Media Compatibility Media compatible with 17-4 PH stainless steel Proof Pressure Max. 2x F.S. range Burst Pressure Max. 5x F.S. range Temperature Compensated Range 0 to 50C (32 to 122F); TC Zero <1.5% of product F.S. per sensor TC Span<1.5% of product F.S. per sensor (2 sensors per unit) Media Temperature Limits -20 to 85C (-4 to 185F); 0 to 90% RH non-condensing Fittings 1/8" NPT female thread, 17-4 PH stainless Minimum input voltage for 4-20mA operation: 250 ohm loop (1-5V) = 12 VDC; 500 ohm loop (2-10V) = 15 VDC *Accuracy combines linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability. **FS is defined as full span of selected range in bi-directional mode.
2-wire, 4-20mA pressure tranducer. LCD display toggles between hi-port, low-port, and differential pressure; loop powered
Output Clamping
F.S.
Noise Rejection
PRESSURE
Surge Damping
0
Actual Pressure
TIME
Digitally Conditioned Output
Microprocessor provides digital signal conditioning Noise rejection reduces fluctuating readings due
to noise or turbulence Surge dampening prevents false alarms by averaging fast peaks
144
800.354.8556
503.598.4564
www.veris.com
2008 Veris Industries
Greystone Accuracy by Design Products for the HVAC Professional
Greystone Energy Systems Inc. is one of North Americas largest ISO registered manufacturers of HVAC sensors and transducers for Building Automation Management Systems. We have conscientiously established a worldwide reputation as an industry leader by maintaining leading-edge design technology, prompt technical support, and a commitment to on-time deliveries. We take pride in our Quality Management System which is ISO 9001 certified, assuring our customers of consistent product reliability.
. . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Sensors Temperature Transmitters Humidity Transmitters Gauge Pressure Transducers Differential Pressure Transducers Static Pressure Transducers Air Flow Transducers Current Switches & Sensors KW & KWH Transmitters Analog to Pneumatic (I/P) Transducers
. Signal Conditioning Transmitters . Proportional Resistive Output Boards . Pulse Width Modulated Boards . Power Supplies . Actuators . Valves . Air Quality Monitor . Carbon Dioxide Detectors . Carbon Monoxide Detectors . Toxic Gas Detectors . Refrigerant Detectors
Peace of mind through reliable sensors

GREYSTONE HAS AN ISO 9001 REGISTERED QUALITY SYSTEM www.prokontrol.com DDC - 15
TEMPERATURE SENSOR/TRANSMITTER: TE200, TE500 SERIES . Nickel & Platinum RTD, integrated circuit or thermistor sensors . Optional features include set point adjust, push button switch and
external/internal jacks . High accuracy temperature transmitters for any application
. Transmitters with optional output signal types, power supplies and . Immersion application sensors available . Bimetal, Alcohol, or LCD temperature indication RELATIVE HUMIDITY TRANSDUCER: RH100, RH200, RH300 SERIES . Accuracy 2% to 5% . LCD options available . Resistant to volatile organic . Humidity span 0% to 100% compounds . Temperature options available . Highly stable . AC/DC operation . Field selectable outputs . Temperature compensated 4-20mA, 0-1 VDC, . Fast response 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC GAUGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS: PGS SERIES . Sensor operating temperature . Ranges 0 through 500 PSIG . Accurate to 0.25% FSO . . DC inputs, current outputs . Compensated temperature Ranges
up to 20C to 80C (0 through 3,400 kpa) ranges up to -40C to 127C 17-4PH Stainless Steel has excellent corrosion resistance (comparable to grade 304 stainless) temperature ranges
LOW PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS: LP1 SERIES . Jumper selectable 2 wire current and 3 wire voltage outputs standard . 24 Vac/dc power supply standard . Eight variable jumper selectable pressure ranges, WC & PA . Functional weather resistant ABS enclosure . Available options include LCD display & mounted static probe . Two available accuracies WET TO WET . Excellent long-term stability . Four switch selectable pressure ranges . Long life . Autozeroing . High performance . Jumper selectable LCD backlight for . Jumper selectable output types:
4-20 mA, 0-5 and 0-10 Vdc low power consumption applications . NEMA 4 enclosure . Bi-directional switch
. Port swap switch GREYSTONE HAS AN ISO 9001 REGISTERED QUALITY SYSTEM www.prokontrol.com DDC - 16
PRESSURE SWITCH & AIR FLOW TRANSDUCER

Pressure Switch (AFS) . Plated housing contains diaphragm, calibration spring and snap acting SPDT switch . Enclosure cover guards against accidental contact . Optional pressure ranges and manual resets available Air Flow Transducer (ESF-35-2) . Converts airspeed into a 4-20mA or a 0-10 VDC signal . Linear output signal
. Made with corrosion resistant

material . Fully electronic registration of airflow speed
CURRENT SENSORS . Solid core models available (CS-450 & CS-475 Series) . Split core models available (SC-550 & SC-575 Series) . Three ranges per unit improves resolution . No field adjustment necessary, factory calibrated . Average measurement is equivalent to True RMS for pure sine waves
for the CS-450 / SC-550 Series . True RMS measurement for sine waves or variable frequency drives for the CS-475 / SC-575 Series
CURRENT SWITCHES . Solid core models available (CS-400 Series) . Split core models available (SC-500 Series) . Auto-ranging eliminates lost jumpers . Self-powered and no insertion loss . Mosfet switching . Small compact size . Easy field adjustment with status LEDs . Input / Output isolation via current transformer COMMAND RELAY AND HIGH CURRENT SWITCH
Command Relay: . CR-112 / CR-124 relay mounting base . CSA certified, UL approved and CE compliant . Easily mounted on CS or SC product for easier installation . SPDT Form C
High Current Switch: . Direct connection to PCs for general status monitoring . Directly control AC loads, such as relays, lamps or fans in response to the current of AC circuit . Safety and alarm circuits
. Lighting controls
SOLID STATE CURRENT VALVES . Solid state control . Accepts a variety of input signals . Zero phase angle switching . Fixed time base for PI control . LED indication . CSA approved
ELECTRONIC TO PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER: ETP-9500 SERIES . Direct connection to PCs for pneumatic control . Two-wire loop powered or three-wire voltage models . Easily accessible wiring terminal blocks . Quick panel mounting with supplied snap-track . High accuracy with low hysteresis . Driftless operation with high repeatability . AC/DC operation PNEUMATIC & CONTROL INTERFACE TRANSDUCERS . Direct connection to PCs for . Driftless operation with . . . .
pneumatic control Three-wire voltage modes and . current outputs Easily accessible wiring terminal . blocks . Quick panel mounting with . supplied snap-track Floating point and pulse width . modulation options high repeatability Input signal and power supply protection AC/DC operation Air filter supplied Manual override available as standard or optional High accuracy with low hysteresis
CARBON DIOXIDE DETECTORS . Setup/calibration fully menu driven (requires LCD option)
Monitors CO2 over range 0-2000 PPM (factory default) . Field adjustable range from 0-1500 PPM up to 10,000 PPM without re-calibration! . NDIR single beam with patented ACLP self- calibration algorithm
. . . .
Guaranteed 5 year calibration interval Optional on board relay with field adjustable trip point Optional LCD for displaying PPM level and menu options Powered by either AC or DC source with no change to circuit required
CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS . Setup / calibration fully menu driven (requires LCD option) . 0-300 PPM for electrochemical (7%) . Optional on board relays with field adjustable trip point . Optional LCD for displaying PPM level and menu options . Powered by either AC or DC source with no change to circuit
required . Choice of three field adjustable analog output signals, linearized over full range . Field replaceable calibrated sensor module 0-500 PPM for electrochemical (3%)
HAZARDOUS GAS & REFRIGERANT DETECTORS . Optional LCD for displaying level . Optional audible alarm . Microprocessor based (12 bit accuracy) . System configuration saved in non-volatile memory . Optional relays can be configured with normally open
or normally closed contacts
AIR QUALITY MONITOR: AIR-300 . VOC (volatile organic compounds) detection . Microprocessor based controller . Analog, stepped, and relay output options . 10-bit resolution . Able to detect one cigarette in 15 m (530 cu. ft.) room . Integral sensitivity adjustment . Ability to directly control air handling unit . Visual indication of quality (internal LEDs) DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR: SL-2000 . 24 VAC/DC or 120/240 VAC operation . Simple change-out of photo or ion detector heads . Low flow air velocity rating from 100 to 4000 FPM . UL, CSFM and MEA Listed . Two (2) sets of 10A form C alarm contacts . One (1) set of 10A form C trouble contacts . Easy and quick mounting to round or rectangular ducts
from 1 - 12 wide . Clear cover for convenient visual inspection
REGULATED DC POWER SUPPLIES . 120 and 24 VAC input/DC outputs . Factory set at 24 VDC out . Adjustable voltage outputs . Snap track mounted (PS 100 Series) . Fuse protected . CSA approved (PS 150 Series) MISCELLANEOUS CONTROL DEVICES . Light sensor/transducer PSR Series . Water detector WD100 Series . Loop powered indicators LPI Series . Damper end switch DES-100 Series . General purpose relays LY & MY Series
CURRENT MONITORING
600/800
LOW-COST STATUS!
Mini Split- & Solid-Core Fixed Setpoint Digital Output Current Switches
The Hawkeye 600/800 Series go/no current switches provide a cost-eective solution for monitoring status on unit vents, exhaust fans, recirculation pumps and other xed loads where belt loss is not a concern. APPLICATIONS Monitoring on/o status of electrical loads Monitoring direct drive units, exhaust fans and other xed loads Verifying lighting run times On/o status for direct-drive fans, pumps, and process motors More reliable for status than relays across auxiliary contacts Ideal for direct-drive units, unit vents, fan coil units, exhaust fans and other xed loads Great for lighting statusless expensive than 277V relays Low 0.5A turn-on (H800)ideal for small exhaust fans (Not intended to detect belt loss) Mounting bracket provides installation exibility Monitor status of fans, pumps, motors & other electrical loads Split-core 600 for fast retrot installation Mini solid-core 800 ts in tight enclosures 100% solid-state, no moving parts to fail Polarity insensitive output 5-year limited warranty
20
H800 Mini Solid-core
-YE VE A
FI
WARRANTY
CURRENT MONITORING www.prokontrol.com
H600 Mini Split-core
Maximize Reliability Minimize Installed Cost
See the H500 series on page 18 for Start/Stop & Status of fractional HP loads MODEL Solid-Core
H800 H800HV H800NC Split-Core H600
AMPERAGE RANGE
0.5 - 200A 0.75 - 200A* 0.5 - 200A 0.75 - 200A*
OUTPUT TYPE
N.O., Solid-state N.O., Solid-state N.C., Solid-state N.O., Solid-state
OUTPUT RATING (MAX.)

1.0A@30VAC/DC .5A@250VAC/DC .1A@30VDC 1.0A@30VAC/DC
*See temperature specications on next page
ACCESSORIES
MODEL
AH01
DESCRIPTION
DIN Rail Clip Set compatible with all solid-core models
2004
VERIS INDUSTRIES
800.354.8556 DDC -24
CURRENT MONITORING
608 Series
Mini Split-Core Adjustable Setpoint Digital Output Current Switches

The Hawkeye 608 Series is a high performance miniature split-core current status switch. Its low minimum setpoint (1.25A) and small size make it ideal for monitoring status of small to medium motor loads. With an amperage range of 1.25 to 50 amps, the 608 series can accurately detect belt loss, coupling shear, or other mechanical failure on loads from 1/5 to 40HP. New high performance miniature split-core Low (1.25A) minimum setpoint...eliminates the need for multiple wraps of the conductor through the sensor even on loads as small as 1/5HP Small size ts easily inside small starter enclosures Self-gripping iris eliminates the need for drill mounting...easy installation Status LEDs for easy setup and local indication 1 Amp status output for increased application exibility Monitor status of fans, pumps & electrical loads Detects belt loss and mechanical failure...ideal for fan/pump status monitoring Reliable cost-eective fan/pump status sensor... the 608 series replaces pressure switches and other electromechanical devices...no tting or tapping required Adjustable set point (1.25-50A) 100% solid state...no moving parts to fail Mounting bracket for installation exibility 5-year limited warranty
22
FI
-YE VE A
WARRANTY
H608 MINI SPLIT-CORE
APPLICATIONS Detect belt loss, coupling shear and mechanical failure Verify lighting circuit and other electrical service run times Monitor status of industrial process equipment Monitor status of critical motors (compressor, fuel, etc.)
Calibrated Trip Point Off
Fan/pump On
Electrical failure Off
Loss of belt/coupling shear
Now you can easily detect when drive belts slip, break, or pump couplings shear. In fact, a typical HVAC motor that loses its load has a reduction of current draw of up to 50%. That's why our sensors are the industry standard for status.
MODEL
H608 H606* H609
AMPERAGE RANGE
1.25 - 50A 1.25 - 50A 1.25 - 50A
OUTPUT TYPE (MAX.)

N.O. 1.0A@30VAC/DC N.C. .1A@30VDC N.O. .2A@120VAC/DC
TRIP POINT ADJUSTMENT
STATUS OPEN LED
STATUS CLOSED LED
*Hx06 Models require a constant source of 5-30VDC power to the status contacts
Do not use the LED indicators for evidence of applied voltage
ACCESSORIES
MODEL
AH01
DESCRIPTION
DIN Rail Clip Set
2004
VERIS INDUSTRIES
800.354.8556 DDC -25
CURRENT MONITORING
708/908 Series
THE INDUSTRY STANDARD!
Solid- & Split-Core Adjustable Setpoint Digital Output Current Switches

The Hawkeye 708/908 Series solid- and split-core Cost eective...reduced installation & adjustable current sensors provide accurate, reliable service costs and maintenance-free fan and pump status indication. Adjustable set-point...1 to 135A (708), 2.5 to 135A (908) APPLICATIONS More reliable & cost-eective than dierential Monitor fans, pumps, motors & other electrical pressure switches... no tting or tapping loads for proper operation 100% solid-state, no moving parts to fail Detect belt loss and motor failure...ideal for fan Output status LEDs for fast setup and pump status Polarity insensitive output...easy wiring Replace pressure switches and other Adjustable mounting bracket...easy placement electromechanical devices Self-gripping iris eliminates the need for drill Verify lighting circuit loads mounting...easy installation Monitor critical motors (compressor, fuel, etc.) 5-year limited warranty Industrial process equipment status (OEM)
24
H708 Solid-core
-YE VE A
FI
WARRANTY
MODEL
Solid-Core H701 H706* H708 H709 Split-Core H906* H908 H909
*Hx06 Models require a constant source of 5-30VDC power to the status contacts
ACCESSORIES
MODEL
AH01
H908 Split-core
Fan/pump On
Electrical failure Off
Loss of belt/coupling shear
AMPERAGE RANGE
1-135A 1-135A 1-135A 1-135A 2.5-135A 2.5-135A 2.5-135A
OUTPUT TYPE
N.O. Solid-state N.C. Solid-state N.O. Solid-state N.O. Solid-state N.C. Solid-state N.O. Solid-state N.O. Solid-state
OUTPUT RATING (MAX.)

1.0A@30VAC/DC 0.1A@30VDC 1.0A@30VAC/DC 0.2A@120VAC/DC 0.1A@30VDC 1.0A@30VAC/DC 0.2A@120VAC/DC
TRIP POINT ADJUSTMENT
STATUS OPEN LED
STATUS CLOSED LED
Do not use the LED indicators for evidence of applied voltage
DESCRIPTION
DIN Rail Clip Set
2004
VERIS INDUSTRIES
800.354.8556 DDC -26
CURRENT MONITORING
Solid-Core Fixed Setpoint Digital Output Current Switches 730 Series with Patented Integral Command Relay
IDEAL FOR EXHAUST FANS
26
-YE VE A
The Hawkeye 730 Series combines an on/o status On/o status sensor and command relay for sensor and command relay in one package. It is ideal direct-drive fans, pumps and process motors for monitoring and controlling motors where belt loss Reduces the number of installed components... is not a concern. saves time and space On/o status and command relay in a single labor APPLICATIONS and space saving device Monitoring direct drive units, exhaust fans and Now you can cost-eectively monitor and start/ other xed loads stop, unit vents, fan coils, exhaust fans and other Monitoring on/o status of electrical loads loads where belt loss is not a concern Starting/stopping motors H740 features an SPDT command relay Space saving dual function sensor for Start/Stop/Status No calibration required One device to install...reduces installation charges More reliable and cost eective than dierential pressure switches...100% solid stateno mechanical parts to fail Mounting bracket for installation exibility 24VAC/DC command relay switches up to 10A@250VAC
FI
WARRANTY
US Patent No. 6,005,760
(Command Relay: ContactCoil)
H7
0
3 = Form A (SPST) 10(5)@250VAC, 30VDC, 1/3HPCoil: 24VAC/DC 10mA 4 = Form C (SPDT) 8(3.5)@250VAC, 30VDC, 1/4HPCoil: 24VAC/DC 10mA 5 = Form A (SPST) 10(5)@250VAC, 30VDC, 1/3HPCoil: 9-12VDC 16mA-20mA
Example: H7 4 0
Available
ACCESSORIES
MODEL
AH01 AH13
DESCRIPTION
DIN Rail Mounting Clip Set Relay Snubber (TVS)
2004
VERIS INDUSTRIES
800.354.8556 DDC -27
CURRENT MONITORING
Solid-Core Adjustable Setpoint Current Switches 735 Series with Patented Integral Command Relay
COMMAND & STATUS IN A SINGLE DEVICE!
28
-YE VE A
WARRANTY
US Patent No. 6,005,760
Combines command relay & fan/pump status sensor in a single, easy to install unit Reduces number of components installedts better in small starter enclosures Command relay and status in a single unit Replace pressure switches and other electromechanical devices Detect belt loss and motor failure...ideal for fan and pump status APPLICATIONS Starting/stopping and monitoring positive status H748 features SPDT command relay of fan and pump motors Now one device does the job of two Replaces pressure switches and other Reduced charges from electrician electromechanical devices Relay and status LEDs for easy setup Polarity insensitive status output 1 to 135A adjustable setpoint for current sensor status Fan/pump Electrical 5-year limited warranty On failure The Hawkeye 735 Series is the ideal solution for the automation installer. These units combine a current switch and relay into a single package, reducing the space required for total control of fans and pumps. The integral current switch and relay operate independently of one another. The 735-759 products facilitate the functions of start/stop and status with one device instead of two.
Loss of belt/coupling shear Off
FI
ORDERING INFORMATION H735 H7

3 = Form A (SPST), 10(5)@250VAC,30VDC, 1/3HP24VAC/DC 10mA 4 = Form C (SPDT), 8(3.5)@250VAC,30VDC, 1/4HP24VAC/DC 10mA 5 = Form A (SPST), 10(5)@250VAC, 30VDC, 1/3HP9-12VDC 20mA 9 = 0.2A@120VAC/DC N.O. Solid State 8 = 1.0A@30VAC/DC N.O. Solid State Form A (SPST) 5(3)@250VAC,30VDC, 1/6HP24VAC/DC 10mA Output: 0.1A@30VAC/DC N.O. Solid-State (Status Output)
(Command Relay: ContactCoil)
Example: H7 3 8
Available only on 735, 738, 748
ACCESSORIES
MODEL
AH01 AH13
DESCRIPTION
DIN Rail Mounting Clip Set Relay Snubber (TVS)
2004
VERIS INDUSTRIES
800.354.8556 DDC -28
CARLO GAVAZZI
A u t o m a t i o n C o m p o n e n t s
Relays
www.prokontrol.com
DDC - 32
Monostable or Bistable Miniature Power Relays
Miniature size 15 mm high PCB mounting Monostable or bistable versions 4 kV / 8 mm insulation Switching capacity 8 A / 250 VAC DC coils:
2 to 147 VDC monostable version 2.4 to 84.7 VDC bistable version
Type
M15
1 normally open contact or 1 change over contact General purpose, industrial electronics Sealed according to IP 67 standard 4 different pin layout configuration Low coil power consumption
Miniature size 15.7 mm high PCB mounting Monostable version 5 kV / 10 mm insulation Switching capacity:
12 or 16 A / 250 VAC 1 pole version 8 A / 250 VAC 2 pole version
Type
C
M25
DC coils 5 to 110 VDC 1 or 2 change over contacts General purpose, industrial electronics Sealed according to IP 67 standard Low coil power consumption
To instantly view a data sheet and specify products, visit www.GavazziOnline.com
www.prokontrol.com
DDC - 33
Relay
TYPE DIMENSIONS Height - Length - Width CONTACTS Configuration Material Rated current Max. switching power Max. contact voltage Minimum permissible load (Typical value) COIL Rated voltage DC
M15 - M15 R1/R2
M25
RMI 2-10 /RMI 4-5
RCP
15 x 29 x 10
15.7 x 29 x 12.7
36 x 28 x 21.5
56 x 35.5 x 35.5
1 CO, 1 NA 1 CO, 2 CO 2 CO, 4 CO AgCdO AgCdO Silver alloy 8A 8 A, 12 A, 16 A 5 A, 10 A 2000 VA 2000VA-3000VA-4000VA 300 W-2500 VA (2 poles) 150 W-1250 VA (4 poles) 380 VAC 440 VAC 250 VAC / 30 VDC 100 mA at 24 VDC 100 mA at 24 VDC 10 mA at 10 mVDC (Au) -
2 CO, 3 CO Silver alloy 10 A 300 W- 2500 VA 380 VAC 100 mA at 24 VDC -
Consumption Operating range GENERAL DATA
AC DC AC
3 to 110 VDC 3 to 48 VDC (M15 R1) 3 to 24 VDC (M15 R2) 100 mW Vmin 0.7 to 1.7 Vn
5 to 110 VDC 0.4 W See data sheet
5 to 110 VDC 6 to 230 VAC 0.9 W 1.9 VA 0.7 to 1.7 Vn
6 to 110 VDC 6 to 230 VDC 1.3 W 2.1 VA -
Electrical life (at max. switching power) Mechanical life Insulation test VAC (1min) - Contact/coil - Open contacts - Contact different polarity Protection category Operating temperature Terminal shape Approvals
1 x 105 cycles 30 x 106 cycles 4000 VAC 1000 VAC -40C to +70C PCB UL, CSA, VDE, IMQ S, N, D, F
1 x 105 cycles 1 x 107 cycles 5000 VAC 1000 VAC 2500 VAC (1 pole) IP 67 -40C to +85C PCB VDE
1 x 105 ops (1800 ops/h) 1 x 107 ops (18000 ops/h) 3750 VAC Vrms 750 VAC Vrms 1250 VAC Vrms IP 67 -55C to +70C Plug-in and PCB UL, CSA, VDE, IMQ
1 x 105 1 x 107 3750 VAC Vrms 750 VAC Vrms 1250 VAC Vrms IP 40 IP 40 -40C to +55C Plug-in UL, CSA, VDE, IMQ
OPTIONS AgNi, AgSnO2 Gold plated contacts SOCKETS

CARLO GAVAZZI offers a wide range of printed circuit board and modular DIN rail mount sockets for our various electromechanical relays. The following optional plug-in blocks are also offered for the DIN rail mount sockets: LED Indication Diode Protection RC Network Protection MOV Protection
AgNi, AgSnO2 Gold plated contacts
www.prokontrol.com
DDC - 34
Monostable Midi Industrial and Industrial Relays

High switching power Small size Monostable version Switching capacity 2 poles version
10 A / 250 VAC - 12 A (5x104 cycles)
Type
RMI
Switching capacity 4 poles version

5 A / 250 VAC - 6 A (5x104 cycles)
DC coils 5 to 110 VDC AC coils 6 to 230 VAC 2 or 4 change over contacts Standard with LED, locking push to test button and mechanical flag indicator 3,750 VAC dielectric coil to contacts Sealed according to IP 40 standard Conform to the CE low voltage directive
8 or 11 pin socket mounting Monostable version Long life (minimum 100,000 electrical operations at 10 A 250 VAC / 30 VDC) Switching capacity:
10 A / 250 VAC - 12 A (5x104 cycles)
Type
RCP
DC coils 6 to 110 VDC AC coils 6 to 230 VAC 2 or 3 change over contacts Matched sockets available Standard with LED, locking push to test button and mechanical flag indicator 3,750 VAC dielectric coil to contacts Sealed according to IP 40 standard Conform to the CE low voltage directive
www.prokontrol.com
DDC - 35
General Purpose Relay
G7L
A high-capacity, high-withstand voltage relay compatible with momentary voltage drops. No contact chattering for momentary voltage drops up to 50% of rated voltage. UL Class B construction standard. Wide-range AC-activated coil that handles 100 to 120 VAC at either 50 or 60 Hz. Miniature hinge for maximum switching capacity, particularly for inductive loads. Flame resistant materials (UL94V-0-qualifying) used for all insulation material. Quick-connect, screw, and PCB terminals available. Standard models are UL, CSA, and TUV approved; VDE versions now available. Conforming to IEC 950.
Ordering Information
To Order: Select the part number and add the desired coil voltage rating (e.g., G7L-1A-T-CB-AC100/120). Replaces G5D series. Type E bracket E bracket (with test button) Upper bracket Upper bracket (with test button) PCB mounting Contact form Quick-connect terminal SPST-NO DPST-NO SPST-NO DPST-NO SPST-NO DPST-NO SPST-NO DPST-NO SPST-NO DPST-NO G7L-1A-T-CB (see note 1) G7L-2A-T-CB (see note 1) G7L-1A-TJ-CB (see note 1) G7L-2A-TJ-CB (see note 1) G7L-1A-TUB-CB G7L-2A-TUB-CB G7L-1A-TUBJ-CB G7L-2A-TUBJ-CB Model Screw terminal G7L-1A-B-CB (see note 1) G7L-2A-B-CB (see note 1) G7L-1A-BJ-CB (see note 1) G7L-2A-BJ-CB (see note 1) G7L-1A-BUB-CB G7L-2A-BUB-CB G7L-1A-BUBJ-CB G7L-2A-BUBJ-CB G7L-1A-P-CB G7L-2A-P-CB PCB terminal
Note: 1. E bracket or socket must be used for mounting (part number R99-07G5D). Refer to Accessories section for options and part numbers. 2. For VDE approved versions, please consult OMRON.
www.prokontrol.com
General Purpose Relay
G7L
DDC -36
3 2 1 s a y s a e . . . y t i l i b a g n a h c r e t n I
type for either hot and chilled water, glycol, low pressure steam or 100 PSI high close-off applications. 2 Select a Cv and cartridge Select your actuator type from electric, wireless, thermoelectric or pneumatic.
1 Select a valve body (2 or 3 way) for the type of connection that best suits your application.
URN SPRING RET
SPRING RETURN
WIRELESS 2.4GHz RF SPRING RETURN
THERMOSTATIC
F.L.P. SYNCUBE
WIRELESS 433MHz RF F. L.P. MODULATING
MATIC 3-6PSI, 7 -11PSI
PNEU
30, 4640, ME4430, 45 4740, 4840
ME1601, 1704, 3901
Mix any of these actuators...
ME8600, 8800
OT1100, 2100, 3100
ME4140, 4240, 4340
ME8200, 8400
MP5100, 5 300
Choose from Electric (spring return or FLP in 2 wire, 3 wire PWM or 0-10VDC modulating), Wireless, Thermostatic, Thermoelectric or Pneumatic versions.
EPXX
BCXX
All of our cartridges have a multitude of CV/KV values used in 2 way, 3 way, hot and chilled water, glycol, low pressure steam and 100 PSI high close-off applications.
with any of these cartridges...
EDXX
EBXX
EVXX
V420
with any of these valve bodies.
V320
V241
V325
V243
V246
In 2 way and 3 way versions with a choice of connections in female thread, single or double union, direct solder and flared, in 1/2 (15mm), 3/4 (20mm) and 1 (25mm) sizes.
Terminal Unit Zone Valves
DATA SHEET
V200, V300 & V400 Series Globe Control Valve Bodies

These ANSI 250# PN16 globe valve bodies (400# @ 150F, 250# @ 250F), which are common to all actuators, are available in a wide range of styles, connection types and Cvs (Kvs) sizes. Ordering using Cv implies NPT threads to ANSI standards. Ordering using metric Kv implies BSPT threads to DIN standard. Designed for use on hot or chilled water up to 50% glycol mix and low-pressure steam, the commercial application globe valve bodies utilize low zinc antidezincification bronze, coupled with long life replaceable and interchangeable internals from 0.15 to 9.0 US Cv (0.12 to 7.75 KVs). All valve bodies are globe type with spring-loaded stems, being actuated power driven stem down to open or close as required by the valve assembly configuration. They have replaceable and / or interchangeable internals in the form of replaceable cartridge types with variations of parabolics or linear characterised globe plungers. Cv (Kv) values can be changed without removing the valve from the line. In all cases, the internals are complete with world-class specifications including 11/2 - million cycles (3,000,000-stroke) packing, burnished mirror finish stainless-steel stems and micro-machine accurate parabolic characterizing plugs, which open wide to clear the orifice of debris. An optional OM1000 manual adjuster can be used to manually adjust the valve body flow without an actuator.
General Specifications
Body Material Pressure Rating Max.Test Pressure Max. P Valve Stem Turndown Ratio Stem Travel Stem Position Low zinc bronze, alloy C84400 ANSI 250 (PN16), 400 PSI at 150F, 27 bar at 65C 1200 PSI (81 bar) 50 PSI (3.5 bar) "Mirror maker" burnished stainless steel stems Better than 50:1 7/64" (2.8mm) 5/32" (4mm) UP = valve open, DOWN = valve closed
Internal Cartridges
Type EP/EV
Type BC
Type ED
Type EB
Internals Specifications - Field replaceable and interchangeable

2 way n/o valves
Replaceable Cartridge Part Nos Valve seat Valve disc/plunger Valve spring Packing Stroke Tight close off Steam rated Water rated Glycol rated Cv Equal % - 4mm lift Cv Linear - 2.8mm lift - 4mm lift Kv Equal % - 4mm lift Kv Linear - 2.8mm lift - 4mm lift
Spartan cartridges are made to high standards and exacting manufacturing techniques which ensure you the best quality available. See chart below for types available.
High 100psi/6.8 bar close-off
2 way n/c valves
3-way/4 Port diverting valves

Type "ED" (plug) ED (Cv) or (Kv) ie: ED - 35 Integral bronze EPDM / brass Stainless Steel Double EPDM 2.8mm & 4mm 100% N/A (250F / 120C) To 50% N/A 0.50, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0 3.5 Bottom port CV 2.0 N/A 0.43, 0.86, 1.72, 2.58 3.1 Bottom port KV 1.7
Type "EP" (plug) Type "EV" (plug) for steam Type "BC" (cage) Type "EB" (balanced plug) Type "ER" (plug) EP (Cv) or (Kv) EV (Cv) or (Kv) BC (Cv) or (Kv) EB (Cv) or (Kv) ER (Cv) or (Kv) ie: EP 3.5 ie: EV 3.5 ie: BC 0.25 ie: EB 6.0 ie: ER 3.0 Integral bronze Integral bronze Bronze - replaceable Integral bronze Integral bronze EPDM / brass Hi-temperature EPDM Brass cage EPDM / brass EPDM / brass Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Double EPDM Hi-temperature Double EPDM Double EPDM Double EPDM Double EPDM 4mm 4mm 4mm 4mm 4mm 100 % 100 % 0.1% of Cv 100% 100% N/A 15 psi. (250F / 120C) N/A N/A N/A (250F / 120C) N/A (250F / 120C) (250F / 120C) (250F / 120C) To 50% N/A To 50% To 50% To 50% 0.50, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0 0.15, 0.25. 0.50 0.50, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 6.0, 8.0 N/A N/A N/A 0.50, 1.0, 2.0 1.0, 2.0, 3.5, 4.5 N/A 1.0, 2.0, 3.5, 4.5, 6.4, 9.0 3.0 0.43, 0.86, 1.30, 1.72, 2.15, 2.58 0.86, 1.72, 3.1, 3.87 0.12, 0.21, 0.43 0.43, 0.86, 1.30, 1.72, 2.15, 2.58, 5.16, 6.90 N/A N/A N/A 0.43, 0.86, 1.72 N/A 0.86, 1.72, 3.1, 3.87, 5.50, 7.75 2.58
Use Spartan Peripheral Devices AV07 tool to replace packing and plunger internal cartridge.
AV07 Packing Wrench
Spartan Peripheral Devices telephone: (450) 424-6067 fax: (450) 424-6071 email: info@spartan-pd.com website: www.spartan-pd.com
Zone Valve Bodies 26 June 2009
Terminal Unit Zone Valves
DATA SHEET
V200, V300 & V400 Series Control Valve Bodies

V240 - union connection both ports
2 way normally open valve body Select V240-12 for 1/2" unions or V240-34 for 3/4" unions Select Cv (Kv) cartridge... EPXX or BCXX Weight: 220g
A 2.24 (56,90) B 2.24 (56,90) C 1.09 (27,69)
All dimensions in inches (mm)
V320 - union on all 3 ports - 3 way diverting valve body V321 - union on all 3 ports - 3 way mixing valve body
Select V320/V321-12 for 1/2" unions or V320/V321-34 for 3/4" unions Select Cv (Kv) cartridge... EDXX Weight: 1/2" and 3/4" - 240g
A 2.24 (56,90) B 2.24 (56,90) C 1.09 (27,69) D 1.15 (29,21)
C B
C B D
V241 - female port in, X union connection port out

2 way normally open valve body Select 1/2" or 3/4" valve size NPT or BSPT Select Cv (Kv) cartridge... EPXX or BCXX Weight: 1/2"- 300g, 3/4" - 480g
C
V345 -
unions on all 3 ports

C
Option: Can be used as mixing at 5 psi (0.4 bar) maximum p CV 5.5, KV 4.73
3 way diverting valve body V345-34-5.5 includes 3/4 union V345-10-5.5 includes 1 union Weight: 520g
V345 A B C D 3.25 3.12 1.50 1.62 (82,55) (79,25) (38,10) (41,15)
1/2 Valve V241-12
A 3.34 (84,84) 3/4 Valve A V241-34 3.90 (99,06)
B C 1.76 1.09 (44,70) (27,69) B C 2.20 1.09 (55,88) (27,69)
V243 - female port in, X female port out

2 way normally open valve body Select 1/2" or 3/4" valve size NPT or BSPT Select Cv (Kv) cartridge... EPXX or BCXX Weight: 1/2 Valve A B C 1 1.60 1.09 /2"- 240g, V243-12 2.29 (58,17) (40,64) (27,69) C 3 /4" - 360g, 3/4 Valve A B C 1" - 940g 2.70 2.20 1.09
V243-34
A
V323 - female thread on all 3 ports

Option: Can be used as mixing at 5 psi (0.4 bar) maximum p
C B D
3 way diverting valve body Available in 1/2" valve size Select Cv (Kv) Cartridge.... EDXX Weight: 320g
1/2 Valve V323-12 A B C D 2.50 2.30 1.13 1.20 (63,50) (58,42) (28,70) (30,48)
(68,58) (55,88) (27,69) 1 Valve A B C 2.84 1.80 V243-10 3.88 (98,50) (71,10) (45,70)
V222 -
union connection both ports

C
V245 - direct solder

2 way normally open valve body Select 3/4" valve size* Select Cv (Kv) Cartridge... EPXX or BCXX Weight: 3/4 Valve A B C 1 /2"- 220g 2.29 1.60 1.09
V245-34
B D
(58,17) (40,64) (27,69)
* /2" possible with AV6412 reducer on each port

1
2 way reverse acting normally closed valve body Select V222-12 for 1/2" unions or V222-34 for 3/4" unions Select Cv (Kv) cartridge.... ERXX CV 1.0, 2.0, 3.0 ERXX KV 0.86, 1.70, 3.0 Weight: A B 300g 2.24 2.43
(56,90) (61,72)
C 1.09 (27,69)
V325 - direct solder
Option: Can be used as mixing at 5 psi (0.4 bar) maximum p

C
Unions (for V240,V222 & V320 valve bodies only)

3/4 solder 3/4 NPT or BSPT
1/2 solder AV6312

Wgt: 80g
1.26 (32,00mm)
B D
3 way diverting valve body Available in 1/2" valve size* Select Cv (Kv) Cartridge.... EDXX Weight: 1/2"- 240g
3/4 Valve V325-34 A B C D 2.24 1.13 1.09 2.23 (56,90) (28,70) (27,69) (56,64)
1.85 (46,99mm)
1.60 (40,64mm)
1/2 NPT or BSPT AV6112

Wgt: 80g
1.45 (36,83mm)
All dimensions in inches (mm)
* 1/2" possible with AV6412 reducer on each port
AV6334
Wgt: 100g
AV6134
Wgt: 100g
Zone Valve Bodies 26 June 2009
Terminal Zone Valves
DATA SHEET
V246 and V243I Flared Connection Valves Bodies

Designed for use on hot or chilled water up to 50% glycol mix and low-pressure steam, these commercial application 2 way terminal globe valve bodies utilize low zinc bronze alloy for outstanding resistance to corrosion and dezincification. Coupled with a long life of 1.5 million cycles and with replaceable and inline interchangeable cartridges with burnished stainless steel stems and micro machined accurate parabolic characterizing plugs. All Spartan cartridges have spring loaded stems which are driven stem down to close. These control valve assemblies can be used with the complete line of Spartan Zone Actuators (Electric, Electronic, Pneumatic & Thermostatic) and are easily interchangeable with a thumb-nut. See Spartan Actuators Data Sheets. Available range of Cv cartridges from 0.15 to 3.5CV in 0.5CV increments Choose from hot or chilled water, low pressure steam or high close-off pressure application versions
ON VALVE BODIES
ON CARTRIDGES
Choose Spartan for a quality and versatile alternative to Honeywell and Erie valves.
Internal Cartridges
Internals Specifications
Standard Application Steam Application Chilled Water/Glycol 15psi Cartridge part #s EP (Cv) or (Kv) EV (Cv) or (Kv) (Replaceable) ie: EP 3.5 ie: EV 3.5 Type "EP" (plug) Type "EV" (plug) for steam Valve seat Integral bronze Integral bronze Valve disc/plunger EPDM / brass Hi-temperature EPDM Valve spring Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Packing Double EPDM Double Hi-temperature EPDM Stroke 4mm 4mm Tight close off 100 % 100 % Steam rated N/A 15 psi. (250F / 120C) Water rated (250F / 120C) N/A Glycol rated To 50% N/A Cv Equal % - 4mm lift 0.50, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0 Cv Linear - 4mm lift 1.0, 2.0, 3.5 High Pressure Application Low Flow 100psi/6.8 bar close-off Application EB (Cv) or (Kv) BC (Cv) or (Kv) ie: EB 6.0 ie: BC 0.25 Type "EB" (balanced plug) Type "BC" (cage) Integral bronze Bronze - replaceable EPDM / brass Brass cage Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Double EPDM Double EPDM 4mm 4mm 100% 0.1% of Cv N/A N/A (250F / 120C) (250F / 120C) To 50% To 50% 0.15, 0.25. 0.50 N/A
Type EP/EV Type EB
Type BC
Choice of Cv*: 0.15 / 0.25 / 0.50 / 1.0 / 1.5 / 2.0 / 2.5 / 3.0 / 3.5 EPxx Cartridge - for hot or chilled water up to 50% glycol mix. EVxx Cartridge - low-pressure steam 15psi. EBxx Cartridge - high close off pressures of 100psi. BCxx Cartridge* - for 0.15, 0.25 CVs only
V246 - Compatible with Honeywell bodies VP527 series V246 valve body with
male thread for 45 SAE flared union nuts
Body Material Pressure Rating Max.Test Pressure Max. P Max. Close-off Pressure Valve Stem Turndown Ratio Stem Travel Stem Position Low zinc bronze, alloy C84400 ANSI 250 (PN16), 400 PSI at 150F, 27 bar at 65C 1200 PSI (81 bar) 60 PSI (4.0 bar) 100 PSI with EB cartridge "Mirror maker" burnished stainless steel stems Better than 50:1 5/32" (4mm) UP = valve open, DOWN = valve closed
V243I - Compatible with Erie bodies

V243I valve body with female thread for 45 SAE flared union nuts
Installation and Flow Direction

When installing it is essential that the flow follows the arrow that is embedded into the valve body casting. The packing and plunger cartridge can be easily replaced by using the AV07 Packing Wrench shown below.
AV07 Packing Wrench

Flared Valve Bodies 15 January 2010
Printed in Canada
V260 Series Angle Valve Bodies
Spartan V260 and V261 Series Globe Control Valves

Spartans V260 double union and V261 single union angle globe valve bodies are suitable for new projects or retrofitting existing radiators offering extended flexibility in piping installations. These globe angle union valve bodies are designed for hot or chilled water and 50% glycol with a standard EP cartridge, or for high differential pressure applications with a balanced EB cartridge and for low pressure steam applications up to 15PSI with a steam rated EV cartridge. The commercial valve bodies utilize low zinc bronze alloy for outstanding resilience to corrosion and dezincification and come with a lifetime warrranty. These control valve assemblies can be used with the complete line of Spartan Zone Actuators (Wireless, Electric, Electronic, Pneumatic & Thermostatic) and are easily interchangeable with a thumb-nut. See Spartan Actuators Data Sheets.
ON VALVE BODIES
ON CARTRIDGES
V260 with air vent
V261 with plug
Unique Feature
A unique feature of the V260 and V261 valve bodies is the 1/8 tapered threaded port. As it is at the highest point of the valve body it can be utilised with the integrated air relief vent AVMAV18. It can also be used as a pressure point or for other applications. For steam applications, in conjuction with an EV steam cartridge, the port is capped for added safety.
V261 with air vent
E F C
Body Material Pressure Rating Max.Test Pressure Max. P Valve Stem Turndown Ratio Stem Travel Stem Position
Low zinc bronze, alloy C84400 ANSI 250 (PN16), 400 PSI at 150F, 27 bar at 65C 1200 PSI (81 bar) 50 PSI (3.5 bar). Maximum close off pressure with EB cartridge 100PSI (6.8bar) "Mirror maker" burnished stainless steel stems Better than 50:1 5/32" (4mm) UP = valve open, DOWN = valve closed
B D A
1/2 Valve V261-12 3/4 Valve V261-34 A 2.25 (58) A 2.68 (67) B 1.13 (28) B 1.13 (30) C 1.13 (29) C 0.75 (19) D 1.25 (32) D 1.38 (36)
V261 Angle Union Valve Body

E 1.25 (33) E 1.25 (33) F 0.75 (19) F 0.75 (19)
Internal Cartridges
Standard Application Steam Application High Pressure Application Low Flow Chilled Water/Glycol 15psi 100psi/6.8 bar close-off Application Cartridge part #s EP (Cv) or (Kv) EV (Cv) or (Kv) EB (Cv) or (Kv) BC (Cv) or (Kv) (Replaceable) ie: EP 3.5 ie: EV 3.5 ie: EB 6.0 ie: BC 0.25 Type "EP" (plug) Type "EV" (plug) for steam Type "EB" (balanced plug) Type "BC" (cage) Valve seat Integral bronze Integral bronze Integral bronze Bronze - replaceable Valve disc/plunger EPDM / brass Hi-temperature EPDM EPDM / brass Brass cage Type EP/EV Type EB Type BC Valve spring Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Choice of Cv*: Packing Double EPDM Double Hi-temperature EPDM Double EPDM Double EPDM 0.15 / 0.25 / 0.50 / 1.0 / 1.5 / 2.0 / Stroke 4mm 4mm 4mm 4mm 2.5 / 3.0 / 3.5 / 4.5 Tight close off 100 % 100 % 100% 0.1% of Cv EPxx Cartridge - for hot or chilled water up to Steam rated N/A 15 psi. (250F / 120C) N/A N/A 50% glycol mix. Water rated (250F / 120C) N/A (250F / 120C) (250F / 120C) EVxx Cartridge - low-pressure steam 15psi. Glycol rated To 50% N/A To 50% To 50% EBxx Cartridge - high close off pressures of 100psi. Cv Equal % - 4mm lift 0.50, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0 0.15, 0.25. 0.50 Cv Linear - 4mm lift 1.0, 2.0, 3.5, 4.5 BCxx Cartridge* - for 0.15, 0.25 CVs only Kv Equal % - 4mm lift 0.43, 0.86, 1.30, 1.72, 2.15, 2.58 0.12, 0.21. 0.43 Kv Linear - 4mm lift 0.86, 1.72, 3.10, 3.87
When installing it is essential that the flow follows the arrow that is embedded into the valve body casting. The packing and plunger
Order no AVMAVIK-20
cartridge can be easily replaced by using the AV07 Packing Wrench shown here.
V260/1 Angle Valves 5 February 2010
Printed in Canada
AV07
Pack of 20 Air Vents
Pneumatic Zone Valves
DATA SHEET
MP5100 & MP5300 Pneumatic Zone Valve Actuators

General Actuator Specifications
Construction: Zinc plated steel housing Diaphragm: Heavy duty molded neoprene Dimensions: Working area 4sq Stroke: 0.197 (5mm) Spring: Stainless steel retracts actuator shaft and
allows the valve stem to rise up on loss of air pressure.
VP320-12-EDXX 3-way control valve
VP222-12-ERXX 2-way normally closed control valve
Nominal Spring Range:

MP5100, 3-6PSI (21Kpa-41Kpa) MP5300, 7-11PSI (48Kpa-76Kpa) Nominal no load spring range is based on maximum 5mm stroke.
Starting point: Non adjustable.

Maximum air pressure: 50PSI (345Kpa)
Operating temperature: -20to220F, (-29 to 104C) Air Connection: Combination 5/32 & 1/4 barb
fitting for plastic tubing
Pilot Positioner: Not applicable
Interchangeable with the complete range of Spartan valve bodies. See Valve Body datasheet.
VP241-12-EPXX 2-way normally open control valve
Description
Spartan Peripheral Devices pneumatic 4sq actuators are available in high and low spring ranges and have a compact design with minimum profile suitable for tight space requirements. They are used with Spartan Peripheral Devices zone valve bodies in a 2 way normally open configuration,V240,V241,V243,V245, 2 way normally closed configuration V222 and a 3 way configuration V320,V325 and V420 for proportional or 2 position applications. Each actuator is equipped with a Neoprene diaphragm and biasing spring to aid the return spring built into the respective valve. Normally the return spring within the valve and the biasing spring within the actuator act together to open the valve. Air pressure opposes the two springs forcing the valve closed when the air pressure is greater than the nominal spring ranges. Further air pressure opposes the pressure of the fluid within the system, closing the valve flow.
To calculate the actual spring range under specific hydronic conditions see table below.
Valve Differential Pressure (PSI) 3-6 PSI Range 7-11 PSI Range 5 6.4 11.4 10 6.75 11.75 15 7.12 12.12 20 7.50 12.50 25 7.87 12.87 30 8.25 13.25 35 8.62 13.62 40 9.00 14.00 45 9.37 14.37 50 9.75 14.75
Installation Instructions:
The actuator can be installed vertically or horizontally; it cannot be installed upside down.The Actuator mounting thumbnut is to be tightened by hand only, using tools may result in over-tightening.
3.10 (78mm)
This product was tested by an independent building owner against a competitive product over 5 million full cycles at which point the competitive product failed and the test was stopped! ise Spartan - Controls without Comprom
1.85 (47mm)
2.50 (65mm)
Pneumatic Zone Valves 17 September 2009
Terminal Unit Control Valves
DATA SHEET
V243-10 1 Valve Body with Pressure Balanced Cartridge

Designed for use on hot or chilled water up to 50% glycol mix and lowpressure steam, these commercial application valve bodies utilize low zinc anti-dezincification bronze, coupled with long life replaceable and interchangeable cartridges. A unique feature of the EB type cartridge is that it contains a pressurebalanced chamber.The supply water enters the balancing chamber through the valve plug ports and the water pressure opposes the differential pressure across the valve, to help the plunger to close. As the water inlet pressure increases so does the pressure in the chamber helping it to close the plunger.The valve close off pressure is limited only to the water noise acceptance. EB cartridges are available with different CV values and different flow characteristics. Easily interchangeable inline without removing the valve body allows for quick maintenance or flow resizing. Soft EPDM disk built into the plunger allows for 100% tight shut off. With this balanced cartridge technology, thermostatic actuators that are known to have a limited linear force, can achieve larger flows and differential pressures. The low force required to move the stainless steel valve stem allows the complete line of Spartan Zone Actuators (Electric, Electronic, Pneumatic & Thermostatic) to be used.These are easily interchangeable with a thumb-nut. These control valve assemblies can be used with the complete line of Spartan Zone Actuators (Electric, Electronic, Pneumatic & Thermostatic) and are easily interchangeable with a thumb-nut. See Spartan Actuators Data Sheets.
EB 6.0 Pressure Balanced Chamber Valve Body V243-10
ON VALVE BODIES
ON CARTRIDGES
Body Material Pressure Rating Max.Test Pressure Max. P Max. Close-off Pressure Valve Stem Turndown Ratio Stem Travel Low zinc bronze, alloy C84400 ANSI 250 (PN16), 400 PSI at 150F, 27 bar at 65C 1200 PSI (81 bar) 50 PSI (3.5 bar) 100 PSI (6.8bar) with all actuators "Mirror maker" burnished stainless steel stems Better than 50:1 5/32" (4mm)
Cartridge part #s (Replaceable) Valve seat Valve disc/plunger Valve spring Packing Stroke Tight close off Water rated Glycol rated Cv Equal % Cv Linear Kv Equal % Kv Linear When installing it is essential that the flow follows the arrow that is embedded into the valve body casting.
C B
V243-10, 2 way normally open valve body Dimensions

Female port in, female port out NPT or BSP threads Select Cv (Kv) cartridge EBXX
1 Valve A B C 2.84 1.80 V243-10 3.88 (98,50) (71,10) (45,70)
EB (Cv) or (Kv) ie: EB 6.0 Type "EB" (balanced plug) Integral bronze EPDM / brass Stainless Steel Double EPDM 4mm 100% (250F / 120C) To 50% 6.0, 8.0 6.4, 9.0 5.16, 6.90 5.50, 7.75
The packing and plunger cartridge can be easily replaced by using the AV07 Packing Wrench shown below.
AV07 Packing Wrench

A
Zone Valve Balanced 15 January 2010
2-Position ON/OFF Spring Return Zone Valves
DATA SHEET
Power Cube ME4430, ME4530 Actuators

Description:
These 2-way and 3-way control valves all use common high strength, glass filled, nylon composite, electric gear motor actuators. The ME4430, normally open series, & the ME4530, normally closed series are 2-position, 2-wire, failsafe on power disruption units. They are designed for on-off control of hot or chilled water, glycol (50%) and low-pressure steam. An insulating collar keeps the valve body heat away from the actuator.The actuator is equipped with a dial type position indicator and an M30 quick disconnect mounting thumbnut.
General Specification:
Motor Type: Brushless hysteresis, capable of continuous stall. Action: Power Interrupt - ME4430 Stem UP (NO), ME4530 Stem down (NC) Operating Voltage: 24VAC, 110VAC, 220VAC 50/60Hz, +-10% Power Consumption: 8 VA, 0.3A at 24VAC Ambient Temperature: 40 to 122F (5-50C) Enclosure: IP20 (NEMA 1) Drive Time: 20 sec closing, 10 sec opening - 4430/4431/4432 20 sec opening, 10 sec closing - 4530/4531/4532 Stroke: 4.5 MM Stem Force: 27lb (120 Newton) Wiring Connections: 4 (100 MM) leads 7/8 strain relief connector (Wire harness optional designated with W) Option: SPDT End Switch 250V 5A (designated with S) Approvals: Meets CE, ROHS requirements Electric motor UL & CSA approved Maintenance Free
Electrical Connection:
Electrical connection 24 Vac Class 2 wiring using strain relief 7/8 connector provided: Connect the two wires (polarity is not required) to the short leads of the electric motor. Secure the connection with wire marets and tuck them inside the motor true 7/8 hole. Snap on the wire connector, press into the opening and it will lock in place.
Power Cube 2-position Actuators types:

Actuator Part Number ME4430 ME4430W ME4430S ME4431 ME4431W ME4431S ME4432 ME4432W ME4432S ME4530 ME4530W ME4530S ME4531 ME4531W ME4531S ME4532 ME4532W ME4532S Action Power Interrupt Normally Open Stem up Normally Open Stem up Normally Open Stem up Normally Open Stem up Normally Open Stem up Normally Open Stem up Normally Open Stem up Normally Open Stem up Normally Open Stem up Normally Closed Stem down Normally Closed Stem down Normally Closed Stem down Normally Closed Stem down Normally Closed Stem down Normally Closed Stem down Normally Closed Stem down Normally Closed Stem down Normally Closed Stem down Power 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 110VAC 110VAC 110VAC 220VAC 220VAC 220VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 110VAC 110VAC 110VAC 220VAC 220VAC 220VAC Option none Wire Harness End Switch none Wire Harness End Switch none Wire Harness End Switch none Wire Harness End Switch none Wire Harness End Switch none Wire Harness End Switch
Valve Bodies:
All valve bodies are spring-loaded stem up.The spring returns the valve & actuator to the stem up position when power is lost in fail open type ME4430 or fail closed in type ME4530. All valve bodies have in line replaceable and / or interchangeable cartridges to enable Cv (Kv) size change on site, resizing or servicing with out removing the valve body from the pipe. Refer to the valve body data sheet for complete specification and selection.
Position Indicator:
ME4430 Series
Open Closed
ME4530 Series
Open Closed
30mm (1.2)
40mm (1.6)
50mm (2)
125mm* (5)
87.5mm (3.5)
Thumbnut
* 160mm (61/4) sizes 32 & 40mm (11/4 & 11/2)
Dimensions
Zone Valves 4430 4530 5 February 2010
Self Acting Thermostatic Control Valves
DATA SHEET
Thermostatic Actuators OT1100, OT2100, OT5100

Description:
These 2-Way and 3-way control valves use the OT1100, OT2100, OT2115, OT5100 family of self acting thermostatic interchangeable actuators. They are designed for the control of hot and chilled water and low pressure steam. The OM1100 manual adjuster is also available. These compact self acting thermostatic actuators are liquid filled for fast reaction to temperature change at the sensing point. On a rise in temperature the liquid within the metallic bellows expands, opposing the action of the return spring within the valve body moving the valve stem. An insulated heat barrier prevents the heat from the valve stem effecting the operation. The entire actuator can be removed without tools for service or replacement with simple thumbnut mounting ring. Temperature adjustment stoppers inside the unit can be set to prevent set point tampering. A theft prevention cover (OM1200) is available to order and can be installed on all units. The complete range of thermostatic actuators can be installed on all Spartan Zone Valve bodies, two way models V160,V240, V241,V243,V245 and three way models V320,V325,V420.
All valve bodies have replaceable cartridges for ease of maintenance. Stem, packing, disc and spring are replaceable as a cartridge inline without removing the valve body. Choice of Cvs (Kvs) is available, see Valve Body Data Sheet.
Specification:
Actuator types: OT1100 - Direct Coupled OT2100 Remote Bulb with 6.5(2m) capillary OT2115 Remote Bulb with 16.5 (5m) capillary OT5100 Wall Mount Sensor and Adjuster 6.5(2m) capillary OM1100 Manual hand adjuster OM1200 Theft prevention cover Force: 27lb (120Newton) Temperature range: 40 to 85F (5 to30C) Temperature setting scale 1 to 5; 57F(14C), 63F(17C), 68F(20C), 73F(23C), 80F(26C)
Dimensions -
inches (mm)
Set Point memory clip. Economy Energy saving setting * Freeze Protection Setting. 42F (6C) Maximum Temperature: 180F (80C) Stroke: 3.5 mm Set point limit stops Maintenance Free
Thumbnut
For OM1200 Theft Proof Cover, use TORX-T10 tool.
Zone Valves OT1100 2100 5100 10 April 2007
Thermoelectric Control Valves
DATA SHEET
Extra Compact Thermoelectric Actuators ME-1605 and ME-1705

These two-way, three-way and 4 ported zone control valves all use a simple time proven thermoelectric actuator operating on the principle of the expansion of refined wax when heated through its melting point. They are silent, extremely compact, inherently fail safe (open or closed) and operate on steam to 15PSI temperatures.
Spartan thermoelectric valves are silent and extra compact for installation in low profile cabinets.
Principles of Operation
Spartans thermoelectric actuators utilize a highly refined wax filled element with piston/stem and patented packless elastomer seal. A PTC (positivetemperature-coefficient) semi-conductive disc is both temperature control and heat source, inherently controlling at 90C (194F).The wax is chemically refined to melt at 70C (158F).The element expands in direct proportion to the amount of wax melted, driving the stem through its travel to close (or open) the valve. No other travel or thermostatic switches are required. Life expectancy is therefore in multiple decades and unconditionally guaranteed by Spartan Peripheral Devices for 5 years. For 230Vac, 50/60Hz versions choose models ME-1625 and ME-1725.
Actuator Models: ME-1605, ME-1705

Supply Voltage: 24Vac or Vdc 10%, 50/60Hz, 6Va Power Consumption: 3W Connection: 100cm/40" PVC Cable (optional UL Plenum cable available) Ambient Temperature: 5C/40F to 40C/105F Stroke: 3.5mm Running Time to open or close: 210 seconds in each direction Enclosure: IP54 at vertical installation End of travel cut-off: PTC Position indicating visual tangible Maintenance free Agency approval: Conforms to CE/ROHS requirements Class 2 as per UL/CSA Bayonet connection engaged with a click: For ease of installation in tight spaces
ME-1605 T echnical Data

Direct Acting: 2-wire control Spring Return: Normally open, stem up Control Input: on/off or PWM Stem Force: 25lbs, 110N Manual Overide: None
Quick Bayonet Coupling

The ME-1605 and ME-1705 Extra Compact Thermoelectric Actuators are designed for quick and easy attachment release with 4 x large contact surfaces inter-locking the threaded bayonet nut and actuator sleeve.
ME-1705 T echnical Data

Reverse Acting: 2-wire control Spring Return: Normally closed, stem down Running Time: 210 seconds Control Input: on/off or PWM Stem Force: 27lbs, 120N Manual Overide: Auto, manual shipped in manual position
Piston
Operating principle of a wax element with elastomer insert

Wax elements, their manufacturing processes and their application to regulation have been proven for decades. Even the most sophisticated requirements can be met using this simple yet extremely costeffective, precise and, above all, reliable technology.
t
Stroke
Dimensions
mm (inches)
t
Elastomer Insert Hot Wax Housing
Zone Valves 1605 1705 5 February 2010
Thermoelectric Control Valves
DATA SHEET
Thermoelectric Actuators ME-1601, ME-1704 & ME-3901

These two-way, three-way and 4 ported zone control valves all use a simple time proven thermoelectric actuator operating on the principle of the expansion of refined wax when heated through its melting point. They are silent, extremely compact, inherently fail safe (open or closed) and operate on steam to 15PSI temperatures.
Spartan thermoelectric valves are silent, extremely compact and inherently fail-safe.
Principles of Operation
Spartans thermoelectric actuators utilize a highly refined wax filled element with piston/stem and patented packless elastomer seal. A PTC (positivetemperature-coefficient) semi-conductive disc is both temperature control and heat source, inherently controlling at 90C (194F).The wax is chemically refined to melt at 70C (158F).The element expands in direct proportion to the amount of wax melted, driving the stem through its travel to close (or open) the valve. No other travel or thermostatic switches are required. Life expectancy is therefore in multiple decades and unconditionally guaranteed by Spartan Peripheral Devices for 5 years. For 230Vac, 50/60Hz versions choose models ME-1621 and ME-1724.
Actuators shipped in manual (MAN) mode. Set to AUTO mode after installation.
Actuator Models: ME-1601, ME-1704, ME-3901

Supply Voltage: 24Vac or Vdc 10%, 50/60Hz, 6Va Operating Current: 400mA Power Consumption: 2.5W Connection: 100cm/40" PVC Cable (optional UL Plenum cable available) Ambient Temperature: 5C/40F to 40C/105F Stroke: 3.5mm Running Time to open or close: 210 seconds in each direction Enclosure: IP54 at vertical installation End of travel cut-off: PTC Position indicating window Maintenance free Agency approval: Conforms to CE/ROHS requirements Low voltage Class 2 as per UL/CSA
ME-1601 Technical Data

Direct Acting: 2-wire control Spring Return: Normally open, stem up Control Input: on/off or PWM Stem Force: 20lbs, 90N Manual Overide: None
ME-3901 modulating 0-10Vdc actuator

This actuator is built on the tried and tested, totally silent wax expansion principle in conjunction with a unique intelligent position-encoding system. The valve stroke responds precisely and reliably to the control signal within the shortest possible time.

Reverse Acting: 2-wire control Spring Return: Normally closed, stem down Running Time: 210 seconds Control Input: on/off or PWM Stem Force: 27lbs, 120N Manual Overide: Auto, manual shipped in manual position

Reverse Acting: 3-wire control Spring Return: Normally closed, stem down Control Input: 0-10Vdc Hall effect position feedback Stem Force: 27lbs, 120N Manual Overide: Auto, manual shipped in manual position Permanent constant control Input Impedance: 10Kohm 10Vdc valve open, 0Vdc valve closed,
Operating principle of a wax element with elastomer insert

Wax elements, their manufacturing processes and their application to regulation have been proven for decades. Even the most sophisticated requirements can be met using this simple yet extremely costeffective, precise and, above all, reliable technology.
t
Stroke
Dimensions
Piston
mm (inches)
t
Elastomer Insert
Manual Overide
Hot Wax
Housing
Zone Valves 1601 1704 3901 5 February 2010
Syncube Control Valves
DATA SHEET
ME-4140, ME-4240 and ME-4340 Spartan non-spring-return Syncube Actuators

Description
There are three different Syncube actuator models available. ME-4140 three point floating, ME-4240 PWM 0.25-5.0 sec, ME-4340 modulating 0-10 or 2-10Vdc They drive 2-, 3- and 4-port control valves with a unique, patented, non-springreturn movement having five robust moving parts. Without small toothed, high pitched gears to wear out or whine, the compact movement has a life expectancy in excess of 500,000 cycles (1,000,000 strokes) or 1,500,000 corrections.The reversible, brushless, synchronous, electric motor maintains accurate positioning and provides creep-free control with extreme accuracy. All of the actuators ride high and clear of pipes, insulation (lagging) and heat, yet the overall height above the actuator remains low. General Features: The maximum stem output is force-balance controlled in floating ME-4140 types, electronically controlled in PWM ME-4240 and modulating ME-4340 types. However, in all cases, valve stem force is enough to maintain and control high differential pressures to at least 60 psig (4.0 Bar) or more, except on steam (see valve body specifications). A blue/semi-clear case or an opaque cream white case are both available, the former allowing viewing of the moving parts, the latter not. (check with your distributor to ascertain which is kept in local stock). In both cases, a top mounted position indicator is available for viewing or for feeling its rise and fall (useful in dark, cramped places such as ceiling spaces and/or inside fan coil cabinets, etc.).
Installation Instructions
All Syncube ME-4140, ME-4240 and ME-4340 actuators can be installed on all Spartan zone valves bodies which are designed for use on hot or chilled water, up to 50% glycol mix, or for low-pressure steam.The commercial type valve bodies all utilise low zinc anti-dezincification bronze coupled with long life replaceable and inter-changeable internals from 0.15 to 9.0 Cv (0.13 to 7.75 Kvs). Refer to Control Valve Bodies Data Sheet. The actuator can be installed vertically, or at any angle not exceeding the horizontal. The Actuator mounting thumbnut is to be hand-tightened only, using tools may result in over-tightening.

All versions of these actuators share a common rail mechanical design with specific electronic variations for floating, PWM and modulating with end of travel shut off. Mounting yoke: glass filled nylon based, high temperature composite to brass fixing ring. M30 x 1.5 Ambient temperature: 5C to +50C; 40F to 120F non-condensing Cover: clear-blue K resin or optional off white ABS Motor: synchronous reversible brushless Output cable: PVC coated copper 20ga wire or optional 18ga Plenum cable Output force: nominal 48 lbs, (214N) Stroke: 0.177 (4.5mm) Enclosure: IP51 (IP54 optional in vertical installation) Input voltage: 24 Vac, 60/50 Hz, +10% -5% all versions Consumption: 45mA, 1 Va Position indication: top mounted stem position height both visual and touch sensitive. Clear case unit gearing is also visible through the cover. Approvals: meets CE and ROHS requirements, low voltage, Class II 24Vac device
Thumbnut
Take note that the actuator should never be attached to the valve if its stem has been electrically driven down for fear of damaging the operating mechanism inside. Actuators shipped separately from the factory are always delivered stem up.
Dimensions
23mm (0.9") 62mm (2.4") 32mm (1.25") 32mm (1.25")
Releasing the Cover:
To remove the cover flip off the black disc and undo the cover screw
77mm 102mm (3.0") (4.0")
Zone Valves 4140 4240 4340 23 April 2009
Priinted in Canada.
Modulating Power Cube Control Valves
DATA SHEET
Control Valves with Spring Return Actuators ME-4640, ME-4740 & ME-4840
These 2, 3 or 4 port control valves use tri-state floating ME-4640, 0.2-5.0 sec PWM ME-4740 and 2-10Vdc ME-4840 spring return actuators. They are available for the control of hot water up to 250F (120C), chilled water to 35F (2C) 50% glycol and low pressure steam using an EV cartridge. ME-4840, ME-4740 & ME-4640 spring return proportional microprocessor based control valve actuators A 24Vac hysteresis brushless motor is used to position a valve in response to an input set point signal either at 2-10Vdc or 10-2Vdc in proportional mode, 0.2 to 5 seconds or 5 to 0.2 seconds in time proportional mode, and a triac or relay 24Vac output for floating mode. A quadrature optical system using two LEDs, two phototransistors and a rotating flag on the rear of the motor measure the displacement of the valve. A microprocessor is used to access the input signal, monitor and store the position count, determine the count difference and appropriately control the drive to the motor. At power-up the valve performs a 50 second re-span operation, the valve is driven fully closed and then fully open. The perceived position outputs as a 1-5Vsignal to use by others, for monitoring or positioning other devices. Upon power failure, the motor will be returned to its starting open position by the valve spring.
Features
The hardware accommodates proportional, time proportional or floating protocols. An appropriately programmed microprocessor must be installed. Direct or reverse acting selected by jumper J3. 4-20mA input: proportional units can be used with such signals if converted to 2-10V by a suitable shunt, 500ohms 1%, 1/2W resistor. Drift: no detectable drift after 100,000 cycles Re-span (standard): after power up as follows: drive to full closed. Reset count to zero. Allow (controlled) spring return to full open, store span count, and then assume set point Operating modes: proportional, time proportional, floating Input Protection: inputs will accept 30Vac continuously without damage. Misconnection (mixing) of the connections to unit will not cause damage Wiring Connection: 32" PVC or optional Plenum cable Agency approval: Conforms to CE/ROHS requirements Class 2 as per UL/CSA

Supply: 24Vac +10%/-5%, 60Hz/50Hz Motor Type: AC hysteresis brushless Nominal Consumption: 6 Watts Ambient operating temperature: 0-50C (120F) Typical opening (closing) time: 25 seconds Signal output: 1-5Vdc +/- .1V impedance 100Kohms. 0 V is perceived as loss of power Output force: 28lbs (120N) Motor jam recovery: if an unexpected stall occurs i.e. in midrange the system reverses the motor, backs up, and then again attempts to move to the calculated position Position feedback (internal): Quadrature optical encoder
30mm (1.2)
40mm (1.6)
77mm (3)
125mm* (5)
* 160mm
THREE POINT FLOATING (ME-4640)
Signal input: .1 to 60 seconds in either direction, inputs shorter than.1 second are ignored Number of steps: end-to-end 30 Input polarity: Input to common Input Impedance/current: 2K or 12mA RMS Switching: low energy (gold) dry contacts of solid state (triac) Dead Band: 0.12 seconds Re-span (standard): after power up Interlock: if both inputs are energized simultaneously, no movement results Re-span (standard): after power up
(61/4) sizes 32 & 40mm (11/4 & 11/2)
TIME PROPORTIONAL (ME-4740)

Signal input (normal mode): 0.2 seconds to 5 seconds 5 seconds to close Signal input (reverse mode): 5 seconds to 0.2 seconds 5 seconds to open Inputs shorter than .1 second are ignored, inputs longer than 5 seconds (e.g. continuous contact closure) initiate fully closed action after 5 seconds. Other time ranges are available. Number of steps: end-to-end 40 Input polarity: Input to 24Vac (+/-10%) Input Impedance/current: 2K or 12mA RMS Switching: low energy (gold) dry contacts or solid state (triac) Dead Band: 0.12 seconds Re-span (standard): after power up Miniumum off cycle: required between pulses 250msecs
PROPORTIONAL (ME-4840)
Signal input (direct mode): 2-10Vdc (2Vdc stem up) (standard set-up) Signal input (reverse mode): 10-2Vdc (2Vdc stem down) by installing Jumper J3 Input Impedance: 200 K (0.05mA at 10Vdc) Dead Band: 0.1V Delay: two seconds before implementing motor direction change End Update: When the input signal is within ~.2V of an end value(i.e. 2.2V or 9.8V), the valve is driven until stall is detected. Re-span (standard): after power up The ME-4840 is factory set to 2-10Vdc. For alternative setting ME-4840A, 10-2Vdc.
Zone Valves 4640,4740,4840 5 February 2010
System Valves
VE411 & 431 SERIES ELECTRONIC SYSTEM CONTROL VALVES
PN10 & PN16 (ANSI 250 rated 400 psi @ 1500F - 27 Bar @ 650C) Two way or three way mixing - lift and lay (globe) - 25mm to 80mm (1 to 3)
VALVE ASSEMBLIES - These assemblies are complete with actuators, linkage assembly and valve body. They are suitable for use in 2-way applications, angle or straight to factory order. VALVE BODIES - Utilising anti-dezincification bronze components and a heavy duty valve body, they are coupled with a unique variable ratio, all-metal cast linkage system which runs slower at the ends for improved modulation and better close-off force, speeding up in the centre range. Built to both European and American standards the valves are stocked in BSPT (PN10&16) in Europe and NPT (125 - 250#) in Canada and in the USA. OTHER FEATURES INCLUDE: 11/2 million cycle U-cup packing cartridge Stem scrubber rings top and bottom Guided stem both top and bottom Parabolic and fluted plugs Better than 50:1 turndown ratio Maintenance free Trouble shooting 'A port' pointer Optional tapped ports
Valve Body Dimensions
Size * 25mm (1) 40mm (11/2) 50mm (2) 80mm (3) A 125mm (5) 140mm (5.5) 152mm (6) 250mm (10) B 30mm (1.2) 38mm (1.5) 39mm (1.5) 91mm (3.6)
DATA SHEET
* High and low Kvs(Cv) each size
80mm (3)
25 - 50mm (1-2)
ELECTRONIC VALVE ACTUATORS Actuators are available for 2-position, floating (tri-state) and 0-10 VDC modulating control. Ambient temperature limitation is 69mm (2.7) 2lbs/0.9kgs from 50C (400F) to 400C (1050F) non-condensing. Power supply 77mm (3) 4lbs/1.8kgs voltage is 24 VAC 50/60Hz on all models. 84mm (3.3) 6lbs/2.7kgs Tri-state actuators can be supplied with an optional 0 - 10 VDC 124mm (4.9) 48lbs/21.6kgs feedback to transmit the position of the actuator for use in external control loops or position indication. Auxilary switches also available. All incorporate override lever/position indicators. The heavy duty steel Geneva movement provides a robust, variable ratio motion which provides more force at the ends of travel for seating the valve extra tightly. The same variable ratio assists in the valve characteristics to improve modulating control. OTHER FEATURES INCLUDE: Lower, more compact package Both mounting nuts and studs to ensure ease of removal, even after decades of corrosive service All metal. No plastic. Hardened steel movement Override lever/pointer on all units AV1500 AV-2400 (for 16-41Nm (max. 16Nm Factory installed and pre-adjusted to its valve body Actuators) Actuators) Maintenance-free, long life expectancy and housed in an Wgt: 10lbs/4.5kgs Wgt: 1lbs/0.45kgs attractive, corrosion resistant, sturdy metal yoke
C Weight
System Valves V411 V431 29 January 2009
Printed in Canada
APPLICATION - Primarily designed for use on closed systems, these valves can nonetheless be used in many other applications. Dezincification resistant, they can be used in most HVAC control systems as well as industrial applications. When used on mains water or open systems, such as cooling towers or open tank installations, mineral deposit build-up may affect operation requiring more frequent maintenance. (For heat transfer oils, steam, brine, seawater, etc., refer to the factory with full details of the fluid specification.) Suitable for use as either 2-way or 3-way valves, in hot or cold water systems, and with static pressure rating suitable to 400 psi., (ANSI 250), they adapt to low or hi rise installations. Technically mixing valves in their 3-way format, these valves can nonetheless be used on either mixing or diverting applications as applied to the load, but correct piping should be observed on diverting applications, and only in closed systems. The water must always mix within the body even though it can divert through or around the load. Diverting into open systems such as tanks, sumps or cooling towers should be avoided with this series of valves. (Refer to the installation instruction sheets.)
Valve Actuators
Part no. Signal input Torque Linkage Type Stem Force Non-spring return (Fail last position) ME-5120 ME-5320 ME-5130 ME-5330 ME-5140 ME-5340 ME-5140L ME-5340L ME-5150 ME-5350 Spring return ME-5430 ME-5630 ME-5830 ME-5440 ME-5640 ME-5840 ME-5640 ME-5840 RBM-6060 2-position Tri-state 0-10 VDC 2-position Tri-State 0-10 VDC Tri-State 0-10 VDC 0-10 VDC 7Nm / 62in/lb 7Nm / 62in/lb 7Nm / 62in/lb 16Nm / 142in/lb 16Nm / 142in/lb 16Nm / 142in/lb 16Nm / 142in/lb 16Nm / 142in/lb 41Nm / 360in/lb AV-2414 AV-2414 AV-2414 AV-2417 AV-2417 AV-2417 AV-1524 AV-1524 AV-1524 I I I H H H K K K 85kg / 186lb 85kg / 186lb 85kg / 186lb 127kg / 280lb 127kg / 280lb 127kg / 280lb 95kg / 210lb 95kg / 210lb 245kg / 540lb Tri-state 0-10VDC Tri-state 0-10 VDC Tri-state 0-10 VDC Tri-state 0-10 VDC Tri-state 0-10 VDC 5Nm / 44in/lb 5Nm / 44in/lb 10Nm / 88in/lb 10Nm / 88in/lb 16Nm / 132in/lb 16Nm / 132in/lb 25Nm / 221in/lb 25Nm / 221in/lb 35Nm / 310in/lb 35Nm / 310in/lb AV-2414 AV-2414 AV-2414 AV-2414 AV-2417 AV-2417 AV-1524 AV-1524 AV-1524 AV-1524 I I I I H H K K K K 60kg / 132lb 60kg / 132lb 120kg / 264lb 120kg / 264lb 127kg / 280lb 127kg / 280lb 150kg / 331lb 150kg / 331lb 211kg / 465lb 211kg / 465lb
System Valves
DATA SHEET
VE411 & 431 SERIES ELECTRONIC SYSTEM CONTROL VALVES

SPECIFICATIONS - V-411 ANSI 250 PN25 BRONZE VALVES Sizes .......................................................25, 40 & 50mm. (1, 11/2 & 2) Cvs ................................................................... 6 & 11; 16 & 24; 35 & 45 Kvs ..........................................................5 & 9.2; 13.3 & 20, 29.2 & 37.5 Connections .....................................3 female NPT(amer) or BSPT(euro) Characteristics ................................................ eq% ends - linear center Turndown ratio ....................................................................................50:1 Close off ...................................................... ANSI Class III tight close off Pressure ratings ..........................................................................ANSI 250 ANSI 250 rating..............32 - 150F (0 - 66C)..........400 psig / 27.6 bar 175F (79C) .......................392 psig / 27.0 bar 200F (93C) .......................385 psig / 26.5 bar 250F (121C) .....................250 psig / 17.2 bar Pressure rating...................................................................................PN16 Standard rating to 16 bar or 240psi. Valve body is pressure tested to 24 bar or 360psi. Max fluid temp rating .........................................................130C (267F) Min fluid temp rating ................................................................0C (32F) Max steam pressure ..........................................................15psi /100kpa Packing .........................................................multiple U-cup EPDM rings Scrubbing rings ......................................................top and bottom Viton Stem....................burnished mirror finish 303 stainless steel PRDT 70 Seat top .....................................................integral bronze C84400 (uns) Seat bottom .........................................removable bronze C84400 (uns) Disc top & bottom...............................................................brass C93200 Stem guides ..................................................packing top & skirt bottom Lift ................................................................14mm exc Cvs 45 @17mm COMMERCIAL CONTROL FEATURES - The unique design of Spartan PDs valve line is the cost effective "one piece" heavy bronze valve body and its ability to be used as a 2-way or 3way valve by closing off the unused ports "A" or "B" (Never "AB"). "Suction-cup" effects will not occur and, because of the unique plug characterisation, good control will be had in both 2 and 3-way formats. (modified equal % to linear. See charts). These specially designed plug shapes incorporate the best features of equal percentage and linear characterization to provide a valve excellent for modulating well at low flow, while adapting to provide linear characterization in the later stages of valve opening. This feature, along with the variable ratio linkage kit, provides better mixing yet no mid-range starvation, (common with most 3way equal percentage valves). This allows for improved throttling action in 2-way duty. A unique trouble-shooting feature, a raised marker at the top of the bonnet, clearly defines port "A" after the insulation (lagging) has been installed. IFlow direction Globe valves or lift-and-lay valves are designed for flow in one specific direction only, that is, the liquid forcing the plug off the seat. In the stem down position the flow is from A to AB, in the stem up position the flow is from B to AB. If used with the flow going backwards with medium to high water flow and ps exceeding 5psig (0.3 bar), the water forces the plug to slam against its seat. Slamming and/or water hammer may then be apparent.
C CLOSED AA-AB C CLOSED A- A-AB
SPECIFICATIONS - V-431 ANSI 125 PN25 CAST IRON VALVES Sizes ....................................................................................................... 3 Cvs ........................................................................................65, 75 & 110 Kvs..................................................................................... 54.2; 62.4 & 95 Connections ............................... 3 flanges 125# ANSI or PN10, 16, 25 Plug characteristics ........................................ eq% ends - linear center Turndown ratio ....................................................................................50:1 Close off ......................................................ANSI Class III tight close off Pressure ratings ........................................................................ANSI 125 ANSI 125 psig static......32 - 150F (0 - 66C).........175 psig / 12.1 bar 175F (79C) .....................170 psig / 11.7 bar 200F (93C) .....................165 psig / 11.4 bar 250F (121C) .....................125 psig / 8.6 bar Pressure rating...................................................................................PN16 Standard rating to 16 bar or 240psi. Valve body is pressure tested to 24 bar or 360psi. Max fluid temp rating .........................................................130C (267F) Min fluid temp rating ................................................................0C (32F) Max steam pressure ..........................................................15psi /100kpa Packing .........................................................multiple U-cup EPDM rings Scrubbing rings ......................................................top and bottom Viton Stem....................burnished mirror finish 303 stainless steel PRDT 70 Seat top ..........................................................................integral cast iron Seat bottom ....................................................................integral cast iron Disc top & bottom ............................................................bronze C93200 Stem guides ................................................. packing top & skirt bottom Lift ......................................65 Cv 14mm; 75 Cv 17mm: 110 Cv 22mm
OPEN A-AB
Replaceable packing cartridge AV400
OPEN A-AB
IN (A)
OUT (AB)
I IN (A)
OUT (AB)
IN (B)
IN (B)
System Valves V411 V431 29 January 2009
Thermostats
DATA SHEET
TE110 On / Off LCD Electronic Thermostat 24Vac

Description
Two position on / off, electronic room thermostat with digital display and key set point input with two outputs for either heating or cooling. Suitable for controlling heating or cooling valves, fans or other two position devices to maintain an accurate room temperature. Selectable C & F scale by jumper J1. Heating / cooling mode is selectable by a Jumper J2 on the PCB. Auto changeover can be achieved by connecting an SPDT strap-on thermostat to the heating / cooling output to create an automatic summer winter change over. Optional external 10K NTC temperature sensor can be connected to terminals T1 and T2. The internal or external temperature sensor can be selected via Jumper J3.
Specifications
Operating voltage: Power consumption: Control output: Switching: Sensing Element: Connection terminals: Digital Display: 24Vac, 50/60Hz, +/- 20% Maximum 3Va Quality, affordable electronic 24Vac, 5Amp room thermostat with digital 1 F (0.5 C) display from Spartan NTC Thermistor Use solid wire 22 AWG to 14 AWG Temperature in C or F, set point, heating or cooling output Set point range: 40-95F in 1F resolution 5-35C in 0.5C resolution Operating temperature: 32-122 F or 0-50 C, < 95% RH Housing cover/base color: Cover white, base grey Wall mounting plate: Color white, mounting holes for European and North American standards, fits 2 x 4 electric box Optional: External 10K NTC type 3 thermistor Shipping weight: 0.5Lbs (0.225 Kg) Agency approval: Conforms to CE/ROHS requirements Class 2 as per UL/CSA
Changing the Set Point To change set point use the increase or decrease keys. LCD display will illuminate after pressing hand key. When the thermostat is in heating mode a thermometer will appear in the display. It will flash when there is a demand for heat.
Wiring Diagram
Temperature Sensor
T1 T2
Heating
2 R
24V Line
When the thermostat is in cooling mode a snow flake will appear in the display. It will flash when there is a demand for cooling. On Power Failure The set-point will return to the factory default setting 75F/24C.
24V Common
ON DEMAND Jumper J2 Set to H = Heat Mode C = Cooling Mode
C 1
Cooling
d
3.520 [89mm]
Output 1 24 Vac 0 Vac
Output 2 0 Vac 24 Vac
Cover Removal
TE110 Cover Removal Instructions To remove the cover simply remove the screws at the bottom of the unit with a screwdriver (1 and 2). The cover then is removed by pulling it out and then up (3 and 4). Disclaimer: The installation and service should be performed by trained personnel. To avoid electric shock ensure the electrical source is switched off. Installation: Thermostats can be installed on a standard 20-20 2X4 electric box, or directly on the flat wall surface, and away from the heat source. Do not expose to water.
Mounting Dimensions
1.376 [35mm] 4.178 [106mm] 1.200 [30mm]
1.010 [26mm]
1.188 [30mm]
TE110Thermostat 22 December 2008
Thermostats
DATA SHEET
TE112 Two Stage On / Off LCD Electronic Thermostat 24Vac

Description
The TE112 is a two position on / off, electronic room thermostat with digital display and set point. Two stage SPDT outputs are suitable for heating or cooling control of valves, fans or other two position devices to maintain an accurate room temperature. Auto changeover can be achieved by connecting an SPDT strap-on thermostat to the heating / cooling output to create an automatic summer winter change over. Optional external 10K NTC temperature sensor can be connected to terminals T1 and T2. S1 jumper - selectable C and F scale S2 jumper - internal or external temperature sensor S3 jumper - deadband,Yes or No
JUMPER CONFIGURATION Temp. Scale Sensor Int. S1 C S2 F Ext.
Dead Band Yes 1C (2F) S4 No 2C (4F)
S4 jumper - selectable deadband S5 jumper - selectable span
S3
S5
Span 1C (2F) 2C (4F)
Quality, affordable electronic room thermostat with digital display from Spartan
Specifications
Operating voltage: Control output: Switching: Sensing Element: Connection terminals: Digital Display: 24Vac, 50/60Hz, +/- 20%, maximum 3Va 24Vac, 5Amp 1 F (0.5 C) NTC Thermistor Use solid wire 22 AWG to 14 AWG Temperature in C or F, set point, heating or cooling output Set point range: 40-95F in 1F resolution , 5-35C in 0.5C resolution Operating temperature: 32-122 F or 0-50 C, < 95% RH Housing cover/base color: Cover white, base grey Wall mounting plate: Color white, mounting holes for European and North American standards, fits 2 x 4 electric box Optional: External 10K NTC type 3 thermistor Shipping weight: 0.5Lbs (0.225 Kg) Agency approval: Conforms to CE/ROHS requirements Class 2 as per UL/CSA
Changing the Set Point To change set point use the increase or decrease keys. LCD display will illuminate after pressing hand key. When the thermostat has a demand for heating, a thermometer will appear in the display.
Wiring Diagram
Temperature Sensor
T1 T2
24Vac power is on terminal 1 when there is a demand for heating and on terminal 3 when there is a demand for cooling Cooling N/C
When the thermostat has a demand for cooling a snow flake will appear in the display. On Power Failure After power is restored, the setpoint will return to the last setting.
Stage 2 Cooling Stage 1 Heating
N/C N/O N/C N/O
3 4
24V Line 24V Common
C R
1 2
Heating N/C
Cover Removal
Illustration shows normally closed valves (N/C). For normally open valves (N/O), or combinations of both, contact Spartan PD.
Mounting Dimensions
3.520 [89mm]
TE112 Cover Removal Instructions To remove the cover simply remove the screws at the bottom of the unit with a screwdriver (1 and 2). The cover then is removed by pulling it out and then up (3 and 4).
Disclaimer: The installation and service should be performed by trained personnel. To avoid electric shock ensure the electrical source is switched off. Installation: Thermostats can be installed on a standard 20-20 2X4 electric box, or directly on the flat wall surface, and away from the heat source. Do not expose to water.
1.376 [35mm] 4.178 [106mm] 1.200 [30mm]
1.010 [26mm]
1.188 [30mm]
TE112Thermostat 2 February 2009
Thermostats
DATA SHEET
TE151 Modulating 0-10Vdc, LCD Electronic Thermostat with single speed fan switch 24Vac
Description
Modulating proportional plus integral (P+I) 0-10 Vdc electronic room thermostat with digital display and set point adjustment. It is suitable for controlling a single speed fan as well as controlling a single heating or cooling modulating valve to maintain the room temperature. An On/ Auto Switch on the thermostat cover will switch the fan On. In Auto position, it will cycle the fan from the room temperature if reaching the set point, this cycle is for maximum energy saving. Heating/Off/Cooling switch on the thermostat cover will select heating or cooling mode. Jumper J2 set to U.S. or E..U. setting will reverse the 0-10Vdc signal. Selectable between C and F scales by jumper on PCB.
Specifications
Operating voltage: Power consumption: Control output: Fan Switch: Sensing Element: Connection terminals: Digital Display: Set point range: Operating temperature: Housing cover/base color: Wall mounting plate: 24Vac, 50/60Hz, +/- 20% Maximum 3Va 0-10Vdc, 30mA 1A, 24Vac NTC Thermistor Use solid wire 22 AWG to 14 AWG Temperature in C or F, set point, heating or cooling output 40-95F in 1F resolution 5-35C in 0.5C resolution 32-122 F or 0-50 C, < 95% RH Cover white, base grey Color white, mounting holes for European and North American standards, fits 2 x 4 electric box 0.5Lbs (0.225 Kg) Heat Conforms to CE requirements Off Class 2 as per UL/CSA Cool
Changing the Set Point To change set point use the increase or decrease keys. LCD display will illuminate after pressing hand key. When the thermostat is in heating mode a thermometer will appear in the display. It will flash when there is a demand for heat.
Shipping weight: Agency approval:
Wiring Diagram
1
0-10VDC Red Black White
When the thermostat is in cooling mode a snow flake will appear in the display. It will flash when there is a demand for cooling. On Power Failure The set-point will return to the factory default setting 75F/24C.
Fan Relay
24VAC
L N
Neutral or Ground Line
Thermostat Terminal
Fan Switch On Auto
Mounting Dimensions
3.520 [89mm]
Cover Removal
TE120 Cover Removal Instructions To remove the cover simply remove the screws at the bottom of the unit with a screwdriver (1 and 2). The cover then is removed by pulling it out and then up (3 and 4).
1.376 [35mm]
Disclaimer: The installation and service should be performed by trained personnel. To avoid electric shock ensure the electrical source is switched off. Installation: Thermostats can be installed on a standard 20-20 2X4 electric box, or directly on the flat wall surface, and away from the heat source. Do not expose to water.
4.178 [106mm] 1.200 [30mm]
1.010 [26mm]
1.188 [30mm]
TE151Thermostat 2 May 2008
Thermostats
DATA SHEET
TE153 Modulating 0-10 Vdc, LCD Electronic Thermostat with 3 Speed Fan Switch 24 Vac
Description
Modulating proportional plus integral (P+I) 0-10 Vdc electronic room thermostat with digital display and set point adjustment. It is suitable for controlling a 3 speed fan with Low/Medium/High switch as well as controlling a single heating or cooling modulating valve to accurately maintain the room temperature with its P+I control loop. An On/Off/Auto Switch on the thermostat cover will switch the fan On or Off manually. In the Auto position the fan will automatically switch off when reaching the room temperature set point This setting is for maximum energy saving. External summer/winter changeover thermostat or wire jumper can be connected to the room thermostat terminals 3 & 4 to select heating or cooling mode. Jumper J2 set to U.S. or E..U. setting will reverse the 0-10Vdc signal. Selectable between C and F scales by jumper J1 on PCB.
Specifications
Operating Voltage: Power Consumption: Control Output: Fan Switch: Sensing Element: Connection Terminals: Digital Display: 24Vac, 50/60Hz, +/- 20% Maximum 3Va 0-10VDC, 5mA 1A 24Vac NTC Thermistor Use solid wire 22 AWG to 14 AWG Temperature in C or F, set point, heating or cooling output Set Point Range: 40-95F in 1F resolution 5-35C in 0.5C resolution Operating Temperature: 32-122 F or 0-50 C, < 95% RH Housing Cover/base Color: Cover white, base grey Wall Mounting Plate: Color white, mounting holes for European and North American standards, fits 2 x 4 electric box Shipping Weight: 0.5Lbs (0.225 Kg) Agency Approval: Conforms to CE/ROHS requirements Class 2 as per UL/CSA Optional Remote Sensor: 10KNTC3 - add R to part number
Changing the Set Point To change set point use the increase or decrease keys. LCD display will illuminate after pressing hand key. High Med Low When the thermostat is in heating mode a thermometer will appear in the display. It will flash when there is a demand for heat.
Wiring Diagram
0-10VDC Black Red White
TE90
* Add jumper to select heating mode if TE90 not used.
4 3
When the thermostat is in cooling mode a snow flake will appear in the display. It will flash when there is a demand for cooling. Selectable by jumper on terminal 3 and 4
Lo Med Hi
3 speed Fan Relay Fan
24VAC
On Off Auto
On Power Failure The set-point will return to the factory default setting 75F/24C.
Neutral or Ground Line 110V
Cover Removal
TE153 Cover Removal Instructions To remove the cover simply remove the screws at the bottom of the unit with a screwdriver (1 and 2). The cover then is removed by pulling it out and then up (3 and 4). Disclaimer: The installation and service should be performed by trained personnel. To avoid electric shock ensure the electrical source is switched off. Installation: Thermostats can be installed on a standard 20-20 2X4 electric box, or directly on the flat wall surface, and away from the heat source. Do not expose to water.
Thermostat Terminal
Mounting Dimensions
3.520 [89mm]
1.376 [35mm] 4.178 [106mm] 1.200 [30mm]
1.010 [26mm]
1.188 [30mm]
TE153Thermostat 19 January 2009
Printed in Canada
Thermostats
DATA SHEET
TE150 Modulating 0/2-10 Vdc, Dual Output LCD Electronic Room Thermostat 24 Vac
Description
Dual output modulating proportional plus integral (P+I) 0/2-10 Vdc electronic room thermostat with digital display and set point adjustment. It is suitable for controlling one heating and one cooling, two heating, or two cooling modulating valves to accurately maintain the room temperature with its P+I control loop. External summer/winter changeover thermostat or a wire jumper can be connected to the room thermostat terminals 2 & 3 to select heating or cooling mode. Economy mode can be implemented by grounding terminal number 4 - hand icon will be displayed. Pressing the hand button for 2 seconds will override to regular mode for a 2 hour period.
Specifications
Operating voltage: Power consumption: Control output: Sensing Element: Optional Remote Sensor:
Quality, affordable electronic
Connection terminals: Digital Display: Full Set point range: Limited Set point range: Operating temperature: Housing cover/base color: Wall mounting plate:
Shipping weight: Agency approval:
24Vac, 50/60Hz, +/- 20% room thermostat with digital display from Spartan Maximum 3Va 0/2-10VDC, 5mA 10K NTC Thermistor internal or external Use 10K Type 3 NTC thermistor in terminals 7 & 8. Contact Spartan for many other types of sensors. Use solid wire 22 AWG to 14 AWG Temperature and set point in C or F, heating, cooling or economy mode symbols DIP switches 40-95F in 1F; 5-35C in 0.5C resolution Internal DIP switches selects the following features 65-75F in 1F; 18-24C in 0.5C resolution Pole ON OFF 32-122 F or 0-50 C, < 95% RH 1 F Scale C Scale Cover white, base grey 2 EU for RA actuator US for DA actuator 3 External sensor Internal sensor Color white, mounting holes for European 4 2-10Vdc 0-10Vdc and North American standards, fits 2 x 4 5 Full set-point range Limited set-point range electric box 6 Dual output A01, A02 Single output A01 0.5Lbs (0.225 Kg) 7 One heating, one cooling output Two heating, two cooling outputs Conforms to CE/ROHS requirements N.B. If only single output (A01) is used, DIP switch 6 and 7 must be in off position. Class 2 as per UL/CSA
Changing the Set Point To change set point use the increase or decrease keys. LCD display will illuminate after pressing hand key.
Wiring Diagram
24Vac Com
or ground
24Vac
C R 2 3 7 8
3.520 [89mm]
Heat/Cool selection
Add jumper for cooling mode
4 5 6 9
Input
Occupancy Sensor Actuator A01 0/2-10V
When the thermostat is in heating mode a thermometer will appear in the display. It will flash when there is a demand for heat.
24Vac 24Vac Com or ground
Ext. Sensor
Actuator A02 0/2-10V Input
When the thermostat is in cooling mode a snow flake will appear in the display. It will flash when there is a demand for cooling. Selectable by jumper on terminal 2 and 3 On Power Failure The set-point will remain in the memory. Disclaimer: The installation and service should be performed by trained personnel. To avoid electric shock ensure the electrical source is switched off. Installation: Thermostats can be installed on a standard 20-20 2X4 electric box, or directly on the flat wall surface, and away from the heat source. Do not expose to water.
TE150Thermostat 19 January 2010
24Vac 24Vac Com or ground
Mounting Dimensions
Economy mode override button
1.376 [35mm] 4.178 [106mm] 1.200 [30mm]
Cover Removal
TE150 Cover Removal Instructions To remove the cover simply remove the screws at the bottom of the unit with a screwdriver (1 and 2). The cover then is removed by pulling it out and then up.
1.010 [26mm]
1.188 [30mm]
Printed in Canada
Wireless Zone Valve Actuators
DATA SHEET
ME8200 Non Spring Return FLP Modulating Wireless RF433MHz Actuator

The ME8200 wireless actuator utilizes a brushless, reversible synchronous A/C motor with constant torque and constant speed for accurate positioning over the full span of the valve travel with a unique, patented, non spring return movement (having five robust moving parts) and has a life expectancy in excess of five hundred thousand cycles.
Spartans innovative Wireless Actuator is based on a RF433.92MHz signal

Supply voltage: 24Vac, 60/50Hz, +/- 10%, 45mA, 1Va Control signal: Wireless RF433.92MHz (USA/Europe Standard) from Spartan TE8200/TE8300 room thermostat. Designed for unlicensed operation under FCC part 15. Ambient Temperature: 40F-120F (5C-50C) non condensing Cover: Clear-blue K resin or yellow ABS Output Force: 48Lbs (214N) Travel: 0.177 (4.5mm) Diagnostic LEDs: Red LED power status is on Green LED signal is received Enclosure: IP51 Mounting: M30 x 1.5 Approval: Meets CE and ROHS requirements, low voltage class II, 24Vac device as per UL & CSA Address Setting: The nine dip switches under the actuators cover are to select the address that will match the address setting on the thermostat. The actuator will ignore the message which is sent by the transmitter with a different address setting. Possibility of 512 address combinations. The last dip switch, no 10, will set the actuator into direct acting or reverse acting mode for heating or cooling applications.
ME8200 Features
Interchangeable with all Spartan valve bodies
Removable attenna can be extended by cable kit
Diagnostic LEDs Green LED - Signal is received Red LED - Power on
512 address setting combinations DIP switch nos 1-9
Wiring 24VAC W - White - Common B - Black - Line

ON
Direct Acting or Reverse Acting Mode DIP switch no 10
Circuit Isolating Triacs
Force sensing lever for downward travel
Wiring Diagram
ME-8200
24 VAC
com
Cable Kit
26 (66cms) Optional Cable Kit for situations where signal strength may be limited. This kit moves the antenna out from the actuator, or out of metal cabinets, to improve the signal range.
Spartan Peripheral Devices ME8200 wireless syncube actuator can be installed on a multitude of Spartan 2 way and 3 way zone control valve bodies with different type of connections, female x female threads in 1/2, 3/4 and 1 sizes, single male union in 1/2 and 3/4 sizes and direct solder in 1/2 and 3/4 sizes. The commercial type valve bodies are designed for use on hot or chilled water up to 50% glycol mix or low pressure steam. The valve bodies all utilize low zinc anti-dezincification bronze casting and are coupled with long life replaceable and interchangeable internals. Choose from V240,V241,V243,V245,V246-12F, V243-12I,V320,V321,V323,V325,V420 series of zone valve bodies, see data sheet Zone Valve Bodies Data Sheet.
Printed in Canada
W H I T E
B L A C K
Wireless Actuators 8200 17 September 2009
MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
Differential Pressure Switch AFS-222 Flow Switches Dwyer DP Switches-air Dwyer Magnehelic Gauges Dwyer Photohelic Gauges Columbus Electric-line stats Thermostat Guards Theben Electronic Timers Pneumatic Tubing Solenoid Valves Accessories Solid State Relays & S.C.RS Refrigerated Air Dryers & Air Compressors Neptronics-modulating T-stats, static pressure controllers Thermolec-duct heaters Pneumatic Brass Fittings by Parker Uni-Gard-thermostat guards DRAINVIEW - Autodrains for compressors CERCO - D.D.C wire & cable MISCELLANEOUS - 36 MISCELLANEOUS - 37 to 39 MISCELLANEOUS - 40 MISC - 41 MISC - 42 MISCELLANEOUS - 1 MISCELLANEOUS - 2, 3 MISCELLANEOUS - 4 MISCELLANEOUS - 5, 6 MISCELLANEOUS - 7, 8 MISCELLANEOUS - 9 MISCELLANEOUS - 10 to 15 MISCELLANEOUS - 16, 17 MISCELLANEOUS - 18 MISCELLANEOUS - 19 MISCELLANEOUS - 20, 21 MISCELLANEOUS - 22 MISCELLANEOUS - 23 to 25 MISCELLANEOUS - 26 to 35
Cleveland Controls
Division of UniControl Inc.
Model AFS222
AIR PRESSURE SENSING SWITCH WITH ADJUSTABLE SET POINT RANGE

APPLICATION
Model AFS-222 Air Pressure Sensing Switch is a general purpose proving switch designed for HVAC and Energy Management applications. It may be used to sense positive, negative, or differential air pressure.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION & OPERATION

The plated housing contains a diaphragm, a calibration spring and a snap-acting SPDT switch.The sample connections located on each side of the diaphragm accept " OD metallic tubing via the integral compression ferrule and nut. An enclosure cover guards against accidental contact with the live switch terminal screws and the set point adjusting screw. The enclosure cover will accept a " conduit connection.
MOUNTING (SEE FIGURE 1)

Select a mounting location which is free from vibration. The AFS-222 must be mounted with the diaphragm in any vertical plane in order to obtain the lowest specied operating set point. Avoid mounting with the sample line connections in the "up" position. Surface mount via the two 3/16" diameter holes in the integral mounting bracket. The mounting holes are 3-7/8" apart. The AFS-222 is designed to accept rm-wall sample lines of " OD tubing by means of (Fig. 1)
AIR SAMPLING CONNECTION (SEE FIGURE 2)

ferrule and nut compression connections. For sample lines of up to 10 feet, " OD tubing is acceptable. For lines up to 20 feet, use " ID tubing. For lines up to 60 feet, use " ID tubing. A " OD adapter, suitable for slip-on exible tubing is available: order part number 18311. Locate the sampling probe a minimum of 1.5 duct diameters downstream from the air source. Install the sampling probe as close to the center of the airstream as possible. Refer to Figure 2 to identify the high pressure inlet (H) and the low pressure inlet (L). Select one of the ve application options listed below, and connect the sample lines as recommended. POSITIVE PRESSURE ONLY: Connect the sample line to inlet H; inlet L remains open to the atmosphere. NEGATIVE PRESSURE ONLY: Connect the sample line to inlet L; inlet H remains open to the atmosphere. TWO NEGATIVE SAMPLES: Connect the higher negative sample to inlet L. Connect the lower negative sample to inlet H. TWO POSITIVE SAMPLES: Connect the higher positive sample to inlet H. Connect the lower positive sample to inlet L. ONE POSITIVE AND ONE NEGATIVE SAMPLE: Connect the positive sample to inlet H. Connect the negative sample to inlet L.
DIVISION OF UNICONTROL INC. 1111 Brookpark Rd Cleveland OH 44109
Cleveland Controls
Tel: 216-398-0330 Fax: 216-398-8558 Email:saleshvac@unicontrolinc.com Web page: http://www.clevelandcontrols.com
Are you reading a FAX or a COPY of this bulletin? DOWNLOAD the full-color PDF version of this and other literature at our website!
Bulletin AFS-222.07
www.prokontrol.com
MISCELLANEOUS -
FLOW SWITCHES Flow Switches Liquid

Series FS4-3
General Purpose Liquid Flow Switches
(for specified models)
Universal design serves the widest variety of applications For starting or stopping electrically operated equipment such as signal lights, alarms, motors, automatic burners, metering devices and others Replacement for common flow switches from Johnson/Penn, Potter/Taco, Watts, Hydrolevel and other manufacturers 1" NPT Two electrical knock-outs allows connection from either end Sensitivity adjusting screw makes flow adjustment easy Single pole, double throw snap switch Hardened stainless steel bearings minimize friction Sealed Monel bellows Four stainless steel paddles included 1", 2", 3" & 6" (25, 50, 80, & 150mm) Optional features Time delay (5 or 20 seconds) Two SPDT switches to make or break two separate circuits Reinforced paddles Materials of construction suitable for corrosive liquids Fire sprinkler service - Model FS4-3F only BSPT threads Minimum temperature (fluid or ambient) 32F (0C) Maximum temperature 300F (149C) Maximum pressure 160 psi (11.3 kg/cm2)
FLOW SWITCHES
F M
Series FS4-3
C D E
FLOW
Electrical Ratings
Voltage 120 VAC 240 VAC Motor Switch Rating (Amperes) Full Load Locked Rotor 7.4 3.7 44.4 22.2 Pilot Duty 125 VA at 120 or 240 VAC 50 or 60 cycles
Dimensions, in. (mm)

A 3 (76) H 11116 (43) 110
1
B 1 2 (38) J 1716 (37)

7
D 2 32 (56) K 118 (29) L 3716 (87)

7 7
E 8 16 (211)
15
F 2 16 (75) M 2116 (52)

3
G 3 8 (86) N NPT 1
8 (22)
www.prokontrol.com
MISCELLANEOUS -
FLOW SWITCHES Flow Switches Liquid

Series FS5
General Purpose Liquid Flow Switches
(for specified models)
For general purpose applications requiring low flow rate sensitivity In-line configuration eliminates need for a pipe tee Sizes available 3 4" NPT 1" NPT Materials of construction Brass, carbon & EPDM elastomer (for water); Models FS5 & FS5-D Stainless steel, carbon & Buna N (for water or water and petroleum base compounds) Models FS5-S & FS5-DS Single pole, double throw snap switch Sensitivity adjusting screw makes flow adjustment easy Optional feature BSPT threads Minimum temperature (fluid or ambient) 32F (0C) Maximum temperature 225F (107C) Stainless Steel models 250F (121C) Brass Maximum operating pressure 150 psi (10.5 kg/cm2)
E F G
Series FS5
K L
Electrical Ratings
Voltage 120 VAC 240 VAC Motor Switch Rating (Amperes) Full Load Locked Rotor 7.4 3.7 44.4 22.2 Pilot Duty 125 VA at 120 or 240 VAC 50 or 60 cycles
Dimensions, in. (mm)

A 3 16 (87) E 5 16 (129) J Weight lbs. (kg)
2.5 (1.1) 2.5 (1.1) 2.5 (1.1) 2.5 (1.1) 2.5 2.5 2.3 2.5 2.5 2.5 (1.1) (1.1) (1.0) (1.1) (1.1) (1.1)
1 1 7 9
B 1 16 (40) F 3 4 (83) K
7 7 5
C 1 16 (33) G
3
D 3 16 (56) H
FLOW SWITCHES
8 (22)
L
1 32 (40.5) M 1 16 (43)
11
19
Model Number
FS5-34
Part Number
114760
3 16 (81)
8 (22)
1 8 (35)
Description
General purpose flow switch 3 " 4 NPT FS5-D-34 114763 FS5-34 w/2 SPDT switches FS5-J-34 114765 FS5-34 w/BSPT connections FS5-1 114780 General purpose flow switch 1" NPT FS5-D-1 114783 FS5-1 w/2 SPDT switches FS5-J-1 114785 FS5-1 w/BSPT connections FS5-S-1 114795 FS5-1 w/SS body FS5-DS-1 114793 FS5-1 w/SS body, 2 SPDT switches FS5-J-34-E 114766 FS5-J-34 - CE conformance rated FS5-J-1-E 114787 FS5-J-1 - CE conformance rated See page 157 for CE Conformance information
Flow Rates
Pipe Size NPT in.
3
Settings
Factory or Minimum Maximum
Mode of Operation Flow No Flow gpm (lpm) gpm (lpm)

1.5 (5.7) 15 (56.8) 1.1 (4.2) 10 (37.9)
Max. Flow Rate gpm (lpm) w/o Paddle Damage
or 1
16.62 (62.9) 27 (102.2)
Values are 10%
NOTE: DO NOT USE LIQUID FLOW SWITCHES ON SYSTEMS WITH FLOW GREATER THAN 10 FEET (3M) PER SECOND.
www.prokontrol.com
MISCELLANEOUS -
123
Pressure
Differential Pressure Switches For Air Filter Service UL & CSA Listed, FM Approved
Three Basic Models Made Exclusively For Very Low Differential Pressure Ranges
Model 1910 Our newest, smallest, lowest cost precision pressure switch (312" dia.). It out performs many larger, more expensive units. Z bracket mounting is simple and all connections are conveniently located on one side. Set point adjustment screw is protected inside the conduit enclosure. STOCKED MODELS
Model No. 1910-00 1910-0 1910-1 1910-5 Range, in. w.c. .07.15 .15.55 .41.6 1.45.5
Model 1823 Our most popular compact, low cost, pressure switch (4" dia.), for general industrial service. Performance has been field proven in many thousands of successful installations. It features high repetitive accuracy, easy set point adjustment, and convenient spud mounting. STOCKED MODELS
Model No. 1823-00 1823-0 1823-1 1823-2 1823-5 Range, in. w.c. .07.22 .15.5 .31 .52 1.55
Model 1638 This quality switch (734" dia.) provides power and precision for the most demanding switching applications including extremely low ranges. Repetitive accuracy and reliability are unsurpassed. Set point is visually adjustable for maximum convenience. STOCKED MODELS
Model No. 1638-0 1638-1 1638-2 1638-5 Range, in. w.c. .05-.25 .2-1 1-3 2-6
SPECIFICATIONS ALL MODELS

Electrical Rating: 15 amp 120-480V AC, 18 HP @ 125V AC, 14 HP @ 250V AC Wiring Connections: (3) Screw type common, normally open, normally closed Switch: Single-pole-double-throw snap type Maximum Pressure Surge: Model 1910, 10 PSI; Models 1823, 1638, 25 PSI Pressure Connections: (2) 18" NPT
OPTIONAL ACCESSORY KITS FOR AIR FILTER SWITCHES
No. A-602 Air Filter Kit. Accessory package for using switch without a gage includes two pressure tips with integral compression fittings, two 5 ft. Lengths of 14" aluminum tubing and two 18" NPT to 14" tubing compression fittings.
No. A-603 T Kit. Accessory package for using pressure switch in conjunction with an air filter kit equipped Magnehelic or Series 250 AF gages. Includes two 18" NPT to 14" tubing compression fittings and two compression tees.
No. A-604 T Kit. Accessory package for using pressure switch in conjunction with Mark II gages includes two plastic tubing connector tees and two plastic tubing to 18" NPT adapters.
Dwyer Instruments, Inc. P.O. Box 373/Michigan City, Indiana 46361/Phone 219 879-8000/Fax 219 872-9057 U.K. Phone (01494)-461707 Australia Phone (02) 9756-5355
www.prokontrol.com
MISCELLANEOUS -
42
Pressure
Series 2000
Magnehelic Differential Pressure Gages

Indicate Positive, Negative or Differential, Accurate within 2%
4-1/8 [104.78] BOLT CIRCLE FOR PANEL MOUNTING 120 APART 1/8 NPT HIGH PRESSURE 1/2 [12.70] 1/8 NPT HIGH PRESSURE 1/8 NPT LOW PRESSURE
1-1/4 1-3/4 [31.75] [44.45]
1/8 LOW PRESSURE 11/16 [17.46] 7/16 [11.11] 1-11/16 [42.86] 1/2 [12.70] 4-3/4 [120.65]
Patent Nos. 4,030,365 5,012,678 Standard Magnehelic Pressure Gage has a large, easy-to-read 4" dial.
Dimensions, Standard Series 2000 Magnehelic Pressure Gages. (Slightly different on medium and high pressure models) SPECIFICATIONS Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases. (Natural Gas option available.) Wetted Materials: Consult factory. Housing: Die cast aluminum case and bezel, with acrylic cover. Exterior finish is coated gray to withstand 168 hour salt spray corrosion test. Accuracy: 2% of full scale (3% on - 0, -100PA, -125PA, 10MM and 4% on - 00, -60PA, -6MM ranges), throughout range at 70F (21.1C). Pressure Limits: -20 Hg. to 15 psig. (-0.677 bar to 1.034 bar); MP option: 35 psig (2.41 bar), HP option: 80 psig (5.52 bar). Overpressure: Relief plug opens at approximately 25 psig (1.72 kPa), standard gages only. Temperature Limits: 20 to 140F.* (-6.67 to 60C). Size: 4 (101.6 mm) Diameter dial face. Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position. Consult factory for other position orientations. Process Connections: 1/8 female NPT duplicate high and low pressure taps - one pair side and one pair back. Weight: 1 lb 2 oz (510 g), MP & HP 2 lb 2 oz (963 g). Standard Accessories: Two 1/8 NPT plugs for duplicate pressure taps, two 1/8 pipe thread to rubber tubing adapters and three flush mounting adapters with screws. (Mounting and snap ring retainer substituted for 3 adapters in MP & HP gage accessories.)
*Low temperature models available as special option. For applications with high cycle rate within gage total pressure rating, next higher rating is recommended. See Medium and High pressure options at lower left.
Select the Dwyer Magnehelic gage for high accuracy guaranteed within 2% of full scale and for the wide choice of 81 models available to suit your needs precisely. Using Dwyer's simple, frictionless Magnehelic movement, it quickly indicates low air or non-corrosive gas pressures either positive, negative (vacuum) or differential. The design resists shock, vibration and over-pressures. No manometer fluid to evaporate, freeze or cause toxic or leveling problems. It's inexpensive, too. The Magnehelic is the industry standard to measure fan and blower pressures, filter resistance, air velocity, furnace draft, pressure drop across orifice plates, liquid levels with bubbler systems and pressures in fluid amplifier or fluidic systems. It also checks gas-air ratio controls and automatic valves, and monitors blood and respiratory pressures in medical care equipment.
MOUNTING. A single case size is used for most models of Magnehelic gages. They can be flush or surface mounted Flush ...Surface...or Pipe Mounted with standard hardware supplied. With the optional A-610 Pipe Mounting Kit they may be conveniently installed on horizontal or vertical 114 2 pipe. Although calibrated for vertical position, many ranges above 1 may be used at any angle by simply re-zeroing. However, for maximum accuracy, they must be calibrated in the same position in which they are used. These characteristics make Magnehelic gages ideal for both stationary and portable applications. A 4916 hole is required for flush panel mounting. Complete mounting and connection fittings plus instructions are furnished with each instrument. VENT VALVES
In applications where pressure is continuous and the Magnehelic gage is connected by metal or plastic tubing which cannot be easily removed, we suggest using Dwyer A-310A vent valves to connect gage. Pressure can then be removed to check or re-zero the gage.
OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Transparent Overlays
Furnished in red, green or yellow to highlight and emphasize critical pressures.
Adjustable Signal Flag

Integral with plastic gage cover. Available for most models except those with medium or high pressure construction. Can be ordered with gage or separate.
LED Setpoint Indicator

Bright red LED on right of scale shows when setpoint is reached. Field adjustable from gage face, unit operates on 12-24 VDC. Requires MP or HP style cover and bezel.
Portable Units
Combine carrying case with any Magnehelic gage of standard range, except high pressure connection. Includes 9 ft. (2.7 m) of 316 I.D. rubber tubing, standhang bracket and terminal tube with holder. A-432, Portable Kit
HIGH AND MEDIUM PRESSURE MODELS

Installation is similar to standard gages except that a 41316 hole is needed for flush mounting. The medium pressure construction is rated for internal pressures up to 35 psig and the high pressure up to 80 psig. Available for all models. Because of larger case, the medium pressure and high pressure models will not fit in a portable case size. Installation of the A-321 safety relief valve on standard Magnehelic gages often provides adequate protection against infrequent overpressure.
Air Filter Gage Accessory Package

Adapts any standard Magnehelic for use as an air filter gage. Includes aluminum surface mounting bracket with screws, two 5 ft. (1.5 m) lengths of 14 aluminum tubing two static pressure tips and two molded plastic vent valves, integral compression fittings on both tips and valves. A-605, Air Filter Kit
www.prokontrol.com
Dwyer Instruments, Inc./P.O. Box 373/Michigan City, IN 46361/Phone 219 879-8000/Fax 219 872-9057 U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 Australia Phone 61 2 4272-2055
MISCELLANEOUS -
ET & EPET Line Voltage Thermostats
ET Thermostats Feature:
Single & Double Pole Designs Fahrenheit & Celsius Temperature Scale Anticipated Models Shadow White Color Optional Wire Leads With or Without Thermometer DP Models Incorporate Positive Off UL Listed / CSA Certified
ET5STS
CATALOG # AET5DWS AET5SWS EPETD8D EPETD8S ET5DS ET5D4S ET5DTS ET5DWS ET5MS ET5SS ET5S4S ET5SRS ET5SRTS ET5STS ET5SWS ETD5MS ETD5MTS ETD5SS ETD5STS PCN # 05387202 05387302 05380702 05381002 05388802 05387402 05387502 05387602 05387702 05387802 05387902 05388002 05388902 05388102 05388202 05388302 05388402 05388502 05388602 DESCRIPTION DP Line Voltage Stat W/Anticipator with Leads SP Line Voltage Stat W/Anticipator with Leads DPDT Hazardous Location Thermostat SPDT Hazardous Location Thermostat Double Pole Heat Only Double Pole with 35-75oF Temp Range DP Heat Only with Thermometer DP Heat Only with Leads Two Stage Heat Only Thermostat SP Heat Only SP Heat Only W/35-75oF Temperature Range SP Cool Only SP Cool Only with Thermometer SP Heat Only with Thermometer SP Heat Only with Leads Double Throw 2 Stage Heat 1 Stage Cool Two Stage Heat / 1 Stage Cool with Thermometer SPDT Heat or Cool SPDT Heat or Cool W/Thermometer STD. LT VOLTAGE MAX-AMP Stock-3W 120-277V 22AMPS Stock-3W 120-277V 22AMPS Stock-3W 120-277V 22AMPS Stock-3W 120-277V 22AMPS Stock-3W 120-277V 22AMPS Stock-3W 120-277V 22AMPS Stock-3W 120-277V 22AMPS Stock-3W 120-277V 22AMPS Stock-3W 120-277V 22AMPS Stock-3W 120-277V 22AMPS Stock-3W 120-277V 22AMPS Stock-3W 120-277V 22AMPS Stock-3W 120-277V 22AMPS Stock-3W 120-277V 22AMPS Stock-3W 120-277V 22AMPS Stock-3W 120-277V 22AMPS Stock-3W 120-277V 22AMPS Stock-3W 120-277V 22AMPS Stock-3W 120-277V 22AMPS
Mstr Box Ind. Box Product Size Individual Box Size Master Box Size H W D L W H L W H Qty Weight 4.75" 2.8" 1.5"* 4.75" 3" 2.75 16" 14.5" 6" 25 <1 LB *Depth measurement is from wall to top of knob. It does not include section that is inside junction box. Product Size H W D 5.5" 6.375 5.625 Individual Box Size L W H 6.5" 7" 5.75"
ET Thermostat Information
Mstr Box Weight 19 lbs.
EPET Thermostat Information

L
Master Box Size W H
Mstr Box Qty 4
Ind. Box Weight 6 lbs.
Mstr Box Weight 24 lbs.
Columbus Electric /div. of TPI, P.O. Box 4973, Johnson City, TN, 37602, Tel: 800-251-7828, Fax:423-477-0545
www.prokontrol.com
MISCELLANEOUS -
TG509, TG510, TG511, TG512 Versaguard Universal Thermostat Guards

PRODUCT DATA
FEATURES
Available in four sizes: mini, small, medium and large, to fit virtually all thermostats. Used in both new and existing applications. Constructed of smoke-colored transparent polycarbonate, off-white opaque polycarbonate, opaque plastic, clear plastic or off-white painted steel. TG509 TG510A Opaque plastic guards match commercial interior decorating schemes. Can be mounted on the wall or an exposed junction box. Smoke-colored transparent or off-white opaque polycarbonate ring base without wallplate, or opaque plastic wallplate and plastic ring base. All models include a guard cover, tumbler lock, two keys and a Honeywell logo insert. TG509F,G models permit thermostat calibration without ring base removal. TG511D TG512B Provision for Honeywell logo (included with all models) or OEM logo on guard cover. Ideal for office areas, lobbies, supermarkets, restaurants, clinics, hospitals, convenience stores, and similar applications. Tamper-resistant lock; key can be removed only when in the locked position. Vertical or horizontal mount. Guard base vents allow airflow for optimum thermostat performance.
GENERAL
The Versaguard Universal Thermostat Guards cover wall thermostats and protect against tampering, damage and unauthorized adjustment of thermostat settings.
CONTENTS
General ............................................................................... Features .............................................................................. Specifications ...................................................................... Ordering Information ........................................................... Installation ........................................................................... Checkout ............................................................................. 1 1 2 2 6 11
U.S. Registered Trademark Copyright 1996 Honeywell Inc. All Rights Reserved
www.prokontrol.com
MISCELLANEOUS -
10
68-0104-4
Service Items
Thermostat Guards
Hi-Impact Plastic Guards
4 Models
Ring & Solid Bases Horizontal & Vertical Mounting Heavy Duty Lock & Key Complete Mounting Hardware
Part # Base
Ring Solid Ring Solid Ring Solid Ring Solid
Clear Cover & Off White Base

Cross Reference
BTG-EK ECST BTG-K KCBT BTG-RK RCBT BTG-UK UCBT F29-0252 029-0178 029-0179 F29-0251 F29-0257 F29-0253 029-0143 F29-0254 029-0198
Inside Dimensions (in.) L W D

3.75 4.00 5.25 5.75 6.31 6.62 8.18 8.50 3.50 4.00 4.62 5.00 3.62 4.12 4.62 5.00 2.62 2.50 3.12 2.81 3.06 2.75 3.56 3.87
77-PG3 77-PG6 77-PG9 77-PG12
Selection Guide
ENERSTAT
DSP, DSL, SHC, SHP, SK, SMS Series ET Series
WHITE RODGERS
77-PG6 77-PG9 77-PG6 77-PG12 77-PG6
IE30, IF30, IE31, IF31, IE50, IF51, IE56, IF56 IF72, IF90
77-PG6 77-PG9 77-PG3 77-PG6 77-PG12
MAPLE CHASE
09500C, 09505C, 09600C, 09610C 09700C, 09710C
HONEYWELL
ROBERTSHAW
275-404C
T86, T87, TS86 Series T651, T822, T834, T874, TS822, T6051, T6052 T8022, T8034 Series T7200, T7400, T8132, T8600, T8601, T8602 T8611, T8621 Series
Miscellaneous Parts
77-F310 Replacement Tumbler Lock 77-F339 Replacement Key
70
www.prokontrol.com
MISCELLANEOUS -
14
Service Items
Thermostat Guards
Metal Guards
5 Models
Ring & Solid Bases Horizontal & Vertical Mounting Heavy Duty Lock & Key Complete Mounting Hardware
Part # Base
Ring Solid Ring Solid Ring Solid * Ring * * Solid *
* HINGED *
* HIN
GED
Off White Colour

W
4.31 5.12 3.62 4.12 4.50 5.25 3.81 4.25
Inside Dimensions (in.) L

5.31 5.62 6.31 6.62 6.75 7.18 6.12 6.37
D
3.00 2.87 3.18 3.75 3.43 3.43 3.12 3.00
Cross Reference
BTG-KWM BTG-KM BTG-EM BTG-RM BTG-RWM BTG-UWM BTG-UM BTG-54VLW BTG-54VL KMRT KMST EMST RMRT UMRT UMST F29-0256 F29-0255
77-MG3 77-MG6 77-MG9 77-MG12R 77-MG12S
Selection Guide
ENERSTAT
DSP, DSL, SHC, SHP, SK, SMS Series ET Series
275-404C
77-MG3
77-MG3 77-MG6
WHITE RODGERS
MAPLE CHASE
09500C, 09505C, 09600C, 09610C 09700C, 09710C
IE30, IF30, IE31, IF31, IE50, IF51, IE56, IF56 IF72, IF90
77-MG3 77-MG6
77-
MG3
ROBERTSHAW
HONEYWELL
T86, T87, TS86, T651, T822, T834, T874, TS822, T6051, T6052, T8022, T8034, T7200, T7400, T8132, T8600, T8601, T8602, T8611, T8621 Series 77-MG3
Miscellaneous Parts
77-F310 Replacement Tumbler Lock 77-F339 Replacement Key
71
www.prokontrol.com
MISCELLANEOUS -
15
Din rail program
Digital timers 12 channels (2 TE)

7d 24 h 1h I I I
auto Impuls Zyklus
By means of text-oriented operator guidance you are escorted step by step through the entire programming. Function: q Week program q Operator guidance by an integrated text line on the LCD display q Programming is shown graphically by a means of a bar chart on the LCD display q Preset ex-works - time (CET) and automatic summer/winter time changeover q Summer/winter time changeover can be alternatively switched off or randomly programmed (GB, USA changover norm selectable) q High number of memory locations q Guided copying of the switching times to other days of the week (random block formation) q Sorting of the switching times in memory by the day of the week q Switching preselection q Permanent switching q Lithium battery and EEPROM TR 610 top TERMINA q 1 channel with 28 memory locations TR 612 top TERMINA q 2 channels with 42 memory locations TR 611 top TERMINA q 1 channel with 42 memory locations q Holiday switching and random function q Pulse and cycle program q LCD backlighting TR 611 top DCF TERMINA q as TR 611 top, but DCF77 radio controlled q DCF power unit integrated q External DCF antenna connectable q without LCD backlighting DCF antenna TR 622 top Dimension drawings (DIN 43 880) Design: q Standard enclosure 45 x 35 x 60 (mm) q Quick fastening facility for 35 mm DIN rail (EN 50 022) q Built-on installation with an additional terminal cover which can be fitted with a leadable seal q Switch panel installation complete with installation kit no. 907 0 001 q Captive hinged cover which can be fitted with a leadable seal
TR 622 top TERMINA as TR 611 top, but q 2 channels with 42 memory locations q With holiday, random and pulse program separate for each channel. q Cycle program for channel 1. Common technical specifications: Rated voltage: 230-240 V~ + 6 % 10 % Frequency: 50 60 Hz Own consumption: max. 6 VA Contact: zero-potential, break gap less than 3 mm () Contact material: Ag Sn O2 Switching power: 16 A, 250 V~, cos . = 1; 10 A, 250 V~, cos . = 0.6 Incandescent lamp load: 2300 W Halogen lamp load: 2300 W Fluorescent lamps: non-compensated, series comp. 1000 W, parallel comp. 400 W (42F) Compact fluorescent lamps: 9x7 W, 7x11 W, 7x15 W, 7x20 W, 7x23 W Timing basis: quartz Working precision: 1 sec./day at 20C Shortest switching time: 1 minute (pulse/cycle 1 sec.) Switching precision: exact to the second Display: LCD display with text line Operating control elements: 4 touch keys and 1 reset key Power reserve: approx. 4 years with display with full controllability (temp. 20C) by means of an environmentally friendly lithium battery Permissible ambient temperature: 10C...+50C Enclosure and insulation material: high-temperature resistant, self-extinguishing thermoplastics Protection class: II in compliance with EN 60730-1 if installed as directed Degree of protection: IP 20 in compliance with EN 60 529 Test approvals: V WS U & Weight: appox. 170 g See page 14 for installation instructions.
TR 610 top
TR 611 top/TR 611 top DCF
Terminal cover
*
*with terminal cover
20
www.prokontrol.com
MISCELLANEOUS - 16
POLY TUBING FOR PNEUMATIC PIPING.
YO-YO FORMAT PLASTIC 1/4-250 FT. SINGLE PLASTIC 5/32 SINGLE FORMAT PLASTIC 3/8-250 FT FORMAT PLASTIC 1/1000 FT
FLEXIBLE TUBING FOR PNEUMATIC PIPING NON FUEL (FR) MODEL # PLASTIC 1/4-250 PLASTIC 1/4-500 PLASTIC 1/4-MIL PLASTIC 3/8-250 PLASTIC 3/8 FR PLASTIC 5/32 PLASTIC 5/32 SIMP DIAMETER [IN] 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 2 x 5/32 1 x 5/32 LENGTH [FT] 250 500 1000 250 500 500 500
1989 Michelin Street, Laval, QC H7L 5B7 Laval (450) 973-7765 Montreal (514) 990-2768 1-800-461-1381 Fax (450) 973-6186 100-420 Desrochers Street, Vanier, QC G1M 1C2 (418) 682-2421 1-800-465-7413 Fax (418) 687-9564 500 Alden road, suite 19, Markham, Ontario L3R 5H5 (905) 475-9888 1-888-687-7247 Fax (905) 475-9030 Internet: http://www.prokontrol.com Email: info@prokontrol.com
www.prokontrol.com
MISCELLANEOUS -
18
11-02
ACCESSORIES
PRO KONTROL OFFERS ALL THE NECESSARY ACCESSORIES FOR THE MOUNTING AND MAINTENANCE OF THE CONTROLS.
HERE ARE A FEW EXAMPLES:
HARDWARE AND KITS:

"Bender" for pneumatic copper pipe Models: JC-5211 For 1/4 pipe JC-5212 For 3/8 pipe
"Woolverine" copper pipe flaired for pneumatic piping Models: Copper 1/4 Rigid copper 1/4 X 12. ( 100 pcs. per bundle) Copper 3/8 Rigid copper 3/8 X 12 .( 60 pcs. per bundle)
Copper "Clip" for pneumatic piping of 1/4 and 3/8 Models: 105-SC Copper clip of 1/4 single 300-SC Copper clip of 1/4 double 115-SC Copper clip of 3/8 single 301-SC Copper clip of 3/8 double
"Gang strap" support for 5 rigid copper pipes of 1/4 Model: AA-230
Kits for pneumatic calibration:

Pneumatic sequencer c/w 0-30 psi gauge
Pneumatic calibration kit Pressure gauge set and pneumatic regulator
www.prokontrol.com
MISCELLANEOUS -
20
11-02
ACCESSORIES
Kits for pneumatic calibration (Continued)
Tool-78 JC-5312 JC-5361 Tool-82 JC-5309 Model TOOL-78 CCT-729A JC-5312 JC-5361 192-759 MCS-GA TOOL-82 CCT-735A JC-5309 T4000-119 192-639 Description Calibration needle "Branch tap" Calibration needle "Branch tap" Calibration needle "Branch tap" Hypodermic needle Calibration needle "Branch tap" Calibration needle "Branch tap" Calibration screwdriver Calibration screwdriver Flexible calibration screwdriver Calibration screwdriver Calibration screwdriver Calibration screwdriver To calibrate trademark kits Barber Colman Honeywell Johnson Controls Johnson Controls Siemens Robertshaw Barber Colman Honeywell Johnson Controls Johnson Controls Siemens Robertshaw
Other accessories:
N2-4
Pressure gauge 0-30 PSI, 1.5" , connection 1/8" cbm Model: KV404-820 Ball joint connector for 5/16" rods model 0804 1/2" crankarm model 1405-L Din rail in 2m lengths Model: 17322005 Water resistant lubricant Contact cleaner "Contact 2000" Heat conducting paste temperature sensing thermowells Models: A-505 White paste
www.prokontrol.com
MISCELLANEOUS -
21
11-02
SCR SILICON CONTROLLED RECTIFIER SSR SOLID STATE RELAY STEP CONTROLLER
SELECTION TABLE FOR THE SCR All the SCRs can be controlled by the following signals: 0-10vdc ( std), 0-135 Ohms, 4-20Ma, 0-5vdc MODEL CCS-15-1 CCS-15-3 CCS-30-1 CCS-30-3 CCS-40-1 CCS-40-3 CCS-50-1 CCS-50-3 CCS-75-1 CCS-75-3 CCS-100-1 CCS-100-3 CCS-135-1 CCS-135-3 CCS-165-1 CCS-165-3 CCS-200-1 CCS-200-3 CCS-250-1 CCS-250-3 AMPERES PHASES MAX 600 V 15 30 40 50 75 100 135 165 200 250 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Cristal's energy control technology offers a precise regulation of electrical current at a very low price. These regulators are perfect for regulating electric heat coils, baseboards heaters, boilers, humidifier elements... All the SSRs accept control signals from 3 to 32 vac/dc.
SELECTION TABLE FOR THE SSR AMPS 10 15 347 VOLTS PHASES MAX 1 1 3 30 600 1 3
MODEL CCT-10-1 CCT-10-1-C CCT-15-1 CCT-15-1-C CCT-15-3 CCT-30-1 CCT-30-1-C CCT-30-3
COVERS 4X4 WITHOUT WITH WITHOUT WITH WITHOUT WITHOUT WITH* WITHOUT
*= 4 11/16 X 4 11/16
CCS-30-3
CCS-100-3
CCT-25-1-C
Enclosure
For more than 250 AMPS, Contact us.
SELECTION TABLE FOR THE STEP CONTROLLERS All the CCE can be controlled by one of the following signals: 0-10vdc ( std),4-20 Ma, 0-5 vdc... MODELS CCE-4 CCE-8 DESCRIPTION 4 stages on-off + 1 stage SCR 8 stages on-off + 1 stage SCR
ALSO AVAILABLE FOR PNEUMATIC CONTROL SIGNAL. Ideal for replacing the PE.
The CCE and CCS series are available by order with enclosure, electric transformer, fuses and connection terminal boards.
www.prokontrol.com
MISCELLANEOUS -
22
11-02
2 year warranty
Refrigerated Air Dryers

ompressors
Quality Compressed Air Products
R134A environmentally friendly refrigerant Robust heavy gauge steel construction Compact cabinet design complete with easily removable steel panels, wall mount slots on LTE-3 to DFE-23 models Neat and readily serviceable layout of components Powder paint coated finish Automatic electronic drains Illuminated on/off switch Electronic controls with LED readout is standard on models DFE-8 to DFE-118 Hot gas bypass solenoid valve Fully hermetically sealed refrigerant compressor includes thermal overload protection and anti-vibration mountings Air to air heat exchanger and evaporator Thermally protected condensor cooling fan High efficiency centrifugal moisture separator Insulated electrical wiring 6 foot 3 prong cord on LTE-3 to DFE-23 models Water proof electrical junction box All dryers are factory tested prior to shipment
DFE-8
DFE-18
DFE-31
Specifications
VOLTAGE/ MODEL LTE-3 LTE-5 DFE-8 DFE-11 DFE-18 DFE-23 DFE-31 DFE-43 DFE-52 DFE-61 DFE-75 DFE-98 DFE-118 SCFM 10 15 27 35 56 75 100 137 168 200 235 310 400 PHASE 115V/1PH 115V/1PH 115V/1PH 115V/1PH 115V/1PH 115V/1PH 230V/1PH 230V/1PH 230V/1PH 230V/1PH 230V/1PH 230V/1PH 230V/1PH CONNECTIONS 3/8 OD TUBE 3/8 OD TUBE 3/4" NPT 3/4" NPT 3/4" NPT 1" NPT 1" NPT 1-1/4" NPT 1-1/2" NPT 2" NPT 2" NPT 2" NPT 2-1/2" NPT PRESSURE MAX PSI 232 232 232 232 232 232 175 175 175 175 175 175 175
DIMENSIONS (INCHES) HEIGHT 17.5 17.5 19.9 19.9 19.9 19.9 25 31.7 31.7 31.7 31.7 34.4 34.4 WIDTH 14.6 14.6 17.7 17.7 17.7 17.7 21.3 23.2 23.2 23.2 23.2 23.6 23.6 DEPTH 17.7 17.7 21.3 21.3 21.3 21.3 26.4 32.3 32.3 32.3 32.3 42.3 42.3
WEIGHT LBS. 62 68 75 77 80 82 126 168 207 227 232 462 528
Capacities are based on 100F entering air temperature, 100F ambient air temperature, 100 PSIG operating pressure. Larger sizes available upon request.
www.prokontrol.com
MISCELLANEOUS -
23
Compressed Air Accessories

Electronic Auto Drains Pneumatic Auto Drains Magnetic Starters Oil Monitors Vibration Isolators Flex Hose Connectors Remote Air Receivers Pressure Switches Check Valves Compressor Oil Gauges Safety Valves Service Parts
2 year warranty
Distributed by:
ompressors
Quality Compressed Air Products
Omega Compressors
27 Hamilton Rd. Barrie, Ontario, Canada L4N 8Y6 Tel: 800-668-8448 or (705) 721-9500 Fax: (705) 721-8646 Email: info@omegacompressors.com www.omegacompressors.com
www.prokontrol.com
MISCELLANEOUS -
25
BRASS AND COPPER COUPLINGS FOR PNEUMATIC PIPING

BUY ONE, A HANDFULL, A BAGFULL OR A WHOLE BOX!!
NUMBER 28-4-2 28-5/32-2 22-4 22-6 22-5/32 22BH-4-4 22-4-6 22-4-5/32 22CA-4-4 22CABH-4 22CABH-6-6 225-4-4 225-6-6 229-4-2 230-4-2 224-5/32 224-4-4-5/32 224-4 224-6-6-4 224-6-6-5/32 224-6 232-4-2 237-4-2 220-4-2 231-4-2 228-4-2
220-4-2
DESCRIPTION BARB ADAPTOR
CONNECTION [INCHES] 1/4B X 1/8MPT 5/32B X 1/8MPT 1/4B 3/8B 5/32B 1/4B 3/8B X 1/4B 1/4B X 5/32B
COUPLING BULKHEAD UNION UNION REDUCER
CONNECTOR BULKHEAD CONNECTOR
1/4B X 1/4C 1/4B X 1/4C 3/8B X 3/8C 1/4B 3/8B 1/4B X 1/8MPT 1/4B X 1/8MPT 5/32BM 1/4B X 1/4B X 5/32B 1/4B 3/8B X 3/8B X 1/4B 3/8B X 3/8B X 5/32B
90 DEG. ELBOW
TEE
3/8B 1/4BX1/8MPTX1/4B 1/4BX1/8MPTX1/4B 237-4-2 +DROP EAR 1/8PT X 1/4B X 1/4B
GAUGE TEE PLUG
1/4B X 1/8PT X 1/8PT 1/4B 3/8B 1/2B 5/32,1/4B
20-4 20-6 20-8 F-1000-323
www.prokontrol.com
MISCELLANEOUS -
37
11-02
NUMBER NV105C-4
N4-20
DESCRIPTION NEEDLE VALVE SOLDER SOLDER REDUCER SOLDER ELBOW SOLDER
CONNECTION [IN.] 1/4C X 1/4C 3/8C X 3/8C 1/4 OD 3/8 OD 3/8 OD X 1/4 OD 1/4 OD 3/8 OD 1/4 OD 3/8 OD 1/4C X 1/8MPT 1/4C X 1/4MPT 1/4C X 3/8MPT
NV105C-6 S-205 S-207 N4-206 S-502 S-504 S-306 S-310 68C-4-2 68C-4-4 68C-4-6 68C-6-2 68C-6-4 68C-6-6 68C-6-8 62C-4 62C-6 62CBH-4 62C-6-4 66C-3-2 66C-4-2 66C-4-4 169C-4-2
169C-4-4
COMPRESSION ADAPTORS
3/8C X 1/8MPT 3/8C X 1/4MPT 3/8C X 3/8MPT 3/8C X 1/2MPT 1/4C X 1/4C 3/8C X 3/8C 1/4C X 1/4C 3/8C X 1/4C 3/16C X 1/8FPT 1/4C X 1/8FPT 1/4C X 1/4FPT 1/4C X 1/8MPT
1/4C X 1/4MPT
COMPRESSION UNION BULK HEAD UNION COMPRESSION REDUCER COMPRESSION ADAPTOR
169C-4-2 164C-4
169C-6-4 270C-4-2 164C-4 164C-6 164C-6-6-4 171C-4-2 176C-4-2 168C-4-2 172C-4-2 177C-4-2 60C-4 60C-6
COMPRESSION MALE ELBOW
3/8C X 1/4MPT 1/4C X 1/8FPT 1/4C 3/8C
COMPRESSION TEE
3/8C X 3/8C X 1/4C 1/4C X 1/8MPT X 1/4C 1/8MPT X 1/8FPT X 1/4C
GAUGE TEE
COMPRESSION TEE ADAPTOR
1/4CX1/8FPTX1/8MPT 1/4CX1/8MPTX1/4C 1/4CX1/8FPTX1/4C 1/4 3/8
168C-4-2
BRASS SLEEVE
www.prokontrol.com
MISCELLANEOUS -
38
11-02
DESCRIPTION 60PT-4 60PT-6 61C-4 61C-6 63PT-4-40 63PT-6-62 238-4-4 209P-4-2 209P-6-4 209P-8-4 209P-8-6 209P-8-2 209P-6-2 209P-12-4 209P-12-8 207P-2 208P-4-2 218P-2 215PN-2 215PNL-2-15
CONNECTION [IN.] PLASTIC SLEEVE COMPRESSION NUT BRASS INSERT SOLDER TO HOSE BARB ADAPTOR
QUANTITY 1/4 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/4 OD 3/8 OD 1/4 OD X 1/4B 1/4MPT X 1/8FPT 3/8MPT X 1/4FPT 1/2MPT X 1/4FPT 1/2MPT X 3/8FPT 1/2MPT X 1/8FPT 3/8MPT X 1/8FPT 3/4MPT X 1/4FPT 3/4MPT X 1/2FPT 1/8FPT X 1/8FPT 1/4FPT X 1/8FPT 1/8M 1/8M X 1/2 1/8M X 1 1/2
QUANTITY BAG 50 50 25 25 50 50 25 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 3 5 5 5 5 5
QUANTITY BOX 200 200 100 100 200 200 100 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 10 25 25 50 20 10
BUSHINGS
COUPLINGS PIPE HEX HEAD PLUG CLOSE NIPPLE LONG NIPPLE
OTHER ACCESSORIES FOR PNEUMATIC CONTROL PIPING

Insertion tool for plastic tube Model: M-318 or 20GT-4
In-Line check valve Models: Restrictions Model: N100-0005 N100-0010 N100-2501 R3710-3007 100-46 N4-32 Description Restrictor TEE- Green T 0.5 scfh Restrictor TEE- Red T 1.0 scfh In-Line Restrictor-Red 1.0 scfh Restriction in green T Adjustable restriction in brass 1/8MPT X 1/4C Restriction T 1/4C in brass N100-2500
www.prokontrol.com
MISCELLANEOUS -
39
11-02
STUDENTPROOF
ULTRA RESISTANT PROTECTOR IN LEXAN CHOICE OF THREE DIMENSIONS AND THREE TYPES OF FINISH MOUNTING RING WITH SPECIAL SCREWS, IDEAL FOR EXISTING INSTALLATION
UG 1A MODEL UG-I(A,C,SC) UG-2-CODE FINI UG-3-CODE FINI
UG 2SC FINISH CODE TRANSPARENT = C OPAQUE ALMOND= A SMOKEY TRANSPARENT = SC
UG 3A DIMENSIONS 31/4H X 21/2L X 21/2P. 7H X 37/8L X 31/4P. 75/8H X 53/8L X 31/2P.
OTHER AVAILABLE PROTECTORS

MODEL 77-MG12R 77-MG12S 77-MG3 77-MG6 77-MG9 77-MG12 77-PG3 77-PG6 77-PG9 INCLUDED BASES METAL RING FULL IN MTAL RING & FULL RING & FULL RING & FULL RING & FULL RING & FULL RING & FULL RING & FULL TRANSPARENT PLASTIC METAL ENCLOSURE LENGTH 6.12 6.37 5.31 6.31 6.75 8.18 3.75 5.25 6.31 WIDTH 3.81 4.25 4.31 3.62 4.50 4.62 3.5 4.62 3.62
77-MG6 DIMENSIONS [INCHES] DEPTH 3.12 3.00 3.00 3.18 3.43 3.56 2.62 3.12 3.06
www.prokontrol.com
MISCELLANEOUS -
40
11-02
DRAINVIEW
SEE-LEVEL AUTO-DRAIN FOR COMPRESSED AIR TANKS
AUTOMATIC DRAIN TRAP DRAINS & EXPELLS:
Condensed Moisture Emulsified Oil Viscous Condensate
FEATURES:
Indestructible Cellular Float Non-corroding parts Extra Large Dumping Valve Comes in 3/8 and 12.
This brilliant technology will do its job automatically and never let you down PLUS it installs in no time flat!
DRAINVIEW PRODUCTS, California
www.prokontrol.com
MISCELLANEOUS -
41
DDC CONTROL WIRING
AT-HOM 29.A Product developed by CERCO for the Building Automation Industry. FT-4 & FT-6.
REELEX Brand packaging makes it easy to unreel and transport cable. PRO KONTROL stocks a good variety for your convenience. Call us for your DDC cable needs!
www.prokontrol.com
MISCELLANEOUS -
42
VICONICS PROPORTIONAL THERMOSTATS

Unistat Series Commercial Programmable LonTalk Communicating T-stat Remote Temp Sensors MicroStat-Proportional stats,Humidistats VICONICS - 1, 2 VICONICS - 3 to 5 VICONICS - 6, 7 VICONICS - 8, 9 VICONICS - 10 to 28
I nt r oduc i ngt heVT 7300 L ow Vol t a ge Communi c a t i ngF a n Coi lt he r mos t a t s !

T h e V T 7 3 0 0 f a n c o i l t h e r mo s t a t s f r o mV i c o n i c s I n c . a r e d e s i g n e d t o p r o v i d e e x c e p t i o n a l t e mp e r a t u r e c o n t r o l o f mu l t i s p e e d f a n c o i l u n i t s w i t h 2 p o s i t i o n , A n a l o g o r f l o a t i n g t e mp e r a t u r e c o n t r o l v a l v e s . T h e s e t h e r mo s t a t s a r e p o s i t i o n e d t o p r o v i d e a r e d u c t i o n i n p r o j e c t d e l i v e r y c o s t s r e l a t e d t o i n s t a l l a t i o n , p r o g r a mmi n g &c o mmi s s i o n i n g t i me . T h e s e c o s t s a r e r e d u c e d d r a ma t i c a l l y w i t h t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n o f o n e s ma l l w a l l mo u n t e d c o n f i g u r a b l e a p p l i c a t i o n s p e c i f i c d e v i c e v s . t h e t r a d i t i o n a l p r o g r a mma b l e s e n s o r c o n t r o l l e r s o l u t i o n . T h e V T 7 3 0 0 i s n o wa v a i l a b l e i n t h r e e d i s t i n c t v a r i a t i o n s : B A C n e t , E c h e l o n L o n t a l k , a n d n o n c o mmu n i c a t i n g v e r s i o n s . F e a t u r e s , a e s t h e t i c s , a n d s e q u e n c e s a r e s h a r e d t h r o u g h o u t t h e V T 7 3 0 0 p r o d u c t l i n e . O f f e r i n g i t s u s e r o n e i n t u i t i v e d e v i c e t o c o v e r ma n y a p p l i c a t i o n s . L o n t a l k V e r s i o n s a d h e r e t o t h e S C C 8 5 0 0 L o n ma r k s p a c e c o mf o r t c o n t r o l l e r . B A C n e t ms / t p v e r s i o n s u s e s t a n d a r d B A C n e t B I B B s t o a c c o mp l i s h e x t r a o r d i n a r i l y s i mp l e i n t e g r a t i o n t o a n y s y s t e m. L o n t a l k v e r s i o n s a r e c o mp l i me n t e d w i t h L N S p l u g i n t o f u r t h e r f a c i l i t a t e t h e i n t e g r a t i o n p r o c e s s . B A C n e t v a r i a n t s o f f e r u n i q u e a u t o b a u d , w h i c h a l l o w s t h e t h e r mo s t a t t o ma t c h t h e e x i s t i n g c o mmu n i c a t i o n s p e e d . I n a d d i t i o n t o a c c o mmo d a t i n g mo s t i n d u s t r y s t a n d a r d p r o t o c o l s , t h e V T 7 3 0 0 s e r i e s o f f e r s u n i q u e n e s s t h r o u g h c o v e r i n g a b r o a d r a n g e o f mo s t u s e a p p l i c a t i o n s . P e r i p h e r a l i t e ms , a n d a u x i l i a r y r e l a y s a r e e l i mi n a t e d b y p a c k a g i n g mo s t r e q u i r e p e r i p h e r a l c o n t r o l s i n t o o n e , e a s y t o i n s t a l l w a l l t h e r mo s t a t . A l l t h e r mo s t a t s a r e p r e c a n n e d w i t h mo s t u s e d s e q u e n c e s t o a c c o mmo d a t e 8 5 %o f a l l a p p l i c a t i o n s e l i mi n a t i n g t h e n e e d f o r c o mp l e x c u s t o mp r o g r a mmi n g . C o n f i g u r a t i o n ma y b e a c c o mp l i s h e d e i t h e r v i a t h e l o c a l c o n f i g u r a t i o n u t i l i t y o r v i a t h e n e t w o r k .
G r e a t t h i n g s c o mei ns ma l l p a c k a g e s !
V T 7 3 0 0
P r o d u c t h i g h l i g h t s :
P r o t o c o l a g n o s t i c a p p r o a c h a l l o w s i n t e g r a t i o n t o v i r t u a l l y a n y s y s t e m, t r a n s p a r e n t l y . O n e s i mp l e w a l l d e v i c e t o i n s t a l l , w i r e a n d c o mmi s s i o n v s . t r a d i t i o n a l c o n t r o l l e r / s e n s o r c o mb i n a t i o n . N o c u s t o mp r o g r a mmi n g r e q u i r e d . F a mi l i a r t h e r mo s t a t l o o k &f e e l , a n d s i mp l i f i e d c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d i n s t a l l a t i o n . L o c a l c o n f i g u r a t i o n u t i l i t y p r o v i d e s f i e l d f l e x i b i l i t y . S i mp l i f i e d , t a r g e t e d i n t e l l i g e n t H MI e l i mi n a t e s u s e r c o n f u s i o n . I n t e g r a t e d o c c u p a n c y f e a t u r e s t o a d d r e s s u n i q u e v e r t i c a l ma r k e t a p p l i c a t i o n s . I n t e g r a t e d c h a n g e o v e r l o g i c e l i mi n a t e s r e mo t e c h a n g e o v e r d e v i c e . F e w e r mo d e l s c o v e r i n g b r o a d r a n g e o f a p p l i c a t i o n s e l i mi n a t e o r d e r i n g c o n f u s i o n . P l e a s e c o n s u l t o u r w e b s i t e f o r mo r e d e t a i l e d p r o d u c t i n f o r ma t i o n a n d p o i n t o f s a l e i n f o r ma t i o n .
( Ho t e l &L o d g i n gMo d e l Sh o wn )
F a nC o i l T h e r mo s t a t
www . v i c o n i c s . c o m
s a l e s @v i c o n i c s . c o m 1 8 0 0 5 6 3 5 6 6 0
VT 7300 L o w Vo l t a geCo mmuni c a t i ng F a n Co i l t he r mo s t a t s !

D. A . S HW
C HW
R C
R A
DA
B I F a nS t a t u s B OF a nL o wS p e e d C T B OF a n Me d i u mS p e e d B OF a n Hi g hS p e e d A OHe a t i n g o rF l o a t i n g
E L E C T R I C R E HE A T D/ O A OC o o l i n g V a l v e
I NT E R NA LP OI NT S R o o mT e mp e r a t u r e R o o mH u mi d i t y Z o n eT i me dO v e r r i d e T i me dl o c a l o v e r r i d e( mo d e l d e p e n d e n t ) H e a t i n g/C o o l i n gs e t p o i n t s C o mmo nA p p l i c a t i o n s : -Mu l t i s p e e dF C U sa n dA H U swi t h mo d u l a r h e a t i n ga n dc o o l i n gV L V s -H o t e l v e r t i c a l F C U s -P a c k a g e dt y p ea i r c o n d i t i o n e r s
I n t e l l i g e n t H MI ma r k e t s p e c i f i c H MI t a i l o r s p r o d u c t t o a p p l i c a t i o n .
C o mme r c i a l A p p l i c a t i o n
H o t e l /L o d g i n g A p p l i c a t i o n
* * ( x ) A d d l e t t e r t o c o mp l e t e p a r t n u mb e r w i t h p r o t o c o l a b b r e v i a t i o n . V i c o n i c s E l e c t r o n i c s I n c . 9 2 4 5L a n g e l i e r B l v d . , S t . L e o n a r d , Q u e b e c C a n a d aH 1 P 3 K 9 T e l . : ( 5 1 4 ) 3 2 1 5 6 6 0F a x : ( 5 1 4 ) 3 2 1 4 1 5 0 e ma i l : s a l e s @v i c o n i c s . c o m w w w . v i c o n i c s . c o m
I S O9 0 0 1&I S O1 4 0 0 1CE RT I F I E D
C C S 0 9 1 9 E 0 1
I nt r o duc i ngt heVT 7200 Se r i e s Co mmuni c a t i ngZ o neT he r mo s t a t s

T h e V T 7 2 0 0 s e r i e s o f t h e r mo s t a t s h a v e b e e n s p e c i f i c a l l y d e s i g n e d t o c o n t r o l e i t h e r 0 1 0 V , f l o a t i n g p o i n t h e a t i n g o r c o o l i n g t e r mi n a l s y s t e ms . T h e V T 7 2 0 0 s e r i e s t h e r mo s t a t s a r e s u p p l i e d p r e p r o g r a mme d t o s u i t mo s t u s e d a p p l i c a t i o n s a n d r e q u i r e l i t t l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n t o a c c o mp l i s h r e ma r k a b l e t e mp e r a t u r e c o n t r o l r e g a r d l e s s o f t h e a p p l i c a t i o n . V T 7 2 0 0 s e r i e s o f f e r s e x c e p t i o n a l v a l u e t h r o u g h p a c k a g i n g mo s t u s e d o c c u p a n c y f u n c t i o n s t y p i c a l l y f o u n d i n mu l t i d e v i c e c o n t r o l i n s t a l l a t i o n s . T h e s e t h e r mo s t a t s a r e o f f e r e d i n t h r e e d i s t i n c t v a r i a t i o n s : B A C n e t MS / T P , E c h e l o n L o n t a l k , o r s t a n d a l o n e . T h e c o mmu n i c a t i n g v e r s i o n ( s ) f e a t u r e , e s t h e t i c s a n d f u n c t i o n a l i t y c o n s i s t e n t w i t h t h e i r s t a n d a l o n e c o u n t e r p a r t s o f f e r i n g t h e n e t w o r k a c c e s s t o i n t e r n a l f u n c t i o n s o f t e n o n l y a s s o c i a t e d w i t h l a r g e r , mo r e c o s t l y c o n t r o l l e r s . T h e V T 7 2 0 0 s e r i e s z o n i n g t h e r mo s t a t s h a v e a l s o b e e n d e s i g n e d f o r e a s e o f i n s t a l l a t i o n , w i r i n g a n d c o mmi s s i o n i n g a s w e l l a s t o r e d u c e o v e r a l l p r o j e c t d e l i v e r y c o s t s . T h e s e c o s t s a r e a d d r e s s e d w i t h u n i q u e f e a t u r e s . R e mo v a b l e t e r mi n a l b l o c k s a n d h i n g e d P C B b o a r d f a c i l i t a t e t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n a n d w i r i n g p r o c e s s . Al o c a l , o n b o a r d me n u d r i v e n c o n f i g u r a t i o n u t i l i t y a l l o w s t h e i n s t a l l e r t o s e l e c t a p p r o p r i a t e p r e c a n n e d c o n t r o l s e q u e n c e s a n d s e t t i n g s t o s u i t t h e i r a p p l i c a t i o n . O p t i o n a l c h a n g e o v e r s e n s o r e l i mi n a t e s mu l t i v e n d o r p e r i p h e r a l s o u r c i n g a n d f u r t h e r s i mp l i f i e s i n s t a l l a t i o n . Mo d e l s e q u i p p e d w i t h L o n t a l k o r B A C n e t MS / T P n e t w o r k f u n c t i o n a l i t y i n c l u d e n e t w o r k s t a t u s L E D s a n d s u p p o r t t o o l s t o e a s e t h e i n t e g r a t i o n p r o c e s s . P r o d u c t h i g h l i g h t s : P r o t o c o l a g n o s t i c a p p r o a c h a l l o w s u s e o n v i r t u a l l y a n y s y s t e m. O n e s i mp l e d e v i c e t o i n s t a l l , w i r e , a n d c o mmi s s i o n v s . t r a d i t i o n a l c o n t r o l l e r / s e n s o r c o mb i n a t i o n . F a mi l i a r t h e r mo s t a t l o o k &f e e l . S i mp l i f i e d l o c a l c o n f i g u r a t i o n u t i l i t y e l i mi n a t e s c o mp l i c a t e d p r o g r a mmi n g . L o c a l t i me d o v e r r i d e . L o c a l d i g i t a l i n p u t s . L N S p l u g i n c o n f i g u r a t i o n u t i l i t y a v a i l a b l e w i t h L o n t a l k mo d e l s . L o c a l c h a n g e o v e r i n p u t s i mp l i f i e s i n s t a l l a t i o n . S i mp l i f i e d U s e r i n t e r f a c e . H i n g e d c i r c u i t b o a r d &r e mo v a b l e t e r mi n a l b l o c k s t o f a c i l i t a t e i n s t a l l a t i o n . L a r g e , a t t r a c t i v e b a c k l i t L C Dd i s p l a y . P l e a s e c o n s u l t o u r w e b s i t e f o r mo r e d e t a i l e d p r o d u c t a n d p o i n t o f s a l e i n f o r ma t i o n a t w w w . v i c o n i c s . c o m.
Po we r f ul l y Si mp l e !
V T 7 2 0 0
Z o n e T h e r mo s t a t
I nt r o duc i ngt heVT 7200 Se r i e sCo mmuni c a t i ng Z o neT he r mo s t a t s

C o o l i n go n l yp r e s s u r e d e p e n d a n t V A V wi t hr e h e a t A IDi s c h a r g e& A i rT e mp e r a t u r e
O Da mp e r D A
HW C
A O He a t i n g V a l v e
I n t e r n a l P o i n t s Z o n eT e mp e r a t u r e T i me dO c c u p a n c yo v e r i d e T e mp e r a t u r es e t p o i n t s
S i mp l i f i e dH MI
C o mmo nA p p l i c a t i o n s C o o l i n go n l yV V Tz o n ewi t hr e h e a t . F i n T u b er a d i a t o r s C a b i n e t H e a t e r s R a d i a n t P a n e l h e a t e r s E l e c t r i cr e h e a t z o n e s . P r e s s u r ed e p e n d e n t V A Vs y s t e m
V i c o n i c s E l e c t r o n i c s I n c . 9 2 4 5L a n g e l i e r B l v d . , S t . L e o n a r d , Q u e b e c C a n a d aH 1 P 3 K 9 T e l . : ( 5 1 4 ) 3 2 1 5 6 6 0F a x : ( 5 1 4 ) 3 2 1 4 1 5 0
I S O9 0 0 1&I S O1 4 0 0 1CE RT I F I E D
e ma i l : s a l e s @v i c o n i c s . c o m w w w . v i c o n i c s . c o m
C C S 1 0 0 6 E 0 1
V i c o n i c s V I P I RT h e r mo s t a t s Ma x i mi z eY o u r T r i p l eB o t t o mL i n e
T h e V i c o n i c s V T 7 0 0 0 s e r i e s t h e r mo s t a t e q u i p p e d w i t h i n t e g r a t e d p a s s i v e i n f r a r e d mo t i o n d e t e c t o r r e p r e s e n t s a n e we r a i n s ma r t e n e r g y ma n a g e me n t . o u c a n n o wi mp r o v e a l l a s p e c t s o f y o u r t r i p l e b o t t o ml i n e ( e c o n o mi c , Y s o c i a l a n d e n v i r o n me n t a l ) w i t h o u t s a c r i f i c e o r c o mp r o mi s e a n d w i t h r e t u r n o n i n v e s t me n t n o wr e d u c e d f r o my e a r s t o mo n t h s . T h e V I P I R p r o v i d e s b u i l d i n g o w n e r s w i t h a s i g n i f i c a n t i n c r e me n t a l e n e r g y s a v i n g s p o t e n t i a l o n s t a n d a l o n e a n d n e t w o r k e q u i p p e d mo d e l s d u r i n g o c c u p i e d p e r i o d s w i t h o u t s a c r i f i c i n g o c c u p a n t o mf o r t . V I P I R a s s e mb l y i s a l s o a v a i l a b l e a s a f a c t o r y o r f i e l d i n s t a l l e d c o p t i o n o n a l l V T 7 0 0 0 s e r i e s t h e r mo s t a t s F e a t u r e s i n c l u d e : Ma x i mi z e s e n e r g y s a v i n g s ( 1 0 3 0 % ) C a n b e u t i l i z e d i n c o n j u n c t i o n w i t h V i c o n i c s s c h e d u l e d ( 7 d a y ) o r o p e n n e t w o r k p r o t o c o l s u c h a s B A C n e t MS / T P , E c h e l o n , o r Z i g b e e t h e r mo s t a t s C o mp a t i b l e w i t h e n t i r e V T 7 0 0 0 mo d e l l i n e u pi n c l u d i n g ( f a n c o i l , z o n i n g a n d mu l t i s t a g e u n i t s ) . P r e p r o g r a mme d , s i n g l e d e v i c e i n a c o mp a c t a e s t h e t i c a l l y p l e a s i n g s t y l i n g P o t e n t i a l f o r c o n t r o l l i n g l o c a l l i g h t i n g s y s t e ms b a s e d u p o n o c c u p a n c y F a c t o r y o r f i e l d i n s t a l l e d v e r s i o n s a v a i l a b l e Ad i a g n o s t i c L E Di n s i d e t h e P I R f a c i l i t a t e s c o mmi s s i o n i n g b y p r o v i d i n g v i s u a l c o n f i r ma t i o n o f mo t i o n d u r i n g t h e f i r s t 3 0 mi n u t e s o f s e r v i c e E x t e n d s e q u i p me n t l i f e s p a n A p p l i c a t i o n s i n c l u d e h o s p i t a l i t y , e d u c a t i o n , o f f i c e f o r r o o f t o p t e r mi n a l e q u i p me n t
I n t r o d u c i n gt h e Ne w I n t e g r a t e d VI P I R Co n t r o l l e r sF r o m Vi c o n i c s
Ma x i mi z eE n e r g y S a v i n g sWh i l e Ma i n t a i n i n g Op t i mu m Oc c u p a n tCo mf o r t
www. c o mmu n i c a t i n g t h e r mo s t a t s . c o m
www. v i c o n i c s . c o m
T h e V I P I R c a n ma x i mi z e y o u r e n e r g y s a v i n g f r o m1 0 3 0 %b y r e l a x i n g t e mp e r a t u r e s e t p o i n t s i n u n o c c u p i e d z o n e s d u r i n g s c h e d u l e d p e r i o d s .
4 O1 0 S I
O9 S I 1 0
1C E 0 R 0
E I D F I T
V i c o n i c s V I P I RE q u i p p e dT h e r mo s t a t s Ma x i mi z eY o u r T r i p l eB o t t o mL i n e
T y p i c a l D e t e c t i o nP a t t e r nf o r V I P I RL e n s V e r t i c a l A n g l e T y p i c a l D e t e c t i o nP a t t e r nf o r V I P I RL e n s H o r i z o n t a l A n g l e
T y p i c a l I mp l e me n t a t i o n O v e r v i e w V I P I R o c c u p a n c y f u n c t i o n a l i t y r e p r e s e n t s a t y p i c a l n o n s c h e d u l i n g s t a n d a l o n e a p p l i c a t i o n w i t h o u t a n y n e t w o r k s u p p o r t . h e s y s t e mc a n b e l e f t i n u n o c c u p i e d mo d e f o r T e x t e n d e d p e r i o d s o f t i me a n d w i l l o n l y b e c o me a c t i v e t o o c c u p i e d l e v e l s w h e n t h e r e i s a c t i v i t y i n t h e r o o m. L E DO p e r a t i o n Ad i a g n o s t i c L E Di n s i d e t h e P I R f a c i l i t a t e s c o mmi s s i o n i n g b y p r o v i d i n g v i s u a l c o n f i r ma t i o n o f mo t i o n d u r i n g t h e f i r s t 3 0 mi n u t e s o f s e r v i c e
T y p i c a l S a v i n g s o f 1 0 3 0 % T h e V I P I R c a n ma x i mi z e y o u r e n e r g y s a v i n g f r o m1 0 3 0 %b y r e l a x i n g t e mp e r a t u r e s e t p o i n t s i n u n o c c u p i e d z o n e s d u r i n g s c h e d u l e d p e r i o d s .
T y p i c a l C o n s u mp t i o n w i t h o u t V I P I R( K Wh ) T y p i c a l C o n s u mp t i o n w i t hV I P I R( K Wh ) E n e r g y S a v i n g s%
* * * * * * * * N o t e : F a c t o r y i n s t a l l e d mo d e l s a r e d e s i g n a t e d b y t h e n u me r i c a l c o d e 5 5 i n t h e mo d e l n u mb e r s u c h a s V T 7 6 0 0 A 5 5 0 0 E
V i c o n i c s E l e c t r o n i c s I n c . , 9 2 4 5L a n g e l i e r B l v d . , S t . L e o n a r d , Qu e b e cCa n a d a , H 1 P 3 K 9T e l . : ( 5 1 4 ) 3 2 1 5 6 6 0F a x : ( 5 1 4 ) 3 2 1 4 1 5 0 e ma i l : s a l e s @v i c o n i c s . c o m www. v i c o n i c s . c o m
VH7200 Humidistat Series For Humidification & Dehumidification Control For Commercial HVAC Applications
(Issue Date September 29, 2008 028-0208 E12)
Product overview The VH7200 humidity controller family is specifically designed for control of humidification and dehumidification equipment such as steam header direct injection, desiccant wheel, or stand alone humidification / dehumidification equipment. The product features a complete embedded humidity control solution with an intuitive backlit LCD display that walks the installer through the configuration steps, making the process extremely simple. Accurate relative humidity control is achieved due to the products unique PI time proportional control algorithm, which virtually eliminates humidity offset associated with traditional, differential-based humidity controllers. All models contain a binary input, which can be set by the user to monitor an electrode humidifier canister service status or may be used as a general purpose service indicator. Models are available which contain more advanced features such as discharge humidity proportional high limit, and indoor humidity setpoint reset based upon outdoor air temperature to conserve energy and eliminate condensation on windows and structure. The additional following documents are available at: www.viconics.com
Information on the BACnet models (VT73xxX5000B), is available on document ITG-VH7200-BAC-Exx
Fig.1 VH7200 series humidistats
Models available
Application Model Number Humidification Output(s) 0-10 Vdc & On/Off 24 Vac 0-10 Vdc On/Off 24 Vac Dehumidification Output On-Off 24 Vac
Model with Outdoor reset & Proportional High Limit
VH7270K1000 (X)
Model with Outdoor reset & Proportional High Limit Models with outdoor reset only
VH7270F1000 (X) VH7200A1000 (X)
On-Off 24 Vac On-Off 24 Vac
(X) model number represents available communication options: X=none for Stand-alone and X=B for BACnet MS-TP.
Features and benefits Features Embedded humidification and dehumidification sequences Embedded internal RH sensor Proportional high limit override (VH7270 Models Only) Humidity setpoint reset based on outdoor temperature Sensor failure protection PI time proportioning algorithm Binary input Unique configuration menu routine Lockable keypad EEPROM memory Optional remote humidity sensors Benefits Simplifies installation and reduce installation costs Eliminates components Prevents costly damage due supply humidity condensation Saves energy and prevents window condensation in colder climates Prevents water damage Increased comfort, accuracy, and energy savings Adds functionality (Trigger service alarms ) Minimizes parameter tampering Tamper proof, no need for humidistat guards No loss configuration parameters Increase flexibility and functionality
www.viconics.com / sales@viconics.com
028-0208 R3_LIT-VH72x0-E12.doc
5 Remote humidity sensor accessories

Model number VH2020W1000 VH2020D10000 S2000D1000 S2020E1000 S1010E1000 Description: Wall mounted humidity transmitter 2% R.H. Duct mounted humidity sensor 2% R.H. Duct mounted outside air temperature sensor Outside air temperature sensor in a NEMA 4 enclosure Outside air temperature sensor, capsule type ( dia., 1 long )
VH2020W1000, remote wall mounted room humidity sensor. (see Fig.8) (wiring diagram next page) VH2020D1000, remote duct mounted humidity sensor c/w junction box. (see Fig.9) (wiring diagram next page) This sensor can be used for: Remote return air humidity sensing with the sensor mounted on the return air duct. Supply air humidity sensor used as a high limit protection.
Fig.9 VH2020W1000
S2020E1000, commercial style outside air temperature sensor in a NEMA 4 enclosure. (see Fig.10) (wiring diagram next page) S1010E1000, residential style outside air temperature sensor, capsule type. (see Fig.11) (wiring diagram next page) These sensors are used for the humidity setpoint reset function based on outdoor temperature.
Fig.10 VH2020D1000 / S2000D1000
INSTALLATION NOTICE ! If replacing an old humidistat, label the wires before removal of the old humidistat. Electronic controls are static sensitive devices. Discharge yourself properly before manipulation and installing the humidistat. Short circuit or wrong wiring may permanently damage the humidistat or the equipment. Anti-short cycling can be set to 0 minutes for equipment that posses their own anti cycling timer. Do not use that value unless the equipment is equipped with such internal timer. Failure to do so can damage the equipment. All VH7200 series humidistat are to be used only as operating controls. Whenever a control failure could lead to personal injury and/or loss of property, it becomes the responsibility of the user to add safety devices and/or alarm system to protect against such catastrophic failures.
Fig.12 S1010E1000
Fig.11 S2020E1000
Viconics is proud to continue to relay the tradition of innovation and value that
R842
has made us recognized leaders in the HVAC controls industry. Many years of research and development has led to the introduction of the first electronic relay for electric baseboards. T186 R842
Join the relay...
Traditional electric baseboard relays operate using the principle of thermal expansion. A bimetal element is heated by a resistor, which then energizes the high voltage circuit. This operation typically takes about 60 seconds and is also applicable when de-energizing. This multiple time delay adds inaccuracy to the control loop, is dependent on ambient temperature, and restricts the types of thermostats that can be used. The new R842 relay, with its sophisticated microcomputer, substantially reduces this long time delay and is not affected by ambient temperature conditions. In addition, it can be used with Viconics own attractive T186 electronic room sensor, providing PI (proportional and integral) control. It can also be used with any electronic analog signal of 0-10 V D.C. from building automation systems or conventional 2-wire low voltage thermostats.
R842
The microcomputer also permits the R842 to achieve a life of greater than 500,000 cycles (typical), even under the high resistive load that this product must handle. This is quite an achievement when compared against conventional electromechanical relays, which have a normal life of 100,000 cycles. The benefit is longer life and reliable operation.
Available Models
Model No. Voltage V a.c. Resistive Rating (A)
R842-120 R842-208
120 208 240 277 347 600
22 22 22 19 18 10
...for life
Innovative Control Solutions
By using sophisticated logic and microcomputer technology, Viconics has reinvented the electric baseboard relay with features and benefits that are sure to please everyone in the supply chain; from OEMs and distributors to contractors and end users. Join us for the relay !
R842-240 R842-277 R842-347 R842-600
Three Possible Control Signals

1. Electromechanical two-wire thermostat
Performance Comparison T186 vs. Electromechanical Thermostat
Internal circuit
RED BLACK BLUE
ON
3 2 1
24 23
Electromechanical thermostat T186 sensor Set point
Temperature C
22 21 20 19
2. Viconics electronic T186 room sensor
Internal circuit
RED
Innovative Control Solutions
ON
Time
3 2 1
BLACK BLUE
R842-Features and Benefits

A
Reliable microcomputer design Long life (greater than 500,000 cycles, typical) Unique compatibility with Viconics own T816 electronic thermostat Improved accuracy, comfort, and energy savings Compatible with all standard 24 V electromechanical thermostats Adds flexibility Constant 10 second time delay Not affected by ambient temperatures Accepts analog signal of 0-10 V D.C. Compatible with electronic and DDC panels Built-in transformer Less inventory to stock Status LED Confirms operation and simplifies troubleshooting Silent operation Will not disturb occupants Direct replacement of competitive models Easy to retrofit Compact enclosure Fits inside baseboard 2 year warranty Assured dependability
3. Analog 10 V. D.C. signal
Internal circuit
RED BLACK BLUE
ON
3 2 1
Tel. (514) 321-5660 | Fax (514) 321-4150 sales@viconics.com | www.viconics.com
R S ES RIIE ER SE 0S 20 82 R8 S S RS ER LE LL OL RO TR NT ON CO RC ER WE OW PO RP CR SC
Viconics is proud to introduce the industrys most versatile and complete line of SCR power controls. The R820 series incorporates a multi-fin, black anodized heatsink with exceptionally high heat dissipation rate as well as a compact control board which can accept all the standard industry control signals. Designed for cost effective modulation of electric loads, the R820 will provide dependable, trouble-free operation for many years.
Features
Microcomputer-based, compact controller board Integrated, self resetting thermostatic protection Multi-input control signal (0-10 VDC, 4-20 ma, 0-135 ohm) Slave output to R810 power switch Factory-installed heatsink Surface or in-panel mounting Three phase models available Status LED CSA approved & UL recognized Two year warranty
Benefits
Saves space in control panel Provides increased security and protection Minimizes inventory and increases flexibility Reduces cost on larger capacity heaters Minimizes labor and wiring costs Increased mounting flexibility Reduces wiring and mounting time Confirms proper operation Can be installed across North America Dependable operation
Typical Application: R820 SCR Power Controller: Room Or Duct Temperature Control Of Electric Duct Heater.
Modulating Room Thermostat T920D Duct Supply Application With S61 Sensor 0 To 10 Vdc Modulating Output OR Modulating Signal From BAS System 0 to 10 Vdc Modulating Output
Specifications
Operating conditions: Thermostatic protection: Input to output voltage isolation: Switching: Power supply: 0C to 80C ( 32F to 176F ) 0 % to 95 % R.H. non-condensing Self resetting. Disables when SCR ambient temp. is above 82C (180F) 4000 Vrms Zero voltage cross firing 24 Vac -15%, +10% 50/60 Hz; 2 VA
R820 Series Ordering Information

Models Available R820-211 R820-213 R820-321 R820-323 R820-341 R820-343 R820-421 R820-423 R820-441 R820-443 R820-471 R820-621 R820-623 R820-641 R820-643 R820-671 Max. Voltage Up to 240 V. Up to 240 V. Up to 347 V. Up to 347 V. Up to 347 V. Up to 347 V. Up to 480 V. Up to 480 V. Up to 480 V. Up to 480 V. Up to 480 V. Up to 600 V. Up to 600 V. Up to 600 V. Up to 600 V. Up to 600 V. Max. Amperage 10 A. 10 A. 25 A. 25 A. 45 A. 45 A. 25 A. 25 A. 45 A. 45 A. 75 A. 25 A. 25 A. 45 A. 45 A. 75 A. Phase 1 Phase 3 Phase 1 Phase 3 Phase 1 Phase 3 Phase 1 Phase 3 Phase 1 Phase 3 Phase 1 Phase 1 Phase 3 Phase 1 Phase 3 Phase 1 Phase
Viconics Electronics Inc. 9245, Langelier Blvd, St-Leonard, Quebec, Canada H1P 3K9
04/05/04 PAM-R820X-E02
www.viconics.com
www.prokontrol.com
VICONICS - 4
Roof t op/He a t pumpCommuni c a t i ngT he r mos t a t s !
I nt r oduc i ngt heVT 7600 Se r i e s
C a n n e d C o mmu n i c a t i n g C o n t r o l s
F e a t u r e s : P r o t o c o l a g n o s t i c a p p r o a c h a l l o w s u s e o n v i r t u a l l y a n y s y s t e m O n e s i mp l e d e v i c e t o i n s t a l l , w i r e , a n d c o mmi s s i o n v s . t r a d i t i o n a l c o n t r o l l e r / s e n s o r c o mb i n a t i o n F a mi l i a r t h e r mo s t a t l o o k &f e e l S i mp l i f i e d l o c a l c o n f i g u r a t i o n u t i l i t y e l i mi n a t e s c o mp l i c a t e d p r o g r a mmi n g U n i q u e e c o n o mi z e r mo d e l L o c a l t i me d o v e r r i d eN E W! D i s c h a r g e a i r s e n s i n g i n p u t . N E W! L o c a l d i g i t a l i n p u t s L N S p l u g i n c o n f i g u r a t i o n u t i l i t y a v a i l a b l e w i t h L o n t a l k mo d e l s f r e e o f c h a r g e S i mp l i f i e d U s e r i n t e r f a c e H i n g e d c i r c u i t b o a r d &r e mo v a b l e t e r mi n a l b l o c k s t o f a c i l i t a t e i n s t a l l a t i o n L a r g e , a t t r a c t i v e b a c k l i t , L C Dd i s p l a y
V T 7 6 0 0
Ro o f t o p /He a t p u mp T h e r mo s t a t
VT 7600 Se r i e sRo o f t o p/He a tpump Co mmuni c a t i ng T he r mo s t a t s !

O. A . S
MI X E D A I R
C o n t r o l C o n n e c t i o n s
F a nS t a t u s F i l t e rS t a t u s
N E W!
Ne wF u n c t i o n a l i t y D i s c h a r g ea i r t e r mi n a l a n da u x . o u t p u t o na l l mo d e l s . E n c h a n c en e t wo r kf u n c t i o n a l i t yi nb o t hL o n t a l k& B A C n e t MS / T Pmo d e l s . L o c a l o c c u p a n c yt i me do v e r r i d e
A n a l o g Ou t p u t
S i mp l i f i e d HMI
I n t e r n a l P o i n t s R o o mT e mp e r a t u r e T i me do c c u p a n c yo v e r r i d e( a d j u s t a b l e ) H e a t i n ga n dc o o l i n gs e t p o i n t s 7d a y( 2o r 4e v e n t )s c h e d u l e( V T 7 6 5 2a n dV T 7 6 5 6s e r i e so n l y ) C o mmo nA p p l i c a t i o n s : -S t a g e dr o o f t o pu n i t s -H e a t p u mp s -S p l i t s y s t e ms -P T A Cu n i t s -U n i t V e n t i l a t o r s
U n i q u e5b u t t o nme n ud r i v e n u s e r i n t e r f a c es i mp l i f i e s p r o g r a mmi n g& c o mmi s s i o n i n g
V i c o n i c s E l e c t r o n i c s I n c . 9 2 4 5L a n g e l i e r B l v d . , S t . L e o n a r d , Q u e b e c C a n a d aH 1 P 3 K 9 T e l . : ( 5 1 4 ) 3 2 1 5 6 6 0F a x : ( 5 1 4 ) 3 2 1 4 1 5 0
I S O9 0 0 1&I S O1 4 0 0 1C E R T I F I E D
e ma i l : s a l e s @v i c o n i c s . c o m w w w . v i c o n i c s . c o m
C C S 1 4 0 2 0 7 E 0 2
N S ES IE RI T ER ST SE IS NI TS T
ELECTRONIC THERMOSTATS T900 Unistat Series Thermostat
The Unistat series offers exceptional value and versatility in most room and supply temperature control applications. By combining advanced PI control algorithms with microprocessor based electronics, it is possible to provide precise temperature control that rivals DDC performance at prices most often associated with electro-mechanical or pneumatic controls. Installation and troubleshooting is very simple since there is no programming involved. The various parameters are adjusted by simply setting the internal dipswitches to the appropriate position. Models are available with one or two outputs, which covers most room control applications. In addition, further energy savings can be achieved by using day / night models. All models are shown in the table below:
Models
T901D T920D T921D T926D T950D T951D
Main Output:
On / Off 24 Vac Analog 0 to 10 Vdc Analog 0 to 10 Vdc Analog 0 to 10 Vdc Modulating floating Modulating floating
Second Output:
On / Off 24 Vac Analog 0 to 10 Vdc
On / Off 24 Vac
Features
PI algorithm provides precise temperature control Available with one or two outputs Dipswitch adjustable. Parameters such as actuator timing, direct/reverse acting, deadband, etc are easily set using internal dipswitches Available with day/night mode Models with proportional outputs contain minimum and maximum output adjustments Remote sensor capability Models for VAV applications can perform heating/cooling changeover
Benefits
Increased comfort and energy savings Meets most room temperature control applications Saves installation and troubleshooting time
Additional energy savings can be realized Permits the adjustment of minimum and maximum positions in VAV and outdoor air damper applications Adds versatility and minimizes models to stock Suitable for VAV systems that use both hot and cold air through the box
www.prokontrol.com
VICONICS -
Typical Applications:
Floating Actuator 0 to 10 Vdc Analog Actuator Supply Sensor
80 70 60
90 F
On / Off Valve N.O. or N.C.
90 80 70 60 50 F
50
T951 VAV with on / off reheat

Changeover Sensor 0 to 10 Vdc Analog Actuator
T920 Mixed air control

0 to 10 Vdc Analog Cooling Valve 0 to 10 Vdc Analog Heating Valve
80 70 60
90 80 F 70 60
90 F
50
50
T920 VAV damper control with changeover
T926 Heating and cooling valves
Increased Energy Savings

Conventional electro-mechanical and pneumatic thermostats waste energy
Comfort Temperature Temperature
Time Viconics PI electronic controls do not waste energy
Advanced PI control algorithms provide precise temperature control and eliminated wasted heating or cooling energy caused by the typical On-Off cycling in conventional thermostats. As a result the room occupant is able to adjust the setpoint or desired temperature to the optimum comfortable setting. The result is 5% to 10% energy savings with improved comfort.
Specifications
Operating Conditions: Thermostat Sensor: Resolution: Accuracy ( Typical, Calibrated ): Scales: Outputs: Power: 0 C to 50 C ( 32 F to 122 F ) 0 % to 95 % R.H. non-condensing Local 47 K NTC thermistor 0.1 C ( 0.2 F ) 0.2 C ( 0.4 F ) 10 C to 32 C or 50 F to 90 F for vertical mounting Isolated Triac: 30 Vac at A max. & 0 to 10 Vadc into 2K min. 24 VAC -15%, +10% 50/60 Hz; 2 VA
www.viconics.com sales@viconics.com
PAM-UNIST-E01
Specifications and equipment are subject to change without prior notice Viconics Electronics Inc. 9245, Langelier Blvd, St-Leonard, Quebec, Canada H1P 3K9
www.prokontrol.com
VICONICS -
www.prokontrol.com
VICONICS - 4
REMOTE TEMPERATURE SENSORS FOR CONTROL & CHANGEOVER APPLICATIONS S60 S70
DESCRIPTION The model S60, S70, S80, S90 sensors are part of Viconics' Micro-Stat & Unistat Series low voltage RHVAC room temperature and humidity controls line. APPLICATIONS The sensors are designed for wall, duct, immersion or changeover applications. Remote room temperature control. Remote control of duct return air temperature. Remote control of duct supply air temperature. Limitation of supply temperature. Auto changeover of VAV damper operation with supply air temperature. Hot water temperature control. Auto changeover of valve operation with supply water temperature. WIRING Wire lengths may exceed 100 feet without causing temperature errors, due to the high 47,000 ohm resistance. Avoid running long sensor leads closed to, or in the same conduit as, high voltage and power wiring. Four sensors may be wired in series / parallel combination in order to obtain average temperature readings. SPECIFICATIONS Operating Conditions: -18 C to 82 C ( 0 F to 180 F ) - 0% to 95% R.H. non-condensing Sensor: Interchangeability: Accuracy: Local 47 K NTC thermistor 1 C @ 25 C ( 1.8 F @ 77 F ) 2 C ( for 18 to 82 C ) 3.6 F ( for 0 to 180 F ) S90 IMMERSION SENSOR This sensor is for the control of hot or cold water, or other fluids. It can be mounted in a standard well or strap mounted to a pipe. It is constructed of 316 stainless steel. S60 DUCT SENSOR Duct sensor adapter for thermostat. This sensor can be mounted directly onto the back of thermostats. This transforms the thermostats into duct mounted thermostats. S70 DUCT SENSOR WITH JUNCTION BOX This sensor can be mounted directly onto the supply or return of the ventilation duct depending on the application. The thermostat can then be mounted on the wall or a remote panel.
S80 S90
S80 ROOM SENSOR This sensor can be mounted in any remote location. The thermostat can then be mounted on the wall or a remote panel.
www.prokontrol.com
VICONICS -
ELECTRONIC HUMIDISTAT: H200

ONE OR TWO STAGES
DESCRIPTION The H200 series low voltage, microcomputer-based PI (proportional and integral) humidistats are designed for accurate humidification and/or dehumidification control in non-corrosive commercial applications such as: hospitals, schools, office buildings, retail stores, museums, computer rooms, etc. The H200 series is available with one or two outputs for maximum flexibility. Outputs can be of the following type: proportional, on/off, and pulse width modulation (PWM). In addition, a wide variety of mounting configurations is available. Sensing options include remote duct and room as well as integral room and duct. Setpoint adjustment can be either concealed or exposed, adding even more versatility to the product. Exposed models feature internally selectable minimum and maximum setpoint knob stops. In order to facilitate periodic recalibration, the H200 series contains a unique autocal key, which permits instant recalibration (see dimension drawing on page 5 for location).
Each humidistat is computer calibrated and factory programmed with default parameters. All control parameters (such as proportional band, stage differential, etc.) may be changed in the field with the H263 programming tool without having to remove the thermostat cover. The H263 also doubles as a diagnostic tool and indicates the status of all the inputs and outputs, and will reduce troubleshooting time by quickly identifying the specific problem.
Fig.1: Wall mounted humidistat
Features
Microcomputer-based design with PI algorithm One or two outputs On/off and/or proportional outputs Direct or reverse acting outputs Integrated and remote sensing Autocal button Concealed or exposed set point Ouput signal to digital indicating devices Optional H263 diagnostic tool with digital display Sensor failure protection CE approved
Benefits
Exceptional accuracy Controls humidification and dehumidification equipment Greater flexibility Controls humidification and dehumidification equipment Larger choice of mounting options Permits instant recalibration Can be used in a large variety of environments Increases functionality of product Simplifies troubleshooting Prevent water dammage Can be sold in European markets
04/06/04 LIT-H200X-E02 H200.doc
www.prokontrol.com
VICONICS - 26
ELECTRONIC HUMIDISTAT: H270

ONE OR TWO STAGES HUMIDITY SUPPLY HIGH LIMIT OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE RESET DESCRIPTION The H270 series low voltage, microcomputer-based PI (proportional and integral) humidistats are designed for accurate humidification and/or dehumidification control in commercial applications such as: hospitals, schools, office buildings, retail stores, museums, computer rooms, etc. The H270 series is available with one or two outputs for maximum flexibility. Outputs can be of the following type: proportional, on/off, and pulse width modulation (PWM). Two additional inputs are provided in order to perform unique functions: humidity setpoint reset based on outdoor air temperature and proportional high limit override. The former function minimizes condensation on window surfaces during cold outdoor temperatures by automatically lowering the humidity setpoint as the outdoor temperature drops. The latter function improves accuracy and safety by throttling back the humidifier control output if the humidity level reaches unacceptably high levels. There are many different types of mounting configurations available. Sensing options include remote duct and room as well as integral room and duct. Setpoint adjustment can be either concealed or exposed, adding even more versatility to the product. Exposed models feature internally selectable minimum and maximum setpoint knob stops. In order to facilitate periodic recalibration, the H270 series contains a unique autocal key, which permits instant recalibration (see dimension drawing on page 5 for location). Each humidistat is computer calibrated and factory programmed with default parameters. All control parameters (such as proportional band, stage differential, etc.) may be changed in the field with the H263 programming tool without having to remove the thermostat cover. The H263 also doubles as a diagnostic tool and indicates the status of all the inputs and outputs, and will reduce troubleshooting time by quickly identifying the specific problem.
Fig.1 Wall mounted humidistat
Features
Microcomputer-based design with PI algorithm One or two outputs On/off and/or proportional outputs Direct or reverse acting outputs Integrated and remote sensing Autocal button Concealed or exposed set point Ouput signal to digital indicating devices Optional H263 diagnostic tool with digital display Sensor failure protection Humidity setpoint reset based on outdoor temp. Proportional high limit override CE approved
Benefits
Exceptional accuracy Controls humidification and dehumidification equipment Greater flexibility Controls humidification and dehumidification equipment Larger choice of mounting options Permits instant recalibration Can be used in a large variety of environments Increases functionality of product Simplifies troubleshooting Prevent water dammage Prevents window condensation in colder climates Prevents costly damage due to over-humidification Can be sold in European markets
1
www.prokontrol.com
VICONICS - 28
HONEYWELL ELECTRIC
VisionPRO 8000-touchscreen programmable The Digital Round-T8775 The Standard Round-T87F Temperature Controllers Heavy Duty thermostats Multi Stage T-stat & base Commercial Programmable T7350 Proportional T-stats Temperature Controllers-Mech. & Electronic Humidity Controllers Damper Motors&Actuators-electric Valves Linkages Valve Actuators HONEYWELL - 1 HONEYWELL - 2, 3 HONEYWELL - 4, 5 HONEYWELL - 6 HONEYWELL - 7, 8 HONEYWELL - 9 to 11 HONEYWELL - 12, 13 HONEYWELL - 14, 15 HONEYWELL - 16 to 22 HONEYWELL - 23 to 29 HONEYWELL - 30 to 38 HONEYWELL - 39 to 44 HONEYWELL - 45, 46 HONEYWELL - 47 to 50
HONEYWELL PNEUMATICS
Pneumatic t-stat covers & Accessories Universal Thermostat Guards Thermostats & RelaysTP-970 Humidistats Receiver Controllers Selector Relays Pneumatic Accessories Pneumatic Valves Damper Actuators HONEYWELL - 51 to 58 HONEYWELL - 59 to 62 HONEYWELL - 63 to 68 HONEYWELL - 69 HONEYWELL - 70, 71 HONEYWELL - 72 HONEYWELL - 73 to 77 HONEYWELL - 78 to 81 HONEYWELL - 82
Maximum Comfort Has Never Been Easier

The NewVisionPRO 8000 Thermostat
Large, Clear Display with backlighting shows the current and set temperatures and time even in the dark. Menu Driven Programming makes set up effortless. Beautiful Ergonomic Design smart and sophisticated to match your lifestyle. Touchscreen Interaction
Programmable Fan offers increased air quality when combined with a Honeywell Whole-house Air Cleaner.
Real Time Clock keeps time during power failures and automatically updates to daylight savings.
Accuracy of +/- 1 degree
Saving Changes Notification lets you know your changes have been saved.
Armchair Programming allows you to remove the thermostat from the wall for programming.
Speed Same-Schedule Programming no need to copy multiple days.
Various HOLD Options allow you to override the program schedule as desired.
Change/Check Reminders let you know when to service or replace filters, batteries, etc.
www.prokontrol.com
HONEYWELL -
4HE2OUND-ERCURY &REE4HERMOSTAT
)-02/6%$$%3)'.-!+%3)4"%44%24(!.%6%2
%LECTRONIC3WITCH ,i>ViiV vii> viìv>Vi %ASY-4O-3EE Model /iEasy-to-See model has an enlarged scale and raised designations that make seeing and setting tiii>i i>i>ii
0ROVEN0ERFORMANCE VV>V>` i>L> >ìii iLii i>VVi vii
0RECISION!CCURACY ,i>Liii>i Vi>i ii>i}
#LASSIC$ESIGN /i,ì `> i>
9EAR7ARRANTY
0ART.UMBERSn53
/n /n /n
0ART.UMBERSn#ANADA
/nx /n n
3TAGES
i>" i>
i>

$ISPLAY3IZE
->`>` ->`>` >}iq >ii
5PGRADE/PTIONS
i>}>`V}vi>>L\ 6*,"n /VVii> *}>>Li /i>
,EARN-ORE
>vii >INFO HONEYWELLCOM
!UTOMATIONAND#ONTROL3OLUTIONS i1-\ ii nx}>i ì6>i] xx{ nnx

>>`>\ iii` x>Vi /]">6{< iiV
x{ Ma îii>>V
T775 Electronic Standalone Controller
We BUILT IT, SO YOU DON'T HAVE TO
No Assembly Required
Built-In Control
With The T775, Youll Know You Have Exactly What You Need, Because All The Features Are Self-Contained
Some controllers require you to piece together separate modules to get the control features you want, and those added relays can, well, add up. So can the added LCD display, an added transformer module and more. The Honeywell T775 Electronic Standalone Controller puts an end to add-on costs. All the features you need for a variety of applications are built right into the T775, including the LCD display. You wont have to worry about having the right modules in stock or needing to piece them together. The T775 has it all. Configurable Minimum Off Time If needed, setting a minimum off time can protect equipment and reduce the need for a separate time delay device. Sensor Calibration Calibrate input sensors up to +/-10 F. This can be used to compensate for resistance drops in wire leads, to offset the input temperature for sensor location and more. Fewer Models Fourteen T775 models replace 38 Series 1000 models, so youll reduce inventory and eliminate the headache of trying to choose the right model.
Its All Inside

Easy-To-Use Graphical Interface Operating the new T775 is as easy as operating your cell phone. The easy-to-use, intuitive programming will save you time on every job. Internal Time Clock Scheduler The Setback and Disable Output options, controlled by the built-in scheduler or digital input, will help save energy during unoccupied times and give you more control of the equipment without needing to purchase an additional time clock. Up To Two Independent Modulating Outputs Each output can be individually configured for 0-10 Vdc, 2-10 Vdc, 4-20 mA or Series 90, so a single device can handle many field requirements to save you time selecting the right control for the job. NEMA 4X Enclosure Option Certain models are offered with NEMA 4X enclosures to protect them from water and corrosion. They can be installed in animal confinement areas, green houses, washdown areas, swimming pools and other similar locations, giving you the control you need for harsh locations.
Special Models
Several T775 models are designed to ensure your control needs can still be met with a single unit for special applications. Universal Model To Control Pressure, Humidity Or Temperature The T775U Universal model has an easy setup for configuring control of pressure or humidity with a 0-10 Vdc or 4-20 mA input. Control humidity with % RH displayed, or control pressure with in. w.c., psi, Pa, or kPa displayed. CO2 senors are also compatible but reading for sensor is displayed in percent instead of ppm. Outputs include two modulating and two relay outputs that can each have their own setpoint. The T775U even offers the ability to reset the output based on outdoor temperature handy when you need to reduce window condensation when setting humidity levels. With the T775U, youll enjoy complete versatility in a single control that gives you the freedom to do what the job requires. Special Sequencing Model For Staging Up To 12 Relays With Up To
Modulating High Or Low Limit Control If you need to protect your coil from freezing or your equipment from overheating, models offering this feature give you the ability to adjust your control temperature at sensor A to protect equipment at sensor B. You get consistent control while still protecting your equipment. Optional Configurable Integral And Derivative Times Standard on every device, this feature delivers pinpoint control. PI or PID control on modulating outputs is set up by default to behave just like the previous T775 Series 1000, but now you can adjust reaction times and behavior, giving you more control. Reset Models With Simplified Setup Reset programming has never been easier. Simply enter the high and low control temperatures and the corresponding high and low outdoor temperatures, and youre done. As your outside temperature gets colder, the setpoint temperature automatically adjusts to save energy.
Two Setpoints The sequencer model has four stages, plus you can add up to two optional 4-stage expansion relay modules for 8- or 12-stage operation. The flexible setup allows you to configure these stages for heating, cooling or both. Because sequencer models operate up to 12 stages, you can control multiple low-mass boilers, chillers, electric heat and other equipment from a single controller. Special Boiler Model The T775 boiler model offers features including dedicated pump output, staging for up to 12 relays, digital output alarm, pump exercise, pump pre-purge and post-purge, warm weather shut-down, built-in scheduler, displayed run time, equal run time, first-on, first-off and more. With a single control, you can handle multi-boiler applications. The T775 boiler model can be used on chillers as well.
T775 Electronic Remote Temperature Controllers

Models for Standard Applications
Product Number T775A2009 T775B2016 T775B2032 T775B2024 T775B2040 T775M2006 T775M2022 T775M2048 T775M2014 T775M2030 T775R2035 T775R2043 T775R2027 T775R2001 T775R2019
1 2
Description Standard Standard-NEMA 4X Standard Standard-NEMA 4X Standard Modulating Modulating-NEMA 4X Modulating Modulating-NEMA 4X Modulating Reset option Reset option Reset option Reset option Reset option
Replaces T775A1001 T775A1019, T775B1000 T775C1009, T775D1008 T775A1027, T775A1035, T775B1018, T775B1026, T775B1040
Relay Outputs 1 SPDT 2 SPDT 2 SPDT 4 SPDT 4 SPDT None 2 SPDT
Analog Outputs 4-20 mA, 0-10 Vdc, 2-10 Vdc, & Series 90
Floating Output1
Sensor Inputs Available 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
# Sensors Included 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2
T775E1015, T775E1023, T775E1056, T775E1064, T775E1098 T775G1005, T775G1013, T775G1021, T775G1039 T775E1114, T775F1022, T775F1055, T775F1089 T775J1001, T775J1076 T775J1019, T775J1027, T775J1035 T775J1043, T775J1050, T775J1068
2 SPDT 4 SPDT 4 SPDT 2 SPDT None 2 SPDT 4 SPDT 4 SPDT
2 2 2 2 2
One floating output eliminates two relay outputs. 50021579-001 included with non-NEMA 4X models, and T775-SENS-WR included with NEMA 4X models.
Models for Special Applications

Product Number T775P20034 T775L2007 T775U2006 T775S2008
1
Description Special boiler with reset Stage sequencer with reset option Universal humidity, pressure, etc. Relay expansion module
Replaces
Relay Outputs 4 SPDT 4 SPDT2
Analog Outputs 4-20 mA, 0-10 Vdc, 2-10 Vdc, & Series 90
Digital Output 1
Dedicated Pump Output
Sensor Inputs Available 3 2 23
# Sensors Included 3 1
Expandable1
Output Reset
H775A1006, H775A1022, H775A1048, H775A1063, H775B1005, H775C1004, H775D1003, H775E1002
2 SPDT 4 SPDT
1 or 2
Use with T77P or T775L
4 or 8 more relays possible with T775S2008 relay expansion module(s). 2 Up to 2 independent non-sequenced relays are also available. 3 First input configurable for temperature, 0-10 Vdc, or 4-20 mA; second input temperature only for reset. 4 Includes dedicated pump output, equal run time, pump pre-purge and post-purge, WWSD and more.
Make The Switch

Whether youre replacing an older control or working on a new project, Honeywell T775 controls are a smart choice.
Series 41 and 81 Modutrol IV Motors

PRODUCT DATA
FEATURES
Used to replace M445, M845 and M865 motors. Models rated for 25 lb.-in. or 60 lb.-in. torque. Integral spring return returns motor to normal position (open or closed) when power is interrupted. Oil immersed motor and gear train for reliable performance and long life. Wiring box provides NEMA 3 weather protection. Motor operates from 24 Vac. Models are available with factory installed transformer, or an internal transformer can be field added. Quick-connect terminals are standardscrew terminal adapter is available. Adapter bracket for matching shaft height of older motors is standard with TRADELINE motors. TRADELINE motors have field adjustable stroke (90 to 160).
APPLICATION
The Series 41 and Series 81 Modutrol IV Motors are 2-position (line- and low- voltage, respectively) spring-return motors. They are used to operate dampers or valves in applications where it is necessary or desirable to have the controlled element return to the starting position in the event of power failure or interruption.
Die-cast aluminum housing. Motors are designed for either normally open or normally closed valves and dampers. Integral auxiliary switches are available factory mounted, or can be field added to TRADELINE models. TRADELINE motors may operate valve linkages from the power end or auxiliary end shafts for normally closed or normally open valve applications.
Contents
Application ........................................................................ 1 Features ........................................................................... 1 Specifications ................................................................... 2 Ordering Information ........................................................ 2 Installation ........................................................................ 4 Settings and Adjustments ................................................. 7 Operation and Checkout .................................................. 10 Replacement .................................................................... 11
U.S. Registered Trademark Copyright 2000 Honeywell All Rights Reserved
63- 2187- 3
www.prokontrol.com
HONEYWELL - 35
Series 90 Modutrol IV Motors

PRODUCT DATA
FEATURES
Directly replaces M934A,D, M941, M944A,C,D, M945A,D,F, M954, M965, and M975 motors. Oil-immersed motor and gear train for reliable performance and long life. Integral junction box provides NEMA 3 weather protection. Motor and circuitry operate from 24 Vac. Models available with factory installed transformer, or a field-added internal transformer. Quick-connect terminals standardscrew terminal adapter available. Adapter bracket for matching shaft height of older motors standard with TRADELINE motors. Field adjustable stroke (90 to 160) models available. Nominal timing of 30 seconds for 90 stroke and 60 seconds for 160 stroke standard. Other timings available. Die-cast aluminum housing. Integral auxiliary switches available factory mounted, or can be field added to TRADELINE models. Integral spring returns motor shaft to normal position (fully open or fully closed, depending on model) upon power interruption. Field addable interface modules can be mounted in the junction box to upgrade the motor to Series 70 (electronic) control. TRADELINE spring return motors can operate valve linkages from power end or auxiliary end shafts for normally closed or normally open valve applications.
APPLICATION
The Series 90 Modutrol IV Motors are spring return and non-spring return modulating proportional control motors. Use these motors with controllers that provide a Series 90 output to operate dampers or valves.
Contents
Application ........................................................................ 1 Features ........................................................................... 1 Specifications ................................................................... 2 Ordering Information ........................................................ 2 Installation ........................................................................ 5 Settings and Adjustments ................................................. 8 Operation .......................................................................... 10 Replacement .................................................................... 12
U.S. Registered Trademark Copyright 2002 Honeywell All Rights Reserved
63-2190-3
www.prokontrol.com
HONEYWELL - 37
V5011A,B,F,G,H,J Single-Seated Valves

FEATURES
Sizes range from one-half inch to six inches. Available with threaded or flanged pipe connections. Direct- or reverse-acting models. Valve designs provide equal percentage flow characteristic for close control of water and glycol solutions, and linear flow characteristic for close control of steam. Spring-loaded, self-adjusting packing. Stainless steel stem prevents corrosion that could damage the packing. V5011G Models available with metal-to-metal seating for high differential pressure applications.
APPLICATION
The V5011 is a single-seated valve for control of steam, water, and glycol solutions (up to 50% concentration) in heating or air conditioning applications. These valves are used in two-position and modulating control systems. These valves are not suitable for combustible gas service.
Contents
Application .......................................................................... Features.............................................................................. Specifications...................................................................... Ordering Information ........................................................... Installation........................................................................... Checkout............................................................................. 1 1 2 2 7 8
U.S. Registered Trademark Copyright 1998 Honeywell Inc. All rights Reserved
www.prokontrol.com
HONEYWELL - 39
60- 2126- 3
V5013B,C,F Three-Way Mixing and Diverting Valves

PRODUCT DATA
FEATURES
Mixing or diverting models. Bronze body with threaded connections or cast iron body with flanged-end connections. Stainless steel stem and replaceable seats. Spring-loaded, self-adjusting packing. Constant total flow throughout full stem travel. Linear flow characteristic for each port, providing constant total flow control of water or glycol solutions (up to 50% concentration). Suitable for pneumatic or electric/electronic actuation. Repacking kits available for field servicing.
APPLICATION
The V5013 is a three-way valve for control of hot water, cold water, and glycol solutions (up to 50% concentration) in heating or cooling applications. These valves are used in two-position or modulating control systems. They can be used for mixing service (V5013B and F) to direct flow from one of two inlets to a common outlet or for diverting service (V5013C) to direct flow from a common inlet to one of two outlets. Mixing and diverting valves are not interchangeable.
Contents
Application ........................................................................... 1 Features .............................................................................. 1 Specifications ...................................................................... 2 Ordering Information ........................................................... 2 Installation ........................................................................... 4 Operation ............................................................................ 6 Checkout ............................................................................. 6
60-2129-4
www.prokontrol.com
HONEYWELL - 41
V5013N Three-Way Threaded Globe Valve

PRODUCT DATA
FEATURES
Red brass body with NPT-threaded connections. Stainless steel stem and brass plug. Low seat leakage rate (=0.05 percent of Cv). Spring-loaded, self-adjusting packing. 50:1 rangeability per VDI/VDE 2173. Constant total flow throughout full stem travel. Accurate positioning to ensure state of the art temperature control. Sizes range from 1/2 in. to 2 in. Suitable for pneumatic or electric/electronic actuation. Repack and rebuild kits available for field servicing.
APPLICATION
The V5013N is a three-way threaded globe valve that controls hot water, cold water, and glycol solutions (up to 50 percent concentration) in heating or cooling HVAC applications. The valve is used for mixing service to direct flow from one of two inlets to a common outlet in two-position or modulating control systems.
U.S. Registered Trademark Copyright 2003 Honeywell International Inc. All Rights Reserved
63-2549-3
www.prokontrol.com
HONEYWELL - 43
ML6874 Valve Actuator

PRODUCT DATA
FEATURES
Allows the use of one common transformer power supply for multiple actuators and controllers Self-contained, motorized valve linkage Linkage self-adjusts to valve stroke of up to 19mm (3/4") Multipose mounting Strong valve seat closing force 710 Newton (160 lbs.) Compact size for easy installation in confined area Field-configurable DIP switches for Direct/Reverse action One device for either Vac or Vdc power supply application Electronic current sensing provides internal protection and positive full closing force
GENERAL
The ML6874 is a self-contained, self-adjusting, linear motorized linkage that mounts directly onto V5011 two-way or V5013 three-way valves and provides up to 19 mm (3/4") of linear travel (stem lift). For use with low voltage 3-wire SPDT Series 20 (on-off) or Series 60 (floating) controllers.
Field-addable auxiliary switches available
Contents
Specifications..........................................2 Order information................................... 2 Installation.............................................. 3 Wiring Schematics..................................5 Operation and Checkout.........................6
PCY 02/98 Honeywell Ltd. 1998 Printed in Canada
95C-10865
www.prokontrol.com
HONEYWELL - 47
HP970 and TP970 Series Standard Covers and Accessories

SPECIFICATION DATA
FEATURES
Compact cover design for aesthetic appearance Available with or without setpoint opening for tamper resistance Satin chrome, bright chrome, satin brass, bright brass, or beige finish for a variety of decors Setpoint only, thermometer only, both setpoint and thermometer, or blank display for a variety of applications Available with large-scale numerals for the visually impaired
GENERAL
These covers and accessories are for use with the HP970 and TP970 Series Humidistats, Thermostats, and Sensors. The covers protect mechanisms from dust and damage and are designed for either vertical or horizontal mounting.
Copyright 1996 Honeywell Inc. All Rights Reserved
www.prokontrol.com
HONEYWELL - 51
77-1003-1
HP970 AND TP970 SERIES STANDARD COVERS AND ACCESSORIES
SPECIFICATIONS
Covers
Material: Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene Dimensions: TP979 Dual Thermostat Covers: 3-3/8 in (86 mm) high by 3-7/8 in. (99 mm) wide by 1-7/8 in. (48 mm) deep Other Covers: 3-1/4 in. (83 mm) high by 2 in. (51 mm) wide by 1-5/8 in. (42 mm) deep
Mounting:
VERTICAL HORIZONTAL
DAY/AUTO LEVER SLOT (CLOSED WITH REMOVABLE INSERT ON ALL HORIZONTAL COVERS) DAY/AUTO LEVER SLOT (OPEN ON ALL VERTICAL COVERS) SETPOINT SLOT (COVERS WITH "CLOSED" SLOT HAVE REMOVABLE, TAMPER-RESISTANT INSERT)
C8033
Bright Chrome Covers:

Part Number 14004787-XXX1 Honeywell Logo Setpoint Slot Open Display (Unit) Cover Thermometer None Setpoint None Mounting Vert 100 Horiz Closed Mounting Vert Horiz
RC158
60-90 (F)
60-90 (F)
111
RC159
When ordering, use complete part number including three-digit suffix.
77-1003-1
www.prokontrol.com
HONEYWELL - 52
HP970 AND TP970 SERIES STANDARD COVERS AND ACCESSORIES
Accessories
305965 Gage:
14002430-001 Heavy Duty Thermostat Guard: (Not applicable for TP979 Dual Thermostats)
RC182
RC181
CCT729 Gage Port Needle:
14004437-001 (Satin Chrome), -002 (Beige Plastic) DAY/ AUTO Cover Inserts:
RC168
STAT COVER
SETPOINT SLOT
CCT735A Thermostat Tool:
DAY/AUTO COVER INSERT
RC183
RC176
14004438-001 (Satin Chrome), -002 (Beige Plastic) Setpoint Cover Inserts; 14004437-XXX Setpoint Cover Inserts for TP979 Dual Thermostats:
14002424-002, -003 Aspirating Wall Boxes and AK3970 Aspirator Box Cover: Box and Cover ordered separately (see TP970 Series Thermostats Aspirating Wall Box Specification Data 77-9830)
COVER SETPOINT SLOT

SETPOINT COVER INSERT
RC184 C8034
14004439-001 Setpoint Extension (for Thermostats Only):
COVER
RC177
SETPOINT ADJUSTMENT SETPOINT COVER INSERT
RC178
C8035 RC185
www.prokontrol.com
HONEYWELL - 57
77-1003-1
TG509, TG510, TG511, TG512 Versaguard Universal Thermostat Guards

PRODUCT DATA
FEATURES
Available in four sizes: mini, small, medium and large, to fit virtually all thermostats. Used in both new and existing applications. Constructed of smoke-colored transparent polycarbonate, off-white opaque polycarbonate, opaque plastic, clear plastic or off-white painted steel. TG509 TG510A Opaque plastic guards match commercial interior decorating schemes. Can be mounted on the wall or an exposed junction box. Smoke-colored transparent or off-white opaque polycarbonate ring base without wallplate, or opaque plastic wallplate and plastic ring base. All models include a guard cover, tumbler lock, two keys and a Honeywell logo insert. TG509F,G models permit thermostat calibration without ring base removal. TG511D TG512B Provision for Honeywell logo (included with all models) or OEM logo on guard cover. Ideal for office areas, lobbies, supermarkets, restaurants, clinics, hospitals, convenience stores, and similar applications. Tamper-resistant lock; key can be removed only when in the locked position. Vertical or horizontal mount. Guard base vents allow airflow for optimum thermostat performance.
GENERAL
The Versaguard Universal Thermostat Guards cover wall thermostats and protect against tampering, damage and unauthorized adjustment of thermostat settings.
CONTENTS
General ............................................................................... Features .............................................................................. Specifications ...................................................................... Ordering Information ........................................................... Installation ........................................................................... Checkout ............................................................................. 1 1 2 2 6 11
www.prokontrol.com
HONEYWELL - 59
68-0104-4
Pneumatic Thermostats
TP970 Pneumatic Thermostat
Adapter plate in thermostat kits covers existing thermostat wall mark. Backplate has molded air connectionsno separate fittings needed. Universal locking cover with satin chrome finish and horizontal, vertical, or blank window options with Convertastat and modernization kitsother covers available. Airflow Usage: 0.011 scfm (5.2 mL/s) Capacity: high Mounting Type: Wall Number of Pipes: 2 Remote Bulb: No Sensor Element: bimetal Setpoint: Single Storage Temperature: 150 F maximum; 66 C maximum Operating Temperature: 100 F maximum; 38 C maximum Throttling Range: 2 F to 10 F (factory set 4 F); 1 C to 5 C (factory set 2 C) Maximum Operating Pressure: 25 psi; 170 kPa Dimensions: 3 1/4 in. high, 2 in. wide, 1 5/8 in. deep; 83 mm high, 51 mm wide, 41 mm deep. Accessories: 14001865-001 Filter Cartridge Assembly 14002430-001 Heavy Duty Thermostat Guard 14004447-001 Setpoint Cam Assembly 14004447-002 Setpoint Cam Assembly 14004459-001 Scaleplate Bag Assembly
Two-pipe, single setpoint, pneumatic thermostat used to provide proportional control of pneumatic valves and damper actuators in heating and air conditioning systems. Replacement kits are available for Johnson, Powers, Robertshaw, Barber-Colman, and older Honeywell two-pipe pneumatic thermostats. Honeywells best pneumatic thermostaticTP970 series. Shock-resistant, suspension-mounted thermostats provide dependable performance and responsiveness year in and year out. Pilot operated for high capacity. Direct Acting (DA) and Reverse Acting (RA) models available. Wide throttling range models for Zero Energy Band (ZEB) operation are available. Limited Control Range (LCR) models available.
ORDER NUMBER TP970A2012 TP970A2038 TP970A2053 TP970A2145 TP970A2152 TP970A2234 TP970A2242 *TP970A2259 *TP970A2283 TP970A2309 TP970A2317 TP970B2077 TP970B2150 TP970B2166 *TP970B2182 *TP970B2216
Application Type Heating
Action Direct
Setpoint Range 40 F to 70 F 4 C to 21 C 60 F to 90 F 16 C to 32 C
Includes Thermostat, universal adapter, and universal satin chrome cover
Comments Order Cover Separately Modernization Kit Convertastat Kit
Thermostat, universal adapter, wall plate and beige cover Heating Direct 60 F to 90 F 16 C to 32 C Thermostat and satin chrome cover Thermostat and beige cover Thermostat, universal adapter wall plate and satin chrome cover Thermostat and satin chrome cover Cooling Reverse Thermostat, universal adapter, wall plate and beige cover Thermostat, universal adapter, wall plate and beige cover Thermostat and satin chrome cover Thermostat and beige cover
Convertastat Kit TRADELINE Kit Convertastat Kit TRADELINE Kit Convertastat Kit Convertastat Kit TRADELINE Kit
A Modernization Kit converts an older Honeywell or competitive one- or two-pipe thermostat to a TP970 series thermostat. A Convertastat Kit converts a new one- or two-pipe competitive thermostat to a TP970 series thermostat. A TRADELINE Kit can be used in a new installation or to convert a newer one- or two-pipe competitive thermostat to a TP970 series thermostat
* TRADELINE model SUPER TRADELINE model Some products are available only through Honeywell Authorized Distributors. 476
www.prokontrol.com
HONEYWELL - 63
TP971 Pneumatic Day/Night Thermostat
Airflow Usage: 0.011 scfm (5.2 mL/s) Application Type: Wall Thermostat, Day/Night operation Mounting Type: Wall Remote Bulb: No Sensor Element: bimetal Setpoint: Day/Night Setpoint Range: Day: 60 F to 90 F; 16 C to 32 C, Night: 50 to 75 F; 10 C to 24 C Storage Temperature: 150 F maximum; 66 C maximum Operating Temperature: 100 F maximum; 38 C maximum Throttling Range: 2 F to 10 F; 1 C to 5 C Maximum Operating Pressure: 25 psi; 170 kPa Dimensions: 3 1/4 in. high, 2 in. wide, 1 5/8 in. deep; 83 mm high, 51 mm wide, 41 mm deep. Accessories: 14001865-001 Filter Cartridge Assembly 14002430-001 Heavy Duty Thermostat Guard 14004460-001 Nozzle, Throttling Plate and Bimetal Assembly 14004460-002 Nozzle, Throttling plate and Bimetal Assembly
Pneumatic thermostat with night setback used to provide proportional control of pneumatic valves and damper actuators in heating and air conditioning systems. Replacement kits are available for Johnson, Powers, Robertshaw, Barber-Colman, and older Honeywell two-pipe pneumatic thermostats. Rod and tube insertion sensing element. Wide throttling range. Gage tee and tank valve facilitate checking line pressures.
ORDER NUMBER TP971A2011 TP971A2029 TP971A2052 TP971A2086 TP971A2102
Action Direct Heating
Number of Pipes Changeover Pressure 2 Day 13 psi, Night 18 psi Day 16 psi, Night 21 psi Day 20 psi, Night 25 psi Day 13 psi, Night 18 psi
Includes
Comments Order Cover Separately
Thermostat, universal adapter wall Convertastat Kit plate and satin chrome cover Replacement for TP971A2138 with satin cover Thermostat and universal satin chrome cover TRADELINE Kit Order Cover Separately
*TP971A2191 TP971B2001 TP971B2019 TP971B2043 *TP971B2068 TP971C2009 TP971C2017 TP971C2025 *TP971C2058 Direct Cooling Day 16 psi, Night 21 psi Day 13 psi, Night 18 psi Direct Heating 3 Reverse Heating Day 16 psi, Night 21 psi Day 20 psi, Night 25 psi Day 13 psi, Night 18 psi
Thermostat and universal satin chrome cover
TRADELINE Kit Order Cover Separately
Thermostat and universal satin chrome cover
TRADELINE Kit
Pneumatic Products
www.prokontrol.com
HONEYWELL - 64
TP972 Pneumatic Heating/Cooling Thermostat
Backplate has molded air connectionsno separate fittings needed. Universal locking cover with satin chrome finish and horizontal, vertical, or blank window options with TRADELINE modelother covers available. Airflow Usage: 0.011 scfm (5.2 mL/s) Application Type: Wall Thermostat, Heat/Cool Operation Mounting Type: Wall Number of Pipes: 2 Remote Bulb: No Sensor Element: bimetal Storage Temperature: 150 F maximum; 66 C maximum Operating Temperature: 100 F maximum; 38 C maximum Throttling Range: 2 F to 10 F; 1 C to 5 C Maximum Operating Pressure: 25 psi; 70 kPa Dimensions: 4 in. high, 2 3/4 in. wide, 1 7/8 in. deep: 102 mm high, 70 mm wide, 47 mm deep. Accessories: 14001865-001 Filter Cartridge Assembly 14002430-001 Heavy Duty Thermostat Guard 14003923-001 20 to 25 psi 14004447-001 Setpoint Cam Assembly 14004447-002 Setpoint Cam Assembly
Two-pipe, one or two temperature, pneumatic thermostat used to provide proportional control of pneumatic valves and damper actuators in heating and air conditioning systems. Replacement kits are available for Johnson, Powers, Robertshaw, Barber-Colman, and older Honeywell two-pipe pneumatic thermostats. Durable TP970 Series Thermostat. Pilot operated for high capacity. Two-temperature energy conservation models available. Adapter plate in thermostat kits covers existing thermostat wall mark.
ORDER NUMBER TP972A2002 TP972A2010 TP972A2036
Action
Changeover Pressure
Setpoint Single Dual
Setpoint Range 60 F to 90 F 16 C to 32 C Heating 55 F to 70 F (12 C to 23 C) Cooling 60 F to 90 F (15 C to 30 C) 60 F to 90 F 16 C to 32 C
Includes Two concealed setpoint knobs
Comments Order Cover Separately Energy Conservation Model, Order Cover Separately Order Cover Separately
Direct Heating, Heat 18 psi, Reverse Cooling Cool 13 psi Heat 18 psi, Cool 13 psi Direct Cooling, Heat 14 psi, Reverse Heating Cool 19 psi Heat 18 psi, Cool 13 psi
TP972A2143 *TP972A2226 *TP972A2242
Single
Thermostat and satin TRADELINE Kit chrome cover
www.prokontrol.com
HONEYWELL - 65
TP973 Pneumatic Thermostat
Low capacity Thermostat. Built in restrictor for two-pipe applications. Airflow Usage: 0.011 scfm (5.2 mL/s) Application Type: Wall Thermostat, Single Temperature Mounting Type: Wall Remote Bulb: No Sensor Element: bimetal Setpoint: Single Setpoint Range: 60 F to 90 F; 16 C to 32 C Storage Temperature: 150 F maximum; 66 C maximum Operating Temperature: 100 F maximum; 38 C maximum Throttling Range: 2 F to 10 F; 1 C to 5 C Number of Pipes: 1; 2 Maximum Operating Pressure: 25 psi; 170 kPa Dimensions: 3 1/4 in. high, 2 in. wide, 1 5/8 in. deep; 83 mm high, 51 mm wide, 41 mm deep. Accessories: 14001865-001 Filter Cartridge Assembly 14002430-001 Heavy Duty Thermostat Guard 14003923-001 20 to 25 psi 14004459-001 Scaleplate Bag Assembly, 60 to 90 F 14004460-001 Nozzle, Throttling Plate and Bimetal Assembly
One-pipe or two-pipe, single temperature, low capacity, pneumatic thermostat used to provide proportional control of pneumatic valves and damper actuators in heating and air conditioning systems. Replacement kits are available for Johnson, Powers, Robertshaw, Barber-Colman, and older Honeywell pneumatic thermostats. Durable TP970 Series Thermostat. Direct Acting (DA) and Reverse Acting (RA) models available. Adapter plate in thermostat kits covers existing thermostat wall mark. Backplate has molded air connectionsno separate fittings needed. Universal locking cover with satin chrome finish and horizontal, vertical, or blank window options with TRADELINE modelother covers available. ORDER NUMBER TP973A2076 TP973A2084 TP973A2167 *TP973A2209 *TP973A2223 TP973B2132 *TP973B2171 Reverse Action Direct Includes
Comments Order cover separately, requires external 0.005 in. restrictor for one-pipe installation Requires external 0.005 in. restrictor for one-pipe installation TRADELINE Kit, requires external 0.005 in. restrictor for one-pipe installation Requires external 0.005 in. restrictor for one-pipe installation TRADELINE Kit, requires external 0.005 in. restrictor for one-pipe installation
14004407-121 Cover and 25 ft. (736 m) twin tubing Thermostat and satin chrome cover 14004407-121 Cover and 25 ft. (736 m) twin tubing Thermostat and satin chrome cover
Pneumatic Products
www.prokontrol.com
HONEYWELL - 66
Pneumatic Humidistats
HP970 Pneumatic Humidistat
Airflow Usage: 0.011 scfm (5.2 mL/s) Application Type: Humidity Comments: Order Cover Separately Number of Pipes: 2 Remote Sensor: No Setpoint: Single Throttling Range: 3 to 15% RH Maximum Storage Temperature: -30 to +150 F; -34 to +66 C Maximum Operating Temperature: -49 F to 151 F; -45 C to 66 C Maximum Operating Pressure: 25 psi; 170 kPa Dimensions: 3 1/4 in. high, 2 in. wide, 1 5/8 in. deep; 95 mm high, 51 mm wide, 41 mm deep. Accessories: 14001865-001 Filter Cartridge Assembly 14002362-001 Duct Sampling Chamber 14002430-001 Heavy Duty Thermostat Guard 14004419-001 Restrictor Block Assembly 14004419-001 Restrictor Block Gasket
Two-pipe, single setpoint, pneumatic humidistat used to provide proportional control of pneumatic valves on humidification or dehumidification systems. Durable HP970 series humidistat. Pilot operated for high capacity. Direct Acting (DA) and Reverse Acting (RA) models available. Vertical or horizontal mounting. Backplate has molded air connections; no separate fittings needed. Variety of cover finishes and display styles available. ORDER NUMBER HP970A1009 HP970B1007 HP970B1015 Action Direct Reverse Reverse
Scale Range 15 to 75% RH 15 to 75% RH 65 to 95% RH
Humidity Range 3 to 75% RH 3 to 75% RH 3 to 95% RH
HP972 Pneumatic Humidistat

Backplate has molded air connections; no separate fittings needed. Variety of cover finishes and display styles available. Action: Reverse Airflow Usage: 0.011 scfm (5.2 mL/s) Application Type: Humidity Comments: Order Cover Separately Humidity Range: 3 to 75% RH Remote Sensor: No Scale Range: 15 to 75% RH Setpoint: Single Maximum Storage Temperature: -30 to +150 F; -34 to +66 C Maximum Operating Temperature: 45 F to 125 F; 7 C to 52 C Throttling Range: 3 to 15% RH; 7 to 35% rh Number of Pipes: 1; 2 Maximum Operating Pressure: 25 psi; 170 kPa Dimensions: 3 1/4 in. high, 2 in. wide, 1 5/8 in. deep; 95 mm high, 51 mm wide, 41 mm deep.
A proportioning pneumatic humidistat used on one- or two-pipe installations for controlling actuators on valves and dampers in air conditioning systems for humidification or dehumidification control Durable HP970 series humidistat. Snap-on mounting to backplate. Vertical or horizontal mounting.
Pneumatic Products
ORDER NUMBER HP972B1005
Description Pneumatic Humidity Controller, number of pipes:2, Action: Reverse
Some products are available only through Honeywell Authorized Distributors. 461
www.prokontrol.com
HONEYWELL - 69
Pneumatic Valves
VP513 Pneumatic Water Valve
Flare tube connections. Small physical size. Air connections: 1/8 in. NPT Application Type: Water Body pattern: Two-way Humidity Range: 5 to 95% RH Maximum Actuator Temperature: 160 F; 71 C Pipe Connections: 45 deg. SAE flare Type: Unitary Body Pressure: 250 psi; 1724 kPa Maximum Diaphragm Pressure: 30 psi; 205 kPa Valve action: VP513AProportional Normally Open. VP513BProportional Normally Closed Temperature Range: VP513A35 F to 250 F; 2 C to 121 C VP513B40 F to 240 F; 4 C to 116 C Dimensions: VP513A5 3/4 in. high, 5 1/8 in. dia.; 146 mm high, 130 mm dia. VP513B6 7/8 in. high, 5 1/8 in. dia.;175 mm high, 130 mm dia. Accessories: 14002734-002 Lubricant, packing, AMOCO H-100 312817T Actuator assembly 312817U Actuator Assembly, 3 to 7 psi, 21 to 48 kPa 312817V Actuator Assembly, 8 to 12 psi, 55 to 83 kPa Spring Range 3 psi to 10 psi 21 kPa to 69 kPa Close-off Ratings 79 psid (545 kPa) at 13 psi (90 kPa)
Single-seated, straight-through, pneumatic valves used for proportional control of unit air conditioners using hot and/or chilled water. Replacement devices are available for Johnson, Powers, Robertshaw, Barber-Colman, and older Honeywell devices. Available in normally-open or normally-closed models. Straight-through pattern. Actuator can be rotated on valve bonnet for alignment with air piping. Molded replaceable composition disc for tight shut-off.
ORDER NUMBER VP513A1048 VP513A1055 VP513A1188 VP513A1204 VP513B1012 VP513B1038 VP513B1053
Valve Size O.D.: 7/8 in. (22.2 mm); Nominal: 3/4 in. (19.1 mm) O.D.: 7/8 in. (22.2 mm); Nominal: 3/4 in. (19.1 mm) O.D.: 5/8 in. (15.9 mm); Nominal: 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) O.D.: 5/8 in. (15.9 mm); Nominal: 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) O.D.: 5/8 in. (15.9 mm); Nominal: 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) O.D.: 5/8 in. (15.9 mm); Nominal: 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) O.D.: 5/8 in. (15.9 mm); Nominal: 1/2 in. (12.7 mm)
Capacity 2.5 Cv; 2.16 Kv 4 Cv; 3.46 Kv 2.5 Cv; 2.16 Kv 2.5 Cv; 2.16 Kv 1.0 Cv; 0.86 Kv 1.6 Cv; 1.38 Kv 2.5 Cv; 2.16 Kv
3 psi to 7 psi 21 kPa to 48 kPa 3 psi to 10 psi 21 kPa to 69 kPa 9 psi to 13 psi 62 kPa to 90 kPa 50 psid (345 kPa) at 7 psi (48 kPa)
VP519 Two-Position Three-Way Air Valve

Air connections: Dual barbed for 5/32 in. or 1/4 in. plastic tubing Application Type: Air Body pattern: three-way mixing Close-off Ratings: 120 psid at 18 psi Humidity Range: 5 to 95% RH Maximum Actuator Temperature: 160 F; 71 C Pipe Connections: NPT Type: Unitary Valve action: 2-position Valve Size: 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) Body Pressure: 150 psi; 1034 kPa Temperature range: 35 F to 115 F; 2 C to 46 C Maximum Diaphragm Pressure: 25 psi; 172 kPa Dimensions: 7 7/8 in. high, 5 1/8 in. dia.; 200 mm high, 130 mm dia. Spring Range: 6 psi to 9 psi; 41 kPa to 62 kPa Capacity: 5.5 Cv; 4.75 Kv Accessories: 14003294-002 Valve Repack Kit, Steam or water application
Two-position, three-way, pneumatic air valve used to control main airflow in large Day-Nite or Summer-Winter pneumatic control systems. Replacement devices are available for Johnson, Powers, Robertshaw, Barber-Colman, and older Honeywell devices. Spring-loaded, self-adjusting Teflon cone packing. Removable composition upper and lower discs. Actuator can be rotated on valve bonnet for alignment with air piping. Right-angle mounting bracket permits mounting on a wall or panel. ORDER NUMBER VP519C1006 Description
Three-way Mixing, Unitary, 1/2 in. (12.7 mm), 5.5 Cv, Air Some products are available only through Honeywell Authorized Distributors.
482
www.prokontrol.com
HONEYWELL - 78
Pneumatic Damper Actuator

MP918B Pneumatic Damper Actuators
Non-overlapping spring ranges for sequencing. Reliablelong life. Actuator Force: high Air connections: Barbed fitting for 1/4 in. O.D. plastic tubing Application Type: Damper Humidity Range: 5 to 95% RH Type: Spring return Temperature range: -40 F to +158 F; -40 C to +70 C Diaphragm Effective Area: 23.8 sq in.; 154 sq cm Stroke: 3.5 in.; 90 mm Maximum Operating Pressure: 29 psi; 200 kPa Dimensions: 18 1/4 in. long, 6 7/8 in. high, 6 5/8 in. dia; 465 mm long, 175 mm high, 168 mm dia Accessories: 14004106-001 Actuator pushrod 14004107-001 Crankarm Assembly 14004236-001 Coupler 14004241-002 Hitch Pin Comments
Used for proportional control of medium- to large-size dampers in HVAC systems. The MP918A& B are rolling diaphragm, piston-type actuators. The MP918A has a positive positioner. Replacement devices are available for Johnson, Powers, Robertshaw, Barber-Colman, and older Honeywell actuator models. Rolling diaphragm operated. Low friction shaft bearing. Close tolerance on operating range and stroke. Versatile mounting and connecting hardware. Cost effective mounting to Honeywell dampers.
ORDER NUMBER MP918B1030 MP918B1121 MP918B1154 MP918B1204 MP918B1212 MP918B1220
Spring Range 3 psi to 13 psi; 20 kPa to 90 kPa
Includes
14004062-001 Bracket and Crankarm assembly Add 14004062-005 Bag assembly to replace MP918B1006 14004062-003 Bracket and Crankarm assembly Add 14004062-007 Bag assembly to replace MP918B1121
8 psi to 13 psi; 55 kPa to 90 kPa
14004062-002 Bracket and Crankarm assembly Add 14004062-006 Bag assembly to replace MP918B1204 14004062-003 Bracket and Crankarm assembly Add 14004062-007 Bag assembly to replace MP918B1121 5 psi to 10 psi; 35 kPa to 70 kPa 14004062-001 External Mounting Bracket with balljoint
MP920 Pneumatic Damper Actuator

Provides proportional control of large dampers in HVAC systems or inlet vanes on a VAV fan. Positive positioner available separately. Replacement devices are available for Robertshaw actuator models. Rolling diaphragm operated. Fail safe on over pressure. Actuator can be swivel mounted from either end to pipe, floor, or wall surface. Optional positive positioner provides accurate positioning under varying load conditions. Actuator Force: high Air connections: Barbed fitting for 1/4 in. O.D. plastic tubing ORDER NUMBER MP920B1002 Description Damper Actuator, Actuator force: High, Spring Range: 7.25 psi to 13 psi Application Type: Damper Humidity Range: 5 to 95% RH Type: Spring return Spring Range: 7.25 psi to 13 psi; 50 kPa to 90 kPa Temperature range: -20 F to +158 F; -30 C to +70 C Diaphragm Effective Area: 24.8 sq in.; 160 sq cm Stroke: 6 in.; 150 mm Maximum Operating Pressure: 29 psi; 200 kPa Dimensions: Less bracket: 12 7/32 in. long, 6 3/16 in. dia / Less bracket with positioner: 16 7/32 in. long, 8 1/4 in. dia; Less bracket: 315 long, 157 mm dia / Less bracket with positioner: 415 mm long, 210 mm dia Includes: No Bracket (order positive positioner, mounting and connecting hardware separately) Accessories: 14004345-001 Positive Positioner Kit, 10 psi feedback spring
Some products are available only through Honeywell Authorized Distributors. 458
www.prokontrol.com
HONEYWELL - 82
SIEMENS PRODUCTS
Powerstar Pneumatic Stats,Covers, Kits & Parts Powers 832 Room Thermostats Limitem Rigid Bulb Duct Stat Limitem Remote Bulb Accessories and Service Kits Receiver Controllers Temperature Transmitters Room & Duct Humidity Transmitters Room & Duct Room Temperature Controllers (VAV , CAV) Control Valves &Actuators Powermite 599 Ball Valves Flowrite Globe Valves Zone Valves Butterfly Valves Damper Actuators Accessories & Service Kits Pneumatics Actuators Pneumatic Switches,Relays,EPs, Valves Air Station Equipment Miscellaneous SIEMENS - 1 to 11 SIEMENS - 12, 13 SIEMENS - 14, 15 SIEMENS - 16, 17 SIEMENS - 18 SIEMENS - 19 to 21 SIEMENS - 22 to 24 SIEMENS - 25 to 26 SIEMENS - 27 to 30 SIEMENS - 31 to 52 SIEMENS - 53 to 60 SIEMENS - 61 to 79 SIEMENS - 80, 81 SIEMENS - 82 SIEMENS - 83 to 93 SIEMENS - 94 to 97 SIEMENS - 98 to 103 SIEMENS - 104 to 120 SIEMENS - 121 to 128 SIEMENS - 129 to 135
Overview
Proven to provide fast response and highly accurate temperature control, Powerstar Pneumatic Room Thermostats are designed to control heating and/or cooling by operating a variety of pneumatic devices such as valves or damper actuators. Powerstar thermostats are factory-calibrated to control pneumatic devices over a 3 to 15 psi (103 to 207 kPa) range. Powerstar pneumatic room thermostats are available for the following applications: Single Temperature Free Energy Band Day/Night Free Energy Band Day/Night/Vent with Hesitation Heating/Cooling Covers are available with concealed or exposed set point adjustment, room temperature indication, and set point indicator.
Powerstar Room Thermostats
Description
Applications
Selection Guide
Control Outputs Control Set Points Control Actions Air Output Capacity Low (1-pipe)
15 to 30 psi (103 to 207 kPa) Heat or Cool Single Single Direct/Reverse
Air Supply
Applications
Model
High (2-pipe)
192 S 192 HC 194 HC
Cool 18 psi (124 kPa) Heat and Cool (auto changeover) Heat 25 psi (172 kPa) Factory-calibrated (194 HC) for Honeywell or Johnson retrofit
Single
Dual (Heat/Cool)
features
Direct/Direct Reverse/Reverse Direct/Reverse Reverse/Direct Direct/Direct Reverse/Reverse
Day 18 psi (124 kPa) Day and Night (auto changeover) Night 25 psi (172 kPa) Factory-calibrated (194 DN) for Honeywell or Johnson retrofit R2 vent (0) day, full supply night (DNV only, 3-pipe) Night override selector switch
Single
Dual (Day/Night)
192 DN 194 DN
Day 18 psi (124 kPa) Day and Night (auto changeover) Night 25 psi (172 kPa) Factory-calibrated (194 DN for Honeywell or Johnson retrofit) R2 vent (0) day, full supply night (DNV only, 3-pipes) Night override selector switch 15 to 30 psi (103 to 207 kPa) Heat and Cool Sequence-controlled devices with two control lines (same or different range) Heat and Cool Sequence-controlled devices with one control line (different spring ranges)
Dual
Dual (Day/Night with Vent)
None
192 DNV 194 DNV
Dual
Dual (Heat/Cool)
Direct/Direct Reverse/Reverse Direct/Reverse Reverse/Direct Direct/Direct
15 to 30 psi (103 to 207 kPa)
Single
Dual (Heat/Cool)
193 HC Free Energy Band
193 HC Free Energy Band (Hesitation)
www.valves-actuators.com
www.prokontrol.com SIEMENS 1
A-3
Thermostats & Hygrostats

Overview
Powerstar Room Thermostats
192 S
Powerstar Single Set Point Pneumatic Room Thermostat
192 S Thermostat chassis.
Typical wall plate and screws.
Description
Providing proportional single output, single set point, 1-pipe for low air capacity or 2-pipe for high air capacity pneumatic room temperature control, the 192 S Powerstar Single Set Point Pneumatic Room Thermostat is the most economical model. Refer to the Retroline Retrostats to replace competitive models.
Applications
Designed for heating and cooling applications for control of pneumatic valves and damper actuators. The 192 S Powerstar Single Set Point Pneumatic Room Thermostat is excellent for commercial and institutional facilities.
Recommendation
1-pipe: Use when limited output air capacity is required to operate a single valve and/or actuator; requires external restrictor, 20 scim (5.4 ml/s) air supply. 2-pipe: Use for high output capacity for control of multiple valves and actuators, used with or without high/low limiting controls.
features
Single set point dial available in Fahrenheit or Celsius scales Available in direct or reverse acting models Sensitive bimetal responds to temperature changes Integral, field adjustable limit stops Wall mounting plate for connection to a variety of rough-in terminal boxes included Large volume air capacity relay in 2-pipe models only Test port for fast check of output pressure without removing the cover Field replaceable thermometer, set point dial, restrictor and filters for decreased maintenance cost
Application Drawings
Dotted lines are alternative control schemes.
Options
Quick-connect air connections for ease of installation and service Fixed limit stops to meet government specifications Large, 1/2 set point knob for convalescent homes
A-5
192
Single Set Point
192 HC
Powerstar Heating/Cooling Pneumatic Room Thermostats
192 HC Thermostat chassis.
192 HC Thermostat with plastic cover. Chassis wall plate with easy maintenance plug-in adapters shown (optional).
Description
Providing proportional single output, dual set point with 2-pipe for high air capacity pneumatic room temperature control, the 192 HC Powerstar Heating/Cooling Pneumatic Room Thermostat provides two thermostats under one cover; one side for heating and the other for cooling. Switchover is accomplished by changing the air pressure to the thermostat.
Applications
Designed for temperature control of heating and cooling applications, the 192 HC Powerstar Heating/Cooling Pneumatic Room Thermostat controls valves and damper actuators in cooling equipment. Providing energy management and occupant comfort, the thermostat automatically adjusts to seasonal changes from heating set point to cooling set point in commercial and institutional facilities.
Recommendation
For control of multiple valves and actuators, use with or without high/low limiting controls.
features
Dual set point dial available in Fahrenheit or Celsius scales Available in direct or reverse acting models Sensitive bimetal responds to temperature changes Integral, field adjustable limit stops Adjustable changeover pressure Large volume air capacity relay Wall mounting plates provides connection to a variety of rough-in terminal boxes Test port for fast check of output pressure without removing the cover Field replaceable thermometer, set point dials, restrictor and filters
Application Drawing
Options
Fixed limit stops to meet government specifications Quick-connect air connections for ease of installation and service Large, 1/2 set point knob for convalescent homes
A-9
192
Heating/Cooling
192 DN/DNV
Powerstar Day/Night/Vent Pneumatic Room Thermostats
192 DN Thermostat chassis.
192 DN Thermostat with plastic cover. Chassis wall plate with easy maintenance plug-in adapters shown (optional).
Description
Providing proportional dual set point, 2-pipe or 3-pipe high air capacity pneumatic room temperature control, the 192 DN or DNV Powerstar Pneumatic Room Thermostat automatically resets the room temperature set point during unoccupied hours by changing the air pressure to the thermostat. A manual override feature allows occupants to switch to day mode. The override returns to night mode the following night.
Applications
The 192 DN and DNV Powerstar Pneumatic Room Thermostat controls valves and damper actuators in cooling equipment, automatically performing setback changes from day to night. The 192 DNV also performs a purge sequence at night to bring in vent outside air to cool the building. A manual override selector switch allows individual room or zone day control locally during the night cycle. During the night control cycle, the 192 DNV models provide a separate output signal (full air supply) allowing ventilation control. Periodic resetting to the night control mode during evening or weekend periods using time clocks ensures optimal energy management.
features
Dual set point dial available in Fahrenheit or Celsius scales Available in direct or reverse acting models Sensitive bimetal responds to temperature changes Manual override selector for off-hour occupant comfort Adjustable changeover pressure Large volume air capacity relay Integral, field adjustable limit stops Wall mounting plate for connection to a variety of rough-in terminal boxes included Test port for fast check of output pressure without removing the cover Field replaceable thermometer, set point dial, restrictor and filters
Recommendation
Use 192 DN or DNV for multiple valves and actuators, with or without high/low limiting controls.
Day/Night. Chassis Port R2 Pressure Full Air Supply 0 psig 0 psig
Day/Night/Vent. Operation Mode (Air Supply) Night (S=25 psig) Night Occupied Day (S=18 psig) Switching Relay Connection A-D B-D B-D
Options
Fixed limit stops to meet government specifications Quick-connect air connections for ease of installation and service Large, 1/2 set point knob for convalescent homes
A-11
192
Day/Night
192
Day/Night/Vent
192/4
Powerstar Retrostat Pneumatic Room Thermostats
easily replaces:
Barber-Colman (Siebe) Johnson Controls Honeywell Robertshaw (Siebe)
192 Dual Set point Pneumatic Room Thermostat Kit.
Description
The Powerstar Retroline Retrostat Pneumatic Room Thermostat converts most existing pneumatic room thermostats to a Powerstar 192 direct or reverse acting, 2-pipe, single or dual set point unit. Day/Night or Heat/Cool Retrostat is factory-calibrated to match the appropriate changeover pressure of the competitive thermostat.
Applications
Retroline Retrostat kits are available for most 2-pipe applications in direct and reverse acting models, including: Single Temperature Day/Night Heat/Cool Refer to the Powerstar products to select the appropriate application.
features
Complete kit including Retrostat cover kit with exposed or concealed set point adjustment Set point dials available in Fahrenheit or Celsius scales Factory-calibrated for accuracy All installation hardware and calibration wrench provided. Fits into large format wall openings, using goof plate, which is included. Integral, field adjustable limit stops Test port for fast check of output pressure without removing the cover Field replaceable thermometer, set point dial(s), restrictor(s), and filter(s)
Options
Quick-connect air connections for ease of installation and service Large, 1/2 set point knob for convalescent homes
A-17
192/4
832 D
Pneumatic Room Thermostats
832 D Pneumatic Room Thermostat and screws.
Description
The single set point, direct acting thermostat provides gradual acting pneumatic room temperature control for heating and cooling applications. The 832 D Thermostat is ruggedly constructed for dependable, long-term service.
Applications
Designed for controlling rooms heated or cooled by radiation, ventilation, or an air conditioning system, the 832 D Pneumatic Room Thermostat is versatile and responsive for individual room control. Other applications include room control of radiant panels, finned radiation, and unit ventilators.
Application Drawing
Dotted lines are alternative control schemes.
features
All metal construction Rapid response to temperature change Unique design of supply and exhaust air valves prevents waste Quiet operation Easy-to-calibrate and service Tamper-proof cover screws Exposed remote changeover control Calibrated thermometer
A-21
832
Day
195
easily replaces:
Barber-Colman Honeywell Robertshaw Seibe Johnson Controls
Single Input Receiver-Controller
195 Single Input Receiver-Controller.
Description
The 195 Single Input Receiver-Controller is a pneumatic controller which receives one pneumatic input, and produces a pneumatic output signal based on the net pneumatic input and the mechanical settings of the set point and percent proportional band. Controller can be easily changed from direct to reverse acting. Retroline Receiver-Controller (195-1000) includes decals and installation instructions to replace competitive models.
Applications
The 195 Single Input Receiver-Controller is a one-input, direct/reverse acting, instrument used to control temperatures, humidity, and pressure of mechanical equipment in commercial and industrial facilities.
Typical Connections
features
Rugged proven design Plug-in air connections for ease of installation, calibration, and service Internal restrictors for transmitter inputs Stick-on scales included for set point dial in standard transmitter ranges Large, easy-to-read scales on all adjustments Calibration card for converting transmitter range to 3 to 15 psi (21 to 103 kPa) signal Tamper-resistant cover
Options
Retroline products for replacing competitive products Pressure Gauge (order separately)
B-15
Controllers & Transmitters
195
Single Input Receiver-Controller
195
Multiple Input Receiver-Controller
easily replaces:
Barber-Colman Honeywell Robertshaw Seibe Johnson Controls
195 Multiple Input Receiver-Controller with Control Pressure Gauge.
Description
The 195 Multiple Input Receiver-Controller is a pneumatic controller that receives up to three pneumatic inputs and produces a pneumatic output signal based on the net pneumatic input and the set point, percent proportional band and authority settings. The Controller can be easily changed from direct to reverse acting. Retroline Receiver-Controller (195-1000) includes decals and installation instructions to replace competitive models.
Applications
The 195 Multiple Input Receiver-Controller is commonly used when the set point needs to be automatically reset based on a separate input; can be used as a single input device. Example: Change hot water supply temperature set point based on outside air temperature.
Typical Connections
features
Rugged proven design Plug-in air connections for ease of installation, calibration, and service Internal restrictors for transmitter inputs Stick-on scales included for set point dial in standard transmitter ranges Large, easy-to-read scales on all adjustments Calibration card for converting transmitter range to 3 to 15 psi (21 to 103 kPa) signal 0 to 30 psig (0 to 200 kPa) Pressure Gauge Retroline replacement products for competitive products
B-17
195
Multiple Input Receiver-Controller
184
Temperature Transmitters
easily replaces:
Johnson Controls Honeywell Robertshaw Seibe
184-0340 Room Temperature Transmitter. 184 Temperature 184-0006 Temperature Transmitter Transmitter with with remote remote bulb. bulb. 184 Temperature Transmitter with averaging bulb. 184 Temperature Transmitter with rigid bulb.
Description
The 184 Temperature Transmitters are direct acting, onepipe instruments that sense temperature and transmit a proportional 3 to15 psi (21 to 103 kPa) pneumatic signal to a remotely-located receiver gauge and/or receiver controller. Temperature Transmitters operate on the force-balance principle, using internal feedback for excellent linearity and accuracy. Retroline transmitters easily replace any competitive model. Refer to the appropriate product to locate the Retroline replacement.
Applications
The 184 Temperature Transmitters can be used for a variety of applications to monitor temperature and are ideal for those requiring indication with a receiver-controller.
Application Drawing
features
1-pipe, direct acting Rapid response to temperature changes over their full range Available in a variety of sensing elements and temperature ranges Available with rigid bulb, remote averaging bulb, and room transmitter Internal feedback for excellent linearity and accuracy
Hot water temperature set point reset.
B-19
Barber-Colman
184
Temperature Transmitters
186
Room and Duct Humidity Transmitters
186-0043 Room Humidity Transmitter.
186-0089 Duct Humidity Transmitter.
Description
The 186 Room and Duct Transmitters are one-pipe, direct acting pneumatic instruments that sense space humidity and transmit a 3 to 15 psi (21 to 103 kPa) pneumatic signal to a remote receiver gauge and/or receiver-controller to read percent relative humidity.
Applications
The 186 Room and Duct Humidity Transmitters operate on a force-balance principle with internal feedback to obtain linearity to accurately sense relative humidity. The transmitter output can be sent to a receiver-controller for control of an air conditioning or process control system.
Recommendation
Room: Air velocity must be at least 30 FPM (0.15m/s) and the transmitter should be located where it senses actual room conditions (away from doors, equipment, etc.). Duct: Duct transmitters should be used whenever possible in the return air duct.
features
Inorganic sensing element for rapid response to humidity changes Bimetal temperature compensation minimizes temperature effects Cover included with Room Transmitter Available for room mounting (vertical) and duct mounting that is at least 6-inch (152 mm) high and 6-1/2-inch (165 mm) deep
Application Drawing
Typical Application of Return Air Duct.
B-23
186
Room and Duct Humidity Transmitters
Overview
Control Valves
Overview 599 Series Control Valves
Description
Designed for precise regulation and control of water, steam and other media, depend on Siemens valves and actuators. Excellent products for a variety of applications are available: Powermite 599 Series Globe Valves for dependable control of terminal unit and zone equipment. Powermite 599 Series Ball Valves. Flowrite 599 Series Globe Valves for economical control of small to medium coils and larger HVAC systems.
Applications
features
Selection Guide
Application
Two- and Three-way Valve Application Selection Matrix

Controlled Medium Water and Low Pressure steam1 Water and Low Pressure steam1 Water and Low Pressure steam1 Water (Equal Percentage) and High Pressure steam (Linear) Water (Equal Percentage) and High Pressure steam (Linear) Water (Equal Percentage) and High Pressure steam (Linear) 599 Series Model Globe Valve Powermite MZ Series 1/2 to 1 Powermite MT Series 1/2 to 1-1/2 Powermite MT Series 1/2 to 1-1/2 Flowrite Bronze 1/2 to 2 Flowrite Bronze 1/2 to 2 Flowrite Iron Flanged 2-1/2 to 6 Refer to Page C-25 C-35 C-35 C-95 C-95 C-105
Baseboard/Terminal Unit
Terminal Unit Unitary/Fan Coil Unitary/Fan Coil Air Handling Unit Central Plant
Table Note 1. Low pressure steam = 15 psig or less
C-3
Valves
Powermite Globe 599 Series

Normally Open or Normally Closed
Two-way Valves
1/2 to 1-inch Bronze Body
Powermite MZ Series Two-way Globe Valve.
Powermite
Description
The Powermite 599 MZ Series Two-way Globe Valves are designed to work with the SSB MZ Series Actuator with a 7/32-inch (5.5 mm) stroke.
Applications
The Powermite 599 MZ Series Two-way Globe Valves are used for control of hot or chilled water for convectors, fan coil units, unit conditioners, radiation, reheat coils, and similar terminal units requiring an actuator that delivers a minimum of 45 lb. (200 N) of force. Recommendation: Use only with the MZ Series SSB Valve Actuators.
Two-way Valves/MZ Series
features
Direct-coupled universal bonnet/No tools required for installation ANSI Leakage Class IV (0.01% of Cv) ANSI Class 250 body Rated for 15 psig steam (low pressure) Variety of actuators available - 0 to 10 V NSR - Floating control Choice of end connections 100:1 Rangeability Orderable separately or as a complete assembly
C-25
Valves
Three-way Mixing Valves

Powermite MZ Series Three-way Globe Valve.
Powermite
Description
The Powermite 599 MZ Series Three-way Globe Valves are designed to work the SSB MZ Series Actuator with a 7/32-inch (5.5 mm) stroke.
Applications
The Powermite 599 MZ Series Three-way Globe Valves are used for mixing of hot or chilled water for convectors, fan coil units, unit conditioners, radiation, reheat coils, and similar terminal units requiring an actuator that delivers a minimum of 45 lb. (200 N) force. Recommendation: Use only with the MZ Series SSB Valve Actuators.
Three-way Valve/MZ Series
features
Direct-coupled universal bonnet/ No tools required for installation ANSI Leakage Class IV (0.01% of Cv) ANSI Class 250 body Variety of actuators available - 0 to 10 V NSR - Floating control Choice of end connections 100:1 Rangeability Orderable separately or as a complete assembly
C-29
Valves

Normally Open or Closed
Two-way Valves
1/2 to 1-1/2-inch Bronze Body
Powermite MT Series Two-way Globe Valve.
Powermite
Description
The Powermite 599 MT Series Two-way Globe Valves are designed to work with either a pneumatic or electronic actuator with a 7/32-inch (5.5 mm) stroke.
Applications
The Powermite 599 MT Series Globe Valves are used for hot or chilled water control on convectors, fan coil units, unit conditioners, radiation, reheat coils, and similar terminal units; also suitable for low pressure steam. Recommendation: Only use the MT Series Valve Actuators. When using this valve with a pneumatic actuator, note that MT valve bodies have the spring in the body, rather than the actuator. To order the correct valve body, select the proper spring range. Alternate spring ranges for pneumatic sequencing are available as valve and actuator factory assemblies only. Refer to pages C-18 and C-20 for available pneumatic assembly part numbers.
Two-way Valves/MT Series
features
Direct-coupled universal bonnet/ No tools required for installation Choice of brass or stainless steel trim ANSI Leakage Class IV (0.01% of Cv) ANSI Class 250 body Available in 3 to 8 psi, 8 to 13 psi or 10 to 15 psi spring ranges with pneumatic actuation Rated for 15 psig steam Interchangeable pneumatic or electronic actuators Orderable as valve only or complete valve/actuator assembly
C-35
Valves
Three-way Mixing Valves

Powermite MT Series Three-way Globe Valve.
Powermite
Description
The Powermite 599 MT Series Three-way Globe Valves are designed to work with either a pneumatic or electronic actuator with a 7/32-inch (5.5 mm) stroke.
Applications
The Powermite 599 MT Series Three-way Globe Valves are used for mixing of hot or chilled water for convectors, fan coil units, unit conditioners, radiation, reheat coils, and similar terminal units requiring water mixing. Recommendation: Only use the MT Series Valve Actuators. When using this valve with a pneumatic actuator, note that MT valve bodies have the spring in the body, rather than the actuator. To order the correct valve body, select the proper spring range. Alternate spring ranges for pneumatic sequencing are available as valve and actuator factory assemblies only. Refer to pages C-22 for available pneumatic assembly part numbers.
Three-way Valves/MT Series
features
Direct-coupled universal bonnet/No tools required for installation Choice of brass or stainless steel trim ANSI Leakage Class IV (0.01% of Cv) ANSI Class 250 body Available in 3 to 8 psi, 8 to 13 psi or 10 to 15 psi spring ranges with pneumatic actuation Interchangeable pneumatic or electronic actuators Orderable as valve only or complete valve/ actuator assembly
C-39
Valves
Two-inch Pneumatic Valve Actuator
Powermite MT Series Two-inch Pneumatic Valve Actuator.
Powermite
Description
The Powermite Two-inch Pneumatic Valve Actuator is designed for use with the 1/2 to 1-inch Powermite 599 MT Series Terminal Unit Valves with a 7/32-inch (5.5 mm) stroke.
Applications
The Powermite Two-inch Pneumatic Valve Actuator is designed to be used on 1/2 to 1-inch Powermite 599 Series Terminal Unit Valves in liquid and steam service applications. The pneumatic actuator relies on the spring inside the bonnet assembly of the MT Series valve bodies to return to the normal position. Recommendation: Use only for MT Series valve bodies, 1/2 to 1-inch only.
features
Low profile Freely rotates to aid tubing installation Easy installation and removal All metal housing Orderable as actuator only or complete valve/actuator assembly
C-43
Valves
MT Series
SSC Electronic Valve Actuator

24 Vac, Proportional Control
SSC61U Electronic Valve Actuator.
Powermite
Description
The Powermite 599 Series MT Series SSC61U and SSC61.5U Electronic Valve Actuators require a 24 Vac supply and provide a 0 to 10 Vdc control signal to proportionally control Powermite 599 MT series valves with a 7/ 32-inch (5.5 mm) stroke and a threaded valve bonnet that fits the actuators.
Applications
The Powermite 599 Series MT Series SSC61 electronic actuators and MT Series Valves are used in heating and cooling applications to control hot or chilled water or steam for convectors, fan coil units, unit conditioners, radiation, reheat coils and similar terminal units requiring a minimum of 67 lbs. (300 N) nominal forces. The SSC61 accepts plenum cable or 3/8-inch flex conduit connection.
Wiring Diagrams
features
UL listed for plenum installations Direct coupled, one step installation without special tools Manual override with hex wrench Visual position indication Fail-Safe or Fail-in-Place
Key G, GO 24 Vac operating voltage Y 0 to 10 Vdc control signal
GO G
System Neutral System potential
C-45
Valves
MT Series
SSC Electronic Valve Actuator

24 Vac, 3-position (floating) Control
SSC81U Electronic Valve Actuator.
Powermite
Description
The Powermite 599 Series MT Series SSC81U and SSC81.5U Electronic Valve Actuators require a 24 Vac supply and provide a 3-position (floating) control signal. These actuators control Powermite 599 MT Series Valves with a 7/32-inch (5.5 mm) stroke and a threaded valve bonnet that fits the actuators.
Applications
The Powermite 599 Series MT Series SSC81 Electronic Actuators and MT Series Valves are used in heating and cooling applications in liquid and steam applications requiring a minimum of 67 lbs. (300 N) nominal forces. The SSC81 accepts plenum cable or 3/8-inch flex conduit connection.
Wiring Diagrams
0 1
Key Y2 Retracts actuator shaft Y1 Extends actuator shaft G System Potential GO System Neutral
features
UL listed for plenum installations Direct coupled, one step installation without special tools Manual override with hex wrench Visual position indication Fail-Safe or Fail-in-Place
SSC81U (Fail-in-Place) Wiring.
SSC81.5U (Fail-Safe) Wiring.
C-47
Valves
MT Series
SQS Electronic Valve Actuator

24 Vac, Proportional Control SR/NSR
Powermite MT Series SQS65U/SQS65.5U Electronic Valve Actuator.
Powermite
Description
The Powermite SQS65 and SQS65.5 Electronic Valve Actuators require a 24 Vac supply and receive a 0 to 10 Vdc or a 0 to 1000 Ohm control signal to proportionally control a valve. This actuator is designed to work with Powermite 599 MT Series Valves with a 7/32-inch (5.5 mm) stroke.
Applications
The Powermite SQS65 and SQS65.5 Electronic Valve Actuator is for use in small to medium HVAC installations with Powermite 599 Series, MT Series valves and Siemens Building Technologies standard valves with a 7/32-inch (5.5 mm) stroke. Recommendation: Use only with the MT Series valve bodies.
features
Maintenance-free with reversible motor Voltage or resistance signal input Position output signal 0 to 10 Vdc Fail-in-place or fail-safe Small, compact design Manual adjustment knob with indication of stroke allows for repositioning in power-off condition (SQS65 actuator only) Mechanical spring allows the valve to return to normal position in power off condition (SQS65.5 actuator only) Orderable as actuator only or complete valve/actuator assembly Suitable for low pressure (15 psi) steam applications
C-49
Valves
MT Series
SQS Electronic Valve Actuator

24 Vac, 3-position (floating) Control SR
Powermite MT Series SQS85.53U Electronic Valve Actuator
Powermite
Description
The Powermite 599 Series MT Series SQS electronic valve actuator requires a 24 Vac supply and receives a floating control signal to provide three-position control. This actuator works with Powermite 599 Series MT Series terminal unit valves with a 7/32-inch (5.5 mm) stroke.
Applications
For use in small to medium HVAC installations with Powermite 599 Series MT Series terminal unit valves and Siemens Building Technologies standard valves with a 7/32-inch (5.5 mm) stroke requiring a minimum of 67 pounds force (300 N). These valves can be used in liquid and low pressure steam service applications. Recommendation: Use only with the MT Series valve bodies. This actuator is not recommended for 2-position or pulse applications.
features
Maintenance-free with reversible motor UL listed for plenum installations Floating 3-position control signal input Mechanical spring returns the valve to its normal (fail-safe) position in power off condition. Orderable as actuator only or complete valve/actuator assembly Suitable for liquid and low pressure (15 psi) steam applications
C-51
Valves
MT Series
Powermite Ball 599 Series
Two- way and Three-way Ball Valves

24 Vac Proportional Control
Powermite 599 Series 2-way Ball Valve and Actuator.
Powermite 599 Series 3-way Ball Valve and Actuator.
Powermite
Description
Designed to provide excellent equal percentage flow control, the Powermite 599 Series Ball Valves are available in 1/2 to 2-inch line sizes and are 1/4-turn rotary control valves. These ball valves are designed to couple with an OpenAir actuator.
Applications
Powermite 599 Series Ball Valves can control hot or chilled water and up to 50% glycol solution in convectors, fan coil units, unit conditioners, radiation, and reheat coils.
Valves
Ball
The parabolic shape of the flow optimizer orifice allows a slowly opening valve. Equal movements of the valve stem at any point of the flow range changes the existing flow an equal percentage regardless of the existing flow. The ball valve equal percentage flow characteristic (See Flow Control.) mirrors the flow characteristic of a coil, resulting in linear heat transfer.
features
Universal mounting plate accommodates different actuator sizes Variety of ball sizes and flow coefficients minimizes the need for downsizing pipes Leak-proof shutoff accurately controls fluid through coils Blow-out proof stem withstands high pressure for safety Actuator and plate can be rotated to facilitate installation and wiring Standoffs provide a thermal barrier between the actuator and the mounting plate Plastic mounting plate, extensions, and handle do not condensate in chilled or hot water applications Operating handle can manually operate valve in the event of a power failure
Flow Optimizer
Ball Valve Equal Percentage Flow Control.
Refer to Section D for a complete listing of OpenAir actuators.
C-58
For assistance, contact Customer Care at:
1.888.593.7876
58
www.prokontrol.com
SIEMENS -
Flowrite Globe 599 Series

1/2 to 2-inch Bronze Body Normally Open or Normally Closed
Two-way Globe Valves
Flowrite 599 Series Two-way Globe Valve.
Flowrite
Description
Designed to work with either a pneumatic or electronic actuator with a 3/4-inch (20 mm) stroke, the Flowrite 599 Series Two-way Globe Valves are available in ANSI Class 250 for Normally Closed or Normally Open action.
Applications
The Flowrite 599 Series Two-way Globe Valves are recommended for water, low and high pressure steam, and glycol solutions up to 50 percent.
Two-way Globe Valves
features
Direct-coupled bonnet Equal percentage (NC port) or linear flow (NO port) characteristics Brass or stainless steel trim Factory orderable as: - Valve only - Valve and Actuator 100:1 Rangeability Accepts any 3/4-inch stroke Flowrite pneumatic or electronic actuator ANSI Leakage Class IV (0.01% of Cv) Cartridge-type packing for easy service Multiple end connections available
C-95
Valves

Three-way Globe Valves
Flowrite 599 Series Three-way Globe Valve.
Description
Designed to work with either pneumatic or electronic actuators with a 3/4-inch (20 mm) stroke, the Flowrite 599 Series Three-way Globe Valves are available in ANSI Class 250.
Applications
The Flowrite 599 Series Three-way Globe Valves are recommended for mixing water supplies of two different temperatures. The upper port is closed in the normal stem up, failed position. The lower port is open in the stem up position. This valve can also be used for throttling or bypass coil control application. However, a pump is recommended on the coil circuit to improve the heat transfer characteristic of the coil and for freeze protection. To use this valve as a diverting valve, contact your local representative for more information.
features
Direct-coupled, universal bonnet Equal percentage (NC port) or linear flow (NO port) characteristics Brass or stainless steel trim Factory orderable as: - Valve only - Valve and Actuator Accepts any 3/4-inch Flowrite pneumatic or electronic actuator 100:1 Rangeability ANSI Leakage Class IV (0.01% of Cv) Cartridge-type packing for easy service FxF or UFxUF end connections available
www.prokontrol.com SIEMENS -
C-101
67
Valves
Flowrite
Three-way Globe Valves

2-1/2 to 6-inch Flanged Iron Body Normally Open or Normally Closed
Two-way Flanged Iron Globe Valves
Flowrite 599 Series Two-Way Flanged Iron Valve.
Description
Designed to work with either pneumatic or electronic actuators, the Flowrite 599 Series Two-way Valves are available in both ANSI Class 125 and 250 for normally closed or normally open action.
Applications
The Flowrite 599 Series Two-way valves are recommended for water, steam, and glycol solutions up to 50 percent. Additional specifications include the following: Water inlet pressures up to ANSI 125 and ANSI 250 cast iron body rating Water modulating differential pressure up to 25 psi (172 kPa) for bronze trim and 50 psi (345 kPa) for stainless steel trim Steam inlet to 100 psig with modulating differential pressure up to 50 psi (345 kPa)
features
Valve flange face-to-face dimensions meet ISA 75.03 standards Direct-coupled, universal bonnet Equal percentage or linear flow characteristics 2-1/2 and 3-inch sizes available with 3/4-inch stroke only 4-, 5-, 6-inch are available with a 1-1/2-inch stroke Bronze or stainless steel trim ANSI Leakage Class IV (0.01% of Cv) Cartridge-type packing for easy service
C-105
71
Valves
Flowrite
Two-way Flanged Iron Globe Valves

2-1/2 to 6-inch Flanged Iron Body
Three-way Flanged Iron Globe Valves
Flowrite 599 Series Three-way Flanged Iron Globe Valve.
Description
Designed to work with either a pneumatic or electronic Flowrite actuator, the Flowrite 599 Series Three-way Globe Valves are available in both ANSI Class 125 and 250.
Flowrite
Applications
The Flowrite 599 Series Three-way Globe Valves are recommended for water and glycol solutions up to 50 percent. Additional specifications include the following: Water inlet pressures up to ANSI 125 and ANSI 250 cast-iron body rating Water modulating differential pressure up to 25 psi (172 kPa) for bronze trim and 50 psi (345 kPa) for stainless steel trim
Three-way Flanged Iron Globe Valves
features
Valve flange face-to-face dimensions meet ISA 75.03 standards Direct-coupled, universal bonnet Equal percentage (NC port) and linear (NO port) flow characteristics Bronze or stainless steel trim Rangeability >100:1 2-1/2 to 3-inch are available with a 3/4-inch stroke 4-, 5-, and 6-inch are available as 1-1/2-inch stroke ANSI Leakage Class IV (0.01% of Cv) Cartridge-type packing for easy service
Option
Service flange for easy removal of stem and plug through bottom port
C-111
76
Valves
Overview
Damper Actuators provide control, either electronically or pneumatically, for a variety of HVAC applications, including: VAV Systems Mixing Boxes Central Fan Systems Exhaust Dampers
Damper Actuators
Overview Damper Actuators
Selection Guide
Electronic Spring Return Application Terminal Units Face and Bypass Multi-zone Mixing Boxes Bypass Damper Makeup Air Damper Outside Air Dampers Small Rooftop Units (RTU) Rooftop Units (RTU) Zone Isolation Dampers Vortex Dampers Inlet Vane Dampers Return Air Dampers Zone Isolation Dampers Central VAV Fans GMA GCA GDE/GLB Non-spring Return GEB GBB/GIB No. 3 Pneumatic Spring Return No. 4 No. 6
Damper Actuators
*
*LC Model Damper Torque for Approach Air of 1200 ft./min. (6 m/s) or less 2.5 lb.-in./ft.2 (0.3 Nm/m2) 5.0 lb.-in./ft.2 (0.6 Nm/m2)
Damper Type Standard Leakage Low Leakage Very Low Leakage
Damper Leakage at 1 H2O (240 Pa) Static Pressure More than 10 CFM/ft.2 (50.8 l/s per m2) 5 to 10 CFM/ft.2 (25.4 to 50.8 l/s per m2)
Less than 5 CFM/ft.2 7.0 lb.-in./ft.2 (0.8 Nm/m2) (Less than 25.4 l/s per m2)
For detailed damper actuator sizing information, please refer to the Engineering Section, I.
D-2
1.888.593.7876
83
www.prokontrol.com
SIEMENS -
OpenAir
GMA Series
Spring Return Electric Damper Actuator
New!
Easily Replaces:
Belimo LN/NF Series
62 lb.-in. 24 Vac/Vdc, 2-position Control 120 Vac, 2-position Control 120 Vac/Vdc, 3-position Control 0 to 10 Vdc, Modulating Control
GMA Series Spring Return Direct-coupled Electric Damper Actuator.
OpenAir GMA Series
Description
The OpenAir GMA Series Direct-coupled, Spring Return Electronic Damper Actuators provide modulating, twoposition and three-position control of building HVAC dampers.
Applications
The OpenAir GMA Series Damper Actuators are ideal for Constant or Variable Air Volume installations for the control of return air, mixed air, exhaust, and face and bypass dampers that require up to 62 lb.-in. of torque. The actuators are designed for application where the damper is required to return to a fail-safe position when there is a power failure. Models are available with either a universal cable for wiring in conduit or a plenum-rated cable.
24 Vac/dc compatible Integral 1/2-inch conduit connector Small actuator footprint with 62 lb.-in. of torque Bi-directional fail-safe spring return Floating control models available with feedback potentiometer Manual override Mechanical range adjustment capability Easily visible position indicator Brushless DC motor technology Precabled UL873 and C-UL (C22.2 No. 24-93) listed Unique self-centering shaft coupling
features
Options
Dual independently adjustable auxiliary switch Adjustable offset and span
D-3
Damper Actuators
OpenAir
GCA Series
Spring Return Electric Damper Actuator
Easily Replaces:
Belimo AF Series
142 lb.-in. torque 24 Vac, 2-position Control 120 Vac, 2-position Control 24 Vac, 3-position Control 4 to 20 mA, Modulating Control 0 to 10 Vdc, Modulating Control
GCA Series Spring Return Electric Damper Actuator.
OpenAir GCA Series
Description
Designed for control of building HVAC dampers, the OpenAir GCA Series Direct-coupled, Spring Return Electric Actuators are available in 0 to 10 Vdc or 4 to 20 mA modulating, three-position (floating) and two-position (on/off) control models.
Applications
The OpenAir GCA Series Damper Actuators are ideal for Constant or Variable Air Volume installations for the control of return air, mixed air, exhaust, and face and bypass dampers that require up to 142 lb.-in. (16 Nm) torque. The actuators are designed for applications where the damper is required to return to a fail-safe position when there is a power failure. Models are available with either a universal cable for wiring in conduit or a plenum-rated cable for applications where conduit is not required.
features
Self-centering shaft coupling Bidirectional fail-safe spring return Rugged all metal housing, rated NEMA 2 Accepts shaft diameters up to 1 (25 mm) Quiet, low-power operation Brushless DC motor technology with stall protection Assembled in the U.S.A. Manual override Options Independently adjustable dual auxiliary switches Potentiometer for 3-position models Adjustable span and offset
D-7
Damper Actuators
OpenAir
Easily Replaces:
Belimo LM Series
GDE Series
Non-spring Return Electric Damper Actuator
44 lb.-in. torque 24 Vac, 3-position Control 0 to 10 Vdc, Modulating Control
GDE Series Non-spring Return Electric Damper Actuator.
OpenAir GDE Series
Description
The OpenAir GDE Series Direct-coupled 24 Vac Nonspring Return Rotary Electric Actuator is designed for 0 to 10 Vdc or three-position (floating) control of building HVAC dampers.
Applications
The OpenAir GDE Series Damper Actuators are used in Constant or Variable Air Volume installations for the control requiring up to 44 lb.-in. (5 Nm) torque. Models are available with either a universal cable for wiring in conduit or a plenum-rated cable for applications where conduit is not required.
features
Compact design Easy-to-see position indicator 0 to 10 V or 3-position models Self-adapting capability for maximum flexibility in damper positioning UL, CSA, CE listed Quiet, low-power operation Rated NEMA 2 Assembled in the U.S.A. Manual override
Options
Independently adjustable dual auxiliary switches Adjustable start/span Standard or plenum cable Available in bulk packs for additional savings
D-11
Damper Actuators
OpenAir
GLB Series
Non-spring Return Electric Damper Actuator
Easily Replaces:
Belimo NM Series
88 lb.-in. torque 24 Vac, 3-position Control 0 to 10 Vdc, Modulating Control
GLB Series Non-spring Return Electric Damper Actuator.
OpenAir GLB Series
Description
The OpenAir GLB Series Direct-coupled 24 Vac Nonspring Electric Actuator is designed for 0 to 10 Vdc or three-position (floating) control of building HVAC dampers.
Applications
The OpenAir GLB Series Damper Actuators are used in Constant or Variable Air Volume installations for the control requiring up to 88 lb.-in. (10 Nm) torque.
features
Compact design Easy-to-see position indicator 0 to 10 V or 3-position models Self-adapting capability for maximum flexibility in damper positioning UL, CSA, CE listed Quiet, low-power operation Rugged all metal housing, rated NEMA 2 Assembled in the U.S.A. Manual override Plenum-rated cable
Options
Independently adjustable dual auxiliary switches Adjustable start/span
D-15
Damper Actuators
OpenAir
GBB Series
Non-spring Return Rotary Electric Damper Actuator
Easily Replaces:
Belimo SM/AM Series
177 lb.-in. torque 0 to 10 Vdc, Modulating Control 4 to 20 mA, Modulating Control 3-position/2-position Control
GBB Series Non-spring Return Electric Damper Actuator.
OpenAir GBB Series
Description
Designed for control of building HVAC dampers, the 24 Vac OpenAir GBB Series Direct-coupled 24 Vac Non-spring Return Electric Damper Actuators are available in 0 to 10 Vdc, 4 to 20 mA, two- and three-position control.
Applications
The OpenAir GBB Series Damper Actuators are used in Constant or Variable Air Volume installations for the control of return air, mixed air, exhaust, and face and bypass dampers that require up to 177 lb.-in. (20 Nm) torque. Models are available with either a universal cable for wiring in conduit or a plenum-rated cable for applications where conduit is not required.
features
Brushless DC motor technology with stall protection Self-centering shaft coupling Quiet, low-power operation Accepts shaft diameters up to 1 (25 mm) Manual override Assembled in the U.S.A.
Options
Independently adjustable dual auxiliary switches Adjustable offset and span Potentiometer for 3-position models
D-19
Damper Actuators
Rugged all metal housing, rated NEMA 2
Accessories & Service Kits

Series
OpenAir
Description Actuator Commissioning Tool. A portable instrument for exercising, calibrating, and testing resistive, proportional (voltage/current), incremental (floating), and On/Off actuators.
GDE GLB
GEB GMA
GCA GIB GBB GKB
GGD
Quantity 1
Part No. 985-047

Tools
Adjustment Tool.
985-098
Hex Key.
Pkg. of 24 985-054P24
OpenAir Reference
Crank Arm Kit. Allows a directcoupled actuator to provide an auxiliary linear drive; can be used to simultaneously drive a set of opposing or adjacent dampers with a single actuator.
1 1
ASK71.13 ASK71.3
Damper Shaft Cranks
155-176P25 155-173P25
Crank Arm Kit with Bracket. For use in applications where the actuator can be rigidly surface-mounted and a linear stroke output is required.
1 1
ASK71.14 ASK71.4
Rotary to Linear Kit. 1 ASK71.5
Damper Actuators
Rotary to Linear Kit with Universal Mounting Bracket.
ASK71.6
Universal Crank Arm. For linear applications requiring connection to damper shaft when ball joint connection is not possible. Shaft sizes 3/8 to 1.
ASK71.9
D-42
1.888.593.7876
94
www.prokontrol.com
SIEMENS -
331
No. 3 Pneumatic Actuator
331-4314 Actuator with fixed mounting bracket and clevis.
331-4312 Actuator with pivot mounting bracket.
331-4311 Actuator, clevis and rocker arm. Mounting for extended shaft.
Description
Designed with a 2-3/8-inch (60 mm) stroke, the No. 3 Pneumatic Actuator is a rugged, metal-fabricated device that provides gradual or positive actuation of HVAC dampers. The actuator is available in a variety of spring ranges for energy optimizing and sequencing with other devices.
Applications
Recommended for control of mixing box dampers or air valves and damper control for unit ventilators, unit conditioners and small HVAC systems, the No. 3 Pneumatic Actuator is also available with 2-3/4-inch (70 mm) stroke in the three spring ranges. For more information, contact your local Siemens Building Technologies representative.
331
No. 3 Pneumatic
features features
Ozone-resistant rolling rubber diaphragm Variety of installation options, including: Fixed bracket mounting Direct front mounting Pivot mounting for extended shaft Available with positioning relay
Max. Thrust lb. (N) Spring Return Full Stroke Forward (No Stroke) 15 psi 18 psi 25 psi 0 psig Gradual (103 kPa) (124 kPa) (172 kPa) (0 kPa) Operation 64 (285) 40 (178) 16 (71) 88 (391) 64 (285) 40 (178) 144 (641) 120 (534) 96 (427) 24 (107) 40 (178) 64 (285) 10 (1.1) 10 (1.1) 10 (1.1)
Torque Rating lb.-in (Nm) 2-position Operation or with Positioner 15 psi 18 psi 25 psi (103 kPa) (124 kPa) (172 kPa) 20.2 (2.3) 33.6 (3.8) 13.4 (1.5) 20.2 (2.3) 33.6 (3.8) 33.6 (3.8) 20.2 (2.3) 33.6 (3.8) 53.8 (6.1)
Thrust/Torque Ratings
Nominal Spring Rating
3 to 7 psi (21 to 48 kPa) 5 to 10 psi (35 to 69 kPa) 8 to 13 psi (55 to 90 kPa)
With maximum hysteresis of 2.5 psi (17.2 kPa) @ 90 rotation.
D-31
Damper Actuators
331
331-2929 No. 4 Pneumatic Actuator and clevis for frame mounting.
331-2904 No. 4 Pneumatic Actuator with pivot mounting bracket.
331-2973 No. 4 Pneumatic Actuator with clevis, and crank. Universal Mounting Plate for extended shaft or frame mounting.
331-2974 No. 4 Pneumatic Actuator with non-pivot bracket for unit ventilator.
Description
Designed with a 4-inch (102 mm) stroke, the No. 4 Pneumatic Actuator is a rugged, metal-fabricated device that provides gradual or positive actuation of HVAC and fire/smoke dampers.
Applications
Recommended for control of outdoor, return air, exhaust, face and bypass, fan discharge, and static pressure control dampers, the No. 4 Pneumatic Actuator also is excellent for controlling specialized dampers and air valves in terminal units, such as unit ventilators and mixing boxes. The No. 4 actuator hesitation model is frequently used to operate the outdoor air damper on unit ventilators and mixing boxes. An actuator marked with an asterisk (*) is a component recognized under ULs Damper Actuator category (EMKU2) for use on fire dampers and leakage-related dampers.
331
No. 4 Pneumatic
features features
Replaceable diaphragm Positioning relay (optional) Forward travel stops (optional) Hesitation model (provides minimum ventilation without separate damper/ actuator Variety of spring ranges for sequencing with other control devices Stainless steel actuator shaft
Max. Thrust lb. (N)
Nominal Spring Rating 3 to 7 psi (21 to 48 kPa) 3 to 13 psi (21 to 90 kPa) 5 to 10 psi (35 to 90 kPa) 8 to 13 psi (55 to 90 kPa) 2 to 3, 8 to 13 psi (14 to 20, 55 to 90 kPa) Hesitation
Spring Return Full Stroke Forward (No Stroke) 15 psi 18 psi 25 psi 0 psig (103 kPa) (124 kPa) (172 kPa) (0 kPa) 88 (391) 22 (198) 55 (245) 22 (98) 22 (98) 21 (145) 55 (245) 88 (391) 55 (245) 55 (245) 198 (881) 132 (587) 165 (734) 132 (587) 132 (587) 33 (147) 33 (147) 55 (245) 88 (391) 22 (98)
Gradual Operation 30 (3.4) 30 (3.4) 30 (3.4) 30 (3.4) 23 (2.6)
2-position Operation or with Positioner 15 psi 18 psi 25 psi (103 kPa) (124 kPa) (172 kPa) 46 (5.2) 30 (3.4) 77 (8.7) 30 (3.4) 46 (5.2) 46 (5.2) 77 (8.7) 77 (8.7) 46 (5.2) 46 (5.2) 77 (8.7) 124 (855)
www.prokontrol.com SIEMENS - 100
D-33
Damper Actuators
Torque Rating lb.-in. (Nm)
331
331-2792 and 331-3060 No. 6 Pneumatic Actuator, pivot mounting type.
331-2856 No. 6 Pneumatic Actuator and clevis for frame mounting.
331-3011 No. 6 Pneumatic Actuator, clevis, crank and rocker arm. Universal mounting for extended shaft or frame mounting.
Description
Designed with a 4-inch (102 mm) stroke, the No. 6 Pneumatic Actuator is a rugged, metal-fabricated device that provides gradual or positive actuation of HVAC and fire/smoke dampers.
Applications
Recommended for multiple applications, the No. 6 Pneumatic Actuator is excellent for control of outdoor air, return air, mixed air, exhaust, face and bypass, fan discharge, multisection, static pressure control, fan inlet vanes and other special applications. An actuator marked with an asterisk is recognized under ULs Damper Actuator category (EMKU2) for use on fire dampers and leakage-rated dampers.
331
No. 6 Pneumatic
features features
Replaceable diaphragm Variety of spring ranges for sequencing with other control devices High torque
Options
Positioning relay Forward travel stops
Max. Thrust lb. (N) Spring Return Full Stroke Forward (No Stroke) 15 psi 18 psi 25 psi 0 psig (103 kPa) (124 kPa) (172 kPa) (0 kPa) 125 (556) 36 (160) 36 (160) 179 (796) 89 (396) 89 (396) 304 (1352) 214 (952) 214 (952) 54 (240) 54 (240) 144 (640)
Torque Rating lb.-in. (Nm) 2-position Operation or with Positioner 15 psi 18 psi 25 psi (103 kPa) (124 kPa) (172 kPa) 75 (8.5) 50 (5.6) 50 (5.6) 75 (8.5) 75 (8.5) 125 (14.1) 75 (8.5) 75 (8.5) 202 (22.8)
Nominal Spring Rating 3 to 8 psi (21 to 55 kPa) 3 to 13 psi (21 to 90 kPa) 8 to 13 psi (55 to 90 kPa)
Gradual Operation 50 (5.6) 50 (5.6) 50 (5.6)
D-35
Damper Actuators
134/251
Pressure Electric Switches
134 Pressure Electric Switch.
251 Pressure Electric Switch.
251 Multi-input Pressure Static Switch
Description
134 Pressure Electric Switches
The 134 Pressure Electric Switches are heavy duty pressure-actuated, mechanical contact type switches used to open or close electrical circuits from pressure signals in pneumatic control systems.
Applications
134 Pressure Electric Switch
The 134 Pressure Electric Switches are used wherever it is necessary to close (or open) an electrical circuit on the basis of a predetermined air pressure signal. This switch is to be used in areas protected from the weather. Typical applications include the control of air compressors, fans, pilot lights, resistance heating elements, control of electric heating loads or motors on fans, pumps or small air compressors.
134 251

The 251 Pressure Electric Switches are pressure-actuated snap switches that open or close electrical circuits from pneumatic control signals.
Pressure Electric Switches
251 Pressure Electric Switch

The 251 Pressure Electric Switches are used to start and stop fans, pumps and chillers or to energize and deenergize electric heating elements and pilot lights.
features

DPST or SPDT snap-acting External adjustment and indication of set point and differential Screw terminals are easily accessible for field wiring Long life, heavy duty contact mechanism Normally open or normally closed contacts models available Not position sensitive, can be mounted in any position Mounting bracket included
Note: Pilot ratings for 251 switches are as follows: 251-0006 .................................... 360 VA, 120 to 480 Vac Other Part Numbers ................... 125 VA, 120 to 277 Vac

SPDT, snap-acting except 251-006, which is SPST, NO; 251-0009 and 251-0001, which are SPST, NC 1 and 2 stage models available Dual pressure input models available Available with fixed or adjustable differentials Accuracy 2 psi
E-17
Switches & Relays
243
Multi-purpose Relays
Commercial and Heavy Duty
243-0046 Commercial Duty Multi-purpose Relay.
243-0009 Heavy Duty Multi-purpose Relay.
Description
The 243 Multi-purpose Relays are pneumatic auxiliary devices designed to provide a variety of pneumatic control functions for the typical control system.
Applications
The 243 Multi-purpose Relays are used as direct and reverse acting, amplifying, signal advancing, minimum pressure relay, and lower pressure transfer.
243
Multi-purpose Relays/Pneumatic
Typical Connections
features
Use for your most common applications Available as commercial-duty (plastic) or heavy-duty (metal) High accuracy/repeat-ability Two-valve design prevents constant air loss Internal relief mechanism for fail safe operation
R TD TR S = = = = output direct acting input reverse acting input air supply
For more detailed information on applications, refer to the Engineering section.
E-23
Switches & Relays
265
Three-way EP Valves
265-1001 Three-way EP Valve-Junction Box Type.
265-1007 Three-way EP Valve-Open Frame Type.
Description
A general purpose, electrically-operated, two-position three-way valve designed to control air flow, the 265 ThreeWay Valve can be used for interlock between an electrical system and a pneumatic control system; available in open frame (yoke) and junction box (splice box) types.
Applications
The 265 EP Three-way Valves are commonly-used to alternately apply pressure to and exhaust pressure from pneumatically-controlled devices, such as valves and damper actuators, by an electrical input energizing or deenergizing the solenoid of the valve. A standard method is shown in the Application Drawings below. The input air is connected to port 1 (normally closed) and the output is connected to port 3 (common). Thus when the solenoid is energized, port 1 connects to port 3 permitting the thermostat to control the damper actuator. When the solenoid is de-energized, port 2 (normally open) is connected to port 3, exhausting air from the actuator permitting it to return to its normal position.
265
Three-way EP Valves
features
UL and CSA approved for general purpose Valve may be mounted in any position Universal replacement for many competitive models Mounting holes provided in the yoke Wide selection of AC voltages
E-21
Switches & Relays
Air Station Equipment
656-0009 High Capacity, 3-way Pilot Valve.
201-1001 Single-stage, Compressed Air Pressure Reducing Valve.
908-048 Single-stage PRV Station.
201-1000 Single-stage, Compressed Air Pressure Reducing Valve.
908-051 Compressed Air Filter.
908-049 Dual-stage PRV Station.
Description
Providing pneumatic control, Air Station Equipment, which includes Single- and Dual-stage Pressure Reducing Valves and High Capacity, 3-way Pilot Valves, responds rapidly to large volume demands and supply pressure variations. The Compressed Air Filter removes water or oil to 0.025 particle size.
Applications
Air Station equipment and compressor systems are available for schools, hospitals, commercial office and industrial buildings, and other facilities. Compressed air systems include: Single (low) pressure Dual (low and high) pressure Dual, low pressure for two pressure systems Your local Siemens Building Technologies representative can assit you in selecting the appropriate air compressors and accessories for optimum efficiency and duty cycling.
features
Pressure Reducing Valves

200 mesh stainless strainer Locking handle Dual tappings for right or left-hand gauge (201-1000) Gauge plug and bushing (201-1000) 2-1/2 (64 mm) gauge with 0 to 30 psig (0 to 207 kPa) (201-1001, 201-1002) Integral safety relief valve (201-1001, 201-1002)
Compressed Air Filter

10 scfm (17 m3/hr) capacity Drain port Replaceable cartridge
F-5
Auxiliary Equipment Air Station Equipment
Single Pressure.
Low and High Pressure.
Dual Pressure.
F-7
Auxiliary Equipment
Air Station Equipment
142AP
Pressure Gauges
1-1/2, 2-1/2 and 3-1/2 Pressure Gauges.
Description
Pneumatic pressure gauges are used wherever visual indication of pressure is required.
Applications
The 142 AP Pressure Gauges are generally used in applications such as air compressor stations and central control panels.
features
Accuracy 2.5% of full scale for the middle half of scale; 3.5% elsewhere Available in 1-1/2-inch (38 mm), 2-1/2-inch (64 mm) and 3-1/2-inch (89 mm) diameter sizes Mounting hardware for panel mounted gauges included
F-9
Auxiliary Equipment
142AP
Pressure Gauges
JOHNSON CONTROLS PRODUCTS

System 350 Electronic Controllers T600 Programmable Thermostats T600 Non-Programmable Line Voltage Thermostats A419 Electronic Temperature Controller A25 High Limit Control W43A Humidistat A70 Freeze Stat P10 Low Pressure Control V11 3 Way Solenoid A11 Low Temperature Cut Out Control A19 Remote Bulb Temperature Control A28 Two Stage Temperature Controller V47 Temperature Activated Modulating Valve F61 Flow Switch P32 Sensitive Differential Pressure Switch P70 Pressure Control (Low, High or Dual) T4002 Pneumatic Stats H4100 Pneumatic Humidistats T4002 Pneumatic Thermostat High Volume H5100 Pneumatic Humidity Transmitter T5002 Pneumatic Temperature Transmitter T4752 Pneumatic Heat/Cool Thermostat T4516 Pneumatic Dual Temp High Output Thermostat Accessories, Accessories, Accessories. Pneumatic Receiver Controllers, Switches, Relays, Transmitters Pneumatic Piston Damper Actuators Valve Body Selection Chart Accessories for M9000 Series Actuators M9000 Series Damper Actuators NG1000 Series Ball Valves J Series Zone Valves Butterfly Valves JCI - 1 to 9 JCI - 10 JCI - 11 JCI - 12 JCI - 13 JCI - 14 JCI - 15,16 JCI - 17 JCI - 18 JCI - 19 JCI - 20 JCI - 21, 22 JCI - 23, 24 JCI - 25, 26 JCI - 27 JCI - 28 JCI - 29 to 31 JCI - 32 JCI - 33 JCI - 34 JCI - 35 JCI - 36 JCI - 37 JCI - 38 JCI - 39 to 44 JCI - 45 to 51 JCI - 52 to 54 JCI - 55 JCI - 56 to58 JCI - 59, 60 JCI - 61 to 63 JCI - 64 to 71 JCI - 72, 73
Controls Group 507 E. Michigan Street P.O. Box 423, Milwaukee, WI 53202 Code No. LIT-1922645
temp less 1922645 9thcc:2-103 Electric System 350 TM
System 350TM Temperature Controls

a350e.tif a350p.tif a350r_2.tif a350r.tif s350.tif s350c.tif s350p.tif d350.tif
Rev: 07/18/97 logo: JCI left ft: elec right ft: standard Sect# = 2 seQ# = 339
a350.tif
A350E
A350P
A350R
A350S
S350
S350C
S350P
y350.tif
D350
The System 350. Temperature family includes On/Off (SPDT), proportional (0 to 10 VDC and 0 to 20 mA output), and reset (SPST) controls in addition to stage, display, and power modules. The controls are used in conjunction with the A99B Series Temperature Sensors and TE-6001 Series Sensor Mounting Accessories. Applications include: A350A/B frozen/refrigerated display cases ventilation control space temperature control temperature reset for single or multistage boilers modulating dampers Y350R temperature indication cooling tower control beverage/milk coolers modulating chilled/hot water valves
Features
!
Benefits
Provides reliable performance Covers a wide range of applications with minimal inventory investment Provides versatility for a wide range of applications; enables user to match equipment cycle rate and/or sequencing for a given application Provides flexible installation capabilities Eliminates wiring between modules Gives convenient, cost-effective, prepackaged options Holds setpoint regardless of load on system and its rate of change Provides flexible and customizable application solutions
Electronic Accuracy and Repeatability Field Selectable Modes Heating/Cooling Temperature Adjustable Settings Over a Wide Range Surface-Mount or DIN Rail-Mounting Ability Plug-Together, 5-Pin Connectors Sensors Included with Most Models ProportionaI/Integral Selectable Option on Some Controls Modular Design
! ! !
The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond t hese specifications, consult the local Johnson 03/02 Johnson Controls, Inc Controls office. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products.
1/1
www.prokontrol.com
JCI -
350_hum whole 1922655 9thcc:2-116 Electric System 350TM
System 350TM Humidity Controls

w351.tif w351p.tif s351.tif d351.tif y351.tif
W351
he6300.tif
W351P
S351
he6310.tif
D351
Y350R
HE-67S3-0N00P The System 350. Humidity family includes on/off SPDT and proportional ( 0 t o10 VDC a n d 0 t o20mA output) controls, as well as stage, display, and power modules. The HE-67S3-0N0BT and HE-67S3-0N00P Series Humidity Transmitters are used with the W351 Series Humidity Control for precise humidity sensing. Applications include: clean rooms computer rooms pharmaceutical manufacturing process high/low humidity alarm museums libraries space humidity control humidity monitoring and display paper manufacturing process and storage greenhouses churches
HE-67S3-0N0BT
Features
! !
Benefits
Provides reliable performance Covers a wide range of applications with minimal inventory investment Provides versatility for a wide range of applications; enables user to match equipment cycle rate and/or sequencing for a given application Provides flexible installation capabilities Eliminates wiring between modules Gives convenient, cost-effective, pre-packaged options Holds setpoint regardless of load on system and its rate of change Provides flexible and customizable application solutions
Electronic Accuracy and Repeatability Field Selectable Modes Dehumidification/Humidification Humidity Adjustable Settings Over a Wide Range Surface-Mount or DIN Rail-Mounting Ability Plug-Together, 5-Pin Connectors Sensors Included with Most Models ProportionaI/Integral Selectable Option on Some Controls Modular Design
! ! ! ! !
1/1
www.prokontrol.com
JCI -
350_pres whole 1922665 9thcc:2-126 Electric System 350TM
System 350TM Pressure Controls

p352.tif p352p.tif s352.tif d352.tif p399v.tif dpt2064.tif y350.tif
P352
P352P
S352
D352
P399
DPT-2640
Y350R
The System 350. Pressure family includes on/off SPDT and proportional ( 0 t o10 VDC a n d 0 t o20 mA output) controls, as well as stage, display, and power modules. A P399 Pressure Transducer or DPT-2640 Pressure Transmitter provides input to the P352 Pressure Control. Applications include: condenser fan cycling (multiple) high pressure indication room or building static pressure supply side static pressure
Features
! !
Benefits
Provides reliable performance Covers a wide range of applications with minimal inventory investment Provides versatility for a wide range of applications; enables user to match equipment cycle rate and/or sequencing for a given application Provides flexible installation capabilities Eliminates wiring between modules Gives convenient, cost-effective, prepackaged options Holds setpoint regardless of load on system and its rate of change Provides flexible and customizable application solutions
Electronic Accuracy and Repeatability Field Selectable Modes Heating/Cooling Temperature Adjustable Settings Over a Wide Range Surface-Mount or DIN Rail-Mounting Ability Plug-Together, 5-Pin Connectors Sensors Included with Most Models ProportionaI/Integral Selectable Option on Some Controls Modular Design
! ! ! !
1/1
www.prokontrol.com
JCI -
350_bcon
Basic Controls
a350.tif
less
1922610
9thcc:2-97B
Electric
System 350 TM
A350A/BElectronic On/Off Temperature Control

The A350 on/off Control has a single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) relay with LED indication of the relay status for use with heating and cooling equipment. Adjustments include: setpoint, differential, and heat/cool mode of operation. Applications include staging compressors for frozen food or dairy cases, chilled water, and space thermostat control of rooftop packages for heating/air conditioning. Refer to A350A/B Series Electronic On/Off Temperature Control Product Data for more details.
a350e.tif
A350EElectronic On/Off Cooling Control

The A350E is an on/off electronic, cooling only control with SPDT relay output, LED indication, and both Fahrenheit and Celsius temperature scales. Besides being a cooling only control, the A350E has two features that differentiate it from the A350A/B Electronic Temperature Control: an adjustable minimum setpoint and sensor short/open circuit protection. Refer to A350E Electronic On/Off Cooling Control Product Data for more details.
a350p.tif
A350PElectronic Proportional Plus Integral Temperature Control
The A350P is a proportional or proportional plus integral control that has both Fahrenheit and Celsius temperature scales and a unique ten-segment LED that displays percentage of output. Adjustments include setpoint (Fahrenheit or Celsius), throttling range, minimum output, and reverse or direct acting mode of operation (for heating or cooling applications). The control also provides two simultaneous analog outputs of 0 to 10 VDC and 0 to 20 mA. The output is jumper-selectable for direct- or reverse-acting output. Application capabilities include mixing valves for chilled or hot water control and modulating dampers for air flow. Refer to A350P Series Electronic Proportional Plus Integral Temperature Control Product Data for more details.
a350r_2.tif
A350RElectronic Temperature Reset Control (with Relay)
The A350R is an electronic reset control with an SPST (normally open) relay with LED indication for relay operation. The A350R raises or lowers (resets) the temperature of the supply water or supply air based on a proportional drop or rise in temperature at the outdoor sensor. Adjustments include reset ratio (1:5 to 3:1), differential (1 to 30F), minimum supply temperature (50 to 160F), maximum supply temperature (160 to 220F), adjustable master reset setpoint temperature (40 to 70F), jumper selectable relay on-time (off, 1, 2, or 3 minutes), adjustable setback temperature (0 to 30F), and selectable warm weather shutdown temperature settings. Typical applications include on/off control of single or multi-stage boilers. Refer to A350R Electronic Temperature Reset Control (With Relay) Product Data for more details.
1/3
www.prokontrol.com
JCI -
Basic Controls (Continued)

a350s_a.tif
A350SElectronic Temperature Reset Module (without Relay)

The A350S requires the use of an S350 to provide either on/off (S350A) or proportional (S350P) output. There are two A350S models with different reset ratio adjustment ranges (1:5 to 10:1, or 1:30 to 1:1) for different applications. Other adjustments include: minimum supply temperature (35 to 80F), maximum supply temperature (45 to 140F), and adjustable master reset setpoint (30 to 90F). Refer to A350S Electronic Temperature Reset Module (Without Relay) Product Data for more details.
w351.tif
W351Electronic On/Off Humidity Control

The W351 Humidity Control contains an SPDT relay with LED indication of relay status, for use with humidification and dehumidification equipment. Adjustments include setpoint (10 to 90% RH), differential (2 to 10% RH), and humidify/dehumidify mode of operation. Typical applications include humidity control of clean rooms, computer rooms, office space, and warehouses. Refer to W351 Series Electronic On/Off Humidity Control Product Data for more details.
w351p.tif
W351PElectronic Proportional Plus Integral Humidity Control

The W351P is a proportional or proportional plus integral humidity control with a unique 10 segment LED that displays percent of output. Adjustments include: setpoint, integration constant, throttling range, minimum output, and reverse and direct acting mode of operation. The control provides two simultaneous analog outputs of 0 to 10 VDC and 0 to 20 mA. A typical application includes modulating steam valves for humidification. Refer to W351P Series Electronic Proportional Plus Integral Humidity Control Product Data for more details.
p352.tif
P352ABElectronic On/Off Pressure Control

The P352AB control is an automatic reset, electronic pressure control with SPDT relay output and LED indication. Typical applications include condenserfan cycling, compressor unloading , as well as other high and low pressure cutout applications. It is designed for use as either a direct or reverse-acting control. Three models provide control over a 0 to100, 90 to 250, or 240 to 600 psi pressure range. The 0 to 100 psi model has an adjustable differential of 2 to 50 psi, and the 90 to 250 and 240 to 600 psi models have an adjustable differential of 10 to 100 psi. The P352AB controls use a (specified) P399 Electronic Pressure Transducer and a WHA-P399 Wiring Harness which must be ordered separately. Refer to P352AB Electronic On/Off Pressure Control Product Datafor more details.
2/3
www.prokontrol.com
JCI -
Basic Controls (Continued)

p352p.tif
P352PElectronic Proportional Plus Integral Pressure Controls: Static Pressure (W.C.) and PSI Series
The P352P Series Controls may be setup as proportional-only or proportional plus integral pressure controls, which generate analog output signals based on the sensed pressure. These controls feature a 10 segment LED that displays percent of output, and they generate a 0 to 10 VDC and a 0 to 20 mA signal simultaneously. Adjustments include: setpoint, reverse or direct operation throttling range, minimum signal output, and integration constant (recovery rate). The P352PQ control models are designed for static pressure applications (W. C.) and use a DPT2640 Series Static Pressure Sensor which must be ordered separately. The P352PN series are designed for refrigerant pressure applications and come in three model pressure ranges: 0 to 100, 90 to 250, or 240 to 600 psi. The P352PN series models use a P399 Electronic Pressure Transducer and WHA-P399 Wiring Harness which must be ordered separately. Refer to P352P Series Electronic Proportional Plus Integral Pressure Controls: Static Pressure (W.C.) and PSI Series Product Data for more details.
r353s353.tif
R353 / S353Modular Electronic Sequencer

The R353 is a signal input module that accepts 0 to 10 VDC, 0 to 20 mA, or 135 to 10k ohm slidewire potentiometer inputs to drive up to ten S353 Stage Modules. The S353 Stage Modules contain an SPDT relay with LED indication of relay status. Field selectable jumpers allow for direct, reverse, or mixed acting applications. The R353 / S353 works in any combination of heating, cooling, humidity, and/or pressure applications. Refer to R353/S353 Modular Electronic Sequencer Product Data for more details.
3/3
www.prokontrol.com
JCI -
350_amod
Accessory Modules
s350.tif
less
1922615
9thcc:2-99
Electric
System 350 TM
S350 / S351 / S352Temperature, Humidity, and Pressure Stage Modules

System 350 Stage Modules can be used with respective Temperature (A350), Humidity (W351), and Pressure (P352) Controls. The stage modules have three adjustments: reverse or direct-acting operation; differential (1 to 30F, 0.5 to 17C, 2 to 10% RH; or 2 to 50 psi), and offset (1 to 30F, 0.6 to 16.7C, 2 to 30% RH, 2 to 50 psi). All stage modules have an SPDT relay output with LED indication. Applications include any job requiring multiple staging when used in conjunction with its respective System 350 control. Refer to S350A Series Temperature Stage ModulePage 17, S351 Humidity Stage ModulePage 28, and S352 Pressure Stage ModulePage 37 for more details.
s350c.tif
S350CTemperature Slave Stage Module

The S350C is used in conjunction with the A350 Temperature Control to add multiple stage capability with independently adjustable setpoints. The module is an electronic control with a single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) relay output. The S350C receives its power and sensor inputs from the A350 Temperature Control to which it is connected. Refer to S350C Temperature Slave Stage ModulePage 18 for more details.
s350p.tif
S350PProportional Plus Integral Temperature Stage Module

The S350P is used in conjunction with the A350 Series Temperature Controls to add proportional or proportional plus integral staging capability with analog 0 to 10 VDC and 0 to 20 mA outputs. Refer to S350P Proportional Plus Integral Temperature Stage ModulePage 19 for more details.
d350.tif
D350 / D351 / D352Temperature, Humidity, and Pressure Display Modules

System 350 Display Modules have a 3-digit LCD display that provides continuous sensor output information (read-only) for use with A350, W351, and P352 Controls. Display modules feature a setpoint button located on front of the module to obtain actual space conditions or setpoint readings. Display modules can be helpful when making accurate setpoint adjustments to System 350 controls. Refer to D350 Series Temperature Display ModulePage 20, D351 Humidity Display ModulePage 29, and D352 Series Pressure Display ModulePage 38 for more details.
1/2
www.prokontrol.com
JCI -
Accessory Modules (Continued)

c-7355di.tif
CLK350-2Time Clock (for use with A350R)

The CLK350-2 Time Clock is for use with A350R Electronic Temperature Reset Control. It is programmable in blocks of days or from day to day, or both. Refer to CLK350-2 Time Clock (Accessory Module for Use With A350R)Page 16 for more details.
y350.tif
Y350RPower Module
The Y350R provides a convenient means of powering System 350 modules in situations where Class 2 power is not available. Input voltage is 120/240 VAC. Output voltage is 24 VDC unfiltered. Refer to Y350R Power ModulePage 46 for more details.
2/2
www.prokontrol.com
JCI -
t22_s whole 1922255 9thcc:2-72 Electric Sensors and Stats
T22 / T25 / T26 Series
Line Voltage Wall Thermostat (Heating, Cooling, or Heating and Cooling)

t26.eps
SeriesT26 3
Y
t26.tif
t22.tif
t25.eps
Series T25 Y
t25.tif
2 1 Action on Increase of Temperature
B R
High Stage
B R
Low Stage
Action on Increase of Temperature
T26
T22 close differential without the need for anticipators bi-metal thermometer supplied as standard except where indicated equipped with adjustable dial stops (T26 Series)
Description
For line voltage control of residential, commercial, or industrial heating or yearround air conditioning. Heat or cold anticipators are not required. The liquidcharged temperature sensing element and highly efficient diaphragm and leverage provides close temperature control.
T25
Applications
line voltage control of heating and cooling equipment
Specifications
Temperature range is 40 to 90F (5 to 30C), except energy conservation models.
Features
attractive beige colored, high-impact plastic enclosure (T26 Series)
Accessories
replacement knobs and faceplates for double trim plate for mounting two T22s or T26s
To Order
Specify the code number from the following selection chart. For the thermostat guard, refer to G Series Thermostat and Humidistat GuardsG Series Thermostat and Humidistat GuardsG Series Thermostat and Humidistat Guards. Differential Approximately C (F) Heating Cooling Ship Wt. (lb)
Selection Chart
Code Number
T22AAA-1C T22ABC-1C T22ABC-3C T22BBC-1C T22CBC-1C T22CBC-3C T26A-14C (No thermometer) T26A-15C (No thermometer) T22JAA-1C T22JCC-1C T26J-7C (No thermometer) T26J-9C (No thermometer) Knob
Type of Adjustment
Application
Heating
Selector Switch
Off-Auto
Knob Concealed Knob Concealed Knob
SPST SPST, Medium Duty SPST, Heavy Duty SPST, Energy Conservation Heating model, max. setting 75F (24C) SPST, Energy Conservation Heating model, max. setting 65F (18C) Cooling SPST SPST, Energy Conservation Cooling model, min. setting 75F (24C) SPST, Energy Conservation Cooling model, min. setting 78F (26C) Off-Auto Auto-Off-Fan Auto-Off-Fan
1 3/4 (1) 1.3 3 (1.7)
None
2 (1.1)
1.0
2 1/4 (1.3)
1.3
None 2 (1.1) 1.0
1/2
www.prokontrol.com
JCI - 12
a419s p; 1927385 9thcc:na Refrigeration Temperature Controls
A419 Series
Electronic Temperature Controls with NEMA 1 or NEMA 4x Watertight Enclosures

A419NEMA1&4.tif
Rev: 09/30/98 logo: standard left ft: none right ft: standrd Sect# = 7 seQ# = 71
new photo pending
The controls feature remote sensing capability and interchangeable sensors. The A419 controls are available in either NEMA 1, high-impact plastic enclosure suitable for surface or DIN rail mounting or NEMA 4X Watertight surface-mount enclosures.
lockable front-panel touchpad allows easy set up and adjustment of the A419 control setpoint, differential, and other functions; a concealed jumper locks the touchpad, and deters unauthorized adjustment of the control settings low- and line-voltage models provides options for almost any refrigeration or HVAC control-voltage application
Features
easy-to-read LCD displays the sensed temperature and control-function status clearly and custom icons on the display indicate the control and system status at a glance the 30 (F or C) temperature differential adjustment range allows precise (1F or C) temperature differential settings that are much tighter than electromechanical controls the Adjustable Anti-Short Cycle Delay (0 to 12 Minutes in 1-Minute Increments) ensures that the output relay remains off for a user-set time delay, and helps avoid hard starts, nuisance overload outages, and unnecessary equipment wear the Temperature Offset Function shifts the cut-in and cut-in setpoints by an adjustable offset when a user-installed, external switch closes the A419 controls binary input circuit the high-impact thermoplastic type NEMA 1 allows surface or snap-fit DIN rail mount; the Noryl high-impact thermoplastic type NEMA 4X enclosures allow watertight surface mount
Applications
The A419 can be used to control a wide variety of single-stage refrigeration or HVAC equipment. Typical applications include: freezer control in convenience stores reach-in coolers supermarket display cases for produce or meats restaurant or convenience store walk-in coolers boiler control compressor lockout (disables the compressor when temperature exceeds limits) condensor fan cycling pump control for cooling towers space and return air temperature
A419 Control and Sensor
Description
The A419 series controls are single-stage, electronic temperature controls with a Single Pole, Double Throw output relay. They feature a lockable front-panel touchpad for setup and adjustment, and a Liquid Crystal Display for viewing the temperature and status of other functions. A Light-Emitting Diode indicates the controls output relay (On/Off) status. The A419 controls are available in 24 VAC or 120/240 VAC models. The A419 controls have heating and cooling modes, adjustable setpoint and differential, an adjustable anti-short cycle delay, and a temperature offset (setback) function. The setpoint range is -30 to 212F (-34 to 100C).
To Order
Specify the code number from the following selection chart.
Selection Chart
Code Number
A419ABC-1C A419AEC-1C A419GBF-1C A419GEF-1C
Item
Description
Line Voltage, NEMA 1 Enclosure A419 Series Electronic Temperature Control with Display, A99 Sensor Included Supply Voltage: 120 or 240 VAC Range: -30 to 212F (-34 to 100C) Line Voltage, NEMA 4X Enclosure A419 Series Differential: 1 to 30F (1 to 30C) Electronic Temperature Control with Display, A99 Sensor Included 24 VAC, NEMA 1 Enclosure A419 Series Electronic Temperature Control with Display, A99 Sensor Included 24 VAC, NEMA 4X Enclosure A419 Series Electronic Temperature Control with Display, A99 Sensor Included Supply Voltage: 24 VAC, Class 2 Range: -30 to 212F (-34 to 100C) Differential: 1 to 30F (1 to 30C)
Accessories A99BB-200C A99BA-200C A99BB-25C BKT287-1R BKT287-2R PLT344-1R CLK350-2C WEL11A-601R Digital Clock Immersion Well Accessory Mounting Hardware Replacement Temperature Sensors PTC Sensor with 6-1/2 ft (2 m) Leads PTC Sensor with 6-1/2 ft (2 m) Shielded Leads PTC Sensor with 9 in (0.25 m) 12 in. (305 mm) long DIN Rail 36 in. (914 mm) long DIN Rail Two End Clamps for DIN Rail Mounting 7-Day Programmable Digital Clock for controlling Temperature Offset Function Immersion Well for applying sensor in fluid applications
The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson 02/03 Johnson Controls, Inc Controls office. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products.
1/2
www.prokontrol.com
JCI - 13
a25s whole 1927105 9thcc:7-19 Refrigeration Temperature Controls
A25 Series a25an1c.tif
Warm Air Limit Control with Manual Reset

a25ap1c.tif
a25.eps
Series A25A25 Series
Y Y
R
Rev: 07/18/97 logo: JCI left ft: refrig right ft: standard Sect# = 7 seQ# = 21
Action on Increase Action on Increase of Temperature
of Temperature
A25AN-1
A25AP-1
Description
The A25 warm air control locks out on a temperature increase to the control set point. Manual reset is required before the electrical contacts can be reclosed. The A25 is normally located in a return air duct and is wired to shut down air conditioning or ventilating fans when the temperature of the air becomes excessively hot.
Features
trip-free reset lever does not permit restarting until the reset lever is manually released the rod and tube type sensing element provides positive control action
Specifications
maximum element temperature: 300F (149C)
To Order
Applications
high temperature cut-out
Selection Chart
Code Number
Switch Action
SPST Open High SPDT
Range F (C)
25 to 215 (-4 to 102) 25 to 215 (-4 to 102) 25 to 215 (-4 to 102) 25 to 215 (-4 to 102)
Range Adjuster
Knob Knob
Dial Stop F (C)

High Limit Set at 125 (52) High Limit Set at 125 (52) High Limit Set at 125 (52) High Limit Set at 125 (52)
Electrical Ratings
Motor Ratings VAC 120
16.0 96.0
208
9.2 55.2
240
8.0 48.0
277

A25AN-1C A25CN-1C
AC Full Load Amp AC Locked Rotor Amp Non-Inductive Amp
Factory Mutual Approved Models

A25AP-1C A25CP-1C SPST Open High SPDT Concealed Screwdriver Slot Concealed ScrewdriverSlot
16.0 Amp at 120/277 VAC
Pilot Duty125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC
1/1
www.prokontrol.com
JCI - 14
Installation Sheets Manual Temperature Controls Section Technical Bulletin Issue Date
121 A70, A72 0591
A70, A72 Series Temperature Controls A70 Single-Pole and Four-Wire Two-Circuit A72 Two-Pole Construction
Application
The A70 single-pole and A72 two-pole controls incorporate a load-carrying, contact structure which provides direct control of AC motors within the control rating. (See cover label for electrical rating.) All Series A70, A72 controls are designed for use only as operating controls. Where an operating control failure would result in personal injury and/or loss of property, it is the responsibility of the installer to add devices (safety, limit controls) or systems (alarm, supervisory systems) that protect against, or warn of, control failure. contact, the auxiliary contact closes to actuate a signal or other auxiliary circuit at the same time the main contact opens. (See Fig. 6.)
Installation
Mounting The A70 control in the NEMA 1 enclosure must be located in areas protected from the direct effects of weather. If the control is directly exposed to the weather or other wet environments, it must be equipped with an outdoor enclosure. Mount the control on a flat surface or panel board by two screws or bolts through the holes in the back of the case. Controls are supplied without brackets unless specified. The standard bracket is Part Number 271-350. The desired mounting position is with the element bellows pointing down. Fig. 1 -- A70 Temperature Control with a style 1 sensing element.
Operation
Controls are available with either CLOSE high -- OPEN low or OPEN high -- CLOSE low contact action for heating or refrigeration applications. The snap-acting contacts are operated by a temperature sensing element. On the A70 controls with auxiliary
General Instructions
1. Avoid sharp bends or kinks in the capillary tubing.
1991 Johnson Controls, Inc. Code No. LIT-121121 Part No. 997-202
www.prokontrol.com
JCI - 17
p10s_lpc p;w 1927175 9thcc:7-33 Refrigeration Pressure Controls
P10 Series
Low Pressure Control (Single or 2-Stage)

p10bc7.tif p10.eps
P10 Series
Y R B B Y R
Rev: 07/18/97 logo: JCI left ft: frig right ft: standard Sect# = 0 seQ# = 1
Specifications
model P10BJ-1 is rated for 24 amp noninductive when used as an SPST (R-Y). (See Electrical Ratings.) maximum allowable pressure is 150 psig (1034 kPa). maximum ambient temperature is 140F (60C)
Action on Increase of Pressure

P10BC-7 (With Bracket No. BKT16A-600R)
To Order
Description
These pressure controls open or close electrical circuits from a change in operating air pressure. R to Y terminals make (cut-in) on pressure rise.
Accessories
A universal mounting bracket No. BKT16A-600R as well as a barbed fitting is supplied as standard. Model P10FC-4 has a jumper installed on the common terminals.
Electrical Ratings
Motor Ratings VAC 120
16.0 16.0
208
9.2 55.2 9.2
240 277 600

8.0 8.0 7.0 7.2
P10BC-7 AC Full Load Amp Non-Inductive Amp AC Locked Rotor Amp 96.0 48.0 42.0
Features
visible calibrated adjustable range scale snap-acting switch in a dust protected enclosure easily accessible wiring terminals
Applications
pneumatic systems control of pumps or small air compressors
Pilot Duty 125 VA at 24 to 277 VAC P10BG-3 AC Full Load Amp Non-Inductive Amp 6.0 6.0 3.4 20.4 3.4 3.0 18.0 3.0 2.6 AC Locked Rotor Amp 36.0
Pilot Duty 125 VA at 24 to 277 VAC P10BJ-1
Selection Chart
Code Number
P10BC-7C P10BG-3C
AC Full Load Amp
16.0
9.2 55.2 16.0 24.0
8.0 48.0
7 42
No. of Contact Stages Action

1 1 SPDT SPDT
Range psig (kPa)

3 to 20 (21 to 138) 2 to 20 (15 to 138) 3 to 20 (21 to 138)
Factory Setting psig (kPa)

12 (R to Y Cut-in) 12 (R to Y Cut-in)
Pressure Switch Diff Connector psi (kPa)

2 0.2 Barbed Fitting 1/8 in. Female NPSF 1/8 in. Female NPSF High Stage 2 (14) 1/8 in. Barbed Fitting 1/8 in. Barbed Fitting
AC Locked Rotor Amp 96.0 NonInd. Amp Double Throw 16.0 Single Throw 24.0
16.0 16.0 16.0 24.0 24.0 24.0
Pilot Duty 125 VA at 24 to 600 VAC P10FC-4 AC Full Load Amp Non-Inductive Amp 16.0 16.0 9.2 55.2 9.2 8.0 8.0 7.0 7.2 AC Locked Rotor Amp 96.0 48.0 42.0
P10BJ-1C
SPDT
12 (R to Y Cut-in)
P10FC-4C
SPDT
(R-Y Cutout) (R-Y Cut-in) Low 3 to 20 Low Stage High Stage Stage (21 to 138) 8 (55) 12 (82) 2 (14) 3 to 20 (21 to 138)
Pilot Duty 125 VA at 24 to 277 VAC On 2- and 3-stage models, the maximum connected load shall not exceed 2000 VA P10PA-11 AC Full Load Amp Non-Inductive Amp 6.0 6.0 3.4 20.4 3.4 3.0 18.0 3.0 AC Locked Rotor Amp 36.0
P10PA-11C
SPST
Stage 1 Stages 2 & 3 Stage Stages Open High Open High 1 2&3 6 (41) 18 (120) 3 (21) 0.4 (3)
Pilot Duty 125 VA at 24 to 277 VAC On 2- and 3-stage models, maximum connected load shall not exceed 2000 VA
1/1
www.prokontrol.com
JCI - 18
Controls Group 507 E. Michigan Street P.O. Box 423, Milwaukee, WI 53202 Code No. Lit-1921510
Y ZKROH WKFF 3QHXPDWLFV 6ROHQRLG$LU9DOYHV
V11
Three-Way Solenoid Air Valve

YHSL Description
The V11 Three-Way Solenoid Valve is used in applications where an electrical circuit operates a pneumatic control device.
5HY ORJR -&, OHIWIW QRQH ULJKWIW VWDQGDUG 6HFW VH4
Application
All V11 Series Air Valves are designed for use as operating devices. Where an operating control failure would result in personal injury and/or loss of property, it is the responsibility of the installer to add devices or systems to protect against, or warn of, control failure.
Features
two-position action three piping connections marked: - N.O. (normally open) - N.C. (normally closed), and COM (common) can be operated manually by removing the plug and inserting a key furnished with an attached bracket operates in any position positive air seal
Repair Parts
If the product fails to operate within its specifications, unit replacement is required.
To Order
Selection Chart
Code Number
V11HAA-100 V11HBA-100 V11HCA-100 V11HDA-100 V11HFA-100 V11HGA-100 V11HAA-115 V11PNA-105
Specifications
Description V11 Three-Way Solenoid Valve
Air Connections Alternating Current Models Direct Current Models 1/4 in. Barb Connections in Common Port and Normally Closed Port; Normally Open Port is 1/8 in. NPT (Internal) Minimum 32F (0C) Maximum 140F (60C) Minimum 32F (0C) Maximum 104F (40C) 7/8 in. Diameter Valve Body Dull Gray (Iridate) Cover and Case Zinc Plated Valve Body Die Cast Aluminum Cover and Case Cold, Rolled Steel 30 psig (210 kPa) 0 to 25 psig (0 to 175 kPa)
110/120 V, 50/60 Hz 220/240 V, 50/60 Hz 208 V, 50/60 Hz 440/480 V, 50/60 Hz 277 V, 50/60 Hz 24 V, 50/60 Hz 110/120 V, 50/60 Hz Includes Internal Grounding Lug 24 VDC
Ambient Temperatures Conduit Opening Finish Material
Accessories
Code Number
Y99AA-4C
Description
Manual Opener Key
Maximum Pressure Rating Operating Pressure (All Three Ports) Power Consumption
Alternating Current Models 6 Watts 24 VDC Models 9 Watts With a 15 psig (103 kPa) Inlet and 0 psig (0 kPa) Outlet. The valve will pass 1.5 cfm (2592 scim) of air from the Common to the Normally Closed connection (when energized) or from the Common to the Normally Open connection (when de-energized). 18 in. Wire Leads
Pressure and Flow Ratings
Wiring Connections
1/1
www.prokontrol.com
JCI - 19
a11s_ltc Less-M/a11-a19 1927005 9thcc:7-5A Refrigeration Temperature Controls
A11 Series a11b1c.tif
Low Temperature Cutout Control

a11coil.eps
a11wire.eps
A11 Se r ie s
Rev: 07/18/97 logo: JCI/Penn left ft: frig right ft: standard Sect# = 0 seQ# = 1
A11B-1
Mount Coils Horizontally ONLY
Description
The A11 Series low temperature cutout controls incorporate a 20 foot long, vapor charged, sensing element. The A11 reacts to the coldest 18 inch section of the controls sensing element. The A11 is suitable for monitoring the face temperature of hot water coils for freeze protection.
Accessories
replacement cover: CVR30A-601R
Applications
To Order
low temperature cut-out for coils and/or pipe liquid sensing
Specifications
ambient temperature of control: 0-140F (-17.8 - 60C) maximum element temperature: 250F (121C)
Electrical Ratings
Motor Ratings VAC
AC Full Load Amp AC Locked Rotor Amp Non-Inductive or Resistance Load Amp (Not Lamp Loads)
Features
snap-acting switch external temperature scale easy setpoint adjustment with top or bottom access
120
16.0 96.0 16.0
208
9.2 55.2 9.2
240
8.0 48.0 8.0
Pilot Duty 125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC
Selection Chart
Code Number
Switch Action
Range F (C)
35 to 45 (2 to 7) 35 to 45 (2 to 7)
Diff F (C)
Manual Reset 8 (4.4) (Fixed)
Bulb and Capillary

20 ft of 1/8 in. O.D. Tubing, 4 ft Cap. 20 ft of 1/8 in. O.D. Tubing, 4 ft. Cap.
Range Adjuster
Screwdriver Slot Screwdriver Slot
A11A-1C A11B-1C
SPST Open Low SPST Open Low
1/1
www.prokontrol.com
JCI - 20
a19s_rbc Less,M/a11-a19 1927010 9thcc:7-5B Refrigeration Temperature Controls
A19 Series
Remote Bulb Control

a19abc24.tif
Y
R
a19.eps
A19 Series Terminal Arrangement for SPDT
Rev: 07/18/97 logo: JCI/Penn left ft: none right ft: standard Sect# = 6 seQ# = 489
Applications
The A19 is suitable for temperature control in heating, ventilating, and refrigeration.
Replacement Parts
Code Number
CVR28A-617R CVR28A-618R KNB20A-602R
Description
Concealed adjustment Visible scale Replacement Knob Kit
A19ABC-24

fixed or adjustable differential available variety of sensing element styles unaffected by cross-ambient conditions
To Order
Specify the code number, packing nut number (if required), and bulb well number (if required). See the following selection chart.
Description
The A19 Series are single stage temperature controls that incorporate liquid filled sensing elements.
Features
wide temperature ranges available constant differential throughout the entire range compact enclosure
Accessories
A packing nut is available for closed tank application. Specify the part number FTG13A-600R. Bulb wells (WEL14A Series) are available for liquid immersion applications. Refer to the following selection chart or to Bulb Wells.
Selection Chart
Code Number Switch Action
SPST Open Low SPDT
(b)
Range F (C)
Diff F (C)
Bulb and Capillary
Bulb Well No. (order separately)

WEL14A-602R WEL14A-603R WEL14A-602R WEL14A-602R WEL14A-602R WEL14A-602R WEL14A-602R WEL14A-602R WEL14A-602R
Range Adjuster
Max. Bulb Temp. F (C)

140 (60) 170 (77) 140 (60) 140 (60) 140 (60) 140 (60) 275 (135) 140 (60) 140 (60)
Adjustable Differential (Wide Range) A19ABA-40C A19ABC-4C

(a)
-30 to 100 (-34 to 38) 50 to 130 (10 to 55) -30 to 100 (-34 to 38) -30 to 100 (-34 to 38) -30 to 100 (-34 to 38) -30 to 100 (-34 to 38) 25 to 225 (-4 to 107) 0 to 80 (-18 to 27) -30 to 50 (-34 to 10)
3 to 12 (1.7 to 6.7)
3/8 in. x 4 in., 6 ft Cap.
Screwdriver Slot Knob Convertible Convertible Screwdriver slot Screwdriver slot Screwdriver slot Screwdriver slot Screwdriver slot
3 1/2 to 14 (1.9 to 8) 3/8 in. x 5 in., 8 ft Cap. 3 to 12 (1.7 to 6.7) 3 to 12 (1.7 to 6.7) 3 to 12 (1.7 to 6.7) 3 to 12 (1.7 to 6.7) 3 1/2 (1.9) 5 (2.8) 2 1/2 (1.4) 3/8 in. x 4 in., 8 ft Cap. 3/8 in. x 4 in., 20 ft Cap. 3/8 in. x 4 in., 10 ft Cap. 3/8 in. x 4 in., 6 ft Cap. 3/8 in. x 3 in., 10 ft Cap. 3/8 in. x 4 in., 6 ft Cap. 3/8 in. x 4 in., 7 ft Cap.
v A19ABC-24C v A19ABC-36C
A19ABC-37C A19ABC-74C A19AAF-12C A19AAC-4C A19AAD-12C
SPDT SPDT SPDT SPDT SPDT SPDT SPST Open Low SPST Open Low SPDT SPDT
Fixed Differential Fixed Differential (Case Compensated)
Fixed Differential (Close) A19AAD-5C (c) A19AAF-20C A19AAF-21C 30 to 50 (-1 to 10) (Bulk Milk Cooler) -30 to 100 (-34 to 38) 40 to 90 (4 to 32) 2 1/2 (1.4) 2 1/2 (1.4) 1 1/2 (0.8) 3/8 in. x 2 5/8 in., 6 ft Cap. 3/8 in. x 4 in., 6 ft Cap. WEL16A-601R WEL14A-602R Screwdriver slot Screwdriver slot Screwdriver slot 190 (88) 140 (60) 140 (60)
3/8 in. x 5 3/4 in., 6 ft Cap. WEL14A-603R
(a) Replaces White-Rodgers 1609-101 (b) Replaces White-Rodgers 1609-12, -13; Ranco 010-1408, -1409, - 1410, -1490, 060-110; Honeywell L6018C-1006, L6021A-1005, T675A-1011, -1508, -1516, -1821, T4301A-1008, T6031A-1011, T6031A-1029 (c) Case-Compensated
v Universal Replacement, Multi-Mount.
5 Non-Stock Item. Built to Order.

1/2
(R) For Refrigerants Not Listed, Contact Application Engineering
www.prokontrol.com
JCI - 21
W SZ WKFF 3QHXPDWLFV 7KHUPRVWDWV
T-4002-30x
Single Temperature Thermostat with Cover and Two-Pipe Conversion Kits

W[WLI Description
The T-4002-30x Thermostat with Cover and Two-Pipe Conversion Kits feature a T-4002-201 (D.A.) or a T-4002-202 (R.A.) Thermostat. The kits also contain a white or beige cover and cover plate, a selection of faceplates, and all other necessary parts and mounting hardware required to convert a wide array of two pipe competitors thermostats.
Features
reduces the number of stocked items simplifies the ordering process includes: - T-4002-201 (D.A.) or T-4002-202 (R.A.) Thermostat - White or Beige Cover - Terminal Connector and Tubing - Tube Couplings and Clamps Description - Installation Instructions - Faceplates (horizontal w/window, horizontal w/logo, vertical w/logo, and blank) - Cover Plate/Subplate - Adjustable Pipehead - Mounting Hardware
Selection Chart
Code Number
T-4002-301 Direct Acting Thermostat and White Cover with Two-Pipe Conversion Kit
To Order
T-4002-302
Reverse Acting Thermostat and White Cover with Two-Pipe Conversion Kit
Direct Acting Thermostat and Beige T-4002-303 Cover with Two-Pipe Conversion Kit T-4002-304 Reverse Acting Thermostat and Beige Cover with Two-Pipe Conversion Kit
Non-Johnson Controls Conversions
Converts the Following Non-Johnson Controls Thermostats:

Landis & Gyr Powers TH192 Series Wallbox and Drywall Mounting Robertshaw T-15 (Metal) Early Wallbox and Mortar Joint Robertshaw T-15 Later Wallbox and Mortar Joint Robertshaw 2212 Series (a) Robertshaw T-18 (Plastic) Drywall Mounting UPC
Barber-Colman TK Series or TKR Series Wallbox and Mortar Joint Honeywell TO900 or TP900 Series Wallbox Honeywell TO910 or TP910 Series Wallbox and Mortar Joint Honeywell TP970 Series Shallow and Deep Wallboxes Landis & Gyr Powers TH832 D Series Wallbox and Ground Plate Landis & Gyr Powers TH180 Series Wallbox and Drywall Mounting (a) Converts dead band thermostat to single temperature control.
Landis & Gyr Powers T-21 Series Ground Plate, Wallbox and Mortar Joint Draeger (ITT/Essen/Johnson Controls) Wallbox
1/1
www.prokontrol.com
JCI - 32
K ZKROH WKFF 3QHXPDWLFV +XPLGLW\,QVWUXPHQWV
H-4100
Pneumatic Room Humidistat

KHSL
response to changes in relative humidity. The humidistat can be ordered in direct or reverse acting models. mounts on virtually any wall surface with available accessories use with T-4000 covers
Features
includes a Cellulose Acetate Butyrate (CAB) sensing element features a shock and vibration resistant mechanism for accurate output pressure changes in response to humidity changes
To Order
Selection Chart
Code Number
H-4100-201 H-4100-203
Description
Description
The H-4100 Pneumatic Room Humidistat provides a proportional output signal to modulate pneumatically controlled devices in
includes a volume amplifier providing faster response time and an output flow capacity of 400 SCIM (190 mL/s) mounts horizontally or vertically air connections are made to barbed fittings for 5/32 in. O.D. polytubing
Direct Acting Reverse Acting
Accessories and Repair Parts

Code Number
T-4002-124 T-4002-6038 T-4002-6029 T-4002-5010 T-4002-5003 F-1000-321 T-4002-3000 T-4002-3001 T-4002-6045 T-4002-3004 GRD10A-608 T-4002-125 T-4002-123 T-4000-110 T-4000-111 T-4000-112 TE-1800-9600 T-4002-122 T-4000-100 F-500-45 T-4002-100 T-4002-5012 JC 5361 JC 5310
Humidistat, Mounting or Air Connection Accessory Description
Function
For Surface Mounting All Humidistats and Covers For Rough-In of Surface Mounted Humidistats in Masonry Keeps Dirt Out of Groundplate and Wallbox During Construction Restricts Adjustment of Set Point Dial For Mounting Brackets and Wallbox
Room Instrument Mounting Bracket Plaster Groundplate Metal Wallbox Cover for Groundplate or Metal Wallbox Restricted Adjustment Pin (Order in Multiples of 100) Plastic Screw Anchors (Order in Multiples of 100) Wire Guard For Exposed Tubing For Concealed Tubing
Optional Wire Guard Mounting Plate Cast Aluminum Guard and Mounting Bracket Plastic Guard Plastic Surface Mounting Back Terminal Connector with Two Angle Fittings Aspirator Wallbox Kit Wallplate Cover Kit Wallbox Mounting Kit Terminal Connector with Two Straight Fittings Terminal Connector Protector Cap (For Rough-In Only) 5/32 x 5/32 in. Barbed Elbow Fitting Ceiling Suspended Mounting Kit Adjusting Knob Kit Hypodermic Needle Test Probe Screw-in Test Gauge and Adaptor Beige Finish Stainless Steel Finish
For Surface Mounted Humidistat Protection After Construction
For Surface Mounted Humidistats with Exposed Tubing
For Concealed Mounted Humidistats without Pushbuttons Adapts 4000 Series Brackets and Covers to Standard Conduit Wallboxes For Optional Plug-In Connection to 5/32 in. O.D. Polytubing Provides a Method of Installing a Humidistat Other Than Wall Mounting Provides a Means of External Set Point Adjustment Calibration
For T-4000 covers, refer to T-4000 Covers (For Use With H-4100 and H-5100 Series Humidity Instruments). For additional connection accessories, covers, and repair parts, refer to T-4000 Series Accessories.
1/1
www.prokontrol.com
JCI - 33
W OHVV WKFF% 3QHXPDWLFV 7KHUPRVWDWV
T-4002
Single Temperature High Volume Output Thermostat

WHSL Description
The T-4002 Thermostat is a high volume output, single temperature thermostat.
To Order
Features
available in Direct Acting (DIR) and Reverse Acting (REV) models includes Fahrenheit dial available in vertical or horizontal model
Selection Chart
Code Number
T-4002-201 T-4002-202 T-4002-203
Description
Direct Acting, Horizontal Mounting Reverse Acting, Horizontal Mounting Direct Acting, Vertical Mounting Reverse Acting, Vertical Mounting
T-4002 Single Temperature Thermostat
T-4002-204 Note:
Order cover and mounting bracket separately.
1/1
www.prokontrol.com
JCI - 34
K ZKROH WKFF 3QHXPDWLFV +XPLGLW\,QVWUXPHQWV
H-5100
Pneumatic Room Humidity Transmitter

KHSL
space relative humidity into a pneumatic signal and transmits this signal to a remote receiver. two locking screws hold cover in place mounts to a standard pipehead or directly to plastic tubing use with T-4000 covers
Features
available in two models: - 30 to 80% RH - 10 to 60% RH transmits standard pneumatic pressure range of 3 to 15 psig (21 to 105 kPa)
To Order
Selection Chart
Code Number
H-5100-201 H-5100-202
Description
The H-5100 Pneumatic Room Humidity Transmitter accurately converts room or
ideal for use with pneumatic transmission systems where the pneumatic receiver is located on a central panel transmitted signal follows any variation in space humidity
Description
30 to 80% RH Movement Only 10 to 60% RH Movement Only
Accessories and Repair Parts

Code Number
T-4002-124 T-4002-6038 T-4002-6029 T-4002-5010 F-1000-321 T-4002-3000 T-4002-3001 T-4002-6045 T-4002-3004 GRD10A-608 T-4002-125 T-4002-123 T-4000-110 T-4000-111 T-4000-112 TE-1800-9600 T-4002-122 T-4000-100 F-500-45 T-4002-100 JC 5361 JC 5310
Transmitter, Mounting, or Air Connection Accessory Description
Function
For Surface Mounting All Transmitters and Covers For Rough-In of Surface Mounted Transmitters in Masonry Keeps Dirt Out of Groundplate and Wallbox During Construction For Mounting Brackets and Wallbox
Room Instrument Mounting Bracket Plaster Groundplate Metal Wallbox Cover for Groundplate or Metal Wallbox Plastic Screw Anchors (Order in Multiples of 100) Wire Guard For Exposed Tubing For Concealed Tubing
Optional Wire Guard Mounting Plate Cast Aluminum Guard and Mounting Bracket Plastic Guard Plastic Surface Mounting Back Terminal Connector with Two Angle Fittings Aspirator Wallbox Kit Wallplate Cover Kit Wallbox Mounting Kit Terminal Connector with Two Straight Fittings Terminal Connector Protector Cap (For Rough-In Only) 5/32 x 5/32 in. Barbed Elbow Fitting Ceiling Suspended Mounting Kit Hypodermic Needle Test Probe Screw-in Test Gauge and Adaptor Beige Finish Stainless Steel Finish
For Surface Mounted Transmitter Protection After Construction
For Surface Mounted Transmitters with Exposed Tubing
For Concealed Mounted Transmitters without Pushbuttons Adapts 4000 Series Brackets and Covers to Standard Conduit Wallboxes For Optional Plug-In Connection to 5/32 in. O.D. Polytubing Provides a Method of Installing a Transmitter Other Than Wall Mounting Calibration
For T-4000 covers, refer to T-4000 Covers (For Use With H-4100 and H-5100 Series Humidity Instruments). For additional connection accessories, covers, and repair parts, refer to T-4000 Series Accessories.
1/1
www.prokontrol.com
JCI - 35
W ZKROH WKFF 3QHXPDWLFV 7HPSHUDWXUH,QVWUXPHQWV
T-5002
Room Temperature Transmitter

WHSL Description
The T-5002 Series Room Transmitters measure space or mass temperature and transmit a proportional 3 to 15 psig (21 to 105 kPa) pneumatic output signal to an indicator, receiver-controller, or Building Automation System (BAS) for automatic temperature control. The space transmitters measure the temperature of the ambient air; the mass transmitters measure the surface temperature of the walls surrounding the space and transmit the signal to an optional start controller.
Features
requires no field adjustment provided with barbed fittings for direct air line connections with 5/32 in. O.D. tubing available with optional plug-in terminal
To Order
Selection Chart
Code Number Description
Space Temperature, Direct Acting
(a)
Repair Parts
Code Number
Range 50 to 100F Range 60 to 85 F Range 10 to 35C Direct Acting, Range 20 to 70F Reverse Acting, Range 120 to 70F T-4000-627 T-4002-617 Screws
Description
#4-40 x 1/4 in. Socket Screws for Mounting Brackets and Covers (Order in Multiples of 100) #4-40 x 1/4 in. Hex Tamper Proof Screws (50 Screws with Driver)
T-5002-201 T-5002-202 T-5002-300 T-5002-205 T-5002-203 (a)
Mass Temperature
(a) Includes solid plastic cover (no vents) for mass temperature sensing.
For a list of transmitter covers, see T-4000 Covers (For Use With H-4100 and H-5100 Series Humidity Instruments).
1/1
www.prokontrol.com
JCI - 36
t4752 less 1921685 9thcc:1-136B Pneumatics Thermostats
T-4752
Heating-Cooling Thermostat
t4752.epi Description
The T-4752 Thermostat is a high volume output, heating-cooling thermostat. Provides automatic changeover between Direct Acting (DIR) and Reverse Acting (REV) when supply pressure changes from 15 to 20 psig (105 to 40 kPa).
Rev: 07/18/97 logo: JCI left ft: (none) right ft: standard Sect# = 0 seQ# = 125
To Order
Selection Chart
Code Number
T-4752-201 T-4752-202 T-4752-205 T-4752-206 Note:
Description
Features
includes Fahrenheit dial available in vertical or horizontal model
15 psig DIR, 20 psig REV, Horizontal Mounting 15 psig DIR, 20 psig REV, Vertical Mounting 15 psig REV, 20 psig DIR, Horizontal Mounting 15 psig REV, 20 psig DIR, Vertical Mounting
Order cover and mounting bracket separately.
1/1
www.prokontrol.com
JCI - 37
WVBSUF ZKROH WKFF 3QHXPDWLFV 5HFHLYHU&RQWUROOHUV
T-5800 Series
Pneumatic Receiver-Controller
WHSL Features
available as single or dual input models with proportional or proportional plus integral (PI) control adjustments for gain, local set point, ratio, master input balance, and integral time are located on the controller face provided with hypodermic needle test points for pressure checks designed for surface mounting action and readjustment are field selectable air lines connect to the unit through two detachable connectors, with barbed fittings for 1/4 in. O.D. polytubing Applications include: - static pressure of return fans - return fan volume control - chilled water temperature control T-5800-100 Time Delay provides adjustable times in order to allow the system to approach the proportional control point before the integral function of the T-5800 is initiated. The PI function takes over when the pressure of the time delay signal is approximately 0.5 PSI (3.5 kPa) below the integral supply pressure (9 psig). optional time delay available for use with the built-in automatic control cutout feature of the T-5800 Series PI Receiver Controllers.
Description
The T-5800 Pneumatic Receiver-Controller is designed for use with remote temperature, humidity, or pressure transmitters that are connected to a control variable (CV) input. The controller provides precise control of pneumatic devices. The T-5800 is capable of providing restricted supply air to low volume remote transmitters, reducing the number of air line connections needed between instruments to only one line. The CV input accepts the transmitted output of any pneumatic device with a calibrated output of 3 to 15 psig (21 to 105 kPa).
a clear cover protects the components from dust and dirt, and discourages tampering output pressure gauge
To Order
Applications
T-5800-1 and T-5800-3 Proportional-Only Control is an accepted means of controlling variables such as: - discharge air temperature - humidity - water temperature - pressure T-5800-2 and T-5800-4 Proportional Plus Integral (PI) Control is an accepted means of controlling variables such as closed-loop arrangements utilizing modulating control devices where the control point offset associated with proportional-only control is undesirable.
WWLI
T-5800-100 Time Delay
Selection Chart
Code Number
T-5800-1 T-5800-2 T-5800-3 T-5800-4
Accessories
Description
Single Input, Proportional Single Input, Proportional Plus Integral Dual Input, Proportional Dual Input, Proportional Plus Integral
Code Number
T-5800-100 JC 5361 JC 5383A
Description
Time Delay Hypodermic Needle Test Probe Calibration Kit
Specifications
Action Set Point Adjustment Gain Ratio (T-5800-3, -4 Only)
T-5800 Series Pneumatic Receiver-Controller

T-5800-1, -2, Single Input Models Direct or Reverse Acting, Field Selectable T-5800-3, -4, Dual Input Models Direct or Reverse Acting with Direct or Reverse Readjustment, Field Selectable Factory Set Local at Approximately 9 psig (63 kPa), Field Selectable Local or Remote T-5800-1, -3 Adjustable From 0.5:1 to 15:1, Factory Set at Approximately 10:1 (Proportional-Only Models) T-5800-2, -4 Adjustable From 0.5:1 to 15:1, Factory Set at Approximately 5:1 (Proportional Plus Integral Models) Jumper 1:1 Variable From 0.1:1 to 2.5:1, Factory Set at Approximately 1:1 Jumper 3:1 Variable From 0.1:1 to 6:1, Factory Set at Approximately 3:1
1/2
www.prokontrol.com
JCI - 47
INVENSYS PRODUCTS
BARBER COLMAN, ROBERTSHAW, ERIE, PARAGON
Actuators Electric Controllers Room Thermostats Air Flow Switches Proportional Thermostats Pneumatic Thermostats & EPs Pneumatic Actuators Pneumatic Receiver Controllers, Transmitters, Relays Erie Zone Valves Globe Valves Ball Valves Paragon Timers Digital Programmable/Non Programmable Thermostats
INVENSYS - 1 to 11 INVENSYS - 12 INVENSYS - 13, 14 INVENSYS - 15 INVENSYS - 16 INVENSYS - 17, 18 INVENSYS - 19 to 24 INVENSYS - 25 to 40 INVENSYS - 41 to 45 INVENSYS - 46 to 54 INVENSYS - 55 to 64 INVENSYS - 65 to 67 INVENSYS - 68, 69
MA-5200 Series, MA-5300 Series
Two-Position Actuators
These actuators are used for electric two-position control of valves and dampers which require a return to the normal position upon power interruption.
Features: Two-position actuators controlled by an SPST controller. Spring return. Available 24, 120, and 240 Vac models. An actuator with the part number suffix "-500" has a built-in, adjustable, SPDT auxiliary switch. Available damper models with linkage or base models that require separate damper or valve linkage. Die cast lower housing with 1/2 in. conduit opening and painted steel upper housing. Hydraulic actuator with oil-immersed motor and pump. Model Chart Damper Actuators.
Actuator Power Input Model No. AC Voltage (10%) 120 24 60 Hz Watts 5.4 8.8 Amps 0.14 0.65 Watts 6.0 9.8 50 Hz Amps 0.17 0.80 Timing in Seconds at 72F (22C) To Extend (No Load Stroke) 60 Retract on Power Loss 15 Damper Output Torque Rating
MA-5200 Series, MA-5300 Series
MA-5200 Series
MA-5300 Series
MA-5330 MA-5333
20 lb-in.
Valve Actuators. Also for Damper Actuators with Field Assembled Damper Linkages.
Timing in Seconds at 72F (22C) 10 Amps Aux 60 Hz 50 Hz To Extend AC Voltage Retract on Switch (No Load (+10/-15%) Watts Amps Watts Amps Power Loss Stroke) Actuator Power Input 120 240 24 5.4 2.7 8.8 0.14 0.07 0.65 6.0 3.1 9.8 0.17 0.09 0.80 No Yes No Yes No Yes 60 15 AM-601 AV-601 AV-7600-1 20 lb-in. Required Linkagea Damper Output Torque Rating
Model No.
Damper
Valve
MA-5210 MA-5210-500 MA-5211 MA-5211-500 MA-5213 MA-5213-500

a
Damper models are provided with factory-installed damper linkages. Only base models require separately-ordered linkages.
Actuator inputs
Specifications
Control circuit Power input Connections Two wire, SPST. Refer to Model Chart. Color-coded 4 ft. (1.2 m) leads.
136
www.prokontrol.com INVENSYS - 1
MA-3XX Series, MA-4XX Series
MA-3XX eries, MA-4XX eries
Two-Position, Oil-Submerged Actuators

These actuators provide two-position operation of dampers, valves, and other equipment requiring the return to normal position upon power interruption.
Features: SPST controller. Spring return. 24, 120, 208, and 240 Vac models. SPDT auxiliary switch if actuator part number suffix is -500. Rugged die cast aluminum. Oil immersed motor and gear train.
Only factory enclosure/actuator assemblies with actuator types (shown in table) are Underwriters Laboratories listed or CSA certified.
Model Chart
Model No. MA-305 MA-305-500 MA-405 MA-405-500 MA-318 MA-318-500 MA-416 MA-416-500 MA-418 MA-418-500 MA-419 MA-419-500 MA5-419 MA5-419-500 Power Supply Vac 24 24 120 120 24 24 208 208 120 120 240 240 240 240 50 60 Hz Aux.a Switch No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes 70 Running 25 Holding 25 48/48 92/32 104/38 108/42 60 (6.8) Damper and valve actuators. Output shaft horizontal. CW 170 when power is applied. Input (Watts) Va Running/ Holding 56/56 16 (1.8) Rated Torque lb-in. (N-m) Application and Mounting Shaft Rotation
Damper CW 180 when power actuators. Upright is applied. position preferred.
120/39
a 2 FLA, 12 LRA at 24/120 Vac; 1 FLA, 6 LRA 2 240 Vac.
133
MP-3XX Series, MP-4XX Series, MP-2XXX Series, and MP-4XXX Series
Reversible and Proportional Electric Actuators

The MP Series Actuators are used for two-position, floating, and proportional control of dampers, valves, and program switches in heating, ventilation, and air conditioning applications or similar applications.
Features: Proportional actuators with built-in feedback potentiometers. Spring return and non-spring return models available. 24 Vac, 120 Vac, and 240 Vac models are available. Die cast housings with four 1/2 in. conduit openings. Oil-immersed motor and gear train.
Typical Spring Return
Typical Non-Spring Return
Typical -691 or -692 Suffix Typical -6XX Suffix (CP-9301-XXX or (CP-8301-XXX Installed, CP-9302-91X Installed) CP-9301-XXX or CP-9302-91X Installed)
MP-3XX Series, MP-4XX Series, MP-2XXX Series, and MP4XXX Series
Model Chart
MP-3XX Series. Solid State Drive CP-8301-XXX CP-9301 CP-9302 Available CP-8301-024 Included CP-9301 Included Available CP-8301-024 Included CP-9301 Included Available 2.5 2.2 Available 50 2.5 130 130 to 1300 (Adj.) 220 (24.9) 130 156 156 to 1560 Adjustable 180 (Adjustable)
Power Requirements Torque Volts Hz Amps lb.-in. (N-m)
Output Shaft Timing Seconds (No Load) Degrees of Rotation Built-in Aux. a Spring Switch Transformer Return
Model No.
Application
MP-361 MP-361-600c MP-361-691d MP-367 MP-371 Sequencing Proportional
180 (Adj.b) 50 (5.6)
CW
SPDT SPST
2.5 60 24
90 180 (non Adj.) SPDT CCW SPST None 180 (Adj. b) No SPDT SPST None SPDT
MP-371-600 c Proportional MP-371-691 d MP-377 MP-379 MP-381 MP-382 MP-387 MP-389 MP5-381 MP5-382 Sequencing Five position Proportional Sequencing Five position Proportional
a Units with a -2 suffix, e.g. MP-XXXX-XXX-2-X, include a built-in transformer (used for Microtherm or with AE-504) with secondary loads
wired externally to terminals seven and eight of the actuator. Red (24 Vac) to terminal eight and Blue (12 Vac) to terminal seven. When these actuators are used with controllers other than Microtherm or AE-504, disconnect the Red and Blue leads and tape off. Note: Models prior to -2 suffix had transformer wired directly to potentiometer. To disconnect the transformer, remove the back plate of the actuator, disconnect, and tape the transformer leads. b Rotation adjustable 45 to 320. Caution: On actuators with proportional input signals changing the rotation will affect the control, since the internal feedback potentiometers travel is fixed. c Integral solid state drive CP-8301 accepts 6-9 Vdc voltage. d Integral solid state drive CP-9301 accepts 6-9 Vdc voltage.
196
TP-8101, TP-8102, TP-8121, TP-8124
Single/Dual Output Room Temperature Controllers

These temperature controllers are used in heating and air conditioning systems.
Features: Dual output adapters for TP-8101 and TP-8102. TP-8124 meets ASHRA 90-75 DOE requirements. Heating and cooling cannot operate simultaneously. Heating/cooling deadband obtained by adjustable dual setpoints and throttling range. Proportional outputs that operate remote System 8000 controlled devices such as valves, dampers, electric heat coils, etc. Concealed adjustments to eliminate occupant tampering. Model Chart
Model No. TP-8101 TP-8101-116 TP-8102 TP-8102-116 TP-8121 Control Dial Range Temp. 55 to 85F 13 to 29C 45 to 75F 17 to 24C 55 to 85F Dual Scale Heating 45 to 75F Cooling 70 to 100F 0 to 14F (0 to 8C); factory set at 3 (1.7) Difference between heating & cooling setpoints Null-band Description Throttling Range for 3 Vdc Output Change 2, 3, 6 and 20F; factory set 3F by jumper/pins Power Requirements Output Voltage
90 80 70 60 50
TP-8101, TP-8102, TP-8121, TP-8124
TP-810X
TP-810X
TP-8121 TP-8124
Single setpoint with single output signal room controller
20 Vdc (-1.5/+1) 13mA
2 to 15 Vdc or 15 to 2 Vdca
TP-8124 TP-8124-770
Single setpoint with dual output signal room controller Heating & cooling 2 to 10F, Dual setpoints and dual independently adj; output signals with factory set 3F deadband between heating and cooling room controller
20 Vdc (-1.5/-1) 23 mA
Heat (OP1) 2 to 15 Vdc or 15 to 2 Vdcb; cool (OP2) 2 to 15 Vdc
a Units factory calibrated for 7.5 Vdc output with sensor at setpoint temperature. b Units factory calibrated for 6 Vdc (R.A. HTG), 9 Vdc (D.A. HTG) and 6 Vdc (D.A. CLG) with sensor at setpoint temperature.
340
CP-8551, CP-8552
CP-8551, CP-8552
Electronic to Pneumatic Transducer

The CP-8551 and CP-8552 transducers receive a variable electronic input signal and produce a 3 to 15 psig (21 to 103 kPa) pneumatic output signal to position pneumatic damper and valve actuators in HVAC systems.
Features: Durable enclosure with easily accessible wiring terminations. Panel or DIN rail mounting for quick, snap-on installation. Two-wire loop powered or three-wire voltage input. High accuracy with low hysteresis. Long-term driftless operation with high repeatability. Low air consumption and large air flow capacity. Control input protection from short circuit or reverse polarity. Model Chart
Model No.a CP-8551 Input Signal 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA CP-8552 6 to 9 Vdc, 0 to 10 Vdc Input Impedance Ohms 550 maximum, 400 minimum 550 maximum, 400 minimum, 4 to 20 mA input, >10,000 Vac input Power Requirements None None 20 to 30 Vac, 24 to 30 Vdc, 3.9 VA, 1.6 W
a CAUTION: This product contains a half-wave rectifier power supply and must not be powered off transformers used to power other devices utilizing non-
isolated full-wave rectifier power supplies.
115
M556 Series (2466 Series), M572 Series (2472 Series), M573 Series (2473 Series), M574 Series (2474 Series),
M556 Series (2466 Series), M572 Series (2472 Series), M573 Series (2473
Pneumatic Damper Actuators

These actuators are designed for use in pneumatic control systems to position air control dampers in response to signals from pneumatic controllers. The M556 is a large swivel-mounted actuator with an adjustable crank arm having a clamp to fit a 1/2 in. O.D. damper shaft. The M570 Series damper actuators are used in pneumatic control systems to position automatic air dampers upon receipt of an air pressure signal from a control device. These actuators are equipped with right angle brackets and are adaptable to air conditioning, multi-zone, heating, ventilating, fan coil units, unit ventilators, mixing boxes, and VAV terminal boxes. M573 and M574 are also available as post-mounted actuators. The M583 is used in classroom type unit ventilators. Special mounting kits are available for adapting the actuator to the various makes and models of classroom type units. The M584 is designed for use on large volume unit ventilators. An internal spring arrangement permits the actuator to operate gradually to a preset percentage of total stroke, hesitate for a preset pressure range, and then complete its full travel. When combined with other control devices, these actuators may be adjusted to perform as required by ASHRAE control cycles for unit ventilators.
Features: Rigid, corrosion-resistant glass-filled nylon bodies. M556, M573 and M574 have 303 stainless-steel shafts. M556, M573 and M574 available with or without N800-0555 positioner.
M556 Shown with Positive Positioner
M572/M573/M574 Right Angle Mounted Shown without Positive Positioner
M573/M574 Post Mounted Actuator Shown with N800-0555 Positive Positioner
517
MK-3000 Series, MK4-3000 Series
MK-3000 Pneumatic Damper Actuators Series, MK4-3000 Proportional pneumatic actuator with 8 in.2 Series
(52 cm2) effective area used to control dampers, mixing boxes, air valves, etc., in heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems.
Features: Rugged cast aluminum bodies. Long lasting rolling diaphragm. Provisions for adjustable stroke-stop.
MK-3100 Series
MK-3101-108 and MK-3300 Series (MK-3311-109 Shown)
MK-3800 Series
Model Chart
Maximum Forceb Return Stroke Nominal Operating Range Starting Pressure Nominal Strokea Based on 1.5 psi (10 kPa) Pressure to Actuator lb (N) 12 (53) 28 (125) 15 psi (103 kPa) Supply Dual Press. System lb (N) 44 (196) 28 (125) Power Stroke 15 psi (103 kPa) Supply Single Press. Systemd lb (N) 56 (249) 40 (178) 20 psi (138 kPa) Supply Single or Dual Press. System d lb (N) 96 (427) 80 (356) Proportional Controlb 15 psi (103 kPa) Supply Dual Press. System lb-in. (N-m) 21 (2.37) 20 psi (138 kPa) Supply Single or Dual Press. System d lb-in. (N-m) 21 (2.37) Nominal Torque c
Model No.
15 psi (103 kPa) Supply Single Press. System d lb-in. (N-m) 21 (2.37)
psig MK-3101 MK-3111 3 to 8 5 to 10
kPa 21 to 55 34 to 69
psig 3 1 5 1
kPa 21 7 34 7
in. (mm) 3-1/2 (89), adjustable 2 to 4 (51 to 102)
a Factory setting required for published operating range. b Force and torques based on factory set stroke and starting pressure. c Nominal torque for actuators without positive positioner is based on 1.5 psi pressure change at the actuator. d Adjust pressure reducing valve so that listed pressures are available at the actuator.
525
RKS-1001, RKS-2001, RKS-3002, RKS-4002, RKS-5001, RKSR-4000
Single/Dual Transmitter Input Receiver Controllers

For use in conjunction with remote proportional transmitters for proportional control of pneumatic actuated dampers, valves, etc., in air conditioning systems. The transmitter-receiver-controller system may be used to control temperature, humidity, or pressure.
Features: Nozzle and flapper relay-type receiver controllers. Linear, stable and responsive. Models available for one, two or three inputs. Mounting provided for two (1/8 NPT) 1-1/2 in. stem-mounted receiver-gauges and two 1-1/2 in. stem-mounted pressure gauges. Barbed fittings for 1/4 in O.D. plastic tubing. Setpoint scales available to match transmitter ranges.
RKS-1001, RKS-2001, RKS-3002, RKS-4002, RKS-5001, RKSR4000
RKS-1001 (Shown without AKS-4 Cover)
RKSR-4000
RKS-5001
Model Chart
Model No. RKS-5001 RKS-1001 RKS-2001 RKS-3002 RKS-4002 RKSR-4000 Dual inputc Single input 10% of primary transmitter span None D.A./R.A. Two Pipe 10% to 200% of primary (input 1) transmitter span adjustable Description Remote SPA None Actiona Type One Pipe None 2-1/2% to 40% of primary (input 1) transmitter span adjustable Authorityb Proportional Band 4% to 40% of input transmitter span adjustable
10% of primary Replacement single transmitter span or dual input
a D.A. (Direct Acting) factory shipped: increases output pressure on rise in input 1 pressure. Field changeable to R.A.
R.A. (Reverse Acting): decreases output pressure on rise in input 1 pressure.
b Primary transmitter connects to input 1. c Input 2 has a reverse acting reset only. For direct acting the output pressure increases as input 2 increases. For reverse acting the output pressure
increases as input 2 decreases.
Specifications
Receiver-controller Setpoint Proportional band Input signals Output air signal Action Forced balanced pneumatic amplifier. Adjustable, F, C, in. water, mm water, % relative humidity labels (included with controller). Field adjustable (refer to Model Chart). 3 to 15 psig (21 to 103 kPa). Maximum input pressure 30 psig (207 kPa). 0.5 psig (3.4 kPa) to supply air pressure -0.5 psig (-3.4 kPa). Direct. Field changeable to reverse (refer to Model Chart).
588
P541 Series (2341-5XX Series)

P541 Series (2341-5XX Series)
PNEUMODULAR Receiver Controller

The receiver controllers are used with remote pneumatic transmitters to provide proportional control in pneumatic control systems. They are designed primarily for use with pneumatic transmitters; however, they may be used with any pneumatic device having an output of 3 to 15 psig, such as thermostats or humidistats. Both direct and reverse acting models are available and each device is of the dual-input type, with remote setpoint capability. These devices may be used as single input devices by using only the desired input.
Features: Nozzle and flapper relay- type receiver-controller; linear, stable and responsive. Three inputs for primary, reset, and remote control point adjustment (may be used with one or two inputs). Slide-type throttling range and authority adjustments are easy to use, require no tools. Easy setpoint calibration. Five barbed connections for 1/4 in. O.D. plastic tubing. Setpoint dials available to match transmitter ranges. Available in direct-acting and reverse-acting models. Direct-acting models have a built-in low-limit feature. Reverse-acting models have a built-in high-limit feature. Designed for mounting on PNEUMODULAR Socket MCS-S; may be mounted as stand-alone controller with K504 Mounting Bracket or P541-BASE. Model Chart Kits.
Model No. P541 P541-RA P541-BASE P541-RA-BASE Wholesale Model No. 2341-501 2341-502 2341-521 2341-522 Action Direct Reverse Direct Reverse Receiver-Controller Receiver-Controller mounted on base. Description
Receiver-Controller
20 25
0
50 40 30 20 10 0
F
60
70 80 90
1 00
Receiver-Controller Mounted on Base (gauges ordered separately)
Setpoint Dial Labels (order separately).

Model No. 300-25 300-26 300-27 300-28 300-29 300-31 Wholesale Model No. 21-450 21-451 21-452 21-453 21-454 21-456 0 to 100F -40 to 160F 40 to 140F 40 to 240F 50 to 90F -25 to 125F English Model No. 300-37 300-39 300-38 300-41 Wholesale Model No. 4 to 60C 4 to 116C 10 to 32C -18 to 38C Metric
548
T12 through T33 Series ( 2211 through 2218 Series)
12 through Room Thermostats 33 Series ( 211 These pneumatic room thermostats are designed hrough 218 Series) for proportional temperature control of pneumatic
valves and damper actuators to maintain room air temperatures in heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems.
Features: Small size, approximately 2 x 2 in. (51 x 51 mm). Attractive appearance (various metal or ABS plastic covers available). Factory calibrated. S.S. ball-in-seat provides pneumatic feedback for linear, stable operation. Easy-to-use throttling range adjustment and recalibration. Adjustable (patented) bimetal shows actual throttling range in both F and C. Adjustable 2 to 12F (1 to 6.7C). Setpoint (in both F and C) shown on thermostat body with cover removed. Leakproof, O-ring sealed, spring-loaded self-closing branch gauge tap. T23, T24, T27, 2214, and 2216 only: - Separate factory-calibrated night bimetal and setpoint dial, with fixed 4F night throttling range for accurate night operation. - Snap-acting (not gradual) changeover from day to night operation and vice versa. T27 and 2216 only: - Third port (R) output with manual reset lever allows full restoration of day operation (typically, of unit ventilator), with either manual or automatic reset to day-night schedule. T32, T33, and 2218 only: - Snap-acting (not gradual) changeover from direct-action to reverse-action and vice versa. Model Chart
Model No.a Wholesale Model No.b Model No. a Wholesale Model No. b Dial Range F (C)
F 12 6 2
C 5 2
W/O Dial Limit Stops T12-301 2211-012 2211-411c 2211-013 2211-412 c
With Dial Limit Stops T12-3011 T12-3081 c 2211-112 2211-512 c
Air Consumption
Description (Refer to Following Pages for More Detail) Single temperature, one-pipe, D.A. T12-3011 same as T12-301, but has factory-installed 10-59 setpoints stops. Single temperature, one-pipe, R.A. T13-3011 same as T13-301, but has factory-installed 10-59 setpoint stops.
55 to 85 (13 to 29) T13-3011 T13-3081 c 2211-113 2211-513 c
T13-301
0.017 scfm at 20 psig (0.48 L/m at 138 kPa)
a All thermostats include: Two mounting screws. b All wholesale thermostats include: One or two 1/4 x 3/16 in. tubing reducer(s), 20-693 tubing, 20-714 wall plate, 20-711 mounting plate, and two mounting c
screws. For details refer to Table , T-Series Thermostat Kits, on page 600.
597
H18-301 (2230-018)
Room Humidistat
The pneumatic room humidistat is a proportioning-type device designed to control pneumatic valves or damper actuators associated with heating or cooling coils, humidifiers, air washers, or other humidifying or dehumidifying equipment to maintain constant relative humidity. This device uses a highly sensitive hygroscopic nylon ribbon and a pilot bleed relay with pneumatic feedback. Throttling range, action (direct or reverse), and setpoint are easily adjusted by graduated dials. Internal limit stops are available to restrict adjustment range when required.
Features: Attractive appearance (various metal or ABS plastic covers available). Factory calibrated. S.S. ball-in-seat provides pneumatic feedback for linear, stable operation. Leakproof, O-Ring-sealed, spring-loaded self-closing branch gauge tap. Easy manual changeover from reverse to direct action, and vice versa. Model Chart
Model No. H18-301 Wholesale Model No. 2230-018a Refer to Specifications. Description
H18-301 (2230-01 8)
20
50
9 0
a Includes cover, (2) 1/4 x 3/16 reducers, 6 piece of plastic tubing, mounting plate, and wall plate.
Specifications
Action Setpoint range Throttling range Construction Components Diaphragms Air filter Maximum ambient temperature Supply air pressure Nominal Minimum Maximum Connections Calibration point Setpoint adjustment Cover Scale Finish Die cast aluminum, stainless steel, and glass-filled nylon. Fabric-reinforced neoprene. Internal. 140F (60C). Clean, dry, oil free air required (Refer to EN-123). 20 psig (138 kPa). 16 psig (110 kPa). 30 psig (207 kPa). For spring-reinforced 3/16 in. plastic tubing and required fittings (order separately). 9 psig branch line pressure when ambient humidity equals setpoint. Serrated thumb wheel. May be concealed with 10-72 adjustment cover (order separately). Included with Humidistat. 20 to 90%. Satin chrome painted aluminum. Proportional: factory set for reverse action, adjustable for direct action. 20 to 90% RH. 5 to 15%/12 psi adjustable, factory set 10%.
508
C Series, CT Series (21 and 22 Series)
Thermostat Covers
These thermostat covers are designed for use with 2 x 2 in. pneumatic controls only. All covers are supplied with a concealed setpoint adjustment cover (factory installed on the -403, -404, -407, and -413 models). The CTR-XX universal replacement cover kit includes a factory assembled standard cover with F thermometer, setpoint, and three inserts for field configuration (Barber-Colman only).
Features: Small size: approximately 2 x 2 in. (51 x 51 mm). Clean, attractive appearance. Metal and ABS plastic models available. Designed to allow room air to move easily over sensing element. Concealed or exposed adjustment, thermometer, and setpoint.
C Series, CT Series (21 and 22 Series)

60
70
0 8
C14-42 Shown
6 0
70
80
CT-21 Shown Std. ( F) 116 ( C)
C2-42 Shown
5 0
CTR-X1 Kits
Model Chart
Model Number Illustration Invensys Barber-Colman Logo CT-21-400 CT-12-400 CT-11-400 Robertshaw Logo C1-42 C1-43 C1-46 C1-47 C2-42 C2-43 C2-46 C2-47 CT-21 CT-12 CT-11 C3-42 C3-43 C3-46 C3-47 Wholesale 21-923 22-923 22-823 21-928 22-928 22-828 21-933 22-933 22-833 None (No company Identification) Concealed adjustment Dial Markings 55 to 85F Cover Type Full X X X X X X X X Blank X X X X Color Satin-chrome Brushed aluminum Gray Beige Satin-chrome Brushed aluminum Gray Beige Satin-chrome Brushed aluminum Gray Beige Metal Plastic Metal Plastic Thermometer Material Ext. Int. Metal Plastic X X X X
60
70
80
All Barber-Colman thermostats are supplied with concealed adjustment covers. The concealed adjustment cover is factory installed on the -403, -404, -407, and -413.
504
60
70
80
60
70
55 to 85F
80
60
70
80
TK-1XXX Series, TKR Series
K-1XXX eries, KR eries
Single Setpoint Room Thermostats

For proportional temperature control of pneumatic valves and damper actuators to maintain room air temperatures in heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems.
Features: Attractive appearance. Branch-line to sensing-element pneumatic feedback for linear, stable operation. Available with F or C setpoint scales and thermometers. Covers supplied with exposed setpoint and thermometer. Cover inserts included for: - Exposed setpoint only. - Blank cover. Aspirated versions of certain models available.
TK-1XXX-600 Aspirated Thermostat
90 80 70 60 50
TK-1XXX, TKR-1XXX
TK-1XXX TKR-1XX1
Model Chart
Model No. TK-1001 TK-1001-116 TK-1001-600 TK-1101 TK-1101-116 TK-1101-600 TK-1301 TK-1301-116 TK-1381 TK-1601c TK-1601-116 c Dial Markingsa 55 to 85F 13 to 29C 55 to 85F 55 to 85F 13 to 29C 55 to 85F 55 to 85F 13 to 29C 55 to 85F 55 to 85F 13 to 29C 55 to 85F Direct Acting 15 psig day 20 psig night Reverse Acting 15 psig day 20 psig night Direct Acting 15 psig day 20 psig night Reverse Acting 15 psig day 20 psig night Reverse Acting Direct Acting Control Actionb Supply Pressure Type Thermostat Two pipe Aspirated Two pipe Aspirated Two or three pipe with manual override
TK-1681 c
Two or three pipe with manual override
a Dial stop pins included to limit dual range on all units. b Direct Acting (D.A.) increases output pressure on temperature rise. c
Reverse Acting (R.A.) decreases output pressure on temperature rise. Has second white plastic tube to pass full line pressure (20 psi) at night and 0 psi at day. Used to actuate items such as pressure electric switches.
615
www.prokontrol.com
US Patents 6,073,907; 5,397,098; and Des. 400,967. Foreign patents pending. UL Listed Actuator.
Body Type & Temperature
T = On/Off (General) S = On/Off (Steam)* *High temperature actuator must be used.
Options
0 = No Options A = End Switch 4 5 6 B = Low Load End Switch 4
5 6
Configuration
2 = 2-Way 3 = 3-Way
Electrical Leads Valve Size

2 = 1/2" 3 = 3/4" 4 = 1" 5= 1-1/4"
3
00 = 6" Motor Wires 01 = Terminal Block with End Switch (General Temp., 24 VAC only) 5 02 = 18" (Standard) Wire Leads
INVENSYS - 41 www.invensysibs.com
F-27093-1 3/03
Voltage Temperature Ratings

3 = General Temperature 4 = High Temperature A = 24 VAC, 50/60 HZ B = 110/120 VAC, 50/60 HZ D = 208 VAC, 50/60 HZ T = 277 VAC, 50/60 HZ U = 230 VAC, 50 HZ
Connection Type
Availability
1/2", 3/4", 1", 1-1/4" 1/2", 3/4", 1" 1/2", 3/4", 1" 3/4" 1/2"
1 = Sweat 2 = Threaded NPT 3 = Threaded Rp (metric) 4 = Inverted Flare (Retrofit) 5 = SAE Flare
Spring Return
1 = Normally Closed 2 = Normally Open
Availability
2-way and 3-way 2-way only
Cv Size
No. 1 = 2 = 2-way 3-way 1.0 2.5 1.5 3.0 Size 1/2" 3/4" 1/2" 3/4" 1/2" 3 = 5= 7 = 3.5 5.0 7.5 8.0 4.0 5.0 7.5 8.0 3/4" 1" 3/4" 1" 3/4" 1" 1-1/4" Connection Type 1, 2, 3, 5 4 1, 2, 3, 5 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 5 1, 2, 3, 4 1 1, 2, 3 1 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 1
Actuator Type
G = On/Off (General Close-Off) H = On/Off (High Close-off)
1 2
When ordering valve body only: use the first six positions to configure the valve. When ordering actuator only use the last seven positions to configure the actuator. Prefix with the letter "A". Invensys inverted flare fittings must be ordered separately. See actuator accessories for fitting part numbers. temperature rating is general (3).
5 6
Actuators with Terminal blocks require endswitch and the endswitch is 24 V/5A. Standard Load: (Option A) 24 - 240V actuators: End switch is rated 24 240 Vac, 101mA - 5A; 9 - 30 Vdc max, 100mA 277V actuators: End switch is rated 277 Vac, 101mA - 5A Low Load: (Option B) 24 - 240V actuators: End switch is rated 24 120 Vac, 100 mA max; 8Vdc max, 100mA 277 V actuators: End switch is rated 24 - 240 Vac, 100 mA max
4 End switch is only available if actuator
Body & Actuator Combination Requirements

Temperature Configurations Body Configuration VTXXXX
T = General S = Steam If body configuration is T, actuator temp rating can be 3 or 4. If body configuration is S, actuator temp rating must be 4.
Actuator Spring Return Mode AXX3XXXX

3 = General Temperature 4 = High Temperature If actuator temp rating is 3, body style must be T. If actuator temp rating is 4, body style can be S or T.
Think Reliability. Think Invensys.
2-Way Globe Valves, Union End (1/2 to 1-1/4 in.) and Flared (1/2 & 5/8 in. O.D.) with Electric, Hydraulic, and Pneumatic Actuators
TABLE 2. Select Actuator Type with correct Input Signal having sufficient close-off for the application. If selecting Component parts, Select Valve Linkage
Input Signal Valve Linkage Positive Positioner Actuator Type Actuator Code Spring Range (psig) Factory Available Valve Assembliesd VA-7211-XXX-3-P VF-7211-2XX-3-P VK-7211-XXX-3-P VS-7211-XXX-3-P VA-7211-XXX-4-P N.O. VA-7212-XXX-4-P VF-7211-2XX-4-P VF-7212-2XX-4-P VK-7211-XXX-4-P VK-7212-XXX-4-P VS-7211-XXX-4-P VS-7212-XXX-4-P VA-7221-XXX-4-P VF-7221-2XX-4-P VF-7222-2XX-4-P N.C. VK-7221-XXX-4-P VK-7222-XXX-4-P VS-7221-XXX-4-P VS-7222-XXX-4-P VA-1219-XXX-4-P N.O. VF-1219-XXX-4-P VK-1219-XXX-4-P VS-1219-XXX-4-P VB-121-0-4-P -1, -2, -3 1/2 VB-7221-0-4-P VB-7222-0-4-P -1-2-3-4 -5-6 -7-8 -9 [5/8]e 3/4 1 1-1/4 1/2 -9 1-1/4 20 40 VB-7211-0-4-P VB-7212-0-4-P VB-7211-0-3-P Size in. 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4
Pneumatic AV-7400 AK-42309-500
Pneumatic AV-401 AK-42039-500
Two-Position Electronic Vdc Electric 4 to 20 mA AV-7600a
MK-2690 201 3 to 7 202 5 to 10 203 8 to 13
MP-521X-XXX MA-521X-XXX MP-541X MK-4601 MK-4611 MK-4621 MF-5X1X MP-551X MPR-561X 301 3 to 6 302 5 to 10 303 10 to 13 2XX
ACTUATOR CLOSE-OFF PRESSURE RATING (psi) b c N.P. Valve Body P Code -1-2-3-4 -5-6 -7-8 -9 Supply Air Pressure (psig) 15 20 15 20 15 20 15 20 15 20 15 10 10 20 200 120 65 40 200 120 65 40 130 220 60 170 80 130 40 120 35 20 70 40 50 30 90 250 250 60 180 250 25 15 90 50 150 90 130 80 40 25 130 80 40 25
1/2 130 220 60 170 -1-2-3-4 [5/8]e -5-6 -7-8 3/4 1 80 130 40 120 35 70 15 8 50 30
90 250 250 120 250 60 180 250 25 15 90 50 150 90 80 35 20 180 100 60
50 30 9
130 60 30 15
30 20 5
100 70 30 15
250 160 60 40
200 130 50 35
130 80 40 25
190 250 90 220 160 250 250 180 250
40
250
125
a MF-5X1X, MP-541X, MP-551X MPR-561X, use AV-7600-1 and AV-601. b Close-off rated for ANSI IV (.01%) with pressure at inlet (port A). Ratings for normally open valves are with indicated supply air pressure applied to
actuator. Ratings for normally closed valves are with 1 psi or less applied to actuator (for kPa multiply by 6.89). See Valve General Information section for seat leakage ratings. c Close-off pressure ratings describe only the differential pressure which the actuator can close-off with adequate seating force. Consult valve body specifications for other limitations. d Consult price guide for factory available valve assemblies. e 5/8 O.D. SAE 45 fittings on VB-7212 and VB-7222 valves.
686
ELECTRONIC WALL THERMOSTATS

DELUXE PROGRAMMABLE MODELS
The line of Deluxe Programmable Thermostats offer state-of-the-art control for residential and commercial applications. Designed for new construction or replacement applications, these models feature 7 day programming with the choice of 2 or 4 program periods per day, a keypad lock, a cover lock, and optional remote indoor and outdoor temperature sensors. They also include as standard features automatic changeover, permanent program memory retention during any type of power outage, and a smart fan option that can run the fan continually during occupied periods, which is a requirement in many commercial applications. It comes in a stylish slimline design with a large easy to read liquid crystal display (LCD).
FEATURES
Automatic changeover Smart Fan provides for continuous fan during occupied periods (Seven Day models only) Locking cover Keypad lock Selectable F or C readout Remote indoor and outdoor sensing capability Short cycle protection during normal operation Built in anticipation Additional features on multistage models Can be tied in with a fresh air/economizer package LED indicators LCD service symbol display options Adjustable outdoor balance points to lockout the auxiliary heat and/ or compressor (300-226 and 300-227 only)
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical rating A.C. Current D.C. Current Temperature setting range 24 to 30 VAC .050 Amps to 0.75 Amps continuous per output with surges to 3 Amp Max. 0 Amps to 0.75 Amps continuous per output with surges to 3 Amp Max. Heating: 38 to 88F / 5 to 30C Cooling: 60 to 88F / 16 to 40C 28 to 124F/0 to 48C 1F / .5C -50F to 124F / -48 to 48C 2F / 1C
Temperature sensing range Temperature differential O.D.T. range Minimum deadband (between heating and cooling)
NOTE: This thermostat contains electronic circuitry replacing the conventional mechanical anticipator.
ORDERING DATA
UNI-LINE ORDER NO. 300-225 300-227 300-229 300-224 * 300-226 300-230 *
* No common required
APPLICATION 1 HEAT/1 COOL 3 HEAT/2 COOL OR 2 HEAT/1COOL HEAT PUMPS 2 HEAT/2 COOL OR 2 HEAT/1 COOL 1 HEAT/1 COOL 2 HEAT/1 COOL HEAT PUMPS COOL ONLY
7 DAY
5-2 DAY
COMMENTS GAS OR ELECTRIC HEAT ADJUSTABLE BALANCE POINTS GAS OR ELECTRIC HEAT
GAS OR ELECTRIC HEAT ADJUSTABLE BALANCE POINTS W/ FAN SWITCH
ACCESSORIES ORDERING DATA

UNI-LINE ORDER NO. 10-528 10-529 10-531 10-546 DESCRIPTION INDOOR SENSOR OUTDOOR SENSOR DECORATIVE WALL PLATE ADD-A-WIRE COMMENTS STYLISH DESIGN COMPLEMENTS ANY DECOR, CAN BE INTERCONNECTED WITH UP TO SIX INDOOR SENSORS FOR TEMPERATURE AVERAGING. CAN BE USED ON ALL MODELS ALLOWS 5 WIRE THERMOSTATS TO BE CONNECTED TO 4 WIRES, CAN ALSO BE USED TO REPAIR BROKEN WIRES.
A3 www.prokontrol.com INVENSYS - 68
ELECTRONIC WALL THERMOSTATS

DELUXE DIGITAL MODELS NON-PROGRAMMABLE
The line of Deluxe Digital Thermostats offers state-of-the-art control in a stylish, slimline package with an easy-to-read LCD display. Designed for residential or commercial needs, these new models will handle single stage, multistage or heat pump applications. All models provide automatic changeover, a day/night button for an alternate temperature setting and remote sensing capability (indoor and outdoor sensors are available). They also provide short cycle protection during normal operation, a keypad lock and a cover lock.
FEATURES
Locking cover Keypad lock Remote clock terminals Selectable F or C readout Remote indoor and outdoor sensing capability Short cycle protection during normal operation Built in anticipation Night set back button Additional features on multistage models LED indicators LCD service symbol display options Adjustable outdoor balance points to lockout the auxiliary heat and/or compressor (300-202 and 300-208 only). Economy or comfort setting allows for speed recovery or energy savings (300-202 and 300-208 only).
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical rating A.C. Current D.C. Current Temperature setting range 24 to 30 VAC .050 Amps to 0.75 Amps continuous per output with surges to 3 Amp Max. 0 Amps to 0.75 Amps continuous per output with surges to 3 Amp Max. Heating: 38 to 88F / 5 to 30C Cooling: 60 to 88F / 16 to 40C 28 to 124F/0 to 48C 1F/ .5C -50F to 124F/-48 to 48C 2F/1C
Temperature sensing range Temperature differential O.D.T. range Minimum deadband (between heating and cooling)
NOTE: This thermostat contains electronic circuitry replacing the conventional mechanical anticipator.
ORDERING DATA
UNI-LINE ORDER NO. 300-201 300-202 300-203 300-204* 300-205 300-206 300-207 300-208 300-209 APPLICATION 1 HEAT/1 COOL 3 HEAT/2 COOL OR 2 HEAT/1 COOL HEAT PUMPS 2 HEAT/2 COOL OR 2 HEAT/1 COOL HEAT ONLY COOL ONLY 1 HEAT/1 COOL 1 HEAT/1 COOL HEAT PUMP 2 HEAT/1 COOL HEAT PUMP SINGLE SETPOINT 1 HEAT/1 COOL ZONE CONTROL AUTOMATIC CHANGEOVER COMMENTS GAS OR ELECTRIC HEAT ADJUSTABLE BALANCE POINTS GAS OR ELECTRIC HEAT GAS HEAT W/ FAN SWITCH GAS OR ELECTRIC HEAT GAS OR ELECTRIC HEAT ADJUSTABLE BALANCE POINTS NARROW FIXED DEADBAND NO DAY, NIGHT OR OUTDOOR BUTTON
No common required.
* No remote sensor capability.
No remote clock capacity.
ACCESSORIES ORDERING DATA

UNI-LINE ORDER NO. 10-528 10-529 10-531 10-546 DESCRIPTION INDOOR SENSOR OUTDOOR SENSOR DECORATIVE WALL PLATE ADD-A-WIRE COMMENTS CAN BE INTERCONNECTED WITH UP TO SIX INDOOR SENSORS FOR TEMPERATURE AVERAGING. CAN BE USED ON ALL MODELS ALLOWS 5 WIRE THERMOSTATS TO BE CONNECTED TO 4 WIRES, CAN ALSO BE USED TO REPAIR BROKEN WIRES.
A6 www.prokontrol.com INVENSYS 69
BELIMO PRODUCTS
Modulating Actuators Selection Chart On/Off Actuators Selection Chart Electronic Accessories Usage Chart Mechanical Accessories Overview of all Belimo Valves (specifics below) CCV Characterized Ball Valves Electronic Zone Valves Ball Valves Globe Valves Universal Actuator Kits (HL, JCI, Invensys, Siemens, TA, etc.) Flanged Globe Valves Butterfly Valves BELIMO - 1 BELIMO - 2 BELIMO - 3, 4 BELIMO - 5 to 7 BELIMO - 8, 9 BELIMO - 10 to 12 BELIMO - 13 to 17 BELIMO - 18 to 22 BELIMO - 23, 24 BELIMO - 25
BELIMO - 26 to 29 BELIMO - 30 to 39
LF Series
NF Series AF Series
LM Series NM Series AM Series GM Series
www.prokontrol.com
BELIMO - 1
LF Series NF Series
FSNF Series AF Series
LM Series NM Series
GM Series AM Series
www.prokontrol.com BELIMO - 2
Electronic Accessories
A CLOSER LOOK
Well help solve any application problem with a wide range of accessories and unparalleled customer service.
D20230/ 5 4 3 2 1 -05/02-10M-EG-Subject to change. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.
The Belimo Difference

q Customer Commitment. Extensive product range. Competitive project pricing. Application assistance. Same-day shipments. Free technical support. Five year warranty. q Low Installation and Life-Cycle Cost. Easy installation. Accuracy and repeatability. Low power consumption. No maintenance. q Long Service Life. Components tested before assembly. Every product tested before shipment. 20+ years direct coupled actuator design.
www.prokontrol.com
BELIMO -
157
Electronic Accessories
www.prokontrol.com
BELIMO - 5
www.prokontrol.com
BELIMO - 6
www.prokontrol.com
BELIMO - 7
www.prokontrol.com
BELIMO - 8
www.prokontrol.com
BELIMO - 9
Characterized Control Valves (CCV)
B2 Series Two-Way Valves Application

The B2 series characterized control valves control water from 0 to 212F [-18C to 100C]. They are used for 2-position or modulating control. The valve should be mounted in a weather-protected area in a location that is within the ambient limits of the actuator. Allow sufficient room for actuator, other accessories and for service. Valve may be mounted in any position, except stem below horizontal. The flow direction is indicated on the valve body. Do not reverse flow direction.
Specifications:
Service Flow Characteristic Sizes Type of end fitting Chilled or Hot Water, 60% glycol A port equal percentage 2'' to 3'' npt, female
Materials:
Body Ball Stem Seats Characterizing Disc Packing Pressure rating Ambient Temp Range Media Temp Range Close-off pressure Maximum Differential Pressure Leakage forged brass, nickel plated stainless steel stainless steel fiberglass reinforced teflon PTFE TEFZEL 2 EPDM O-rings, lubricated 400 PSI -22F to 122F 0F to 212F 100 PSI 30 PSI for quiet service 50 PSI maximum 0%
Actuators
A number of combinations are possible. Both spring return and non-spring return actuators are available direct coupled to the valve. Actuators are thermally isolated from the valve body for protection from heat and condensation. Available Actuators: AM24-MFT US AM24 US AF24-MFT US AF24 US
Warning
These valves are not for combustible gas applications as leaks and explosions could result. Sound engineering practices need to be applied, especially in low temperature applications with respect to condensation and ice buildup.
Cv ratings*
2'' 2.5'' 3'' 65, 90, 130, 265* 65, 90, 130, 180, 265* 90, 180, 220, 265*
Part Number
B251 B252 B253 B254* B261 B262 B263 B264 B265*
Cv
65 90 130 265 65 90 130 180 265
Size
2'' 2'' 2'' 2'' 2.5'' 2.5'' 2.5'' 2.5'' 2.5'' B277 B278 B279 B280* 90 180 220 265 3'' 3'' 3'' 3''
* Models without Characterizing Discs
Valve Size
2'' 2.5'' 3''
A 5.00'' (124 mm) 5.53'' (138 mm) 5.82'' (145 mm)
B 2.78'' (69.45 mm) 2.78'' (69.45 mm) 2.78'' (69.45 mm)
C 1.63'' (41.4 mm) 1.63'' (41.4 mm) 1.63'' (41.4 mm)
* Subject to change +-5%
www.prokontrol.com
BELIMO -
10
Characterized Control Valves (CCV)

1/2 with TR Actuator B2-Series Two-Way Valves B3-Series Three-Way Valves
Specifications Service Flow characteristic
Action Sizes Type of end fitting Materials: Body Ball Stem Seats Characterizing disc Packing Pressure rating Ambient temp. range Media temp. range Close off pressure Maximum differential pressure (. P)
chilled or hot water, 60% glycol A port equal percentage B port modified linear for constant AB flow Max 95 rotation 1/2 female, NPT forged brass, nickel plated stainless steel (on B versions), chrome plated brass (on BB versions) stainless steel (on B versions) brass (on BB versions) fiberglass reinforced teflon PTFE TEFZEL 2 EPDM O-rings, lubricated
600 psi
Application The B2 and B3 characterized control valves control water from 0 to 212F [-18C to 100C]. They are used for 2 position or floating point control (with characterizing disc). The valve should be mounted in a weather-protected area in a location that is within its ambient limits of the actuator. Allow sufficient room for actuator, other accessories and for service. Valve may mounted in any position, except stem below horizontal. Actuators The compact, non-spring TR Series actuators, for 1/2 Characterized Control Valves, provides visual indication of ball position and constant running time. The actuators are available direct coupled and are thermally isolated from the valve body for protection from heat and condensation. WARNING These valves are not for combustible gas applications as leaks and explosions could result. Sound engineering practices need to be applied, especially in low temperature applications with respect to condensation and ice buildup.
Leakage
Cv rating
19F to 122F (-7C to 50C) 0F to 212F [-18C to 100C] 200 psi Full flow version on/off 150 psi (no A disc) Characterized A port: modulating: 30 psi for quiet service, 50 psi maximum A port: 0% B port: 0.5% - 2% of full rated CV AB port: 0% A port: see product chart for values B port: 70% of A port flow
Dimensions for CCV with TR24-3-T US

B2
3.25 [82.6] 2.50 [63.5]
D060
2.82 [71.6]
A C C
B3
3.25 [82.6]
2.50 [63.5]
2.82 [71.6]
Valve Size 1/2
B2/B3 Dimensions in inches [mm] A B C D 2.38 [60.5] 1.63 [41.4] 1.63 [41.4] 1.31 [33.3]
A C
www.prokontrol.com
BELIMO -
11
D061
Tefzel is a registered trademark of DuPont
2-Way 1/2 NPT Ball Valve B2VS Series

Stainless Ball and Stem Live-load packing set Stainless steel ball & stem Blow-out proof stem design
Application These threaded valves are designed to provide modulating or two position control of hot or chilled water and saturated steam systems under 35 psi. Typical applications include reheat coils, vav terminal control, unit ventilators, and air handlers, especially in areas which have minimum profile requirements. Up to 35 psi steam 1/2 - 600 PSIG WOG, Cold Non-Shock. Federal Specification:WW-V-35C,Type II, Composition:BZ,Style: 3. Chilled or hot water, glycol, 35# steam Modified equal percentage 90 rotation valve open CW, valve closed CCW 1/2 SAE NPT (Female Connections)
800
Specifications Media Flow Characteristic Action Sizes End Fittings Materials: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) Stem Packing Stem Bearing Ball Seat (x2) Retainer Gland Stem Jam Nut Body Seal Reinforced PTFE Reinforced PTFE 316 Stainless Steel Reinforced PTFE w/ Durafill B16 (3/4 - 1) Brass B16 Brass 316 Stainless Steel Stainless Steel B584-C84400 Bronze 600 psig WOG -20F to 450F 600 psig @ 100F <600 psig
RPTFE SEATS
600
400
200
0 -50 0 100 200 300 400 500 600
(10) Body Pressure Rating Media Temp. Range Close-off Pressure Maximum Differential Pressure
Closed CCW
7 1 2
8 6
INLET
OUTLET
10
Flow Direction
Open CW
5 9 4 3
Valve Model B212VS B213VS B214VS
Nominal Size Inches DN/mm 1/2 15 1/2 15 1/2 15
Cv 1 2 4
Close Off LM/LF NM/NF 75 200 75 200 75 200
AF 200 200 200
www.prokontrol.com
BELIMO -
19
E20233 / 5 4 3 2 1 -05/02-10M-EG-Subject to change. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.
Typical Installation
Ball Valve Piping Diagrams
Two-Way Valve Piping Diagram
Return Coil
A AB
Three-Way Mixing Valve Piping Diagram

(N.C. TO COIL @ 0 VDC)
B A
Supply
Coil
AB
Return Supply
Supply
Three-Way Diverting Valve Piping Diagram

Return Coil
A B AB
Three-Way Mixing Valve Piping Diagram

(N.O. TO COIL @ 0 VDC)
A B
Coil Supply Return
AB
Return Supply
Supply
Supply
Supply
Set-up 2-way and 3-way Ball Valves Note: 3-way Ball Valves have ports tagged. Valves will be shipped with the default set-up unless custom set-up is specified upon ordering.
SPRING RETURN ACTUATOR LF24 US NF24 US AF24 US LF, NF, AF (-3), -MFT, -SR Floating or proportional type actuators SurePowr actuators
DEFAULT NO/FO (Normally Open / Fail Open) Valve: Open A to AB, will drive closed Spring action: Will spring open A to AB upon power loss NC/FO (Normally Closed / Fail Open) Valve: Closed A to AB, will drive open Spring action: Will spring open A to AB upon power loss
CUSTOM (Specify when ordering) NC/FC (Normally Closed / Fail Closed) Valve: Closed A to AB, will drive open Spring action: Will spring closed A to AB upon power loss NC/FC or NO/FC
(Normally Closed/Fail Closed) or (Normally Open/Fail Closed)
Valve: Closed A to AB or Open A to AB (can be chosen with CW/CCW switch). Spring action: Will spring closed A to AB upon power loss
NON-SPRING RETURN ACTUATOR All NM, AM US, GM US -MFT, MAR actuators
DEFAULT NC (Normally Closed) Closed A to AB, will open as voltage increases or power applied
CUSTOM (Specify when ordering) NO (Normally Open) Open A to AB, will close as voltage increases or power applied. (Can be chosen with CW/CCW switch).
22
www.prokontrol.com
BELIMO -
20
Electronic Globe Valves

NVF Series Spring return fail safe, direct coupled globe valve actuator, on/off, floating point, proportional control NVFD24 US NVFD24-E US NVFD24-MFT US NVFD24-MFT-E US NVF24-MFT US NVF24-MFT-E US Application For on/off, floating point and proportional control of globe valves. Actuator will mate to an integrated adaptor bracket. Adaptor bracket shown fits valves manufactured by Siebe Environmental Controls (Invensys) under designations VB7000 and VB9000. Technical Data Power Supply: Power consumption Transformer sizing Electrical connection Overload protection Control signal Y* NVF Series 24 VAC +/- 20% 50/60 Hz 24 VDC +/- 10% 5.5 W 10 VA (Class 2 power supply) 3 ft, 18 GA appliance cable, 1/2" conduit fitting electronic throughout stroke 2 to 10 VDC, NVFMFT(-E) US, V-10001 Default Pulse width modulation, NVFMFT(-E) US V-20 (selectable when ordered) Floating point, NVFMFT(-E) US, V-30001 Default (when ordered) On-Off, NVF(-E) US, V-40002 Default (when ordered) 2 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20 mA (w/500. , 1/4 W resistor), NVFMFT(-E) US 100K. for 2 to 10 VDC, 500W for 4 to 20 mA 750. for PWM 1500. for On-Off, Floating point 2 to 10 VDC, 0.5 mA max., NVFMFT (-E) US 3/4" [20 mm] NVF US, Spring UP NVF-E US, Spring DOWN 90 lbf [400 N], NVFD (-E) US 180 lbf [800 N], NVF (-E) US stroke indicator on bracket 3/16" hex, 5 mm hex, phillips screwdriver 150 sec. Independent of load and Independent of stroke 30 sec. at 3/4" [20 mm] stroke 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing -22F to + 122 F [-30C to 50C] 20F to + 250 F [-7C to 120C] -40F to +176 F [-40C to 80C] NEMA 2/ IP54 with cable entry down UL 94-5V (flammability rating) CE, UL 873, CSA C22.2 NO.24 certified ISO 9001 max. 35 dB(A) maintenance free 4 lb [1.8 kg]
Functional safety The actuator is secure against short circuiting and incorrect polarity. The stroke is adapted automatically and is overloadprotected. The spring return function in the actuator is pretensioned when delivered. Pressing a 3/16 or 5 mm hex into the housing cover releases the spring stop. Manual operation When a 3/16 or 5 mm hex is inserted, depressed and turned clockwise, the actuator plunger pushes out. The actuator plunger retains the position until the nominal voltage is applied. Display of function The stroke is shown mechanically on the adaptor bracket, and the maximum stroke is set automatically. Under the housing cover on -MFT models is a two-colored LED display which will verify that the actuator is set up properly. Multi-Function Technology (MFT) An integrated microprocessor allows for a great variety of parameters to be easily configured at the factory or in the field.
Input impedance Feedback* Maximum stroke Plunger Force Position indicator Manual override Running time motor* Running time spring Humidity Ambient temperature Media temperature Storage temperature Housing Housing material Agency listing Quality standard Noise level Servicing Weight * Variable 38
Dimensions in inches (numbers in brackets are metric)
7.05" [179]
4.35" [110]
8.75" [222]
UNV-001 bracket shown
www.prokontrol.com
BELIMO -
23
E20222 5 4 3 2 1 05/02-10M-EG-Subject to change. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.
Operating range*
D030
70298C
Mounting UNV Kits to NV Type Actuators

Application UNV- Series Retrofit Kits are designed for use with NV Series actuators. These kits include all parts needed to mount to any of the below valves (see chart). NV actuators are purchased separately.
CHART 1
Valve Manufacturer SIEBE / Invensys Valve Body VB7000 2 way and 3 way VB9000 2 way and 3 way Belimo USA G2 Series 2 way Belimo USA G3 Series 3 way Belimo Europe Series H4 2 way Belimo Europe Series H5 3 way VF 599 Series 2 way VF 599 Series 3 way Powertop/Series VP 658 2 way and 3 way Flowrite/Series VP591 2 way Flowrite/Series VP591 3 way V5011 Series 2 way screwed V5013 Series 3 way screwed V5011N Series 2 way V5013N Series 3 way V6600 3 way V6700 2 way V6800 2 way V-3754 Series Bronze Cage Trim 2 way V-3974 Series Bronze Cage Trim 2 way V-4324 Series Bronze Cage Trim 3 way V-5844 Series 2 and 3 way VG7000 Series 2 and 3 way VG7000 Series 2 and 3 way VB7000 2 way VB9000 2 way Belimo USA G2S Series 2 way Size 1/2 to 2 1/2 to 1.25" 1/2 to 2 1/2 to 2 1/2 to 2 1/2 to 2 1/2 to 2 1/2 to 2 1/2 to 1.25 1/2 to 1 1/2 to 2 1/2 to 3 1/2 to 3 1/2 to 3 1/2 to 3 1/2 to 2 1/2 to 2 3/4 3/4 to 2 3/4 to 2 3/4 to 2 3/4 to 2 1/2 to 3/4 1 to 2 1/2 to 2 1/2 to 1.25" 1/2 to 2 Kit UNV-001 UNV-001 UNV-001 UNV-001 UNV-002 UNV-002 UNV-003 UNV-003 UNV-004 UNV-005 UNV-005 UNV-006 UNV-006 UNV-006 UNV-006 UNV-007 UNV-007 UNV-007 UNV-008 UNV-008 UNV-008 UNV-008 UNV-009 UNV-040 UNV-035 UNV-035 UNV-035 Stem Adjustment 45 mm 44 mm 45 mm 45 mm No adjustment needed No adjustment needed 60 mm 65 mm 65 mm 65 mm 65 mm 65 mm 65 mm 60 mm 60 mm 64 mm 60 mm 60 mm 60 mm 60 mm 65 mm 65 mm 67 mm 66 mm 67 mm
Danfoss-Trata Siemens Landis
Honeywell
Robertshaw
Johnson
SIEBE / Invensys For steam use up to 50 psi inlet pressure
UNV-001 Dimensions in inches (numbers in brackets are metric)
UNV-003-UNV-040 Dimensions in inches (numbers in brackets are metric)
www.prokontrol.com
BELIMO -
25
G6S/G7S/G7DS Series Flanged Globe Valve

G6S Series Two-Way G7S Series Three-Way Mixing G7DS Series Three-Way Diverting Application G6S series single seat, stem up open, two-way valves control water or steam for 2-position or modulating control applications. G7S series mixing and diverting valves control water for two position or modulating control applications. All valves have 125 psig pressure rating per ANSI Standards for flanged cast iron bodies.
Stainless Steel Trim
Actuators A number of combinations are possible. Both spring return and non-spring return actuators are available with appropriate linkages. Piping The valve should be mounted in a weather-protected area in a location that is within the ambient limits of the actuator. Allow sufficient room for valve linkage, actuator, and other accessories and for service. The preferred mounting position for the valve stem is vertical above the valve body. An arrow indicates flow. Do not reverse flow direction. G7S mixing: A port is inlet, B port is bypass, AB port is outlet. G7DS diverting: A and B ports are outlets, AB port is inlet. WARNING These valves are not for combustible gas applications as leaks and explosions could result. Specifications Service Flow Characteristic Action
Dimensions (Three-way mixing shown)
D035
Sizes Type of End Fitting Materials: Body Seat Stem Plug Packing ANSI Class Maximum Inlet Pressure Water Maximum Inlet Pressure Steam Media Temp. Range
G6S Two-way Dimensions in inches [mm] A B C Model # Valve G665S G680S G6100S G6125S G6150S Valve Inches 2-1/2 3 4 5 6
iron Stainless 316 Stainless steel 316 Stainless Steel TFE V-ring 125 flanged 150 psi [1034 kPa] @250F G6S only - 100 psi [680 kPa]
9 [229] 10 [254] 13 [330] 15-3/4 [400] 17-3/4 [451]
4-9/16 [103] 5-1/4 [133] 6-3/16 [157] 5-5/8 [143] 6-3/8 [162]
5[127] 5-15/16 [151] 7 [178] 7-5/8 [194] 8-1/4 [210]
G7S Three-way Mixing Dimensions in inches [mm] A B C Model # Valve G765S G780S G7100S G7125S G7150S Valve Inches 2-1/2 3 4 5 6
9 [229] 10 [254] 13 [330] 15-3/4 [400] 17-3/4 [451]
7-1/16 [179] 7-15/16 [202] 9-7/8 [251] 9-1/4 [235] 9-7/8 [251]
5 3/8 [137] 5-15/16 [151] 7 [178] 5-5/8 [149] 6-5/8 [168]
steam 32F to 338F [0C to 170C] water 32F to 350F [0C to 176C] Maximum Differential steam 50 psi [340 kPa] (G6S) Pressure water 50 psi [340 kPa] Rangeability 50:1 G6S, G7S 30:1 G7DS 26
G7DS Three-way Diverting Dimensions in inches [mm] A B C Model # Valve G765DS G780DS G7100DS G7125DS G7150DS Valve Inches 2-1/2 3 4 5 6
9 [229] 10 [254] 13 [330] 12 [305] 14-1/8 [359]
7-1/16 [179] 7-15/16 [202] 9-7/8 [251] 10-1/2 [267] 11-1/16 [281]
5-1/4[132] 6-1/16 [154] 6-7/8 [175] 7-7/16 [189] 8-1/8 [203]
www.prokontrol.com
BELIMO -
27
chilled or hot water, glycol, G6S only - up to 100# steam G6S equal percentage G7S, G7DS linear G6S: stem up open G7S mixing: stem up B to AB open stem down A to AB open G7DS Diverting: stem up AB to B open, stem down AB to A open 2-1/2 to 6 125 lb. flanged
G6-250/G7-250 Series Flanged Globe Valve

ANSI 250 - Standard Trim G6-250 Series Two-Way G7-250 Series Three-Way Mixing Application G6-250 series single seat, stem up open, two-way valves control water or steam for 2-position or modulating control applications. G7-250 series mixing valves control water for two position or modulating control applications. All valves have 250 psig pressure rating per ANSI Standards for flanged cast iron bodies. Actuators A number of combinations are possible. Both spring return and non-spring return actuators are available with appropriate linkages. Piping The valve should be mounted in a weather-protected area in a location that is within the ambient limits of the actuator. Allow sufficient room for valve linkage, actuator, and other accessories and for service. The preferred mounting position for the valve stem is vertical above the valve body. An arrow indicates flow. Do not reverse flow direction. G7-250 mixing: A port is inlet, B port is bypass, AB port is outlet. WARNING These valves are not for combustible gas applications as leaks and explosions could result.
Dimensions (Three-way mixing shown)

Specifications Service Flow Characteristic Action
chilled or hot water, glycol, G6-250 only - steam G6-250 equal percentage G7-250 linear G6-250: stem up open G7-250 mixing: stem up B to AB open stem down A to AB open 2-1/2 to 6 250 lb. flanged iron bronze 316 Stainless steel bronze TFE V-ring 250 flanged 100 psi [680 kPa] @250F G6-250 only - 35 psi 32F to 280F [0C to 138C] steam 10 psi [69 kPa] (G6-250) water 25 psi [170 kPa] 50:1 G6-250, G7-250
Model # Valve G765-250 G780-250 G7100-250 G7125-250 G7150-250 Valve Inches 2-1/2 3 4 5 6
D035
Sizes Type of End Fitting Materials: Body Seat Stem Plug Packing ANSI Class Maximum Inlet Pressure Water Maximum Inlet Pressure Steam Media Temp. Range Maximum Differential Pressure Rangeability
G6-250 Two-way Dimensions in inches [mm] A B C Model # Valve G665-250 G680-250 G6100-250 G6125-250 G6150-250 Valve Inches 2-1/2 3 4 5 6
9-5/8 [240] 10-3/4 [269] 13-5/8 [341] 16-5/8 [416] 18-5/8 [466]
4-7/8 [122] 5-1/2 [138] 6-3/8 [160] 5-3/4 [144] 6-1/2 [163]
5-1/2[138] 6-1/8 [153] 7-1/8 [178] 7-3/4 [194] 8-3/8 [210]
G7-250 Three-way Mixing Dimensions in inches [mm] A B C
9-5/8 [240] 10-3/4 [269] 13-5/8 [341] 16-5/8 [416] 18-5/8 [466]
7-3/8 [184] 8-3/8 [210] 10-1/4 [256] 10-3/8 [260] 11 [275]
5 1/2 [138] 6-1/8 [153] 7-1/8 [178] 6 [150] 6-3/4 [169]
www.prokontrol.com
BELIMO -
28
27
Butterfly Valves
HS Series Valves, HVAC Service Butterfly Valves, 2-way and 3-way Assemblies
Features and Benefits

Belimo resilient seat HS Series butterfly valves are designed for use in ANSI Class 150 piping systems and are supplied in standard lug style body designs. Valve Design Features Unique seat and disc design ensures positive valve sealing while maintaining low seating torque Butterfly valve discs are precision machined to half ball profile, providing a precise disc-to-seat relationship Cartridge style seat incorporates an elastomer bonded to a phenolic stabilizing ring, eliminating elastomer movement and reducing seat tearing or fatiguing due to bunching Cartridge seat has a much smaller mass of elastomer than traditional boot seat designs, limiting seat swell and the accompanying variations in seating torque The four bushing design completely isolates the valve shaft from the body, resulting in increased control of the valve disc, lower valve seating torque, and longer valve life No mechanical shaft-to-disc connections protruding into flow stream (2-12) Cast Iron Full Lug Bodies EPDM liner Stainless Steel Disc Two Models to suit the application: HSU Series provides economical HVAC solutions up to 50 psi close-off with a 200 psi body rating HS Series provides full-rated close-off to 200 psi (2" - 12") or 150 psi (14" - 30") 2-way and 3-way applications
ISO5211 TOP WORKS CAST IRON BODY RPTFE TOP BUSHING EPDM O-RING RPTFE BUSHINGS ANSI BOLT PATTERN EPDM SEAT
ID TAG
304SS DISC 416SS SHAFT
DRIVE SPLINE
RPTFE LOWER BUSHING
www.prokontrol.com
BELIMO -
30
F20301 / 5 4 3 2 1 -04/03-10M-IG-Subject to change. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.
F6HSU Butterfly Valves 2 - 6 Cast Iron Lug Body

Resilient Seat, 304 Stainless Disc with AM, GM and AF Series Electronic Actuation 50 psi bubble tight shut-off Field replaceable lining Long stem design allows for 2 insulation Valve face-to-face dimensions comply with API 609 & MSS-SP-67 Completely assembled and tested, ready for installation Application These valves are designed to meet the stringent needs of HVAC and Commercial applications requiring positive shut-off for liquids.
Typical applications include chiller isolation, cooling tower isolation, change-over systems, large air handler coil control, bypass and process control applications. The large Cv values provide for an economical control valve solution for larger flow applications.
100 90
% OF MAXIMUM FLOW
80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
50 psi 2 - 6 10:1 (for 30 to 70 range) 12 FPS
% OF VALVE OPENING
Valve F650HSU F665HSU F680HSU F6100HSU F6125HSU F6150HSU 8
Size 2 2-1/2 3 4 5 6
Cv 115 196 302 600 1022 1579
Cv 10 .06 .10 .20 .30 .50 .80
Cv 20 3 6 9 17 29 45
Cv 30 7 12 18 36 61 95
Cv 40 15 25 39 78 133 205
Cv 50 27 45 70 139 237 366
Cv 60 44 75 116 230 392 605
Cv 70 70 119 183 364 620 958
Cv 80 105 178 275 546 930 1437
Cv 90 115 196 302 600 1022 1579
www.prokontrol.com
BELIMO -
33
Specifications Service Flow Characteristic Action Sizes Type of End Fitting Materials: Body Disc Seat Body Pressure Shaft O-ring Upper bushing Middle bushings Lower bushing Flange Media Temp. Range Maximum Differential Pressure Rangeability Maximum Velocity
chilled, hot water, glycol modified equal percentage 90 rotation 2 to 6 125/150 lb. flanged cast iron -200 psig Body 304 Stainless EPDM standard 200 psi at -30F to 275F 416 stainless steel EPDM RPTFE RPTFE RPTFE For use with ANSI125/150 Flanges -22F to +250F [-30C to +120C]
F7HSU Butterfly Valves, 2- 6 Cast Iron Lug Body

Resilient Seat, 304 Stainless Disc with AM, GM and AF Series Electronic Actuation 50 psi bubble tight shut-off Field replaceable lining Long stem design allows for 2 insulation Valve face-to-face dimensions comply with API 609 & MSS-SP-67 Completely assembled and tested, ready for installation Tees comply with ASA B16.1 Class 125 flanges Application These valves are designed to meet the stringent needs of HVAC and Commercial applications requiring positive shut-off for liquids.
Valve F750HSU F765HSU F780HSU F7100HSU F7125HSU F7150HSU 10
Size 2 2-1/2 3 4 5 6
Cv 115 196 302 600 1022 1579
Cv 10 .06 .10 .20 .30 .50 .80
Cv 20 3 6 9 17 29 45
Cv 30 7 12 18 36 61 95
Cv 4 0 15 25 39 78 133 205
Cv 50 27 45 70 139 237 366
Cv 60 44 75 116 230 392 605
Cv 70 70 119 183 364 620 958
Cv 80 105 178 275 546 930 1437
Cv 90 115 196 302 600 1022 1579
www.prokontrol.com
BELIMO -
34
chilled, hot water, glycol modified linear 90 rotation 2 to 6 125/150 lb. flanged cast iron -200 psig Body 304 Stainless EPDM standard 200 psi at -30F to 275F 416 stainless steel EPDM PTFE PTFE PTFE For use with ANSI125/150 Flanges -22F to +250F [-30C to +120C]
F6HSU Butterfly Valves 2- 12 Cast Iron Lug Body

Resilient Seat 304 Stainless Disc with SY Series Electric Actuation 50 psi bubble tight shut-off 2 - 12 Field replaceable lining Long stem design allows for 2 insulation Valve face-to-face dimensions comply with API 609 & MSS-SP-67 Completely assembled and tested, ready for installation Application These valves are designed to meet the stringent needs of HVAC and Commercial applications requiring positive shut-off for liquids.
cast iron -200 psig Body 304 Stainless EPDM standard 200 psi at -30F to 275F 416 stainless steel EPDM RPTFE RPTFE RPTFE For use with ANSI125/150 Flanges -22F to +250F [-30C to +120C] 50 psi 2 - 12 10:1 (for 30 to 70 range) 12 FPS
100 90
% OF MAXIMUM FLOW
80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
% OF VALVE OPENING
Valve F650HSU F665HSU F680HSU F6100HSU F6125HSU F6150HSU F6200HSU F6250HSU F6300HSU 12
Size 2 2-1/2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12
Cv 115 196 302 600 1022 1579 3136 5340 8250
Cv 10 .06 .10 .20 .30 .50 .80 2 3 4
Cv 20 3 6 9 17 29 45 89 151 234
Cv 30 7 12 18 36 61 95 188 320 495
Cv 40 15 25 39 78 133 205 408 694 1072
Cv 50 27 45 70 139 237 366 727 1237 1911
Cv 60 44 75 116 230 392 605 1202 2047 3062
Cv 70 70 119 183 364 620 958 1903 3240 5005
Cv 80 105 178 275 546 930 1437 2854 4859 7507
Cv 90 115 196 302 600 1022 1579 3136 5340 8250
www.prokontrol.com
BELIMO -
35
chilled, hot water, glycol modified equal percentage 90 rotation 2 to 12 125/150 lb. flanged
F7HSU Butterfly Valves 2- 12 Cast Iron Lug Body

Resilient Seat 304 Stainless Disc with SY Series Electric Actuation 50 psi bubble tight shut-off 2 - 12 Field replaceable lining Long stem design allows for 2 insulation Valve face-to-face dimensions comply with API 609 & MSS-SP-67 Completely assembled and tested, ready for installation Tees comply with ASA B16.1 Class 125 flanges Application These valves are designed to meet the stringent needs of HVAC and Commercial applications requiring positive shut-off for liquids.
Typical applications include chiller isolation, cooling tower isolation, change-over systems, large air handler coil control, bypass and process control applications. The large Cv values provide for an economical control valve solution for larger flow applications. Specifications Service Flow Characteristic Action Sizes Type of End Fitting Materials: Body Disc Seat Body Pressure Shaft O-ring Upper bushing Middle bushings Lower bushing Flange Media Temp. Range Maximum Differential Pressure Rangeability Maximum Velocity
chilled, hot water, glycol modified linear 90 rotation 2 to 12 125/150 lb. flanged cast iron -200 psig Body 304 Stainless EPDM standard 200 psi at -30F to 275F 416 stainless steel EPDM RPTFE RPTFE RPTFE For use with ANSI125/150 Flanges -22F to +250F [-30C to +120C] 50 psi 2 - 12 10:1 (for 30 to 70 range) 12 FPS
Valve F750HSU F765HSU F780HSU F7100HSU F7125HSU F7150HSU F7200HSU F7250HSU F7300HSU 14
Size 2 2-1/2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12
Cv 115 196 302 600 1022 1579 3136 5340 8250
Cv 10 .06 .10 .20 .30 .50 .80 2 3 4
Cv 20 3 6 9 17 29 45 89 151 234
Cv 30 7 12 18 36 61 95 188 320 495
Cv 40 15 25 39 78 133 205 408 694 1072
Cv 50 27 45 70 139 237 366 727 1237 1911
Cv 60 44 75 116 230 392 605 1202 2047 3062
Cv 70 70 119 183 364 620 958 1903 3240 5005
Cv 80 105 178 275 546 930 1437 2854 4859 7507
Cv 90 115 196 302 600 1022 1579 3136 5340 8250
www.prokontrol.com
BELIMO -
36
F6HS Butterfly Valves 2 - 4 Cast Iron Lug Body

Resilient Seat, 304 Stainless Disc with AM, GM and AF Series Electronic Actuation 200 psi bubble tight shut-off Field replaceable lining Long stem design allows for 2 insulation Valve face-to-face dimensions comply with API 609 & MSS-SP-67 Completely assembled and tested, ready for installation Application These valves are designed to meet the stringent needs of HVAC and Commercial applications requiring positive shut-off for liquids.
100 90
% OF MAXIMUM FLOW
80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
% OF VALVE OPENING
Valve F650HS F665HS F680HS F6100HS 16
Size 2 2-1/2 3 4
Cv 115 196 302 600
Cv 10 .06 .10 .20 .30
Cv 20 3 6 9 17
Cv 30 7 12 18 36
Cv 40 15 25 39 78
Cv 50 27 45 70 139
Cv 60 44 75 116 230
Cv 70 70 119 183 364
Cv 80 105 178 275 546
Cv 90 115 196 302 600
www.prokontrol.com
BELIMO -
37
chilled, hot water, glycol modified equal percentage 90 rotation 2 to 4 125/150 lb. flanged cast iron -200 psig Body 304 Stainless EPDM standard 200 psi at -30F to 275F 416 stainless steel EPDM RPTFE RPTFE RPTFE For use with ANSI125/150 Flanges -22F to +250F [-30C to +120C]
F6HS Butterfly Valves 2- 30 Cast Iron Lug Body

Full rated, Resilient Seat 304 Stainless Disc with Belimo SY Series Electric Actuation 200 psi bubble tight shut-off 2 - 12 150 psi bubble tight shut-off 14 - 30 Field replaceable lining Long stem design allows for 2 insulation Valve face-to-face dimensions comply with API 609 & MSS-SP-67 Completely assembled and tested, ready for installation Application These valves are designed to meet the stringent needs of HVAC and Commercial applications requiring positive shut-off for liquids. Specifications Service Flow Characteristic Action Sizes Type of End Fitting Materials: Body Disc Seat Body Pressure Shaft Taper pins O-ring Upper bushing Middle bushings Lower bushing Flange Media Temp. Range Maximum Differential Pressure Rangeability Maximum Velocity Valve F650HS F665HS F680HS F6100HS F6125HS F6150HS F6200HS F6250HS F6300HS F6350HS F6400HS F6450HS F6500HS F6600HS F6750HS 20 Size 2 2-1/2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30
chilled, hot water, glycol modified equal percentage 90 rotation 2 to 30 125/150 lb. flanged cast iron -200 psig Body 304 Stainless EPDM standard 200 psi at -30F to 275F 416 stainless steel stainless steel (14+ Only) EPDM RPTFE RPTFE RPTFE For use with ANSI125/150 Flanges -22F to +250F [-30C to +120C] 200 psi 2 - 12, 150 psi 14 to 30 10:1 (for 30 to 70 range) 12 FPS Cv 115 196 302 600 1022 1579 3136 5340 8250 11917 16388 21705 27908 43116 73426 Cv 10 .06 .10 .20 .30 .50 .80 2 3 4 6 8 11 14 22 37 Cv 20 3 6 9 17 29 45 89 151 234 338 464 615 791 1222 2081 Cv 30 7 12 18 36 61 95 188 320 495 715 983 1302 1674 2587 4405
100 90
% OF MAXIMUM FLOW
80 70 60
40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
% OF VALVE OPENING
Cv 40 15 25 39 78 133 205 408 694 1072 1549 2130 2822 3628 5605 9545
Cv 50 27 45 70 139 237 366 727 1237 1911 2761 3797 5028 6465 9989 17011
Cv 60 44 75 116 230 392 605 1202 2047 3062 4568 6282 8320 10698 16528 28146
Cv 70 70 119 183 364 620 958 1903 3240 5005 7230 9942 13168 16931 26157 44545
Cv 80 105 178 275 546 930 1437 2854 4859 7507 10844 14913 19752 25396 39236 66818
Cv 90 115 196 302 600 1022 1579 3136 5340 8250 11917 16388 21705 27908 43116 73426
www.prokontrol.com
BELIMO -
39
50
GAS DETECTION PRODUCTS

Airtest Vulcain QEL GAS DETECTION - 1 to 11 GAS DETECTION - 12 to 19 GAS DETECTION - 20 to 27
TR9290 No-Frills - Self Calibrating - CO2 Transmitter

Now LonMark Certified
Wall Mount TR9290
Wall Mount TR9294
In-Duct Mount TR9291
Splash Resistant Wall Mount TR9293
Aspiration Duct Probe TR9292
The No-Frills CO2 Transmitter

The TR9290 is a value-engineered CO2 transmitter targeted at applications where the only requirement is a dependable CO2 sensor that never needs calibration. Key features of the TR9290 include: Internal self-calibration method based on background measurement also eliminates need for outdoor CO2 sensor. Choice of outputs: 0-10V, 0-5V or 4-20mA and LonWorks. Built to ISO 9001 standards Mounting options include wall, duct and in-duct. Utilizes a proven infrared measurement technology with over 18 years of flawless operating history. Supported by a team of knowledgeable application specialists. We are just a phone call away if you have questions. LonMark Certified output option. AirTest also offers CO2 sensors that feature selfcalibrating dual beam technology, and that integrate CO2 temperature and humidity in one device. We also have a wide variety of other sensors to measure combustible and toxic gases, humidity, dew point and air velocity. Contact us for more information.
Length Does Matter

The AirTest CO2 transmitter has proven itself to be the most trouble free CO2 product available today. A big reason for this is the unique, patented, oval design of the sensor. All competitive sensors use a straight path of infrared energy shining through an air sample to measure CO2. The amount of gas that can be sampled, called the path length is limited by the size constraints of their wall-mounted and duct-mounted cases. The AirTest design, using a similar sized case, provides over double the path length of any other CO2 sensor (4.8) by bouncing the light around the small oval sensor element. Longer path length means that a larger sample of air is measured. In technical terms this results in an increased signal-to-noise ratio. This means that the AirTest sensor performs better at long-term sensor stability and accuracy than other devices. Greater dependability is the ultimate result.
AirTest Technologies Inc. #9-1520 Cliveden Ave, Delta BC Canada V3M 6J8 P: 604 517-3888 888 855-8880 F 604 517-3900 www.AirTestTechnologies.com
AirTest LonWorks Specifications

Description: Three versions of AirTest CO2 sensors are offered with LonWorks communication capability including: 1. Duct Aspiration Probe for in duct measurements. (LonMark Certified) 2. Splash resistant enclosure for dirty and wet areas. (LonMark Certification Pending) 3. Wall Mount for commercial, institutional and residential applications. (LonMark Certification Pending) These sensors are all self-calibrating and will not require any maintenance for the life for the sensor (typically 15 years). These sensors provide a CO2 ppm & % SNVT for 0-2000 ppm CO2. Note: other ranges up to 0-10,000 can be factory set. Product Models: Duct Aspiration Probe Splash Resistant Enclosure Wall Mount Wall Mount
TR9292-L-Lon
TR9292-Lon
TR9293-L-Lon TR9293-Lon
TR9294-L-Lon
TR9294-Lon
AirTest Models: Category: Measurement Range: Standard Program ID: LonMark Version: Manufacturer ID: Device Class: Usage: XIF/DRF Download: Transceiver: Model: XIF Available: DRF available: LonMark Objects: Clock Rate: Power Requirement: Object Details:
TR9294-L-Lon, TR9294-Lon Sensor 0-2000 ppm (factory adjustable to 10,000 ppm) 80:00:E5:05:46:06:04:01 3.4 229 CO2 Sensor (10.70) 06 Residential/Commercial www.airtest.ca/support/sw/AirTestLon.zip 04-TPFT-10 2 True True 0000 Node object (1), 1070 CO2 Sensor (1) 10 MHz 18-30VAC/VDC (1/2 wave rectified) < 1 W average See diagram
7/15/08
AirTest Technologies Inc. #9-1520 Cliveden Ave, Delta BC Canada V3M 6J8 P: 604 517-3888 888 855-8880 F 604 517-3900 www.AirTestTechnologies.com
CARBON MONOXIDE (CO)
TR2000 Electrochemical CO Transmitter
Low Cost Long Life Low Profile

The TR-2000 delivers all the advantages of electrochemical sensing in a durable, long life (5 year) package that is priced to compete against less accurate MOS/Solid State sensors. The loop powered sensor delivers a linear 4-20 ma output that is easily integrated into any building control, ventilation or alarm application. The low profile design can be attached to any single gang electrical box and features a low cost replaceable sensor element.
Why The TR-2000? Electrochemical performance at a MOS (solid state)

price. One-half to two-thirds the cost of comparable electrochemical sensors.
AirTest Electrochemical Vs MOS/Solid State Higher accuracy in the 0-50 ppm range means more
energy savings for ventilation control in vehicle operation and parking areas.
Two-wire, loop powered for easy integration with

EMS & DDC Systems.
No temperature or humidity interference eliminates

seasonal drift of sensors.
Five year life vs 18 months for most other

electrochemical sensors.
Much less sensitive to other gases and less likely to

be poisoned.
High accuracy sensor, +/- 5% of measurement.

Custom ranges available. mounted in any single gang J box.
Linear output over complete 0-200 ppm range. Significantly less long term drift means less
maintenance.
Low profile, attractive enclosure that can be Consistent linear output between sensors Low cost replacements sensor elements minimizes
long term operating costs.
means specialized operational curves and control points are not necessary.
1520 Cliveden Ave, Delta BC V3M 6J8 2815 Ben Lomond Drive, Santa Barbara, CA 93105 P: 604 517-3888 888 855-8880 F 604 517-3900 www.airtesttechnologies.com
Availalable with 1 to 11 sampling points
RM4000
Model pSENSE - RH
Portable Carbon Dioxide Instrument
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Model pSENSE is a very flexible and easy to use hand-held, instrument designed to measure the carbon dioxide concentration, temperature and humidity in surrounding air. The large illuminated display presents the 3 values simultaneously, as well optional Air/Wet and Bulb temp by selection. Built-in data output (RS232) makes it simple to log data for longer time. Audible alarm, Max/Min Average as well as TWA and STEL measurements are possible. The carbon dioxide sensor's gold-plated infra-red waveguide and diffusion membrane filter provides you great reliability, accuracy and longterm stability.
FEATURES
State-of-the-art non-dispersive infrared (NDIR) technology to measure carbon dioxide gas in parts-per-million (ppm) Data output RS232 Displays the current carbon dioxide temperature and RH% on a large LCD Displays TWA (8hours) STEL (15 minutes) Min, Max and average values Internal automatic self-diagnostic function Audible alarm Easy to calibrate
APPLICATIONS
With a battery capacity covering more than 24 hours, the instrument works perfectly for diagnosing ventilation using carbon dioxide as the surrogate ventilation index. The instrument works perfect for measuring the indoor air quality parameters CO2, Temp and RH%. Carbon dioxide has been acknowledged as a good indicator that adequate fresh outside air is being supplied to the occupants for acceptable indoor air quality. Adequate ventilation reduces temporary sickness, downtime and lost productivity. The pSENSE is also ideal for measuring carbon dioxide concentration in incubators, greenhouses, mushroom farms, etc., where correct levels are essential for the process outcome.
PM2500
Personal Laser Particulate Monitor

A Cost Breakthrough In Particle Detection Technology
The PM2500 represents a dramatic breakthrough in the cost of laser particle measurement technology. Now this important air quality parameter can be monitored easily, in the home, office or wherever it may be a concern.
Key Features of the PM2500

Designed for use in homes or offices. A Breakthrough in cost effective laser particle counting that makes this important measurements accessible to all. Professional laser particle counter performance in a personal monitor at less than 5% of the cost. The PM2500 counts particulates two critical size ranges: 1.0 to 5.0 micron range particles are small enough to stay airborne for extended periods of time and can go deeper into the respiratory system. 5 microns and greater particles are larger and tend to settle out in still air. Pollen, insect and dust mite related particles are often in this range. Display indicates 100s of particles per cubic foot, averaged over the past minute. Calculates and displays measurement history by minute, hour and day. Monitor mode that takes a sample every hour, for long term monitoring.
Particulate Facts...
Many allergic reactions and health effects can be related to particulate exposure. The two particle sizes measured by the PM2500 (1.0 and 5.0 micron), represent particle sizes often of concern for healthy indoor air. Sources of particulates can be outdoor air and/or indoor materials and activities. Particulate levels may also be seasonal in some cases. The PM2500 can help provide an understanding of the things that affect particulates in your space. Generally, lower particulate levels will result in a healthier environment. The PM2500 is the first affordable laser particulate monitor designed for every day use.
100s of particles/cubic ft
Horizontal bar graph indicates detection activity. 604 517-3888
AirTest Technologies Inc.
www.AirTestTechnologies.com
PM2200 Personal AirTest Monitor
Know Your Indoor Environmental Quality

The Personal AirTest Monitor (PM2200) is an affordable, air quality indicator that provides the functionality of a desktop clock and calendar with a continuous indication of three of the most important indicators of indoor environmental quality: carbon dioxide, humidity and temperature. If desired, the monitor can provide an audible alert if concentrations are beyond acceptable limits. The large LCD display will also interpret the indoor carbon dioxide readings and indicate if ventilation rates are good, normal or poor. The Personal AirTest Monitor requires no maintenance or calibration and uses advanced sensor technology previously only available in professional air quality diagnostic equipment.
Carbon Dioxide
Carbon dioxide (CO2) levels can indicate the amount of fresh air ventilation being provided to a space. Higher levels mean less fresh air and greater chance of pollutant buildup. What is it? People breath in oxygen and breath out CO2. Most combustion devices also produce large amounts of CO2. The lowest levels of CO2 is found in fresh outside air at 400 to 500 ppm (parts-per-million). What does it means? In indoor spaces, if CO2 levels build up it is usually due to lack of ventilation. Since ventilation is the primary method of controlling pollutants indoors, increased concentrations of CO 2 are an indicator that other gases and contaminants my also be building up. New Green and Smart buildings now use CO2 sensors to measure and control ventilation. Most existing buildings do not yet measure or use CO2 for control. AirTest Technologies Inc.
Humidity
The relative humidity of air indicates the amount of moisture in the air. Moisture levels that are too high or too low can create conditions for mold and bacteria to thrive. What is it? Relative humidity is the amount of moisture that air can hold at a given temperature. As levels approach 100% RH, moisture will condense out of air. What does it means? Extended period of humidity over 60% RH indoors can create conditions favorable to mold and mildew growth that can affect allergies and general health. Very high levels of humidity can lead to condensation on cold surfaces that can cause staining, potential structural damage and accelerated mold growth. Ideally levels in indoor environments should be between 40%RH and 60% RH.
Temperature
The temperature of air can be an important indicator of comfort. Humidity levels and the potential for mold growth also significantly affected by temperature. What is it? The Personal AirTest monitor can display temperatures in F or C. Check your space to ensure it is at the temperature you like. Check how your space temperature compare to the setting on the thermostat. What does it mean? We all know the temperature affects comfort. It also affects humidity. For every 1F decrease in temperature there is approximately a 2% increase in humidity. If a space or surfaces in a space get too cool it can lead to conditions that encourage the growth of certain molds and bacteria.
604 517-3888
Key Features Of The PM2200

The AirTest Personal Monitor provides an instant and ongoing indication of the most commonly used indoor environmental quality parameters. Key features include: Displays year and date with clock function and alarm Displays carbon dioxide concentrations (CO2) in parts per million (ppm) with Good, Normal and Poor indicator. High level alarm at 5,000 ppm. Self calibrating CO2 sensor will never need maintenance. Displays percentage relative humidity (%RH), droplet image indicates levels over 60% RH, Low indication under 30% RH. Displays temperature in C or F.
One year warranty covers defects in parts and workmanship
Understanding CO2
People breath in oxygen and breath out CO2. Combustion devices also produce large amounts of CO2. Outside CO2 levels are very low in the range of 400-500 ppm. Concentrations in this range in indoor air, generally indicate the presence of large amounts of fresh air. Indoor CO2 concentrations are a dynamic indication of the number of people in the space (producing CO2) and the amount of low concentration CO2 being introduced for ventilation. As a result, peak CO2 concentrations can be used to determine the outdoor ventilation rate in terms of the cubic feet-per-minute (cfm) of outside air per person. Most buildings and codes target 15 cfm per person as a level that will minimize complaints. This is equal to about 1,100 ppm CO2. Elevated levels of CO2 generally indicate a lack of ventilation, that can also allow various other indoor pollutants to build up. Symptoms often attributed to CO2 of headaches, drowsiness or lethargy, are not due to CO2 but are a result of exposure to other irritants and pollutants that build up with the CO2 when ventilation rates are low. Carbon dioxide should not be confused with carbon monoxide (CO) a deadly gas given off by combustion appliances. Carbon dioxide is also given off by combustion devices but is much less harmful. If CO2 levels exceed 5,000 ppm and keep rising in an indoor space it can indicate the unusual presence of combustion fumes that may contain CO and other harmful gases. Ventilate the space and have a professional investigate immediately.
Understanding Humidity
Humidity is a major comfort parameter, that indicates the amount of moisture that air can hold at a particular temperature. At 100% RH the air contains so much moisture that it will turn from a liquid to vapor and form condensation. This condensation can stain building components and potentially be a source of nourishment for the growth of mold. As shown on the graph on the right, adverse health effects, and organisms that may threaten health tend to thrive in conditions of low and high humidity. For the chart on the left, the thicker the triangle shaped bar the greater the effect. Ideally conditions should be maintained in the ideal range shown on the chart. Humidity is directly affected by temperature. As air cools it can hold less moisture. As a result, what may appear to be acceptable humidity at one temperature may be much higher at a lower temperature. This is one reason basements often feel damp. Watch out for cold surfaces in a building that may cool air to the point where water condenses out of the air.
Health & Humidity Chart
PM2200 Specifications:
CO2 Sensor
Type: NDIR w/ self calibration Sample Method: Diffusion Range: 0-10,000 ppm Accuracy: 50 ppm + 5% of measured value
Humidity Sensor
Type: Resistive Sample Method: Diffusion Range: 0-100% RH Accuracy: 3% RH
Temperature Sensor
Type: Thermistor Range: 4 to 120F (-20 to 50C) Accuracy: 0.9F (0.5C)
General
Power: 110V Plug-in adaptor Input To Monitor: 5VDC, 1A Warranty: 1 year, for defects in parts of workmanship
AirTest Technologies Inc. specializes in the application of cost effective, state-of-the-art air monitoring technology to ensure the comfort, security, health and energy efficiency of buildings.
604 517-3888
EE80 Series
HVAC Room Transmitter and Switches for CO2, Relative Humidity and Temperature
EE80 series set new standards in CO2 measurements for HVAC. The transmitters resp. switches combine CO2, relative humidity (RH) and temperature (T) measurement in one modern and userfriendly housing. The basic EE80 version for CO2 and T can be easily extended with a RH plug-in module. The CO2 measerument is based on the infrared principle. A patented auto-calibration procedure compensates for the aging of the infrared source and ensures outstanding long term stability. EE80 provides analogue outputs (in V or mA). The optional display indicates sequentially the actual measuring data. As one more option a switching output with adjustable switching point and hysteresis is available. A wide variety of models ensures an optimal adjustment for customised requirements.
EE80
T ypical A pplica tions

building management for residential and office areas ventilation control
Fea tur es
CO2 / RH / T measurement in one device RH output with plug-in module analogue or switching output modern design optional display easiest installation long term stability
Tec hnical Da ta
Measuring values
CO2
Measurement principle Sensor Working range Accuracy at 20C (68F) and 1013mbar Response time t63 Temperature dependence Long term stability Sample rate
Non-Dispersive Infrared Technology (NDIR) E+E Dual Source Infrared System 0...2000ppm 0...5000ppm 0...2000ppm: < (50ppm +2% of measuring value) 0...5000ppm: < (50ppm +3% of measuring value) < 90 sec typ. 2ppm CO2/C typ. 20ppm / year ca. 0.5 min capacitive HC103 10...90% RH 3% RH (30...70% RH) 0.3C
(0.54F)
Relative Humidity
Measurement principle Sensor element Working range1) Accuracy at 20C (68F)
5% (10...90% RH) version with current output 4 - 20mA: 0.7C

(1.26F)
Temperature
Accuracy at 20C
(68F)
Outputs
Analogue Output
0...2000/5000 ppm / 0...100% RH / 0...50C (32...122F) 0 - 5V 0 - 10V 4 - 20mA 50V AC / 60V DC 1A at 50V AC 1mA at 5V DC Ag+Au clad 24V AC 20% <3W < 5 min -1mA < IL < 1mA -1mA < IL < 1mA RL < 500 Ohm 1A at 30V DC
Switching Output
Max. switching voltage Max. switching load Min. switching load Contact material
General
Supply voltage SELV Power requirement Warm up time 2) 15 - 35V DC
SELV = Safety Extra Low Voltage
EE80
96
v1.7
EE85 Series
CO2 Transmitter and Switches for Duct Mounting
Duct mounted CO2 transmitters and switches of the EE85 series are designed for HVAC applications. The CO2 sensing element uses the Non-Dispersive Infrared Technology (NDIR). A patented auto-calibration procedure compensates for drift caused by the aging of the sensing element and guarantees outstanding long term stability. Installed into a duct a small flow of air will be established by convection through the probe into the transmitter housing and back into the duct. Inside the transmitter housing the air will diffuse through a membrane into the CO2 sensing element. The operation in closed loop air stream avoids pollution of the EE85 CO2 sensor. Measuring ranges of 0...2000ppm and 0...5000ppm correspond to an analogue interface of 0 - 5/10V or 4 - 20mA. Selectively a switching output with adjustable switching point and hysteresis is available. The instruments can be easily positioned in the duct with the standard mounting flange.
T ypical A pplica tions

building management for residental and office areas ventilation control
Fea tur es
very simple installation compact housing auto-calibration traceable calibration measuring ranges: 0...2000ppm or 0...5000ppm analogue or switching output
Tec hnical Da ta
Measuring Values
CO2
Measurement principle Sensing element Measuring range Accuracy at 20C (68F) and 1013mbar Response time 63 1) Temperature dependence Long term stability Sample rate
0...2000ppm: 0...5000ppm:
Non-Dispersive Infrared Technology (NDIR) E+E Dual Source Infrared System 0...2000ppm / 0...5000ppm < (50ppm +2% of measuring value) < (50ppm +3% of measuring value) Traceable to international standards, administrated by NIST, PTB, BEV... < 120s typ. 2ppm CO2/C typ. 20ppm / year ca. 30s
Outputs
Analogue Outputs
0...2000ppm / 0...5000ppm 0 - 5V 0 - 10V 4 - 20mA 50V AC / 60V DC 1A at 50V AC 1mA at 5V DC Ag+Au clad -1mA < IL < 1mA -1mA < IL < 1mA RL < 500 Ohm 1A at 24V DC
Switching Output
Max. switching voltage Max. switching load Min. switching load Contact material
General
Supply voltage SELV Power requirement Warm up time 2) Housing / protection class Cable gland Electrical connection Electromagnetic compatibility Working temperature and conditions Storage temperature and conditions 24V AC 20% 15 - 35V DC SELV = Safety Extra Low Voltage < 3W < 5 min PC / housing: IP65, probe: IP20 M16 x 1.5 cable 4.5 - 10 mm (0.18 - 0.39) screw terminals max. 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16) EN 61000-6-3 VE EN61326-1+A1+A2:05.2002 EN 61000-6-1 FCC Part 15 ICES-003 ClassB -5...55C (23...131F) 0...95% RH (not condensating) -20...60C (-4...140F) 0...95% RH (not condensating)
1) minimum flow speed 1m/s (200ft/min) 2) warm up time for performance according to specification
EE85
102
v1.3
AirTest CN7216-VFD Parking Garage Ventilation Controller CN7216 Major Components
Display & Keypad Menu driven display allows check of system status and adjustment of A variety of operating parameters.
CN7216 Product Overview

The CN7216 Controller is a pre programmed controller specifically designed to measure gas concentrations in an enclosed parking garage, and to modulate the operation of one or more Variable Speed Drives based on the highest concentration measured in a ventilation zone of a parking garage. Versions that turn fans on/off are also available. The controller can take up to 16 gas sensor inputs with each sensor covering 5,000 to 7,000 square feet (total of 112,000 square feet). The controller features a 128 X 164 Display that allows viewing of the controller operating parameters. It also has a number of user adjustable settings to allow customization for a particular application. User adjustment include: Time And Date Daily Occupancy/Operation Periods High Level Alarm Levels Horn And Strobe Silence Base Ventilation Rate Ventilation Rate Of Increase Based On Gas Concentrations VFD Hold Timer To Reduce Demand Charges Options High Level Horn Indicator (110V) Strobe To Indicate System Fault (110V) Phone Dialer For High Level or Fault Alarm Multiple gas configuration (e.g. CO for gasoline vehicles and NO2 for diesel)
110 V Input
High Alarm Relay 110 V If levels exceed an elevated level over a user adjustable time period a Horn is activated (Default is 100 ppm for 15 min). Fault Relay 110V If a sensor or relay experiences a fault this relay trips to activate a flashing strobe. Phone Dialer Alarm & Fault Relays Low voltage relays will activate under the following conditions: #1 Relay: Activated if levels exceed high CO alarm. #2 Relay: Activated if system or sensor detects fault. Fails safe.
VFD Output 4-20 or 0-5 V output to control VFDs Sensor Inputs Designed for AirTest looppowered gas sensors (CO, NO2, Combustibles). Two wires home run per sensor. Up to 16 possible. Phone Dialer (Optional) To notify of Fault or High Alarm. User must record message for alarm and fault conditions and program in numbers. PLC Controller Holds and operates programming for the CN7216
www/AirTestTechnologies.com
604 517-3888
Smartcool
TM
Reduced Cooling And Refrigeration Costs By Adding Compressor Intelligence

SmartcoolTM adds smart adaptive intelligent control to any compressor to allow it to maximize energy performance, while always maintaining target cooling conditions. Total cooling costs can be reduced by 10% to 20%. Its easy to install and simple to verify energy performance. Display verifies ongoing energy savings.
Ideal Applications
Single Or Two Stage Unitary Rooftop Air Conditioning Heat Pumps Single Stage Refrigeration
How It Works
The SmartcoolTM intelligent compressor control module uses a three step process to optimize compressor operation:
1. The module tracks the absolute switching

values within the existing control band for a cooling or refrigeration system. compressor duty cycle and;
Key Features
Built in Performance Verification: Display indicates cumulative hours of 1) call for cooling, 2) compressor run time saved 3) programmed bypass mode 4) manual override. Energy savings can directly be calculated from these variables. Continuously monitors system performance to intelligently identify and implement opportunities to optimize compressor performance. Does not compromise target cooling conditions like many simple, timer based, add-on controls. Based on proven optimization control algorithms that have been applied in refrigeration and cooling systems for over 20 years. Versions available for single stage and dual stage compressors. Fully compatible with existing equipment and controls. Will not affect existing warranties. Easily and quickly added to existing rooftop units. Can be mounted inside or outside equipment.
2. Demand is monitored by tracking the 3. The rate of change that occurs between the
on and off points is calculated operation. during
SmartcoolTM then computes a reference heat load to match the current cooling capacity requirements and calculates the appropriate variable operating parameters for the compressor that will satisfy cooling requirements but save energy. These parameters utilize the natural physical properties found in the compression cycle to take advantage of more efficient heat removal opportunities. This is done with no appreciable change to the temperature of the space being controlled. If high demand conditions occur, the logic module will not activate in order to preserve target temperature conditions. A display on the unit tracks hours of compressor demand and compressor hours saved by SmartcoolTM thus providing clear verification of energy savings.
604 517-3888
www,AirTestTechnologies.com
Six Green Building Retrofit Options From AirTest

Building owners are increasingly looking to do the right thing to save energy, reduce operating costs, lessen environmental impact and make tenants more comfortable and productive. Highlighted below are six innovative technologies available from AirTest that can be applied to existing buildings to meet these goals. Contact AirTest or one of our distributors to find out more about including these strategies in your green retrofit plans. We can also assist if you goal is also increasing your building score for Green Building LEED Certification.
1. CO2 Ventilation Control
2. Dew Point Economizer
3. SmartCool Compressor Management
Issue: Buildings are ventilated with outside air based on maximum occupancy. Many buildings are over ventilated because of poor control. AirTest Solution: A self calibrating CO2 sensor that automatically modulates fresh air ventilation based on actual occupancy. Results: Heating and cooling savings, good air quality, more comfortable and productive environment. Payback is 1 to 3 yrs. Application: One sensor in each major occupied zone. Control is based on highest level measured in a room or on a floor.
Issue: Typical approaches of temp and enthalpy economizer control have all kinds of problems. Projected savings never realized. AirTest Solution: Based on ASHRAE recommendations, economizer for all equipment is controlled based on a central, weather station quality dew point and temperature sensor on the rooftop. Results: Energy savings are realized, zero maintenance for 10-15 years, moisture loading from outside is minimized. Payback 0.5 to 2 yrs. Application: One sensor in each major occupied zone. Control is based on highest level measured in a room or on a floor.
Issue: Rooftop AC compressors are dumb, and often over sized. Energy savings can result from more intelligent control. AirTest Solution: The Smartcool compressor management module is easily added to better manage compressor under part load conditions. Actual savings are tracked by the unit. Results: Reduced unit energy savings of 10-15%, 10% demand reduction. Payback 1 to 4 yrs. Control temperatures are maintained. Application: Unit is installed between thermostat and compressor. Designed to fail safe. Operation status and savings tracked in real time on display.
4. Low-Leak Refrigerant Detection
5. Parking Garage Ventilation Control
6. Indoor Dew Point Control
Issue: Most refrigerant monitors focus on identifying high levels to ensure safety. Low level leaks can hurt the environment and can be very costly. False alarms and maintenance also a problem. AirTest Solution: The RM4000 monitors multiple spaces for unusual trace amounts of specific refrigerants, identifying small leaks before they become costly. Self calibrating. Results: Low level detection saves on refrigerant cost and impact on the environment. Central monitor results in low maintenance. Application: Units can sample draw from up to 11 zones. Can be used as sniffer to track down leaks. Easily configured to other refrigerants. AirTest Technologies Inc.
Issue: Garage ventilation is designed for maximum auto activity. Sensors can control on actual activity & reduce fan energy. VFD control can also reduce energy demand by 50 to 80% AirTest Solution: . AirTest offers a system of sensors, controls, VFDs and design services to dramatically reduce operating and peak energy demand. Easy and low cost to configure and operate. Results: Reduction of 80 to 90% energy use, 50 to 80% peak reduction in fan operation. Better garage air quality. Payback of 0.5 to 3 years. Application: Can be applied to garages with and without existing sensors system. Significant rebates available in most areas. www.AirTestTechnologies.com
Issue: Moisture control is a problem in many, buildings because it is not properly measured or controlled. Chilled surface cooling is also very vunerable. Condensation and mold can occur. AirTest Solution: . The AirTest wall mount dew point sensor provides a stable indoor control parameter for dehumidification control. Moisture control can be decoupled from temp control. Results: Cost effectively operate cooling and dehumidification equipment to maintain safe levels of moisture for the space to avoid condensation, staining and mold problems. Application: One unit in each major space can provide important information to allow cooling systems to better control moisture. 604 517-3888
TR9294-LON
(Preliminary)
Specifications
General
CO2 Detection Method: Gold Plated NonDispersive Infrared Optical Sensor with Automatic Baseline Correction for Self-Calibration, 4.8 optical path length, diffusion sampling. Certification: CE, EMC89/336/EEC, CA Energy Commission, NYSERDA, ISO 9001 Manufactured for Quality & Consistency. LonMark Pending. Transmitter Rated Life: 15 years Operating Conditions: 32 to 122 F (0 to 50C), 0 to 95% RH Storage Conditions: -40 to 158 F (-40 to 70 C)
Performance
CO2 Measurement Range: 0-2000 ppm (factory adjustable to 10,000 ppm upon request), CO2 Accuracy: +/- 1% of measurement range + 5% of measured value. Calibration: Self Calibrating, Calibration Not Required Response Time: T90 = <2 minutes (diffusion), < 15 seconds for flow through.
Power
Input: 18-30 VAC, 50-60 hz (half-wave rectified) Average Power Consumption: 160 mA average Ground: Must share common ground with control system Outputs LonWorks Wiring Access: Backplate and wiring harness mounts to wall and front cover with sensor and electronics hinges from the top to lock into
CO2 BASED OUTSIDE AIR VENTILATION SYSTEMS
Match Outside Air Ventilation to Actual Occupancy to Cut HVAC Cost to 20%
Buildings generally set a fixed level of outside air ventilation based on maximum design occupancy. Because actual ventilation levels are generally in excess of the maximum occupancy design and buildings are not usually occupied at maximum design level, this results in over-ventilation. A CO2 (carbon dioxide) sensing system uses real time CO2 measurements, and adjusts air delivery to ensure ventilation meets actual occupancy needs of the space to reduce over-ventilation. HVAC savings from 5% and up to 20% are being realized. Cost is generally recovered in 18 to 36 months.
Benefits of Real-Time Ventilation
How the System Operates
CO2 based ventilation control eliminates the over- CO2 sensors are installed in major occupied spaces
ventilation condition found in most buildings. to provide the real-time information needed to deliver outside air, based on people in the space.
As occupancy levels vary during the day, air

delivery is adjusted to provide only for the real-time occupancy needs, further reducing over-ventilation.
If one fresh air supply feeds many zones, control is

based on the highest level measured in all zones.
Excess pre-conditioned air in low occupancy areas A base ventilation level controls contaminants from
is transferred to further reduce outside air needs. building components when occupancy is low.
Ventilation control system and humidity sensing can This approach can be easily integrated with existing
integrate with economizers for maximum savings. pneumatic or digital building control systems.
AirTest Technologies Inc. 1520 Cliveden Ave., Delta BC V3M 6J8 TF: 888 855-8880 P: 604 517-3888 F: 604 517-3900 www.AirTestTechnologies.com
www.prokontrol.com
AIRTEST -
The SenseAire (PT-9250) Measure CO2, Ventilation Rate & Temperature With Built-In Data Logging
The Complete Package For CO2 & Ventilation Measurement Measures and displays CO2 and temperature. Calculates and displays cfm/person ventilation
rate based on inside/outside CO2 differential.
Now You Can Measure And Trend Log Fresh Air Ventilation In Every Zone
The SenseAire can help you better understand ventilation in a building and easily identify and solve problems related to fresh air ventilation. Measure zone level fresh air ventilation rates to determine if spaces are over or under ventilated. Quantify opportunities for energy savings with CO2 ventilation control. Quickly investigate air quality problems to determine if lack of ventilation is an issue. Quickly check to ensure a ventilation/ mechanical system is working properly, Trend log CO2 and temperature concentrations over time to determine if occupancy profiles correspond to system operation time sequences. Use as a verification tool to verify that new / retrofit equipment installations or air balance are providing optimum ventilation to each occupied zone. Discover areas affected by combustion exhaust (CO2 is a major byproduct of combustion).
Built in data logging (2000 points). Provided

with PC based graphing software. Data also easily exported to other PC programs.
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery provides 12+

hours of operation.
Includes, plug in 120V charger, 12 Volt car

adaptor, sensor case with snap-on belt clip and PC interface cable with software.
Color LEDs can be programmed to provide

quick indication of CO2 concentration range.
Overnite self-calibration feature will calibrate

sensor to background CO2 concentrations.
Gold plated optical sensor ensures long-term

durability and stability.
Purposefully built for quality - designed and

built using Internationally Certified ISO 9001 processes.
1520 Cliveden Ave, Delta BC V3M 6J8 2815 Ben Lomond Drive, Santa Barbara, CA 93105 P: 604 517-3888 888 855-8880 F 604 517-3900 www.airtesttechnologies.com
www.prokontrol.com
AIRTEST -
Now With Thermistor/RTD Temperature Measurement Option
ISO 9001 Manufactured For Quality
TR9290 No-Frills - Self Calibrating - CO2 Transmitter
Wall Mount TR9290-L
Wall Mount TR9290
In-Duct Mount TR9291
Aspiration Duct Probe TR9292-L
The No-Frills CO2 Transmitter

Now With Temperature Option! The TR9290 is a valued engineered CO2 transmitter targeted at applications where all that is needed is a dependable CO2 sensor with a 0-10 volt output. A temperature thermistor options is also available. This sensor utilizes the identical and proven infrared CO2 sensor technology used in AirTests popular TR-9220 CO2 transmitter.
Why Active Ventilation Control With CO2?

Ventilation control with CO2 is a viable and energy efficient way of controlling ventilation to target cfm/person levels based on actual occupancy. This approach offers many advantages over the traditional approach of providing fixed ventilation based on maximum occupancy. Reduce ventilation and energy costs in applications with variable occupancy. In static occupancy applications, owner can continuously control ventilation rates to reflect current occupancy conditions. Actively control ventilation to eliminate unintended over and under ventilation conditions resulting from post commissioning adjustment of outside air quantities. Monitor and control zone ventilation efficiency and take advantage of using preconditioned transfer air from under occupied spaces for ventilation. Documented CO2 levels can provide ongoing verification that code-required ventilation rates are being maintained.
Self-calibrating sensor eliminates calibration &

maintenance requirements. No calibration required for life of the sensor (rated at 15 years).
Attractive wall mount display with locking,

snap-on cover.
Inexpensive duct mount enclosure designed to

mount directly in the duct. No tubes to clog, no filters to clean. In-duct mounting also means fast response. Aspiration probe also available.
Gold plated optical sensor ensures long-term

durability and stability.
Purposefully built for quality one of the few

CO2 sensors designed and built using Internationally Certified ISO 9001 processes to ensure consistent quality.
AirTest Technologies Inc. 1520 Cliveden Ave, Delta BC V3M 6J8 P: 604 517-3888 888 855-8880 F 604 517-3900 www.AirTestTechnologies.com
www.prokontrol.com
AIRTEST -
10
Gas Detection Controller

Division of BW Technologies
ToxyPoint VA201C
Vulcain Inc., a company that prides itself on innovation and product excellence, is pleased to offer a gas detection system of exceptional quality. The product of many years of extensive research, makes the VA201 Detection System extremely flexible compared to its competitors. The VA201C controller can manage 32 gas transmitters and 32 relay modules, through two RS-485 channels, up to 2000 feet of distance from the controller. Visual indicators and audible alarm 2 or 3 alarm levels Programmable time delays Failure indicator Optional LCD display and keypad Up to 32 transmitters and relay modules Up to 4 actions per alarm level per transmitter No moving parts Trouble-free operation Quick self-test and warm-up RS-232C transmission port
VA201C Options: AC 3L RS-232 4XC C/Guard LCD display and keypad 3 Alarm Levels RS-232 output Nema 4X enclosure Metal guard Controller
www.prokontrol.com
Protecting your health and your environment.

AIRTEST - 12
Stand-Alone Gas Monitor

VA201M ToxyPoint Series

The product of years of research and innovative technological development, Vulcains VA201M series is an advanced microprocessor-based system featuring a high quality stand-alone controller, a unique high-tech enclosure, and all the necessary characteristics to provide continuous, effective and fully integrated monitoring of toxic and combustible gases. Two alarm levels 10-step LED display 2 high/low DPDT alarm relays Audible/visual alarms Programmable time delays Quick self-test and warm-up Calibration status warning Innovative and attractive case design Simple installation and operation Easy field verification Remote sensor configuration available Cost-effective
VA201MQ1-xxx* VA201MQ2-xxx*
*gas to be detected
Complete gas monitor with Q1-type sensor Complete gas monitor with Q2-type sensor
Package: D Options: RS DT 4X ECLAB TM/Guard LTAM
Display
Remote sensor Duct type (N/A for Q2) Nema 4 (N/A for Q2 and CL2) Splash guard (N/A for CL2) Metal guard Low temperature assembly
www.prokontrol.com

AIRTEST - 14
Infrared CO2 Gas Monitor

90DM A 90DM A ToxyPoint 3 3

With an unparalleled reputation for product innovation, reliability and excellence, Vulcain Inc. is once again setting industry standards with the latest generation Infrared CO2 Gas Monitor - the 90DM3A. The product of the most rigorous research and industrial design, the 90DM3A, incorporates Vulcains unique infrared sensing technology and state of the art microprocessor controlled digital transmission into a CO2 gas monitor, offering a level of precision and efficiency second to none. Proven infrared technology Specific CO2 monitoring Built-in microprocessor Optional relay contact closure (fail safe) 4-20mA or 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC output Temperature compensation Trouble-free operation No moving parts Menu driven easy calibration Optional 0-2% or 0-5% detection range
90DM3ASM-1 90DM3ASM-2 90DM3ADT-1 90DM3ADT-2 90DM3ASMR-1* 90DM3ASMR-2* 90DM3ADTR-1* 90DM3ADTR-2* 90DM3ASMO3-1 90DM3ASMO3-2 90DM3ADTO3-1 90DM3ADTO3-2 90DM3A Wall Mount Enclosure, 0-2000 ppm 90DM3A Wall Mount Enclosure, 0-50000 ppm 90DM3A Duct Type Enclosure, 0-2000 ppm 90DM3A Duct Type Enclosure, 0-50000 ppm 90DM3A Network, Wall Mount Enclosure, 0-2000 ppm 90DM3A Network, Wall Mount Enclosure, 0-50000 ppm 90DM3A Network, Duct Type Enclosure, 0-2000 ppm 90DM3A Network, Duct Type Enclosure, 0-50000 ppm 90DM3A Wall Mount Enclosure, Relay, 0-2000 ppm 90DM3A Wall Mount Enclosure, Relay, 0-50000 ppm 90DM3A Duct Type Enclosure, Relay, 0-2000 ppm 90DM3A Duct Type Enclosure, Relay, 0-50000 ppm
*Only Network output comes with these models.
Package: D3
Display Option for 90DM3A
www.prokontrol.com

AIRTEST - 16
Infrared Refrigerant Gas Transmitter

VA301IRF ToxyPoint
The VA301IRF Vulcains award-winning, electronic selfcalibrating IR sensing technology provides stable and accurate monitoring of refrigerant leaks far exceeding ASHRAE 15 and International Mechanical Code requirements. The VA301IRF modular design permits for real time remote sensing at distances of up to 100 feet without the need for service prone pumps and other mechanical moving parts. The sensing module functions on a diffusion basis and communicates concentration rates back to the transmitter on a RS-485 communication bus, eliminating issues related to sample draw systems such as dwell time. The VA301IRFs transmitter module provides remote annunciation at a glance through its backlit LCD and LED alarm status display. This highly customizable product allows the tailoring of the units features to specific projects. The units options include: analog outputs, modbus, three relays, strobe light and horn. The unit is also fully compatible with the VA201C Controller. Vulcains award-winning technology Stand-alone or Network operation Up to three levels of alarm Fail-safe relays Visual indicators Easy calibration Backlit LCD display and keypad Remote sensor up to 100 feet from transmitter Optional 4-20mA output Three alarm relays Modbus communication Audible alarm Vulbus communication
VA301IRF-xxx*
*gas to be detected
Refrigerant gas transmitter

Options: REF/Guard RFS Metal Guard Built-in Strobe Light (Red)
Packages: RFNET RFNETC RFNETCAO RFNETCAF RFC RFCAO RFCAF RFO RFF
c/w Network configuration c/w Network, 4-20mA c/w Network, 4-20mA, Audible, Air Relay c/w Network, 4-20mA, Audible, Air + F Relay c/w 4-20mA output c/w 4-20mA, Audible, Air Relay c/w 4-20mA, Audible, Air + F Relay c/w Air Relay c/w Air + F Relay
www.prokontrol.com

AIRTEST - 18
CTS - M18 SERIES CARBON MONOXIDE TRANSMITTER/SENSOR

The CTS-M18 Series is a microprocessor based transmitter. It uses a gas specific solid state semiconductor sensor for the detection of Carbon Monoxide. Typical application is enclosed parking facilities. QEL Engineers, through extensive research and development, have designed the M18 to be an industry leader in performance and application. The M18 offers good value. Standard features within the M18 can only be found as expensive options in other manufacturers product. Temperature compensation is standard to maintain accuracy. A digital display (LCD), push-button programming and onboard meter jacks are all standard. The transmitter provides an analog output of 4-20 mA DC or 2-10 VDC, linear to the measured gas range, for transmission to the Building Automation System (BAS) or controller supplied by QEL or others. The signal is fully user assignable over the gas range and can be configured for rising or falling gas concentration. In addition, RS-485 communication is built in. Input voltages of 24 VDC or 24 VAC with wide tolerances are acceptable. Relay set points may be set as increasing or decreasing actuation simply by adjusting the deadband relationship. Set the deactuation point above the actuation setpoint and the M18 will automatically alarm on decreasing concentrations. Relay setpoints are always present even though relays themselves are an option. Calibration is very easy - simply apply the cal gas and the microprocessor handles all calculations and adjustments, allowing hands-free and attention-free calibration. The standard enclosure is a fire retardant Polycarbonate / ABS blend.
MODEL NUMBER ORDERING CODE

C T S
M 1 8 1 6 X
Q 0
0 0 0
Revision (Factory Provided) Enclosure - Wall Mount
X Q
Options (Enter 0 for No Selection) Relays (2) Conformal Coating

R W
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The solid state sensor utilizes a sintered tin dioxide element. When the sensor is heated to a high temperature, free electrons flow easily when no oxygen is present. In clean air (20.9% oxygen) the oxygen is absorbed onto the element surface causing a restriction to the electron flow thus increasing the electrical resistance of the element. As the sensor is exposed to the target gas, the tin dioxide element adsorbs molecules of the target gas and displaces oxygen molecules in a process known as oxidation. In the presence of CO, the sensors conductivity increases depending on the gas concentration in the air. The microprocessor based electronics measures this change in conductivity and converts it to a 4-20 mA DC or 2-10 VDC output. The microprocessor performs an algorithm to linearize the final signal.
www.prokontrol.com
AIRTEST -
20
CTS - M20 SERIES CARBON DIOXIDE TRANSMITTER/SENSOR

The CTS-M20 transmitter/sensor is an industry leader providing a Carbon Dioxide concentration measurement for Indoor Air Quality and ventilation control in commercial office buildings, arenas, gymnasiums, conference centers, greenhouses and other facilities with variable occupancy. The QEL proprietary designed Infra-Red sensing element is the result of extensive research and development by QEL engineers. The NDIR technology is accurate to +/-2% with minimal zero drift. The M20 offers improved performance and standard features that are unmatched by others. A digital display (LCD), push-button programming and onboard meter jacks are all standard. The transmitter provides an analog output of 4-20 mA DC or 2-10 VDC, linear to the measured gas range, for transmission to the Building Automation System (BAS) or controller supplied by QEL to others. The signal is fully user assignable over the gas range and can be configured for rising or falling gas concentration. Input voltages of 24 VDC or 24 VAC with wide tolerances are acceptable. R elay setpoints may be set as increasing or decreasing actuation simply by adjusting the deadband relationship. Set the deactuation point above the actuation setpoint and the M20 will automatically alarm on decreasing concentrations. It also offers user selectable time delay settings. Surface mount technology has be en used for the circuitry resulting in a reduction of overall size and total number of components. Fewer components increases the mean time between potential failure. Enclosure styles include the office mount for occupied rooms and the duct mount for return or fresh air intake ducts.

C T S
-M2
0 0 0 X
X
Q D
0 0 0 0 0 0
Revision (Factory Provided) Enclosure - Wall Mount - Duct Mount
An air sample is introduced into the air column within the sensor block by diffusion. At one end of the sensor block a cycling tungsten light source emits Infra-Red energy through the air column. Energy of a specific wavelength is absorbed by any carbon dioxide present. A thermopile element, at the opposite end, senses the remaining Infra-Red energy and provides a DC millivolt signal. The electronics measures the difference in the thermopile output between the off and the on light source cycle. This signal differential is proportional to the concentration of carbon dioxide. Energy measurement during the off cycle of the lamp provides an absolute reference for compensation of environmental conditions experienced by the block. The measured signal is linearized and converted to a 4-20 mA or 2-10 volt DC output. Zero and span adjustments are provided for accurate calibration.
ATMOSPHERIC CARBON DIOXIDE

Carbon Dioxide (CO2) is the most abundant greenhouse gas. Major sources of CO2 include the combustion of fossil fuels and the respiration of human beings. Human exhaled breath contains a concentration of about 40,000ppm (4%) CO2, while trees and plants consume CO2 and produce oxygen. The global average background CO2 level is, at present, approximately 375 ppm and this average has been rising for decades. The background concentration in any one area may vary depending on the environmental conditions. The center of a city will have a much higher level, while the background level in a forested area will be lower. ASHRAE number 62-1989 requires that commercial buildings have an adequate air exchange system to ensure that CO2 concentrations do not exceed 1000 ppm.
www.prokontrol.com
AIRTEST -
22
QAS-101 SINGLE CHANNEL CONTROLLERS

The QAS-101 Series Single Point Gas Detector is an economical, stand alone gas detection and control unit. The detector uses a broad spectrum solid state semiconductor sensor to measure one of a series of hazardous gases. LED status indicator lights at the front provide alarm and fail information. Two DPDT relay outputs are available for alarm and control, as well as an internal audio indicator. The solid state sensor can be either integrally or remotely mounted to the 115 VAC powered electronics encased in a Nema 1 general purpose wall mount enclosure. Internal DIP switch selections configure relay time delays, relay actuation on sensor fail, and disable the audio indicator.

Q A S
1 0 1
0 0
Revision (Factory Provided) Enclosure (Comme
GAS SELECTION TABLE

STANDARD CALIBRATION HI ALARM
GAS TYPE
LOW ALARM
Special
(Consult Factory)
Carbon Monoxide 16 17 Combustibles Ammonia 22 Freon R11 26 Freon R12 27 28 Freon R22 Freon R134a 30
50 ppm in VE* 100 ppm in VE* 10% LEL** 20% LEL** 300 ppm 35 ppm 500 ppm 1000 ppm 1000 ppm 500 ppm 500 ppm 500 ppm 1000 ppm 1000 ppm
VE* = vehicle exhaust ** = standard calibration for Propane
The solid state sensor utilizes a sintered tin dioxide element. When the sensor is heated to a high temperature (typically 400 C), free electrons flow easily when no oxygen is present. In clean air, oxygen is absorbed onto the element surface providing a restriction to the electron flow and therefore increasing the electrical resistance of the element. As the sensor is exposed to the target gas, the tin dioxide element absorbs molecules of the target gas causing oxidation in the process. This oxidation reduces the resistance of the element in a known and repeatable manner. The controller electronics measures this change in resistance and compares it to two independent setpoints. Field adjustment of the setpoints is done by multi-turn trim potentiometers. When either of these setpoints is exceeded by the measurement signal, the electronics actuates the associated internal DPDT relay. The contacts of this relay may be used to control ventilation fans, audible devices, visual alarms, or other on-off type equipment. Power requirement is 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz. The controller monitors the input signal and indicates a fail condition if the signal drops below a factory preset level. LED status indicator lights are visible at the front of the unit for power on, alarm status, and fail condition. The controller is supplied with an internal audio indicator for actuation on high alarm or fail condition. Internal DIP switch settings provide time delay for actuation of the relays, audible deactivation, and selection of relay to actuate on fail condition. The enclosure is rated Nema 1 general purpose for surface mounting.
www.prokontrol.com
AIRTEST -
24
QTS-1800 SOLID STATE SENSOR/TRANSMITTERS

The QTS-1800 Series are microprocessor based transmitters using a broad spectrum solid state sensor for the detection of hazardous gases such as Carbon Monoxide, Propane, Ammonia, and Freons. Typical applications include enclosed parking facilities, maintenance garages, loading bays, and chiller rooms. Temperature compensation is included as standard to maintain accuracy for all gas types. Humidity compensation is standard on Ammonia and Freon sensors, and is optional on CO and LEL sensors. The transmitter has an analog output of 4 to 20mA DC, linear to the measured gas range, for transmission to the BAS, or controller supplied by QEL or others. Test jacks are provided at the transmitter for true one-man calibration. The transmitter will accept input voltages of 24 VDC (three-wire) and 24 VAC (four-wire) with wide tolerances. The standard enclosure is ABS plastic NEMA 1, with NEMA 4x weatherproof as an option.

Q T S - 1 8 1 X 0 0
Gas Type
(see Gas Selection Table for #)
Revision (Factory Provided) Enclosure Commercial NEMA 4x Options (Enter 0 for NO Selection) Humidity Compensation Sensor Guard Conformal Coating Non-Standard Calibration Special
X C N
GAS SELECTION TABLE

GAS TYPE
Carbon Monoxide Combustibles
# STANDARD RANGE
16 17 22 26 27 28 29 30 30 0 TO 125 ppm in VE 1 0 TO 50% LEL2 0 to 500 ppm 0 to 1000 ppm 0 to 1000 ppm 0 to 1000 ppm 0 to 100 ppm 0 to 1000 ppm 0 to 1000 ppm
Ammonia
Freon R11
H G W X S
Freon R12 Freon R22 Freon R123 Freon R134a Freon R407c
1 - Measured in Vehicle Exhaust 2 - Calibrated for Propane
Specify Gas When Ordering Other Gas Available, Consult Factory
The solid state sensor utilizes a sintered tin dioxide element. When the sensor is heated to a high temperature, free electrons flow easily when no oxygen is present. In clean air (20.9% oxygen) the oxygen is absorbed onto the element surface causing a restriction to the electron flow thus increasing the electrical resistance of the element. As the sensor is exposed to the target gas, the tin dioxide element adsorbs molecules of the target gas and displaces oxygen molecules in a process known as oxidation. In the presence of CO, the sensors conductivity increases depending on the gas concentration in the air. The microprocessor based electronics measures this change in conductivity and converts it to a 4-20 mA DC or 2-10 VDC output. The microprocessor performs an algorithm to linearize the final signal.
www.prokontrol.com
AIRTEST -
26
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

AC TECH VFD - 1 to 5
OPTIDRIVE E2
OPTIDRIVE E2
Ease Of Use
AC Variable Speed Drive 0.37kW - 11kW (0.5 - 15HP) 110-480V
General purpose economy drive with modbus communication

Rich in features the Optidrive E2 is the most commercially competitive Optidrive in the Optidrive family. Innovative and compact the Optidrive E2 range combines good looks with robustness, reliability and easy to use performance. The product is dedicated to low power applications where total costs are ultra-competitive, including: - Competitive purchase price - Low installation costs - Low commissioning costs - Low technical support costs Optidrive E2 has only 14 standard parameters to adjust in its basic form, thus Optidrive's legendary ease of use could not be easier or quicker to get started with. Optidrive E2 can be supplied with or without an internal rfi filter.
Industry Sectors
Food Processing Bottling Pumping Chemical Waste Water HVAC Conveyor
Key Benefits >>

Small mechanical envelope Rugged industrial 50C ambient rating for hot and tough applications Simple mechanical & electrical installation Simple operation, powerful features easy to use Fast setup, factory default settings ok for most applications, only 14 basic parameters Motor current and rpm indication Debugging using troubleshooting & P-00 150% overload for 60 secs (175% for 2 secs) Keypad control Integral RFI filter option Integral brake chopper (S2 and S3 only) Modbus RTU serial communications
OPTISTICK
Product code: OPT-STICK
For fast and accurate repeat drive programming

Simply insert Optistick into the RJ45 slot on the face of the Optidrive E2: Upload/download buttons allow for fast copying of parameters between drives Infra red communications capability provides remote control convenience Can be programmed with PDA or Smart phone
10
OPTIDRIVE E2
SINGLE PHASE
OPTIDRIVE E2
AC Variable Speed Drive 0.37kW - 1.1kW (0.5 - 1.5HP) 110-240V
SINGLE PHASE
Single Phase Motor Control
Variable speed drive for low power single phase motors

The Optidrive E2 Single Phase is the worlds first fully digital, fully packaged variable speed drive for controlling low power single phase motors. Designed to be cost effective and easy to use, the Optidrive E2 Single Phase is for use with PSC (Permanent Split Capacitor) or ShadedPole Single-Phase induction motors. Optidrive E2 Single Phase uses a revolutionary motor control strategy to achieve reliable intelligent starting of single phase motors. Optidrive E2 Single Phase has only 14 standard parameters to adjust in its basic form. The Optidrive's legendary ease of use ensures quick and easy drive commissioning. For the more advanced user the extended parameter set gives access to powerful additional functionality.
Key Benefits >>

115V & 220V ratings Single phase input/ single phase output Small mechanical envelope Rugged industrial operation 50C ambient rating Simple mechanical & electrical installation Simple operation, powerful features & easy to use Fast setup, factory default settings ok for most applications, only 14 basic parameters Variable torque or constant torque Unique programmable boost feature to achieve intelligent starting Motor current and rpm indication Debugging using troubleshooting & P-00 150% overload for 60 secs (175% for 2 secs) Keypad control Integral RFI filter option Integral brake chopper (S2 only) Modbus RTU serial communications
Industry Sectors
Fan Control Food Processing Pumping Waste Water
OPTIDRIVE E2 Single Phase Dimensions

Size 1 2 Height (mm) 173 221 Width (mm) 82 104 Depth (mm) 123 150 Weight (kg) 1.1 2.6 Fixings 4 x M4 4 x M4
14
KREUTER(KMC) PRODUCTS
CSP4000 VAV Flow Controller Actuator SSE1000,2000 Duct Sensor for VAV Sys. KMC - 1, 2 KMC - 3 KMC - 4 KMC - 5 KMC - 6 KMC -7 KMC - 8 KMC - 9
SSS1000 Differential Pressure Flow Sensor CSC1001 Constant Volume Controller CSC2000 Reset Volume Controller CSC3000 Reset Volume Controller MCP3631 Rotary Pneumatic Damper Actuator MCP8031 Damper Actuator(Terminal Boxes)
CSP-4000 Series
VAV Flow Controller-Actuator Electronic Analog
Description
The KMC CSP-4000 VAV Flow Controller-Actuator are pressure-independent combination controlleractuators designed primarily for use on variable air volume terminal units. They use a multi-point or single-point differential (velocity) pressure measuring station or pitot tube for sensing airflow. Designed with a passive mass airflow sensor utilizing two Wheatstone bridges, each measures dynamic differential pressure which corresponds linearly to reset. These units afford full range flow control of VAV terminal units when used with the CTE-1000, 1100 or 5000 series room thermostats. Minimum and maximum flow control limits are set at the wall thermostat. Available control options include proportional or on/off wet or electric reheat, dual minimum, fan induction, dual duct, and computer interface. The internal magnetic clutch assures that excessive torque will not be applied to the gear train.
Models
Use the following to determine the appropriate model:
CSP-4 X X X
Application
The CSP-4000 series controller-actuator is designed for pressure independent variable air volume control applications.
6: 2" Range 8: 1" Range
Accessories
The following accessories are available: HFO-0011: HFO-0034: HFO-0011: Thermostats CTE-1000 Series CTE-1100 Series CTE-5000 Series Thermostat/Controllers (w/remote sensors) CEE-1000 Series CEE-1100 Series
Specifications and design subject to change without notice.
0: CCW to Close 1: CW to Close 0: 100 Rotation 2: 60 Rotation 4: 45 Rotation 6: 360 Rotation
Adaptor for 3/8" shaft Filter Adaptor for 3/8" shaft
www.prokontrol.com
KMC - 1
SSE-1000, 2000 Series

Duct Sensors for VAV Systems
Description
The KMC SSE-1000 Duct Sensors are designed for use with VAV terminal units in HVAC systems. They are used in conjunction with the CEP series of controller-actuators to maintain the desired airflow to an occupied space. The CEP model must be ordered separately. (Refer to the CEP-4000 data sheet for related model numbers). Two sensor lengths are available to accommodate various box inlet sizes. Sensors are inserted into the inlet collar of the box; the foam backing on the sensor head protects against conditioned air leakage. SSE-1011, 1012, 2011, and 2012 are conformal coated for air streams that may be contaminated with corrosive materials. The SSE-2000 series incorporates two additional terminals (X and Y) which allow duct temperature sensing for items such as the REE-1005 heating-cooling change over relay. In addition, the airflow portion of the signal is fully compensated for changes in temperature for accurate control of delivered air.
Features
The KMC SSE-1000/2000 Duct Sensors feature:
Models
The following models are available Standard SSE-1001/2001 SSE-1002/2002 SSE-1011/2011 SSE-1012/2012 3-7/8" long (98 mm) 7-7/8" long (200 mm) 3-7/8" long (98 mm) 7-7/8" long (200 mm)
Available with or without conformal coating Available in two different lengths to accommodate inlet box sizes 2000 Series models include additional terminals for temperature sensing Foam backing prevents air leakage
Conformal Coated
Application
The KMC SSE-1000/2000 Series Duct Sensors are intended for use in conjunction with KMC CEP series controller-actuators in HVAC systems. The sensors provide airflow sensing to the controlleractuators for controlling VAV terminal units to maintain airflow in an occupied space.
(CEP controller-actuator must be ordered separately, but can be shipped together. Specify full CEP model number).
www.prokontrol.com
KMC - 3
SSS1000
Differential Pressure Flow Sensors
Description
The KMC SSS-1000 sensors are designed to sense differential pressure in the inlet section of variable air volume terminal units and fan terminal units. They can also be used to sense differential pressure at other locations in the main, or branch, duct systems. The H port senses total pressure and the L port senses static pressure. The difference between these signals is the differential, or velocity pressure. Models offer up to four sensing points and sensing lengths of 3-5/32"9-29/32" to accommodate box size diameters of 4"16".
Applications
The SSS-1000 Series sensors are typically used in conjunction with the CSC-1000, 2000, and 3000 series of VAV terminal controllers for individual zone control in HVAC systems.
Models
SSS-1002 SSS-1003 SSS-1004 SSS-1005 One sensing point; 3-5/32 (80 mm) sensing length Two sensing points; 5-13/32 (137 mm) sensing length Three sensing points; 7-21/32 (195 mm) sensing length Four sensing points; 9-29/32 (252 mm) sensing length
www.prokontrol.com
KMC - 4
CSC1001 Constant Volume Controller
Description
The KMC CSC-1001 Constant Volume Controller is designed for use on variable volume boxes in HVAC systems. The CSC-1001 has two output connections that allow two different modes of operation. In mode one, the CSC is a constant volume controller without a thermostat override. In mode two the CSC is a high limit controller which assumes control of a VAV terminal if a thermostat calls for too much flow.
Specifications
Setpoint Range Supply Pressure Air Consumption Action 01" wg (249 kPa) 20 psig (138 kPa) operating 30 psig (207 kPa) maximum 14.4 scim (3.93 mL/s) @ 20 psig N.O. dampers only; requires D.A. Thermostat for heating, R.A. for cooling ABS UL Flame Class 94 HB 4 oz. (113 grams) 40 to 120 F (4 to 49 C) -40 to 140 F (40 to 60 C) Proportional Band .04" wg (10 Pa)
Details
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES (MM)
Material Weight Ambient Limits Operating Shipping
KMC Controls, Inc. 19476 Industrial Drive New Paris, IN 46553 574.831.5250 www.kmccontrols.com
2003 KMC Controls Inc. Specifications and design subject to change without notice.
202-035-01
www.prokontrol.com
KMC - 5
CSC2000 Series
Reset Volume Controllers
Description
The KMC CSC-2000 Series Reset Volume Controllers are designed for use on VAV terminal units in HVAC systems. The CSC-2000s are sub-master air velocity controllers with adjustable minimum and maximum velocity limits. A master controller, typically a room thermostat, resets the CSCs velocity setpoint. CSCs are available as direct acting for normally open VAV terminal units, and reverse acting for normal closed VAV terminal units. Each unit is equipped with separate adjustment knobs for minimum and maximum airflow settings. CSC2001/2002s are equipped with 010 reference dials, while all others have blind adjustments. Calibrate all models using standard airflow measuring equipment.
Models
Use the table below to choose the appropriate model for your application.
Features
Available as direct or reverse acting Separate adjustments for minimum and maximum airflow settings Reference dials available on some models
For Normally-Open Dampers (Beige Controllers) Thermostat Required: Setpoint Range For Cooling For Heating Minimum Maximum 0-1.0" wg (249 Pa) Min. plus 1" wg (249 Pa) 8 (0.5) to 13 psig (55 0.3 to 90 kPa)
Model CSC-2001 CSC-2003 CSC-2007 CSC-2009 CSC-2011 CSC-2013 CSC-2015 CSC-2017 CSC-2002 CSC-2004 CSC-2008 CSC-2010 CSC-2012 CSC-2014 CSC-2016 CSC-2018
Reset Pressure Band
DA
RA
0-2.0" wg (498 Pa) Min. plus 2" wg (498 Pa) Same as CSC-2001 without mounting bracket Same as CSC-2003 without mounting bracket Same as CSC-2009 without mounting bracket 0-2.0" wg (498 Pa) Min. plus 2" wg (498 Pa) For Normally-Closed Dampers (Gray Controllers) 0-1.0" wg (249 Pa) Min. plus 1" wg (249 Pa)
RA
DA
0-2.0" wg (498 Pa) Min. plus 2" wg (498 Pa) Same as CSC-2002 without mounting bracket Same as CSC-2004 without mounting bracket Same as CSC-2010 without mounting bracket 0-2.0" wg (498 Pa) Min. plus 2" wg (498 Pa)
3 (0.5) to 8 psig (21 0.3 to 55 kPa)
www.prokontrol.com
KMC - 6
CSC3000 Series
Reset Volume Controllers
Description
The KMC CSC-3000 Series Reset Volume Controllers are designed for use on VAV terminal units in HVAC systems. The CSC-3000s are sub-master air velocity controllers with adjustable minimum and maximum velocity limits. A master controller, typically a room thermostat, resets the CSCs velocity set point. CSC-3000s are used in applications that call for direct or reverse acting resets for normally open, or normally closed, VAV terminal units. The CSC features field adjustable reset start point and span. The reset span is constant, regardless of the minimum and maximum limits.
Features
Models
CSC301110 CSC301610 CSC301710 CSC302110 CSC302310 CSC302510 1"; 2"; 1"; 1"; 1"; 2"; 8 psig start; with bracket 8 psig start; with bracket 8 psig start; w/o bracket 3 psig start; with bracket 10 psig start; with bracket 8 psig start; with bracket
Available in 1" and 2" Direct or reverse acting Filed adjustable reset start point and span
Application
CSC-3000s are used in applications that call for direct or reverse acting resets for normally open, or normally closed, VAV terminal units.
www.prokontrol.com
KMC - 7
MCP3631 Series
Rotary Pneumatic Damper Actuator
Description
The MCP3631 Series Rotary Pneumatic Damper Actuators are designed to position VAV terminals and other small dampers in HVAC systems. Model 3631 Series actuators ending in the 000 designation will mount to 1/2" diameter damper shafts, or 3/8" diameter shafts using the HLO-1011 shaft adapter. Models ending with the "001" designation will mount to 1/2" square damper shafts. Actuators may be mounted with either side toward damper to allow clockwise or counterclockwise rotation. A non-rotation bracket is supplied with each actuator and a variety of options are available to lock the actuators drive hub to the damper shaft.
Features
. . .
Mounts on 1/2" and 3/8" round or 1/2" square shafts. Units can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise Variety of options for securing the hub and damper shaft
Accessories/Replacement Parts
HLO-1004 HLO-1006 HLO-1008 HLO-1009 HLO-1011 HLO-1016 HMO-1003 HPO-0038 Drive bushing/collar, 1/2" shaft Drive bushing, 1/2" shaft Drive pin Push-on shaft retainer Adaptor for 3/8" shaft Collar for 1/2" shaft Non-rotation bracket Replacement diaphragm
Models
Actuators for 1/2 or 3/8 Diameter Shafts MCP-3631-2000 MCP-3631-3000 MCP-3631-5000 MCP-3631-8000 3-12 psi range (21-83 kPa) 5-10 psi range (34-69 kPa) 8-13 psi range (55-90 kPa) 3-8 psi range (21-55 kPa)
Actuators for 1/2 Square Shafts MCP-3631-3001 MCP-3631-5001 MCP-3631-8001 5-10 psi range (34-69 kPa) 8-13 psi range (55-90 kPa) 3-8 psi range (21-55 kPa)
www.prokontrol.com
KMC - 8
MCP8031 Series
Damper Actuators for Terminal Boxes
Description
The KMC MCP8031 Pneumatic Actuators are designed to control small dampers such as air terminal units. The 8031 Series features a right angle bracket for mounting to the side of VAV terminals. The actuator rotates in its bracket so air connections can be made where needed. A clevis pin and slot provide direct connection between the VAV terminals damper and the actuator shaft. The 8031s metal body design is ideal for ceiling plenum installations.
Features
The metal body is ideal for ceiling installations. Adjustable bracket allows a wide range of air
connections
Direct connection between VAV damper and

actuator shaft.
Models
Use the list, below, to choose the MCP8031 model which fits your application. BRONZE BUSHING WITH CLEVIS & COTTER PINS MCP-8031-2101 MCP-8031-3101 MCP-8031-5101 MCP-8031-8101 312 psi spring range 510 psi spring range 813 psi spring range 38 psi spring range
DELRIN BUSHING WITHOUT CLEVIS & COTTOR PINS MCP-8031-2102 MCP-8031-3102 MCP-8031-5102 MCP-8031-8102 312 psi spring range 510 psi spring range 813 psi spring range 38 psi spring range
DELRIN BUSHING WITH CLEVIS & COTTER PINS & WITHOUT BRACKET MCP-8031-3003 510 psi spring range
BRONZE BUSHING WITHOUT CLEVIS & COTTOR PINS MCP-8031-2100 MCP-8031-3100 MCP-8031-5100 MCP-8031-8100 312 psi spring range 510 psi spring range 813 psi spring range 38 psi spring range
BRONZE BUSHING WITHOUT CLEVIS & COTTER PINS OR BRACKET - SPECIAL 1" STROKE MCP-8031-2099 38 psi spring range
www.prokontrol.com
KMC - 9

CATALOGUE Prokontrol

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

CATALOGUE Prokontrol

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

ABOUT THIS CATALOGUE

Canadas leading HVAC/R controls wholesaler

The Pro Kontrol family of products

Electronic (DDC) controls

Thermostats, valves, actuators, controllers.

Control valves and actuators Temperature Humidity Pressure

Measurement and control of electrical consumption

PMS: 3155 et Noir

Control transformers, power supplies.

Relays and contactors

Other controls and accessories

Take advantage of our wide range of technical services

We also distribute the following brands:

D.D.C. PERIPHERALS INDEX

Office Sales Fax Email

765.883.5538 800.888.5538 765.883.7505 sales@functionaldevices.com

Wht - 120 Vac

*Secondary Yel/Wht wire in phase with Primary Blk wire.

Mounting Hole = .350" x .175" 2.500"

Office Sales Fax Email

765.883.5538 800.888.5538 765.883.7505 sales@functionaldevices.com

Wht - 120 Vac

*Secondary Yel/Wht wire in phase with Primary Blk wire.

Mounting Hole = .350" x .175" 2.500"

Office Sales Fax Email

765.883.5538 800.888.5538 765.883.7505 sales@functionaldevices.com

Wht - 120 Vac

*Secondary Yel/Wht wire in phase with Primary Blk wire.

Mounting Hole = .350" x .175" 2.500"

Office Sales Fax Email

765.883.5538 800.888.5538 765.883.7505 sales@functionaldevices.com

Wht - 120 Vac

*Secondary Yel/Wht wire in phase with Primary Blk wire.

1.950" Mounting Hole = .350" x .175" 3.475" 2.525"

Office Sales Fax Email

765.883.5538 800.888.5538 765.883.7505 sales@functionaldevices.com

Mounting Hole = .350" x .175" 2.525"

Office Sales Fax Email

765.883.5538 800.888.5538 765.883.7505 sales@functionaldevices.com

Wht - 120 Vac

*Secondary Yel/Wht wire in phase with Primary Blk wire.

Mounting Hole = .350" x .175" 2.500"

Office Sales Fax Email

765.883.5538 800.888.5538 765.883.7505 sales@functionaldevices.com

10 Amp Pilot Control Relay

Wht/Blk 120 Vac

Wht/Blu 10-30 Vac/dc

10 Vdc 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 30 Vdc

RIBU1C-RD Red housing

RIBU1C-N4 NEMA 4X housing

Office Sales Fax Email

765.883.5538 800.888.5538 765.883.7505 sales@functionaldevices.com

10 Amp Pilot Control Relay

Wht/Blk 120 Vac

Wht/Blu 10-30 Vac/dc

CLOSED OPEN AUTO

Office Sales Fax Email

765.883.5538 800.888.5538 765.883.7505 sales@functionaldevices.com

1.008 1.508 LEDS

REMOVABLE MOUNTING TAB

LOAD WIRE Wht/ Yel

RIBXK SERIES SELECTION GUIDE

RIBXKF RIBXKTF RIBXKA RIBXKTA